[gatein-commits] gatein SVN: r8913 - in epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US: fallback_content and 6 other directories.

Author: smumford Date: 2012-10-18 01:48:54 -0400 (Thu, 18 Oct 2012) New Revision: 8913 Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Author_Group.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Book_Info.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Feedback.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Introduction.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Next.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Preamble.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Preface.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Revision_History.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Site_Publisher.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Site_Publisher_User_Guide.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/fallback_content/Conventions.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/fallback_content/Feedback.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/fallback_content/Legal_Notice.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Advanced.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Advanced/Administration.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Advanced/Administration/Advanced.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Advanced/Administration/Ontology.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Advanced/Administration/Presentation.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Advanced/Administration/Types.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Advanced/Manage_Site_Resources.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Advanced/SP_Roles.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Categories.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Content_By_Query.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Content_Inside_Categories.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Contribute_Content.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Dynamic_Navigation.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/FastContentCreator.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/FormGenerator.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Newsletters.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Preferences.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Print.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/SEO_management.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Search.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/SearchPortlet.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Sites.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/SitesExplorer.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/SitesExplorer/Access_Sites_Explorer.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/SitesExplorer/Actions.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/SitesExplorer/Drives.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/SitesExplorer/Folders_and_Documents.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/SitesExplorer/Manage_Content.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/SitesExplorer/Views.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/View.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Webdav.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Get_Started.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Get_Started/Account.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Get_Started/ChangeLanguage.xml epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Get_Started/ChangeSkin.xml Log: BZ#867691: Removed XML code for incline icon images and marked text fallbacks as guilabel. Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Author_Group.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Author_Group.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Author_Group.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -3,25 +3,20 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<authorgroup> - <author> - <firstname>eXo Platform</firstname> - <surname>Documentation Team</surname> - <affiliation> - <shortaffil><emphasis role="bold"><ulink type="http" url="http://www.exoplatform.com">eXo Platform</ulink></emphasis></shortaffil> - </affiliation> - - </author> - <editor> - <firstname>Scott</firstname> - <surname>Mumford</surname> - <affiliation> - <shortaffil><emphasis role="bold"><ulink type="http" url="www.redhat.com">Red Hat</ulink></emphasis></shortaffil> - <orgdiv>Engineering Content Services</orgdiv> - - </affiliation> - <email&gt;smumford(a)redhat.com&lt;/email&gt; - - </editor> -</authorgroup> - + <authorgroup> + <author> + <firstname>eXo Platform</firstname> <surname>Documentation Team</surname> <affiliation> + <shortaffil> + <emphasis role="bold"><ulink type="http" url="http://www.exoplatform.com">eXo Platform</ulink></emphasis> + </shortaffil> + </affiliation> + </author> <editor> + <firstname>Scott</firstname> <surname>Mumford</surname> + <affiliation> + <shortaffil> + <emphasis role="bold"><ulink type="http" url="www.redhat.com">Red Hat</ulink></emphasis> + </shortaffil> <orgdiv>Engineering Content Services</orgdiv> + </affiliation> + <email&gt;smumford(a)redhat.com&lt;/email&gt; + </editor> + </authorgroup> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Book_Info.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Book_Info.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Book_Info.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -3,26 +3,25 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<bookinfo id="book-User_Guide-User_Guide"> - <title>Site Publisher User Guide</title> - <subtitle>A guide to using JBoss Enterprise Portal Platform Site Publisher &VZ;</subtitle> - <productname>JBoss Enterprise Portal Platform</productname> - <productnumber>5.2</productnumber> - <edition>5.2.2</edition> - <abstract> - <para> + <bookinfo id="book-User_Guide-User_Guide"> + <title>Site Publisher User Guide</title> + + <subtitle>A guide to using JBoss Enterprise Portal Platform Site Publisher &VZ;</subtitle> + <productname>JBoss Enterprise Portal Platform</productname> <productnumber>5.2</productnumber> <edition>5.2.2</edition> + <abstract> + <para> This document provides an easy to follow guide to the functions and options available in the Enterprise Portal Platform Site Publisher extension (powered by eXo). It is intended to be accessible and useful to both experienced and novice portal users. - </para> - </abstract> - <corpauthor> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="Common_Content/images/title_logo.svg" format="SVG"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </corpauthor> -<!-- FOR PUBLICAN: --> <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="Common_Content/Legal_Notice.xml"> - <!-- FOR JDOCBOOK: --> <xi:fallback xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude"/> - </xi:include> - <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="Author_Group.xml"/> -</bookinfo> + </para> + </abstract> + + <corpauthor> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="Common_Content/images/title_logo.svg" format="SVG"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </corpauthor> +<!-- FOR PUBLICAN: --> + <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="Common_Content/Legal_Notice.xml"> +<!-- FOR JDOCBOOK: --> + <xi:fallback xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude"/> + </xi:include> + + <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="Author_Group.xml"/> + </bookinfo> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Feedback.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Feedback.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Feedback.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> - <!--NOTE: THE FOLLOWING ENTITIES WILL NOT BE REPLACED IN YOUR BUGZILLA URL. +<!--NOTE: THE FOLLOWING ENTITIES WILL NOT BE REPLACED IN YOUR BUGZILLA URL. YOU WILL NEED TO CORRECT THE URL MANUALLY. &PRODUCT_NAME; of the form "JBoss Enterprise Application Platform" &BZ_COMPONENT; of the form "doc-triage" (as listed in Bugzilla) @@ -14,17 +14,16 @@ These entities should not affect translated documents, since Bugzilla is not localised. --> - -<section id="jboss-feedback"> - <title>Give us Feedback</title> - - <para> - If you find a typographical error, or know how this guide can be improved, we would love to hear from you. Submit a report in JIRA against eXo Content. The following link will take you to bug report for eXo Content <ulink type="http" url="http://jira.exoplatform.org/secure/Dashboard.jspa">http...;. - </para> - <para> - Select the document name and version number relevant to the document you found the error in from the available lists then complete the description with as much detail as you can provide. - </para> - + <section id="jboss-feedback"> + <title>Give us Feedback</title> + + <para> + If you find a typographical error, or know how this guide can be improved, we would love to hear from you. Submit a report in JIRA against eXo Content. The following link will take you to bug report for eXo Content <ulink type="http" url="http://jira.exoplatform.org/secure/Dashboard.jspa">http...;. + </para> + + <para> + Select the document name and version number relevant to the document you found the error in from the available lists then complete the description with as much detail as you can provide. + </para> <!-- <para> Fill out the following template and add it to Bugzilla's <literal>Description</literal> field. Be as specific as possible when describing the issue; this will help ensure that we can fix it quickly. </para> @@ -45,9 +44,7 @@ </screen>--> - - <para> - Be sure to give us your name so that you can receive full credit for reporting the issue. - </para> - -</section> + <para> + Be sure to give us your name so that you can receive full credit for reporting the issue. + </para> + </section> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Introduction.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Introduction.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Introduction.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -3,324 +3,390 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<chapter id="chap-User_Guide-Product_Introduction"> - <title>Product Introduction</title> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Product_Introduction-Site_Content_Structure"> - <title>Site Content Structure</title> - <para> - While creating a site is a quick process, deciding what content to put into it and how to organize that content can take some time. Therefore, to make managing a site as easy and effective as possible, a site created with Site Publisher will always adhere to a specific structure: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/sitecontent.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata width="150mm" align="center" fileref="images/sitecontent.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> + <chapter id="chap-User_Guide-Product_Introduction"> + <title>Product Introduction</title> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Product_Introduction-Site_Content_Structure"> + <title>Site Content Structure</title> + + <para> + While creating a site is a quick process, deciding what content to put into it and how to organize that content can take some time. Therefore, to make managing a site as easy and effective as possible, a site created with Site Publisher will always adhere to a specific structure: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/sitecontent.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata width="150mm" align="center" fileref="images/sitecontent.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> The Site Content is stored in collaborative workspaces of the underlying Java Content Repository (JCR). - </para> - <variablelist id="vari-User_Guide-Site_Content_Structure-Details"> - <title>Details:</title> - <varlistentry> - <term>CSS</term> - <listitem> - <para> - Files in this folder are used to define the presentation of your entire site, such as font, color, size and more. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>Documents:</term> - <listitem> - <para> - All the documents which are used in the site will be stored in this folder. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>JS</term> - <listitem> - <para> - This folder contains programming scripts used on the site. Resources in this folder help make a web page&apos;s graphics and navigation more animated and dynamic. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>Links:</term> - <listitem> - <para> - This folder stores all the links used in the site. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>Media:</term> - <listitem> - <para> - This folder contains three sub-folders: - </para> - <variablelist> + </para> + + <variablelist id="vari-User_Guide-Site_Content_Structure-Details"> + <title>Details:</title> + <varlistentry> - <term>Audios:</term> - <listitem> - <para> - All sound files used in a site are stored here. - </para> - </listitem> + <term>CSS</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + Files in this folder are used to define the presentation of your entire site, such as font, color, size and more. + </para> + </listitem> </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> - <term>Images:</term> - <listitem> - <para> - Pictures and other images used in a site are stored here. - </para> - </listitem> + <term>Documents:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + All the documents which are used in the site will be stored in this folder. + </para> + </listitem> </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> - <term>Videos:</term> - <listitem> - <para> - All video files used in a site are stored here. - </para> - </listitem> + <term>JS</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + This folder contains programming scripts used on the site. Resources in this folder help make a web page&apos;s graphics and navigation more animated and dynamic. + </para> + </listitem> </varlistentry> - </variablelist> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>Web content:</term> - <listitem> - <para> - This folder is used to store the documents which present the main site content (text, images, hyperlinks, audios and videos) of the site. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - </variablelist> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Product_Introduction-Web_Content"> - <title>Web Content</title> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Web_Content-Web_Content"> - <title>Web Content</title> - <para> - The <emphasis>Web Content</emphasis> is the visual or aural content that is encountered as part of the user experience on a website. It includes any or all of the following elements; text, images, sounds, videos and animations. + + <varlistentry> + <term>Links:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + This folder stores all the links used in the site. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Media:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + This folder contains three sub-folders: + </para> + + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>Audios:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + All sound files used in a site are stored here. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Images:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + Pictures and other images used in a site are stored here. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Videos:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + All video files used in a site are stored here. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Web content:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + This folder is used to store the documents which present the main site content (text, images, hyperlinks, audios and videos) of the site. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Product_Introduction-Web_Content"> + <title>Web Content</title> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Web_Content-Web_Content"> + <title>Web Content</title> + + <para> + The <emphasis>Web Content</emphasis> is the visual or aural content that is encountered as part of the user experience on a website. It includes any or all of the following elements; text, images, sounds, videos and animations. </para> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Web_Content-Web_Content_Structure"> - <title>Web Content Structure</title> - <para> - Much like the website as a whole, ensuring Web Content adheres to a specific structure makes creating and managing the content more effective and dynamic. + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Web_Content-Web_Content_Structure"> + <title>Web Content Structure</title> + + <para> + Much like the website as a whole, ensuring Web Content adheres to a specific structure makes creating and managing the content more effective and dynamic. </para> - <variablelist> - <varlistentry> - <term>Main content:</term> - <listitem> + + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>Main content:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + This is the key content, the text, images, links, tables, and other elements that make up the bulk of the web content. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Illustration:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + This folder contains an image that is used as an illustration for the content. A summary also can be added to this image. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>default.css:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + This folder contains CSS data which is used to present the web content. CSS controls the layout, font, color, and more. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>default.js:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + This folder contains JS data which is used to make web content more dynamic. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + </section> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Product_Introduction-Terminologies"> + <title>Terminologies</title> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Terminologies-Repository"> + <title>Repository</title> + <para> - This is the key content, the text, images, links, tables, and other elements that make up the bulk of the web content. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>Illustration:</term> - <listitem> + A repository is a location where data is stored and maintained. The content repository stores web content and related digital data and is accessible to users locally, without requiring content to be transferred across a network. + </para> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Terminologies-Workspace"> + <title>Workspace</title> + <para> - This folder contains an image that is used as an illustration for the content. A summary also can be added to this image. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>default.css:</term> - <listitem> + A content repository is composed of a number of workspaces. <emphasis>Workspace</emphasis> is a term used by several software vendors for applications that allow users to exchange and organize files over a network (the Internet, for example). + </para> + <para> - This folder contains CSS data which is used to present the web content. CSS controls the layout, font, color, and more. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>default.js:</term> - <listitem> + In this case, the content repository consists of more than one workspace. The <emphasis>repository</emphasis> repository contains multiple workspaces, including: <emphasis>system</emphasis>, <emphasis>backup</emphasis> and <emphasis>collaboration</emphasis> workspaces. + </para> + + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>System workspace:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + This workspace is used to reserve <emphasis>system folders</emphasis>. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Backup workspace:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + The backup process depends on the timestamps of published content; each published document has a defined period for which it can be published and, when it exceeds that time frame, it will be automatically archived to the backup database. + </para> + + <para> + This workspace is mostly used when utilizing the Workflow based content publication life-cycle. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Collaboration workspace:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + This workspace allows users to validate and manage documents. This is the central place to store and edit contents and media. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Terminologies-Drive"> + <title>Drive</title> + <para> - This folder contains JS data which is used to make web content more dynamic. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - </variablelist> - </section> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Product_Introduction-Terminologies"> - <title>Terminologies</title> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Terminologies-Repository"> - <title>Repository</title> - <para> - A repository is a location where data is stored and maintained. The content repository stores web content and related digital data and is accessible to users locally, without requiring content to be transferred across a network. + A <emphasis>drive</emphasis> can be understood as a shortcut within the content repository. It enables administrators to limit the visibility of each workspace to groups of users. It also offers a visual simplification of complex content storage arrangements by only showing the structure that is appropriate for users to interact with. </para> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Terminologies-Workspace"> - <title>Workspace</title> - <para> - A content repository is composed of a number of workspaces. <emphasis>Workspace</emphasis> is a term used by several software vendors for applications that allow users to exchange and organize files over a network (the Internet, for example). - </para> - <para> - In this case, the content repository consists of more than one workspace. The <emphasis>repository</emphasis> repository contains multiple workspaces, including: <emphasis>system</emphasis>, <emphasis>backup</emphasis> and <emphasis>collaboration</emphasis> workspaces. + + <para> + More specifically, a drive consists of: </para> - <variablelist> - <varlistentry> - <term>System workspace:</term> - <listitem> - <para> - This workspace is used to reserve <emphasis>system folders</emphasis>. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>Backup workspace:</term> - <listitem> - <para> - The backup process depends on the timestamps of published content; each published document has a defined period for which it can be published and, when it exceeds that time frame, it will be automatically archived to the backup database. + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + A configured path where the user will start when browsing the drive. </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + A set of allowed views that could, for example, limit the actions available to users (such as editing or creation of content within the drive). + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + A set of permissions to limit the access to, and view of, the drive to a defined number of users. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + A set of options to describe the behavior of the drive when users browse it. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Terminologies-Node"> + <title>Node</title> + <para> - This workspace is mostly used when utilizing the Workflow based content publication life-cycle. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>Collaboration workspace:</term> - <listitem> + A <emphasis>node</emphasis> is an abstract basic unit used to build linked data structures, such as linked lists and trees and computer-based representation of graphs. Nodes contain data and/or links to other nodes. Links between nodes are often implemented by pointers or references. + </para> + <para> - This workspace allows users to validate and manage documents. This is the central place to store and edit contents and media. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - </variablelist> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Terminologies-Drive"> - <title>Drive</title> - <para> - A <emphasis>drive</emphasis> can be understood as a shortcut within the content repository. It enables administrators to limit the visibility of each workspace to groups of users. It also offers a visual simplification of complex content storage arrangements by only showing the structure that is appropriate for users to interact with. + A node can be defined as a logical placeholder for data. It is a memory block which contains some data units, and optionally a reference to some other data (which may in turn be another node that contains other data). By linking one node with other interlinked nodes, very large and complex data structures can be formed. </para> - <para> - More specifically, a drive consists of: + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Terminologies-Version"> + <title>Version</title> + + <para> + <emphasis>Versioning</emphasis> means that, at any given time, the node&apos;s state can be saved for possible future recovery. The action of saving is called &apos;checking in&apos;. </para> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - A configured path where the user will start when browsing the drive. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - A set of allowed views that could, for example, limit the actions available to users (such as editing or creation of content within the drive). - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - A set of permissions to limit the access to, and view of, the drive to a defined number of users. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - A set of options to describe the behavior of the drive when users browse it. - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Terminologies-Node"> - <title>Node</title> - <para> - A <emphasis>node</emphasis> is an abstract basic unit used to build linked data structures, such as linked lists and trees and computer-based representation of graphs. Nodes contain data and/or links to other nodes. Links between nodes are often implemented by pointers or references. + + <para> + A workspace may contain both versionable and non-versionable nodes. A node is versionable if it has been assigned a <parameter>mixin</parameter> type <literal>mixin:versionable</literal>; otherwise, it is a non-versionable node. </para> - <para> - A node can be defined as a logical placeholder for data. It is a memory block which contains some data units, and optionally a reference to some other data (which may in turn be another node that contains other data). By linking one node with other interlinked nodes, very large and complex data structures can be formed. + + <para> + A version exists as a part of a version history graph that describes the predecessor/successor relations among versions of a particular versionable nodes. </para> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Terminologies-Version"> - <title>Version</title> - <para> - <emphasis>Versioning</emphasis> means that, at any given time, the node&apos;s state can be saved for possible future recovery. The action of saving is called &apos;checking in&apos;. - </para> - <para> - A workspace may contain both versionable and non-versionable nodes. A node is versionable if it has been assigned a <parameter>mixin</parameter> type <literal>mixin:versionable</literal>; otherwise, it is a non-versionable node. - </para> - <para> - A version exists as a part of a version history graph that describes the predecessor/successor relations among versions of a particular versionable nodes. + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/node.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata width="47mm" align="center" fileref="images/node.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + Software versioning is the process of assigning either unique names or version numbers to unique states of the software. Within a given version number category (<emphasis>major</emphasis> or <emphasis>minor</emphasis>, for example), these numbers are generally assigned by increasing order and correspond to new developments in the software. </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/node.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata width="47mm" align="center" fileref="images/node.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - Software versioning is the process of assigning either unique names or version numbers to unique states of the software. Within a given version number category (<emphasis>major</emphasis> or <emphasis>minor</emphasis>, for example), these numbers are generally assigned by increasing order and correspond to new developments in the software. - </para> - <para> - At a fine-grained level, revision control is often used for keeping track of incrementally different versions of electronic information, whether or not this information is actually computer software. + + <para> + At a fine-grained level, revision control is often used for keeping track of incrementally different versions of electronic information, whether or not this information is actually computer software. </para> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Terminologies-WebDAV"> - <title>WebDAV</title> - <para> - <emphasis>WebDAV</emphasis> stands for <emphasis role="bold">Web</emphasis>-based <emphasis role="bold">D</emphasis>istributed <emphasis role="bold">A</emphasis>uthoring and <emphasis role="bold">V</emphasis>ersioning. It is a set of extensions to the Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) which allows users to collaboratively edit and manage files on remote servers. + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Terminologies-WebDAV"> + <title>WebDAV</title> + + <para> + <emphasis>WebDAV</emphasis> stands for <emphasis role="bold">Web</emphasis>-based <emphasis role="bold">D</emphasis>istributed <emphasis role="bold">A</emphasis>uthoring and <emphasis role="bold">V</emphasis>ersioning. It is a set of extensions to the Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) which allows users to collaboratively edit and manage files on remote servers. </para> - <para> - The protocol was developed to make the Web a readable and writable medium. It provides functionality to create, change and move documents on a remote server (typically a web server or &quot;web share&quot;). This is useful for authoring the documents which a web server serves, among other things, but can also be used for general web-based file storage that can be accessed from anywhere. + + <para> + The protocol was developed to make the Web a readable and writable medium. It provides functionality to create, change and move documents on a remote server (typically a web server or &quot;web share&quot;). This is useful for authoring the documents which a web server serves, among other things, but can also be used for general web-based file storage that can be accessed from anywhere. </para> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Terminologies-Podcast"> - <title>Podcast</title> - <para> - A <emphasis>podcast</emphasis> is an audio file that you can download and listen to on your computer or a portable MP3 player such as an <trademark>iPod</trademark>. The word itself comes from the combination of the words: <emphasis>iPod</emphasis> and <emphasis>broadcast</emphasis>. + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Terminologies-Podcast"> + <title>Podcast</title> + + <para> + A <emphasis>podcast</emphasis> is an audio file that you can download and listen to on your computer or a portable MP3 player such as an <trademark>iPod</trademark>. The word itself comes from the combination of the words: <emphasis>iPod</emphasis> and <emphasis>broadcast</emphasis>. </para> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Terminologies-File_Plan"> - <title>File Plan</title> - <para> - The file plan is the primary records management planning document. Although file plans can differ across organizations, their typical functions are to: + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Terminologies-File_Plan"> + <title>File Plan</title> + + <para> + The file plan is the primary records management planning document. Although file plans can differ across organizations, their typical functions are to: </para> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - Describe the kinds of items the organization acknowledges to be records. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - Describe what broader category of records that the items belong to. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - Indicate where records are stored. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - Describe retention periods for records. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - Delineate who is responsible for managing the various types of records. - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Terminologies-Symlink"> - <title>Symlink</title> - <para> - A <emphasis>symlink</emphasis> is a special file containing a reference to another document or folder. Symlinks can make it easier to access the specific target node that the symlink points to. In Content Explorer, a symlink can be identified by a small chain symbol next to its icon: + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + Describe the kinds of items the organization acknowledges to be records. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + Describe what broader category of records that the items belong to. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + Indicate where records are stored. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + Describe retention periods for records. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + Delineate who is responsible for managing the various types of records. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Terminologies-Symlink"> + <title>Symlink</title> + + <para> + A <emphasis>symlink</emphasis> is a special file containing a reference to another document or folder. Symlinks can make it easier to access the specific target node that the symlink points to. In Content Explorer, a symlink can be identified by a small chain symbol next to its icon: </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/symlink.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata width="31mm" align="center" fileref="images/symlink.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </section> - </section> -</chapter> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/symlink.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata width="31mm" align="center" fileref="images/symlink.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + </section> + </chapter> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Next.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Next.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Next.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -3,78 +3,68 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<chapter id="chap-User_Guide-Next_Steps"> - <title>Support</title> - <para> - Although this document is intended to provide a thorough explanation of JBoss Enterprise Portal Platform Site Publisher features and terminologies, you may have more questions. The following links will assist you with information about Red Hat's support processes and services. - </para> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Next_Steps-Product_Support_and_License_Website_Links"> - <title>Product Support and License Website Links</title> + <chapter id="chap-User_Guide-Next_Steps"> + <title>Support</title> + + <para> + Although this document is intended to provide a thorough explanation of JBoss Enterprise Portal Platform Site Publisher features and terminologies, you may have more questions. The following links will assist you with information about Red Hat's support processes and services. + </para> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Next_Steps-Product_Support_and_License_Website_Links"> + <title>Product Support and License Website Links</title> + <formalpara id="form-User_Guide-Next_Steps-Product_Support_and_License_Website_Links-Red_Hat_JBoss_Customer_Support"> - <title>Red Hat JBoss Customer Support</title> - <para> - <ulink type="http" url="https://access.redhat.com/home " /> + <title>Red Hat JBoss Customer Support</title> <para> + <ulink type="http" url="https://access.redhat.com/home " /> </para> - - </formalpara> + </formalpara> + <formalpara id="form-User_Guide-Next_Steps-Product_Support_and_License_Website_Links-JBoss_Customer_Support_Portal_Downloads"> - <title>JBoss Customer Support Portal Downloads</title> - <para> - <ulink type="http" url="https://access.redhat.com/jbossnetwork/restricted/listSoftware.... /> + <title>JBoss Customer Support Portal Downloads</title> <para> + <ulink type="http" url="https://access.redhat.com/jbossnetwork/restricted/listSoftware.... /> </para> - - </formalpara> + </formalpara> + <formalpara id="form-User_Guide-Next_Steps-Product_Support_and_License_Website_Links-Support_Processes"> - <title>Support Processes</title> - <para> - <ulink url="https://access.redhat.com/support/policy/support_process.html&q... /> + <title>Support Processes</title> <para> + <ulink url="https://access.redhat.com/support/policy/support_process.html&q... /> </para> - - </formalpara> + </formalpara> + <formalpara id="form-User_Guide-Next_Steps-Product_Support_and_License_Website_Links-_Production_Support_Scope_of_Coverage_"> - <title> Production Support Scope of Coverage </title> - <para> - <ulink url="https://access.redhat.com/support/offerings/production/soc.html... /> + <title>Production Support Scope of Coverage</title> <para> + <ulink url="https://access.redhat.com/support/offerings/production/soc.html... /> </para> - - </formalpara> + </formalpara> + <formalpara id="form-User_Guide-Next_Steps-Product_Support_and_License_Website_Links-_Production_Support_Service_Level_Agreement_"> - <title> Production Support Service Level Agreement </title> - <para> - <ulink url="https://access.redhat.com/support/offerings/production/sla.html... /> + <title>Production Support Service Level Agreement</title> <para> + <ulink url="https://access.redhat.com/support/offerings/production/sla.html... /> </para> - - </formalpara> + </formalpara> + <formalpara id="form-User_Guide-Next_Steps-Product_Support_and_License_Website_Links-_Developer_Support_Scope_of_Coverage"> - <title> Developer Support Scope of Coverage</title> - <para> - <ulink url="https://access.redhat.com/support/offerings/developer/soc.html&... /> + <title>Developer Support Scope of Coverage</title> <para> + <ulink url="https://access.redhat.com/support/offerings/developer/soc.html&... /> </para> - - </formalpara> + </formalpara> + <formalpara id="form-User_Guide-Next_Steps-Product_Support_and_License_Website_Links-_Developer_Support_Service_Level_Agreement"> - <title> Developer Support Service Level Agreement</title> - <para> - <ulink url="https://access.redhat.com/support/offerings/developer/sla.html&... /> + <title>Developer Support Service Level Agreement</title> <para> + <ulink url="https://access.redhat.com/support/offerings/developer/sla.html&... /> </para> - - </formalpara> + </formalpara> + <formalpara id="form-User_Guide-Next_Steps-Product_Support_and_License_Website_Links-_Product_Update_and_Support_Policy"> - <title> Product Update and Support Policy</title> - <para> - <ulink url="https://access.redhat.com/support/policy/updates/jboss_notes/&q... /> + <title>Product Update and Support Policy</title> <para> + <ulink url="https://access.redhat.com/support/policy/updates/jboss_notes/&q... /> </para> - - </formalpara> + </formalpara> + <formalpara id="form-User_Guide-Next_Steps-Product_Support_and_License_Website_Links-_JBoss_End_User_License_Agreement"> - <title> JBoss End User License Agreement</title> - <para> - <ulink url="http://www.redhat.com/licenses/jboss_eula.html" /> + <title>JBoss End User License Agreement</title> <para> + <ulink url="http://www.redhat.com/licenses/jboss_eula.html" /> </para> - - </formalpara> - - </section> - -</chapter> - + </formalpara> + </section> + </chapter> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Preamble.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Preamble.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Preamble.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -3,89 +3,111 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<chapter id="chap-User_Guide-Overall_Introduction"> - <title>Overall Introduction</title> + <chapter id="chap-User_Guide-Overall_Introduction"> + <title>Overall Introduction</title> + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Overall_Introduction-Why_Use_Site_Publisher"> - <title>Why Use Site Publisher</title> + <title>Why Use Site Publisher</title> + <para> If you are looking for a powerful solution to manage websites and contents, Site Publisher is the tool you need. Site Publisher is designed to provide webmasters a way to maintain, control, modify and reassemble the content of a web-page easily and effectively. </para> + <para> - All the components of your website can be organized and reconstructed easily, which helps you keep your website under the control. Site Publisher can change the way you think about websites and content management. - </para> - <para> - Some of the key features in Site Publisher are: - </para> + All the components of your website can be organized and reconstructed easily, which helps you keep your website under the control. Site Publisher can change the way you think about websites and content management. + </para> + + <para> + Some of the key features in Site Publisher are: + </para> + <variablelist id="vari-User_Guide-Why_Use_Site_Publisher-Website_Creation"> <title>Website Creation</title> - <varlistentry> - <term>Fast Set up:</term> - <listitem> - <para> - Create a new site in just a few clicks using an intuitive user interface and template features. - </para> - </listitem> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Fast Set up:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + Create a new site in just a few clicks using an intuitive user interface and template features. + </para> + </listitem> </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>Navigate, Preview and Publish Content:</term> - <listitem> - <para> - Navigate page content in either a single content viewer or a list display, quickly preview page content or work on new content in draft mode and publish at any time. - </para> - </listitem> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Navigate, Preview and Publish Content:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + Navigate page content in either a single content viewer or a list display, quickly preview page content or work on new content in draft mode and publish at any time. + </para> + </listitem> </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>Templates:</term> - <listitem> - <para> - Create websites from existing templates and themes, or create new templates with a consistent look and feel across a single site. - </para> - </listitem> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Templates:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + Create websites from existing templates and themes, or create new templates with a consistent look and feel across a single site. + </para> + </listitem> </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>In-Site Editing</term> - <listitem> - <para> - The integrated rich text editor allows non-technical users to edit pages in an intuitive way. - </para> - </listitem> + + <varlistentry> + <term>In-Site Editing</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + The integrated rich text editor allows non-technical users to edit pages in an intuitive way. + </para> + </listitem> </varlistentry> - </variablelist> + </variablelist> + <variablelist id="vari-User_Guide-Why_Use_Site_Publisher-Web_Content_Organization"> <title>Web Content Organization</title> - <varlistentry> - <term>Web-Based Administration:</term> - <listitem> - <para> - Use a web browser to manage sites remotely, without the need for local administration software. - </para> - </listitem> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Web-Based Administration:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + Use a web browser to manage sites remotely, without the need for local administration software. + </para> + </listitem> </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>Manage Multiple Websites:</term> - <listitem> - <para> - Manage and control any number of sites from one place. - </para> - </listitem> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Manage Multiple Websites:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + Manage and control any number of sites from one place. + </para> + </listitem> </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>Media Library:</term> - <listitem> - <para> - Upload media to the library, publish, reuse and update all available media content across multiple websites. - </para> - </listitem> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Media Library:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + Upload media to the library, publish, reuse and update all available media content across multiple websites. + </para> + </listitem> </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>Content Search:</term> - <listitem> - <para> - Search content and documents using categorization and tag features. - </para> - </listitem> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Content Search:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + Search content and documents using categorization and tag features. + </para> + </listitem> </varlistentry> - <!-- Commenting out pending resolution of JBEPP-949 (also in SP Release Notes) +<!-- Commenting out pending resolution of JBEPP-949 (also in SP Release Notes) <varlistentry> <term>Broken Link Detection:</term> <listitem> @@ -94,154 +116,183 @@ </para> </listitem> </varlistentry>--> - <varlistentry> - <term>Versioning and Rollback:</term> - <listitem> - <para> - Easily roll back a website's content with automatic versioning. - </para> - </listitem> + <varlistentry> + <term>Versioning and Rollback:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + Easily roll back a website's content with automatic versioning. + </para> + </listitem> </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>SEO Friendly URLs:</term> - <listitem> - <para> - Search Engine Optimization (SEO) is simplified for editing meta tags and more. Content has its own specific URL for easier bookmarking and improved SEO. - </para> - </listitem> + + <varlistentry> + <term>SEO Friendly URLs:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + Search Engine Optimization (SEO) is simplified for editing meta tags and more. Content has its own specific URL for easier bookmarking and improved SEO. + </para> + </listitem> </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>Configuration for Deployment on Web Farms:</term> - <listitem> - <para> - Advanced deployment rule for scalable, three-tier web application architecture with partitioned replicated deployment. - </para> - </listitem> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Configuration for Deployment on Web Farms:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + Advanced deployment rule for scalable, three-tier web application architecture with partitioned replicated deployment. + </para> + </listitem> </varlistentry> - </variablelist> + </variablelist> + <variablelist id="vari-User_Guide-Why_Use_Site_Publisher-Capture_and_Manage_Documents"> <title>Capture and Manage Documents</title> - <varlistentry> - <term>Kofax Plugin:</term> - <listitem> - <para> - Collect paper documents, forms, invoices and other unstructured documents and convert into accurate and retrievable information, stored in the eXo JCR. - </para> - </listitem> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Kofax Plugin:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + Collect paper documents, forms, invoices and other unstructured documents and convert into accurate and retrievable information, stored in the eXo JCR. + </para> + </listitem> </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>Access Control List:</term> - <listitem> - <para> - Validate the current session's permissions to add nodes, set properties, remove or retrieve items. Define actions to launch the next step in a process, or to invoke any "coded" action required. - </para> - </listitem> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Access Control List:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + Validate the current session's permissions to add nodes, set properties, remove or retrieve items. Define actions to launch the next step in a process, or to invoke any "coded" action required. + </para> + </listitem> </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>Workflow:</term> - <listitem> - <para> - Specify processes for document collaboration and validation. - </para> - </listitem> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Workflow:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + Specify processes for document collaboration and validation. + </para> + </listitem> </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>Record Management:</term> - <listitem> - <para> - Track the status of content completion and control document storage lifecycles. - </para> - </listitem> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Record Management:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + Track the status of content completion and control document storage lifecycles. + </para> + </listitem> </varlistentry> - </variablelist> + </variablelist> + <variablelist id="vari-User_Guide-Why_Use_Site_Publisher-Store_and_Access_Documents"> <title>Store and Access Documents</title> - <varlistentry> - <term>JCR:</term> - <listitem> - <para> - eXo JCR allows applications to access or manage files independent of their location, and also provides advanced features such as unified access control, versioning, indexing and more. - </para> - </listitem> + + <varlistentry> + <term>JCR:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + eXo JCR allows applications to access or manage files independent of their location, and also provides advanced features such as unified access control, versioning, indexing and more. + </para> + </listitem> </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>Automatic Backup:</term> - <listitem> - <para> - Define and automate tasks to save documents as required. - </para> - </listitem> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Automatic Backup:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + Define and automate tasks to save documents as required. + </para> + </listitem> </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>Web Interface:</term> - <listitem> - <para> - Access documents in an intuitive and user-friendly web interface. - </para> - - </listitem> - + + <varlistentry> + <term>Web Interface:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + Access documents in an intuitive and user-friendly web interface. + </para> + </listitem> </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>Microsoft and OpenOffice Plug-ins:</term> - <listitem> - <para> - Microsoft and OpenOffice plug-ins give users the freedom to work on documents in their preferred document editing program. - </para> - </listitem> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Microsoft and OpenOffice Plug-ins:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + Microsoft and OpenOffice plug-ins give users the freedom to work on documents in their preferred document editing program. + </para> + </listitem> </varlistentry> - </variablelist> + </variablelist> + <formalpara id="form-User_Guide-Why_Use_Site_Publisher-And_More..."> - <title>And More</title> - <para> - Site Publisher also provides other powerful tools, such as CSS, Java Script and RSS support, advanced document management tool, collaboration tools, to manage and build content-rich websites. - </para> + <title>And More</title> <para> + Site Publisher also provides other powerful tools, such as CSS, Java Script and RSS support, advanced document management tool, collaboration tools, to manage and build content-rich websites. + </para> </formalpara> + <para> All the features in Site Publisher are engineered to deliver simple site management and to reduce the cost of managing multiple sites. - </para> - </section> - - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Overall_Introduction-About_This_Document"> - <title>About This Document</title> + </para> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Overall_Introduction-About_This_Document"> + <title>About This Document</title> + <para> This guide will explain all the basic and advanced features that Site Publisher provides in managing websites and site content. It gives in-depth examples and easy explanations of the technology that allows the webmasters to create and manage a very fast and powerful website. It is intended for Portal users and administrators alike. - </para> + </para> + <para> With this guide you will: - </para> + </para> + <itemizedlist> <listitem> - <para> - Learn the basic terminologies used in Site Publisher. - </para> + <para> + Learn the basic terminologies used in Site Publisher. + </para> </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - Learn how to create, manage and publish Site content. - </para> + + <listitem> + <para> + Learn how to create, manage and publish Site content. + </para> </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - Learn how to manage Web pages, set up a website, and more. - </para> + + <listitem> + <para> + Learn how to manage Web pages, set up a website, and more. + </para> </listitem> - </itemizedlist> + </itemizedlist> + <para> For ease of reference, the following accounts (username/ password) will be used throughout the guide: - </para> + </para> + <itemizedlist> <listitem> - <para> - <emphasis role="bold">root/ gtn</emphasis>: This account is for users as Administrators who have the highest right on the platform. - </para> + <para> + <emphasis role="bold">root/ gtn</emphasis>: This account is for users as Administrators who have the highest right on the platform. + </para> </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - <emphasis role="bold">mary/ gtn</emphasis>: This account is for a publisher who can write contents but also can create new pages or edit them in the current site. - </para> + + <listitem> + <para> + <emphasis role="bold">mary/ gtn</emphasis>: This account is for a publisher who can write contents but also can create new pages or edit them in the current site. + </para> </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - </section> -</chapter> - + </itemizedlist> + </section> + </chapter> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Preface.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Preface.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Preface.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -3,20 +3,19 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<preface id="pref-Install_Guide-Preface"> - <title>Preface</title> - + <preface id="pref-Install_Guide-Preface"> + <title>Preface</title> <!--FOR PUBLICAN --> -<xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="Common_Content/Conventions.xml"> + <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="Common_Content/Conventions.xml"> <!--FOR JDOCBOOK:--> - <xi:fallback xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude"> - <xi:include href="fallback_content/Conventions.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude"></xi:include> - </xi:fallback> -</xi:include> - + <xi:fallback xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude"> + <xi:include href="fallback_content/Conventions.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude"></xi:include> + </xi:fallback> + </xi:include> <!--FOR PUBLICAN --> -<xi:include href="Common_Content/Feedback.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude"><xi:fallback xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude"><xi:include href="fallback_content/Feedback.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> - </xi:fallback> -</xi:include> -</preface> - + <xi:include href="Common_Content/Feedback.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude"> + <xi:fallback xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude"> + <xi:include href="fallback_content/Feedback.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> + </xi:fallback> + </xi:include> + </preface> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Revision_History.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Revision_History.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Revision_History.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -3,52 +3,47 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<appendix id="appe-Release_Notes-Revision_History"> - <title>Revision History</title> - <simpara> - <revhistory> - <revision> - <revnumber>5.2.2-100</revnumber> - <date>Wed Sep 05 2012</date> - <author> - <firstname>Jared</firstname> - <surname>Morgan</surname> - <email/> - </author> - <revdescription> - <simplelist> - <member>Prepared guide for JBoss Enterprise Portal Platform 5.2.2 GA. No changes were made to this guide in this release.</member> - </simplelist> - </revdescription> - </revision> - <revision> - <revnumber>5.2.1-101</revnumber> - <date>Tue Apr 17 2012</date> - <author> - <firstname>Jared</firstname> - <surname>Morgan</surname> - <email/> - </author> - <revdescription> - <simplelist> - <member>Prepared guide for JBoss Enterprise Portal Platform 5.2.1 GA. Refer to 5.2.1 Release Notes for a summary of changes to this guide.</member> - </simplelist> - </revdescription> - </revision> - <revision> - <revnumber>5.2.0-100</revnumber> - <date>Wed Dec 14 2011</date> - <author> - <firstname>Scott</firstname> - <surname>Mumford</surname> - <email/> - </author> - <revdescription> - <simplelist> - <member>Publication build.</member> - </simplelist> - </revdescription> - </revision> - </revhistory> - </simpara> -</appendix> + <appendix id="appe-Release_Notes-Revision_History"> + <title>Revision History</title> <simpara> + <revhistory> + <revision> + <revnumber>5.2.2-100</revnumber> <date>Wed Sep 05 2012</date> + <author> + <firstname>Jared</firstname> <surname>Morgan</surname> <email/> + </author> + + <revdescription> + <simplelist> + <member>Prepared guide for JBoss Enterprise Portal Platform 5.2.2 GA. No changes were made to this guide in this release.</member> + </simplelist> + </revdescription> + </revision> + + <revision> + <revnumber>5.2.1-101</revnumber> <date>Tue Apr 17 2012</date> + <author> + <firstname>Jared</firstname> <surname>Morgan</surname> <email/> + </author> + + <revdescription> + <simplelist> + <member>Prepared guide for JBoss Enterprise Portal Platform 5.2.1 GA. Refer to 5.2.1 Release Notes for a summary of changes to this guide.</member> + </simplelist> + </revdescription> + </revision> + + <revision> + <revnumber>5.2.0-100</revnumber> <date>Wed Dec 14 2011</date> + <author> + <firstname>Scott</firstname> <surname>Mumford</surname> <email/> + </author> + + <revdescription> + <simplelist> + <member>Publication build.</member> + </simplelist> + </revdescription> + </revision> + </revhistory> + </simpara> + </appendix> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Site_Publisher.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Site_Publisher.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Site_Publisher.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -3,14 +3,14 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "Installation_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<section id="sect-User_Guide-Overall_Introduction-Site_Publisher"> - <title>Site Publisher</title> - <para> - Site Publisher (powered by eXo) is an add-on component for JBoss Enterprise Portal Platform. It enables users to create, edit and publish rich web content within the context of their portal installation. - </para> - <para> - Site Publisher simplifies the authoring and management for every website an organization needs to deploy. It includes the ability to administer sites, manage navigation, and publish content. Site Publisher delivers powerful functionality to everyone responsible for maintaining web content. - </para> - -</section> - + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Overall_Introduction-Site_Publisher"> + <title>Site Publisher</title> + + <para> + Site Publisher (powered by eXo) is an add-on component for JBoss Enterprise Portal Platform. It enables users to create, edit and publish rich web content within the context of their portal installation. + </para> + + <para> + Site Publisher simplifies the authoring and management for every website an organization needs to deploy. It includes the ability to administer sites, manage navigation, and publish content. Site Publisher delivers powerful functionality to everyone responsible for maintaining web content. + </para> + </section> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Site_Publisher_User_Guide.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Site_Publisher_User_Guide.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/Site_Publisher_User_Guide.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -4,14 +4,22 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "Site_Publisher_User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<book> - <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="Book_Info.xml"/> - <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="Preface.xml"/> - <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="Preamble.xml"/> - <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="Introduction.xml"/> - <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="modules/Get_Started.xml"/> - <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="modules/Basics.xml"/> - <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="modules/Advanced.xml"/> - <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="Next.xml"/> - <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="Revision_History.xml"/> -</book> + <book> + <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="Book_Info.xml"/> + + <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="Preface.xml"/> + + <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="Preamble.xml"/> + + <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="Introduction.xml"/> + + <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="modules/Get_Started.xml"/> + + <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="modules/Basics.xml"/> + + <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="modules/Advanced.xml"/> + + <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="Next.xml"/> + + <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="Revision_History.xml"/> + </book> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/fallback_content/Conventions.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/fallback_content/Conventions.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/fallback_content/Conventions.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -3,118 +3,173 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "../Installation_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<section> - <title>Document Conventions</title> - <para> - This manual uses several conventions to highlight certain words and phrases and draw attention to specific pieces of information. - </para> - <para> - In PDF and paper editions, this manual uses typefaces drawn from the <ulink url="https://fedorahosted.org/liberation-fonts/">Liberation Fonts</ulink> set. The Liberation Fonts set is also used in HTML editions if the set is installed on your system. If not, alternative but equivalent typefaces are displayed. Note: Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 and later includes the Liberation Fonts set by default. - </para> - <section> - <title>Typographic Conventions</title> - <para> - Four typographic conventions are used to call attention to specific words and phrases. These conventions, and the circumstances they apply to, are as follows. - </para> - <para> - <literal>Mono-spaced Bold</literal> - </para> - <para> - Used to highlight system input, including shell commands, file names and paths. Also used to highlight keycaps and key combinations. For example: - </para> - <blockquote> - <para> - To see the contents of the file <filename>my_next_bestselling_novel</filename> in your current working directory, enter the <command>cat my_next_bestselling_novel</command> command at the shell prompt and press <keycap>Enter</keycap> to execute the command. - </para> - </blockquote> - <para> - The above includes a file name, a shell command and a keycap, all presented in mono-spaced bold and all distinguishable thanks to context. - </para> - <para> - Key combinations can be distinguished from keycaps by the hyphen connecting each part of a key combination. For example: - </para> - <blockquote> - <para> - Press <keycap>Enter</keycap> to execute the command. - </para> - <para> - Press <keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>F1</keycap></keycombo> to switch to the first virtual terminal. Press <keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>F7</keycap></keycombo> to return to your X-Windows session. - </para> - </blockquote> - <para> - The first paragraph highlights the particular keycap to press. The second highlights two key combinations (each a set of three keycaps with each set pressed simultaneously). - </para> - <para> - If source code is discussed, class names, methods, functions, variable names and returned values mentioned within a paragraph will be presented as above, in <literal>mono-spaced bold</literal>. For example: - </para> - <blockquote> - <para> - File-related classes include <classname>file system</classname> for file systems, <classname>file</classname> for files, and <classname>dir</classname> for directories. Each class has its own associated set of permissions. - </para> - </blockquote> - <para> - <application>Proportional Bold</application> - </para> - <para> - This denotes words or phrases encountered on a system, including application names; dialog box text; labeled buttons; check-box and radio button labels; menu titles and sub-menu titles. For example: - </para> - <blockquote> - <para> - Choose <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu><guisubmenu>Preferences</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Mouse</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the main menu bar to launch <application>Mouse Preferences</application>. In the <guilabel>Buttons</guilabel> tab, click the <guilabel>Left-handed mouse</guilabel> check box and click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to switch the primary mouse button from the left to the right (making the mouse suitable for use in the left hand). - </para> - <para> - To insert a special character into a <application>gedit</application> file, choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Applications</guimenu><guisubmenu>Accessories</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Character Map</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the main menu bar. Next, choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Search</guimenu><guimenuitem>Find&hellip;</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the <application>Character Map</application> menu bar, type the name of the character in the <guilabel>Search</guilabel> field and click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>. The character you sought will be highlighted in the <guilabel>Character Table</guilabel>. Double-click this highlighted character to place it in the <guilabel>Text to copy</guilabel> field and then click the <guibutton>Copy</guibutton> button. Now switch back to your document and choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Paste</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the <application>gedit</application> menu bar. - </para> - </blockquote> - <para> - The above text includes application names; system-wide menu names and items; application-specific menu names; and buttons and text found within a GUI interface, all presented in proportional bold and all distinguishable by context. - </para> - <para> - <command><replaceable>Mono-spaced Bold Italic</replaceable></command> or <application><replaceable>Proportional Bold Italic</replaceable></application> - </para> - <para> - Whether mono-spaced bold or proportional bold, the addition of italics indicates replaceable or variable text. Italics denotes text you do not input literally or displayed text that changes depending on circumstance. For example: - </para> - <blockquote> - <para> - To connect to a remote machine using ssh, type <command>ssh <replaceable&gt;username&lt;/replaceable&gt;(a)&lt;replaceable&gt;domain.name&lt;/replaceable&gt;&lt;/command&gt; at a shell prompt. If the remote machine is <filename>example.com</filename> and your username on that machine is john, type <command>ssh john(a)example.com&lt;/command&gt;. - </para> - <para> - The <command>mount -o remount <replaceable>file-system</replaceable></command> command remounts the named file system. For example, to remount the <filename>/home</filename> file system, the command is <command>mount -o remount /home</command>. - </para> - <para> - To see the version of a currently installed package, use the <command>rpm -q <replaceable>package</replaceable></command> command. It will return a result as follows: <command><replaceable>package-version-release</replaceable></command>. - </para> - </blockquote> - <para> - Note the words in bold italics above &mdash; username, domain.name, file-system, package, version and release. Each word is a placeholder, either for text you enter when issuing a command or for text displayed by the system. - </para> - <para> - Aside from standard usage for presenting the title of a work, italics denotes the first use of a new and important term. For example: - </para> - <blockquote> - <para> - Publican is a <firstterm>DocBook</firstterm> publishing system. - </para> - </blockquote> - </section> - - <section> - <title>Pull-quote Conventions</title> - <para> - Terminal output and source code listings are set off visually from the surrounding text. - </para> - <para> - Output sent to a terminal is set in <computeroutput>mono-spaced roman</computeroutput> and presented thus: - </para> - + <section> + <title>Document Conventions</title> + + <para> + This manual uses several conventions to highlight certain words and phrases and draw attention to specific pieces of information. + </para> + + <para> + In PDF and paper editions, this manual uses typefaces drawn from the <ulink url="https://fedorahosted.org/liberation-fonts/">Liberation Fonts</ulink> set. The Liberation Fonts set is also used in HTML editions if the set is installed on your system. If not, alternative but equivalent typefaces are displayed. Note: Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 and later includes the Liberation Fonts set by default. + </para> + + <section> + <title>Typographic Conventions</title> + + <para> + Four typographic conventions are used to call attention to specific words and phrases. These conventions, and the circumstances they apply to, are as follows. + </para> + + <para> + <literal>Mono-spaced Bold</literal> + </para> + + <para> + Used to highlight system input, including shell commands, file names and paths. Also used to highlight keycaps and key combinations. For example: + </para> + + <blockquote> + <para> + To see the contents of the file <filename>my_next_bestselling_novel</filename> in your current working directory, enter the <command>cat my_next_bestselling_novel</command> command at the shell prompt and press <keycap>Enter</keycap> to execute the command. + </para> + </blockquote> + + <para> + The above includes a file name, a shell command and a keycap, all presented in mono-spaced bold and all distinguishable thanks to context. + </para> + + <para> + Key combinations can be distinguished from keycaps by the hyphen connecting each part of a key combination. For example: + </para> + + <blockquote> + <para> + Press <keycap>Enter</keycap> to execute the command. + </para> + + <para> + Press + <keycombo> + <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>F1</keycap> + </keycombo> + to switch to the first virtual terminal. Press + <keycombo> + <keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Alt</keycap><keycap>F7</keycap> + </keycombo> + to return to your X-Windows session. + </para> + </blockquote> + + <para> + The first paragraph highlights the particular keycap to press. The second highlights two key combinations (each a set of three keycaps with each set pressed simultaneously). + </para> + + <para> + If source code is discussed, class names, methods, functions, variable names and returned values mentioned within a paragraph will be presented as above, in <literal>mono-spaced bold</literal>. For example: + </para> + + <blockquote> + <para> + File-related classes include <classname>file system</classname> for file systems, <classname>file</classname> for files, and <classname>dir</classname> for directories. Each class has its own associated set of permissions. + </para> + </blockquote> + + <para> + <application>Proportional Bold</application> + </para> + + <para> + This denotes words or phrases encountered on a system, including application names; dialog box text; labeled buttons; check-box and radio button labels; menu titles and sub-menu titles. For example: + </para> + + <blockquote> + <para> + Choose <menuchoice><guimenu>System</guimenu> + <guisubmenu> + Preferences + </guisubmenu> + <guimenuitem>Mouse</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the main menu bar to launch <application>Mouse Preferences</application>. In the <guilabel>Buttons</guilabel> tab, click the <guilabel>Left-handed mouse</guilabel> check box and click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to switch the primary mouse button from the left to the right (making the mouse suitable for use in the left hand). + </para> + + <para> + To insert a special character into a <application>gedit</application> file, choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Applications</guimenu> + <guisubmenu> + Accessories + </guisubmenu> + <guimenuitem>Character Map</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the main menu bar. Next, choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Search</guimenu><guimenuitem>Find&hellip;</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the <application>Character Map</application> menu bar, type the name of the character in the <guilabel>Search</guilabel> field and click <guibutton>Next</guibutton>. The character you sought will be highlighted in the <guilabel>Character Table</guilabel>. Double-click this highlighted character to place it in the <guilabel>Text to copy</guilabel> field and then click the <guibutton>Copy</guibutton> button. Now switch back to your document and choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Paste</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the <application>gedit</application> menu bar. + </para> + </blockquote> + + <para> + The above text includes application names; system-wide menu names and items; application-specific menu names; and buttons and text found within a GUI interface, all presented in proportional bold and all distinguishable by context. + </para> + + <para> + <command><replaceable>Mono-spaced Bold Italic</replaceable></command> or <application><replaceable>Proportional Bold Italic</replaceable></application> + </para> + + <para> + Whether mono-spaced bold or proportional bold, the addition of italics indicates replaceable or variable text. Italics denotes text you do not input literally or displayed text that changes depending on circumstance. For example: + </para> + + <blockquote> + <para> + To connect to a remote machine using ssh, type <command>ssh <replaceable&gt;username&lt;/replaceable&gt;(a)&lt;replaceable&gt;domain.name&lt;/replaceable&gt;&lt;/command&gt; at a shell prompt. If the remote machine is <filename>example.com</filename> and your username on that machine is john, type <command>ssh john(a)example.com&lt;/command&gt;. + </para> + + <para> + The <command>mount -o remount <replaceable>file-system</replaceable></command> command remounts the named file system. For example, to remount the <filename>/home</filename> file system, the command is <command>mount -o remount /home</command>. + </para> + + <para> + To see the version of a currently installed package, use the <command>rpm -q <replaceable>package</replaceable></command> command. It will return a result as follows: <command><replaceable>package-version-release</replaceable></command>. + </para> + </blockquote> + + <para> + Note the words in bold italics above &mdash; username, domain.name, file-system, package, version and release. Each word is a placeholder, either for text you enter when issuing a command or for text displayed by the system. + </para> + + <para> + Aside from standard usage for presenting the title of a work, italics denotes the first use of a new and important term. For example: + </para> + + <blockquote> + <para> + Publican is a + <firstterm> + DocBook + </firstterm> + publishing system. + </para> + </blockquote> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Pull-quote Conventions</title> + + <para> + Terminal output and source code listings are set off visually from the surrounding text. + </para> + + <para> + Output sent to a terminal is set in + <computeroutput> + mono-spaced roman + </computeroutput> + and presented thus: + </para> <screen>books Desktop documentation drafts mss photos stuff svn books_tests Desktop1 downloads images notes scripts svgs </screen> - <para> - Source-code listings are also set in <computeroutput>mono-spaced roman</computeroutput> but add syntax highlighting as follows: - </para> - + <para> + Source-code listings are also set in + <computeroutput> + mono-spaced roman + </computeroutput> + but add syntax highlighting as follows: + </para> <programlisting language="Java">package org.jboss.book.jca.ex1; import javax.naming.InitialContext; @@ -135,33 +190,37 @@ } } </programlisting> - </section> - - <section> - <title>Notes and Warnings</title> - <para> - Finally, we use three visual styles to draw attention to information that might otherwise be overlooked. - </para> - <note> - <title>Note</title> - <para> - Notes are tips, shortcuts or alternative approaches to the task at hand. Ignoring a note should have no negative consequences, but you might miss out on a trick that makes your life easier. - </para> - </note> - <important> - <title>Important</title> - <para> - Important boxes detail things that are easily missed: configuration changes that only apply to the current session, or services that need restarting before an update will apply. Ignoring a box labeled 'Important' will not cause data loss but may cause irritation and frustration. - </para> - </important> - <warning> - <title>Warning</title> - <para> - Warnings should not be ignored. Ignoring warnings will most likely cause data loss. - </para> - </warning> - </section> - -</section> - - + </section> + + <section> + <title>Notes and Warnings</title> + + <para> + Finally, we use three visual styles to draw attention to information that might otherwise be overlooked. + </para> + + <note> + <title>Note</title> + + <para> + Notes are tips, shortcuts or alternative approaches to the task at hand. Ignoring a note should have no negative consequences, but you might miss out on a trick that makes your life easier. + </para> + </note> + + <important> + <title>Important</title> + + <para> + Important boxes detail things that are easily missed: configuration changes that only apply to the current session, or services that need restarting before an update will apply. Ignoring a box labeled 'Important' will not cause data loss but may cause irritation and frustration. + </para> + </important> + + <warning> + <title>Warning</title> + + <para> + Warnings should not be ignored. Ignoring warnings will most likely cause data loss. + </para> + </warning> + </section> + </section> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/fallback_content/Feedback.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/fallback_content/Feedback.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/fallback_content/Feedback.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -3,21 +3,28 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "../Installation_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<section> - <title>We Need Feedback!</title> - <indexterm> - <primary>feedback</primary> - <secondary>contact information for this manual</secondary> - </indexterm> - <para> - If you find a typographical error in this manual, or if you have thought of a way to make this manual better, we would love to hear from you! Please submit a support ticket with your comments via the JBoss Customer Support Portal available at <ulink url="http://support.redhat.com">http://support.redhat.com</ulink> against the product <application>JBoss Enterprise Portal Platform</application>. - </para> - <para> - When submitting a bug report, be sure to mention the manual's identifier: <citetitle>&BOOKID;</citetitle> - </para> - <para> - If you have a suggestion for improving the documentation, try to be as specific as possible when describing it. If you have found an error, please include the section number and some of the surrounding text so we can find it easily. - </para> -</section> - - + <section> + <title>We Need Feedback!</title> + + <indexterm> + <primary> + feedback + </primary> + + <secondary> + contact information for this manual + </secondary> + </indexterm> + + <para> + If you find a typographical error in this manual, or if you have thought of a way to make this manual better, we would love to hear from you! Please submit a support ticket with your comments via the JBoss Customer Support Portal available at <ulink url="http://support.redhat.com">http://support.redhat.com</ulink> against the product <application>JBoss Enterprise Portal Platform</application>. + </para> + + <para> + When submitting a bug report, be sure to mention the manual's identifier: <citetitle>&BOOKID;</citetitle> + </para> + + <para> + If you have a suggestion for improving the documentation, try to be as specific as possible when describing it. If you have found an error, please include the section number and some of the surrounding text so we can find it easily. + </para> + </section> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/fallback_content/Legal_Notice.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/fallback_content/Legal_Notice.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/fallback_content/Legal_Notice.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -3,9 +3,8 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "../Installation_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<legalnotice> - <para> - Copyright <trademark class="copyright"></trademark> &YEAR; &HOLDER; This material may only be distributed subject to the terms and conditions set forth in the GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL), V1.2 or later (the latest version is presently available at <ulink url="http://www.gnu.org/licenses/fdl.txt">http://www.gnu.org...>). - </para> -</legalnotice> - + <legalnotice> + <para> + Copyright <trademark class="copyright"></trademark> &YEAR; &HOLDER; This material may only be distributed subject to the terms and conditions set forth in the GNU Free Documentation License (GFDL), V1.2 or later (the latest version is presently available at <ulink url="http://www.gnu.org/licenses/fdl.txt">http://www.gnu.org...>). + </para> + </legalnotice> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Advanced/Administration/Advanced.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Advanced/Administration/Advanced.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Advanced/Administration/Advanced.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -4,643 +4,571 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "../../../User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<section id="sect-User_Guide-Advanced_Configuration"> - <title>Advanced Configuration</title> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Advanced_Configuration-Manage_Queries"> - <title>Manage Queries</title> - <para> - This function enables you to manage queries. It allows adding, editing and deleting queries. - </para> - <para> - Go to <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Administration</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Advanced Configuration</guimenuitem> - <guimenuitem>Manage Queries</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice>. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/managequeriestable.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/managequeriestable.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_Queries-Add_a_new_query"> - <title>Add a new query</title> - <step> - <para> - Open the <guilabel>Add Query</guilabel> form by clicking the <guibutton>Add Query</guibutton> button in the <guilabel>Manage Queries</guilabel> form. + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Advanced_Configuration"> + <title>Advanced Configuration</title> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Advanced_Configuration-Manage_Queries"> + <title>Manage Queries</title> + + <para> + This function enables you to manage queries. It allows adding, editing and deleting queries. </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/addqueryform.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/addqueryform.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter a query name for the <guilabel>Name</guilabel> field. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the query type: - </para> - <variablelist> - <varlistentry> - <term>Xpath</term> - <listitem> - <para> - <emphasis>XML Path Language</emphasis> is a language for selecting nodes. For example, <filename>/jcr:root/Documents/Live</filename>. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>SQL</term> - <listitem> - <para> - <emphasis>Structured Query Language</emphasis> is a database computer language. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - </variablelist> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter the statement for query. The name of node type must be unique. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Check or uncheck the <guilabel>Enable cache results</guilabel> option. If you tick this checkbox, for the fist time you use this query to search, the result will be cached. For the second time you search using this query, it will show the cached results. After 45minutes, the cache will be removed. - </para> - <example> - <title></title> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - You have the query <literal>Test</literal> with the statement <literal>//element (*, nt:file)</literal>. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - In the File Explorer, you have a <filename>nt:file</filename> document named <filename>File1</filename>. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - When you execute the query <literal>Test</literal>, only the <filename>File1</filename> document will be shown. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - You create a <filename>nt:file</filename> document named <filename>File2</filename> and execute query <literal>Test</literal>, only document <filename>File2</filename> document will be listed. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - After 45 minutes, the cache will be removed. When you execute the query <literal>Test</literal>, the documents <filename>File1</filename> and <filename>File2</filename> will be listed. - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - </example> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select permissions for a group that can use this query by clicking the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/pluspermissionbutton.png" format="PNG" width="8mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>green plus</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/selectpermission.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/selectpermission.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="146mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to add the new query. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_Queries-Edit_a_query"> - <title>Edit a query</title> - <step> - <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/editicon4.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>pencil</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon corresponding to the query you want to edit. The <guilabel>Edit Query</guilabel> form will appear: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/editqueryform.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/editqueryform.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Edit the properties of the selected query. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to submit any changes. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_Queries-Delete_a_query"> - <title>Delete a query</title> - <step> - <para> - Click <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/trashicon.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>trash can</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon corresponding to the query you want to delete. A confirmation message will appear. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>OK</guilabel> to accept deleting this query, or <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> to discard the form. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Advanced_Configuration-Manage_Scripts"> - <title>Manage Scripts</title> - <para> - The function enables users to manage all script codes in the <emphasis role="bold">ECM</emphasis> and <emphasis role="bold">Browser Content</emphasis> system. - </para> - <para> - Go to <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Group</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Administration</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice> then go to <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Advanced Configuration</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Manage Scripts</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice>. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/managescriptsform.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/managescriptsform.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <table> - <title>Manage Scripts Form</title> - <tgroup cols="2"> - <thead> - <row> - <entry> - Field - </entry> - <entry> - Details - </entry> - </row> - </thead> - <tbody> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>ECM Scripts</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry> - These scripts are used in <emphasis role="bold">Site Publisher</emphasis>. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>BC Scripts</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry> - These scripts are used in <emphasis role="bold">Content Browser</emphasis>. - </entry> - </row> - </tbody> - </tgroup> - </table> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_Scripts-Add_a_new_script_in_ECM"> - <title>Add a new script in ECM</title> - <step> - <para> - Select the <guilabel>ECM Scripts</guilabel> tab in the <guilabel>Manage Scripts</guilabel> form. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the <guilabel>Add</guilabel> button to open the <guilabel>Add/Edit script</guilabel> form: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/ecmaddeditscriptsform.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/ecmaddeditscriptsform.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter a value for the <guilabel>Script content</guilabel> field. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter a name in the <guilabel>Script name</guilabel> field. - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - The script name must be unique. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - The name must not contain special characters such as !,@,#,$,%,&amp;,*,(,). - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to adding the new script. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_Scripts-Edit_an_ECM_script"> - <title>Edit an ECM script</title> - <para> - To edit an ECM script, do the following: - </para> - <step> - <para> - In the <guilabel>ECM Scripts</guilabel> tab, click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/editicon4.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>pencil</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon that corresponds to the script that you want to edit. The <guilabel>Add/Edit script</guilabel> form will appear: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addeditscriptsform.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Edit the properties in this form. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to save all changes. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_Scripts-Delete_an_ECM_script"> - <title>Delete an ECM script</title> - <para> - To delete an ECM script, do the following: - </para> - <step> - <para> - In the <guilabel>ECM Scripts</guilabel> tab, click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/trashicon.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>trash can</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon on the script that you want to delete. A confirmation message will appear. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>OK</guilabel> to delete this script or <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> to discard this action. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_Scripts-Add_a_BC_script"> - <title>Add a BC script</title> - <para> - To add a BC script, do the following: - </para> - <step> - <para> - In the <guilabel>Manage Scripts</guilabel>, select the <guilabel>BC Scripts</guilabel> tab. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/bcscriptstab.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/bcscriptstab.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Add</guilabel> to open the <guilabel>Add/Edit script</guilabel> form: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/bcaddeditscriptform.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/bcaddeditscriptform.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter the script in the <guilabel>Script content</guilabel> field. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter a name into the <guilabel>Name</guilabel> field. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to finish adding the new script. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_Scripts-Edit_a_BC_script"> - <title>Edit a BC script</title> - <para> - To edit a BC script, do the following:: - </para> - <step> - <para> - In the <guilabel>BC Script</guilabel> tab, click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/editicon4.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>pencil</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon on a script that you want to edit. + + <para> + Go to <menuchoice> <guimenu>Administration</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Advanced Configuration</guimenuitem> <guimenuitem>Manage Queries</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>. </para> - <para> - The <guilabel>Add/Edit script</guilabel> form will appear: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/bceditscriptform.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/bceditscriptform.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Edit the properties as required. + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/managequeriestable.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/managequeriestable.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_Queries-Add_a_new_query"> + <title>Add a new query</title> + + <step> + <para> + Open the <guilabel>Add Query</guilabel> form by clicking the <guibutton>Add Query</guibutton> button in the <guilabel>Manage Queries</guilabel> form. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/addqueryform.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/addqueryform.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter a query name for the <guilabel>Name</guilabel> field. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select the query type: + </para> + + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>Xpath</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + <emphasis>XML Path Language</emphasis> is a language for selecting nodes. For example, <filename>/jcr:root/Documents/Live</filename>. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>SQL</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + <emphasis>Structured Query Language</emphasis> is a database computer language. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter the statement for query. The name of node type must be unique. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Check or uncheck the <guilabel>Enable cache results</guilabel> option. If you tick this checkbox, for the fist time you use this query to search, the result will be cached. For the second time you search using this query, it will show the cached results. After 45minutes, the cache will be removed. + </para> + + <example> + <title></title> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + You have the query <literal>Test</literal> with the statement <literal>//element (*, nt:file)</literal>. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + In the File Explorer, you have a <filename>nt:file</filename> document named <filename>File1</filename>. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + When you execute the query <literal>Test</literal>, only the <filename>File1</filename> document will be shown. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + You create a <filename>nt:file</filename> document named <filename>File2</filename> and execute query <literal>Test</literal>, only document <filename>File2</filename> document will be listed. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + After 45 minutes, the cache will be removed. When you execute the query <literal>Test</literal>, the documents <filename>File1</filename> and <filename>File2</filename> will be listed. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </example> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select permissions for a group that can use this query by clicking the <guilabel>green plus</guilabel> icon. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/selectpermission.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/selectpermission.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="146mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to add the new query. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_Queries-Edit_a_query"> + <title>Edit a query</title> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>pencil</guilabel> icon corresponding to the query you want to edit. The <guilabel>Edit Query</guilabel> form will appear: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/editqueryform.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/editqueryform.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Edit the properties of the selected query. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to submit any changes. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_Queries-Delete_a_query"> + <title>Delete a query</title> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>trash can</guilabel> icon corresponding to the query you want to delete. A confirmation message will appear. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>OK</guilabel> to accept deleting this query, or <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> to discard the form. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Advanced_Configuration-Manage_Scripts"> + <title>Manage Scripts</title> + + <para> + The function enables users to manage all script codes in the <emphasis role="bold">ECM</emphasis> and <emphasis role="bold">Browser Content</emphasis> system. </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to accept all changes. + + <para> + Go to <menuchoice> <guimenu>Group</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Administration</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> then go to <menuchoice> <guimenu>Advanced Configuration</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Manage Scripts</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>. </para> - </step> - </procedure> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_Scripts-Delete_a_BC_script"> - <title>Delete a BC script</title> - <para> - To delete a BC script, do the following: - </para> - <step> - <para> - In the <guilabel>BC Scripts</guilabel> tab, click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/trashicon.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>trash can</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon on the script you want to delete. A confirmation message appears. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>OK</guilabel> to delete this script or <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> to discard this action. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> - - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Advanced_Configuration-Manage_Locks"> - <title>Manage Locks</title> - <para> - All locked nodes are listed and managed by administrators in the <guilabel>Administration page</guilabel>. - </para> - <para> - There are two ways that administrators can unlock nodes: - </para> - <orderedlist> - <listitem> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/managescriptsform.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/managescriptsform.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <table> + <title>Manage Scripts Form</title> + + <tgroup cols="2"> + <thead> + <row> + <entry> + Field + </entry> + + <entry> + Details + </entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>ECM Scripts</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + These scripts are used in <emphasis role="bold">Site Publisher</emphasis>. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>BC Scripts</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + These scripts are used in <emphasis role="bold">Content Browser</emphasis>. + </entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_Scripts-Add_a_new_script_in_ECM"> + <title>Add a new script in ECM</title> + + <step> + <para> + Select the <guilabel>ECM Scripts</guilabel> tab in the <guilabel>Manage Scripts</guilabel> form. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Add</guilabel> button to open the <guilabel>Add/Edit script</guilabel> form: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/ecmaddeditscriptsform.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/ecmaddeditscriptsform.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter a value for the <guilabel>Script content</guilabel> field. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter a name in the <guilabel>Script name</guilabel> field. + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + The script name must be unique. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + The name must not contain special characters such as !,@,#,$,%,&amp;,*,(,). + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to adding the new script. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_Scripts-Edit_an_ECM_script"> + <title>Edit an ECM script</title> + <para> - The <guilabel>unlock nodes</guilabel> in the right-click menu of Content Explorer. + To edit an ECM script, do the following: </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> + + <step> + <para> + In the <guilabel>ECM Scripts</guilabel> tab, click the <guilabel>pencil</guilabel> icon that corresponds to the script that you want to edit. The <guilabel>Add/Edit script</guilabel> form will appear: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addeditscriptsform.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Edit the properties in this form. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to save all changes. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_Scripts-Delete_an_ECM_script"> + <title>Delete an ECM script</title> + <para> - <guilabel>Manage Locks</guilabel> in the <guilabel>Administration page.</guilabel> + To delete an ECM script, do the following: </para> - </listitem> - </orderedlist> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_Locks-Unlock_Nodes"> - <title>Manage Locks</title> - <step> - <para> - Go to <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Group</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Administration</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice> on the navigation bar. Then go to <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Advanced Configuration</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Manage Locks</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice>. + + <step> + <para> + In the <guilabel>ECM Scripts</guilabel> tab, click the <guilabel>trash can</guilabel> icon on the script that you want to delete. A confirmation message will appear. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>OK</guilabel> to delete this script or <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> to discard this action. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_Scripts-Add_a_BC_script"> + <title>Add a BC script</title> + + <para> + To add a BC script, do the following: + </para> + + <step> + <para> + In the <guilabel>Manage Scripts</guilabel>, select the <guilabel>BC Scripts</guilabel> tab. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/bcscriptstab.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/bcscriptstab.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Add</guilabel> to open the <guilabel>Add/Edit script</guilabel> form: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/bcaddeditscriptform.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/bcaddeditscriptform.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter the script in the <guilabel>Script content</guilabel> field. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter a name into the <guilabel>Name</guilabel> field. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to finish adding the new script. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_Scripts-Edit_a_BC_script"> + <title>Edit a BC script</title> + + <para> + To edit a BC script, do the following:: + </para> + + <step> + <para> + In the <guilabel>BC Script</guilabel> tab, click the <guilabel>pencil</guilabel> icon on a script that you want to edit. + </para> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Add/Edit script</guilabel> form will appear: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/bceditscriptform.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/bceditscriptform.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Edit the properties as required. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to accept all changes. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_Scripts-Delete_a_BC_script"> + <title>Delete a BC script</title> + + <para> + To delete a BC script, do the following: + </para> + + <step> + <para> + In the <guilabel>BC Scripts</guilabel> tab, click the <guilabel>trash can</guilabel> icon on the script you want to delete. A confirmation message appears. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>OK</guilabel> to delete this script or <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> to discard this action. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Advanced_Configuration-Manage_Locks"> + <title>Manage Locks</title> + + <para> + All locked nodes are listed and managed by administrators in the <guilabel>Administration page</guilabel>. </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/manageunlockstab.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/manageunlockstab.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - In the <guilabel>Locked Node</guilabel> tab on the right panel, administrators can unlock nodes by clicking the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/unlockicon.png" format="PNG" width="8mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>open lock</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon that corresponds to nodes which need to be unlocked. The unlocked nodes will disappear from the locked node list. - </para> - <para> - Administrators can manage and add the unlock permission for another group and users in the <guilabel>Manage Lock</guilabel> tab. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the group on the left-hand <guilabel>Select group</guilabel> panel and the corresponding membership on the right-hand <guilabel>Select membership</guilabel> panel. The selected group will be listed in the <guilabel>Group and Users</guilabel> column. However, administrators can also click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/blueplusicon.png" format="PNG" width="7mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>plus</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon if they want to allow any users to unlock nodes. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/manageunlocksform.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/manageunlocksform.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - To remove the unlock permission of groups, click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/trashicon.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>trash can</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon that corresponds to the group in order to remove them form the Unlock permission list except the group <filename>*:/platform/administrator</filename> and <literal>root</literal>. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Advanced_Configuration-Create_Action_Types"> - <title>Create Action Types</title> - <para> - This function allows managing of all action nodes in the <emphasis role="bold">Site Publisher</emphasis>. - </para> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Create_Action_Types-Create_an_Action_Type"> - <title>Create an Action Type</title> - <step> - <para> - Go to <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Group</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Administration</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice> on the navigation bar. Then go to <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Advanced Configuration</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Create an Action Type</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice>. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/createactiontypetab.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/createactiontypetab.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the <guilabel>Add</guilabel> button to open the <guilabel>Action Type Form</guilabel> form: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/createactiontypeform.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/createactiontypeform.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the action type. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter a name for the action. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Check or uncheck the <guilabel>is Action Move</guilabel> option: the action will have the <parameter>exo:move</parameter> property or not depending on the status of this switch. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select an execute for the <guilabel>Execute</guilabel> field. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/createactiontypeexecuteform.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/createactiontypeexecuteform.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="106mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - The <guilabel>Variables</guilabel> field allows creating multi-values for action. If you want to add more values for action, click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/blueplusicon.png" format="PNG" width="7mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>plus</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon. Alternatively, click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/trashicon.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>trash can</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon to delete a value. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to the new action type. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> -</section> \ No newline at end of file + + <para> + There are two ways that administrators can unlock nodes: + </para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + The <guilabel>unlock nodes</guilabel> in the right-click menu of Content Explorer. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + <guilabel>Manage Locks</guilabel> in the <guilabel>Administration page.</guilabel> + </para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_Locks-Unlock_Nodes"> + <title>Manage Locks</title> + + <step> + <para> + Go to <menuchoice> <guimenu>Group</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Administration</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> on the navigation bar. Then go to <menuchoice> <guimenu>Advanced Configuration</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Manage Locks</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/manageunlockstab.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/manageunlockstab.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + In the <guilabel>Locked Node</guilabel> tab on the right panel, administrators can unlock nodes by clicking the <guilabel>open lock</guilabel> icon that corresponds to nodes which need to be unlocked. The unlocked nodes will disappear from the locked node list. + </para> + + <para> + Administrators can manage and add the unlock permission for another group and users in the <guilabel>Manage Lock</guilabel> tab. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select the group on the left-hand <guilabel>Select group</guilabel> panel and the corresponding membership on the right-hand <guilabel>Select membership</guilabel> panel. The selected group will be listed in the <guilabel>Group and Users</guilabel> column. However, administrators can also click the <guilabel>plus</guilabel> icon if they want to allow any users to unlock nodes. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/manageunlocksform.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/manageunlocksform.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + To remove the unlock permission of groups, click the <guilabel>trash can</guilabel> icon that corresponds to the group in order to remove them form the Unlock permission list except the group <filename>*:/platform/administrator</filename> and <literal>root</literal>. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Advanced_Configuration-Create_Action_Types"> + <title>Create Action Types</title> + + <para> + This function allows managing of all action nodes in the <emphasis role="bold">Site Publisher</emphasis>. + </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Create_Action_Types-Create_an_Action_Type"> + <title>Create an Action Type</title> + + <step> + <para> + Go to <menuchoice> <guimenu>Group</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Administration</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> on the navigation bar. Then go to <menuchoice> <guimenu>Advanced Configuration</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Create an Action Type</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/createactiontypetab.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/createactiontypetab.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Add</guilabel> button to open the <guilabel>Action Type Form</guilabel> form: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/createactiontypeform.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/createactiontypeform.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select the action type. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter a name for the action. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Check or uncheck the <guilabel>is Action Move</guilabel> option: the action will have the <parameter>exo:move</parameter> property or not depending on the status of this switch. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select an execute for the <guilabel>Execute</guilabel> field. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/createactiontypeexecuteform.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/createactiontypeexecuteform.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="106mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + The <guilabel>Variables</guilabel> field allows creating multi-values for action. If you want to add more values for action, click the <guilabel>trash can</guilabel> icon to delete a value. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to the new action type. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + </section> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Advanced/Administration/Ontology.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Advanced/Administration/Ontology.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Advanced/Administration/Ontology.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -4,557 +4,536 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "../../../User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<section id="sect-User_Guide-Categories_and_Tags"> - <title>Categories and Tags</title> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Categories_and_Tags-Manage_Tags"> - <title>Manage Tags</title> - <para> - The <emphasis>Manage Tags</emphasis> form allows you to manage tag styles (the appearance of tags in visual representations). A tag's style changes depending on the number of documents with that tag. - </para> - <para> - Go to <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Group</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Administration</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice> then click on <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Categories and Tags</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Manage Tags</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice>. - </para> - <para> - From this page you can add new tags styles or edit existing styles. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/manage_tags.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/manage_tags.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Tags-Add_a_tag_style"> - <title>Add a tag style</title> - <para> - To add a new tag style, do the following: - </para> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_tag_style-Add_a_Tag_Style"> - <title>Add a Tag Style</title> - <step> - <para> - Click the <guibutton>Add style</guibutton> button. The <guibutton>Add tag style configuration</guibutton> form will appear: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/editstyletagconfig.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/editstyletagconfig.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <table> - <title></title> - <tgroup cols="2"> - <thead> - <row> - <entry> - Field - </entry> - <entry> - Details - </entry> - </row> - </thead> - <tbody> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Style name</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry> - Give the tag name. You cannot edit it. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Document Range</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry> - Give the number of documents that must have this tag for this style to apply. The asterix (*) indicates this is a required value. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>HTML style</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry> - Include settings for the font-size, font-weight, color, font-family and text-decoration. The asterix (*) indicates this is a required value. - </entry> - </row> - </tbody> - </tgroup> - </table> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Input values in the fields: <guilabel>Style name</guilabel>, <guilabel>Document range</guilabel>, <guilabel>HTML style</guilabel>, all of which are required. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Update</guilabel> to accept adding a new tag style.</para> - </step> - </procedure> - <note> - <title>Note</title> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Categories_and_Tags"> + <title>Categories and Tags</title> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Categories_and_Tags-Manage_Tags"> + <title>Manage Tags</title> + + <para> + The <emphasis>Manage Tags</emphasis> form allows you to manage tag styles (the appearance of tags in visual representations). A tag's style changes depending on the number of documents with that tag. + </para> + + <para> + Go to <menuchoice> <guimenu>Group</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Administration</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> then click on <menuchoice> <guimenu>Categories and Tags</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Manage Tags</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>. + </para> + + <para> + From this page you can add new tags styles or edit existing styles. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/manage_tags.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/manage_tags.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Tags-Add_a_tag_style"> + <title>Add a tag style</title> + <para> - The format of valid range must be: <replaceable>a</replaceable>..<replaceable>b</replaceable> where <replaceable>a</replaceable>, <replaceable>b</replaceable> are positive integers. You can use <parameter>*</parameter> instead of<replaceable>b</replaceable> to indicate it is unlimited. - </para> - <para> - For example; <emphasis>0..2</emphasis> means that 0, one or two documents must be assigned to a tag for this style to apply while <emphasis>10..*</emphasis> means at least ten documents (with no upper limit) must be assigned for the style to take effect. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> + To add a new tag style, do the following: + </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_tag_style-Add_a_Tag_Style"> + <title>Add a Tag Style</title> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guibutton>Add style</guibutton> button. The <guibutton>Add tag style configuration</guibutton> form will appear: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/editstyletagconfig.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/editstyletagconfig.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <table> + <title></title> + + <tgroup cols="2"> + <thead> + <row> + <entry> + Field + </entry> + + <entry> + Details + </entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Style name</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + Give the tag name. You cannot edit it. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Document Range</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + Give the number of documents that must have this tag for this style to apply. The asterix (*) indicates this is a required value. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>HTML style</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + Include settings for the font-size, font-weight, color, font-family and text-decoration. The asterix (*) indicates this is a required value. + </entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Input values in the fields: <guilabel>Style name</guilabel>, <guilabel>Document range</guilabel>, <guilabel>HTML style</guilabel>, all of which are required. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Update</guilabel> to accept adding a new tag style. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <note> + <title>Note</title> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + The format of valid range must be: <replaceable>a</replaceable>..<replaceable>b</replaceable> where <replaceable>a</replaceable>, <replaceable>b</replaceable> are positive integers. You can use <parameter>*</parameter> instead of<replaceable>b</replaceable> to indicate it is unlimited. + </para> + + <para> + For example; <emphasis>0..2</emphasis> means that 0, one or two documents must be assigned to a tag for this style to apply while <emphasis>10..*</emphasis> means at least ten documents (with no upper limit) must be assigned for the style to take effect. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + The <guilabel>HTML style</guilabel> text box cannot be empty: you can change values of font-size, font–weight, color, font-family, text-decoration. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </note> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Tags-Edit"> + <title>Edit</title> + <para> - The <guilabel>HTML style</guilabel> text box cannot be empty: you can change values of font-size, font–weight, color, font-family, text-decoration. - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - </note> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Tags-Edit"> - <title>Edit</title> - <para> - To edit the existing tags do the following: - </para> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Edit-Editing_existing_tabs"> - <title>Editing existing tabs</title> - <step> - <para> - Click the pencil icon corresponding to the tag name which you want to edit in the <guilabel>Action</guilabel> column. The <guilabel>Edit tag style configuration</guilabel> form appears like the form to add a tag style. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Change values in the fields <guimenu>Document range</guimenu> and <guimenu>HTML style</guimenu>. Do not change the <guimenu>Style name</guimenu> field, as you are editing an <emphasis>existing</emphasis> tag. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guimenu>Update</guimenu> to save any changes. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Tags-Delete_a_tag_style"> - <title>Delete a tag style</title> - <para> - To delete a tag style: - </para> - <procedure> - <title></title> + To edit the existing tags do the following: + </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Edit-Editing_existing_tabs"> + <title>Editing existing tabs</title> + <step> <para> + Click the pencil icon corresponding to the tag name which you want to edit in the <guilabel>Action</guilabel> column. The <guilabel>Edit tag style configuration</guilabel> form appears like the form to add a tag style. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Change values in the fields <guimenu>Document range</guimenu> and <guimenu>HTML style</guimenu>. Do not change the <guimenu>Style name</guimenu> field, as you are editing an <emphasis>existing</emphasis> tag. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guimenu>Update</guimenu> to save any changes. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Tags-Delete_a_tag_style"> + <title>Delete a tag style</title> + + <para> + To delete a tag style: + </para> + + <procedure> + <title></title> + + <step> + <para> Click the corresponding trash icon, </para> </step> + <step> <para> Click <guilabel>OK</guilabel> in the confirmation message to confirm the deletion. </para> </step> - </procedure> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/confirmdeletion.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/confirmdeletion.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="101mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Tags-Tag_Permission_Manager"> - <title>Tag Permission Manager</title> - <para> - The <guilabel>Tag permission manager</guilabel> tab helps you set permissions regarding editing and deleting public tags. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/tagpermissionmanager.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/tagpermissionmanager.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Tag_Permission_Manager-Set_Permission_To_Tag_Management"> - <title>Set Permission To Tag Management</title> - <step> - <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/userpermissionbutton.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Select user</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon beside the <guilabel>Memberships</guilabel> field to select memberships in order to add a permission for those memberships. The Select membership form will appear: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/selectmembership.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/selectmembership.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="146mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select a group on the left and the corresponding membership on the right. The selected membership will appear in the <guilabel>Memberships</guilabel> field: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/memberships.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/memberships.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guibutton>Save</guibutton> to add a permission for the membership to the <guilabel>Memberships</guilabel> column. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/managemembership.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/managemembership.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - To delete memberships permissions: - </para> - <procedure> - <title></title> + </procedure> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/confirmdeletion.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/confirmdeletion.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="101mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Tags-Tag_Permission_Manager"> + <title>Tag Permission Manager</title> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Tag permission manager</guilabel> tab helps you set permissions regarding editing and deleting public tags. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/tagpermissionmanager.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/tagpermissionmanager.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Tag_Permission_Manager-Set_Permission_To_Tag_Management"> + <title>Set Permission To Tag Management</title> + <step> <para> - Click the trash icon corresponding to that membership. + Click the <guilabel>Select user</guilabel> icon beside the <guilabel>Memberships</guilabel> field to select memberships in order to add a permission for those memberships. The Select membership form will appear: </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/selectmembership.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/selectmembership.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="146mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> + <step> <para> - Click <guilabel>OK</guilabel> in the confirmation message. + Select a group on the left and the corresponding membership on the right. The selected membership will appear in the <guilabel>Memberships</guilabel> field: </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/memberships.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/memberships.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guibutton>Save</guibutton> to add a permission for the membership to the <guilabel>Memberships</guilabel> column. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/managemembership.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/managemembership.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + To delete memberships permissions: + </para> + + <procedure> + <title></title> + + <step> + <para> + Click the trash icon corresponding to that membership. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>OK</guilabel> in the confirmation message. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/accept_delete.png" format="PNG" width="104mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Categories_and_Tags-Manage_Taxonomy"> + <title>Manage Categories</title> + + <para> + Category management can be understood as a classification practice. Categories are used to sort documents, so as to facilitate effective searches. + </para> + + <para> + In this section, the concept of categorization and classification will be referred to with the term <emphasis>taxonomy</emphasis>. + </para> + + <para> + The Site Publisher category management system includes adding, editing and deleting a taxonomy tree. + </para> + + <para> + Go to <menuchoice> <guimenu>Group</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Administration</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> then click on <menuchoice> <guimenu>Categories and Tags</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Manage Categories</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>. + </para> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Manage Categories</guilabel> form appears. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/manage_taxonomy_trees.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/manage_taxonomy_trees.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Categories_and_Tags-Add_a_Taxonomy_Tree"> + <title>Add a Taxonomy Tree</title> + + <para> + Perform the steps in <xref linkend="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_Taxonomy_Tree-Adding_a_Taxonomy_Tree"/> to add a taxonomy tree. + </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_Taxonomy_Tree-Adding_a_Taxonomy_Tree"> + <title>Add a Category Tree</title> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guibutton>Add Category Tree</guibutton> button to add a new category. The <guilabel>Add taxonomy tree</guilabel> form will appear. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/add_category_tree.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/add_category_tree.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter a name for the tree in the <guilabel>Name</guilabel> field. The asterix (*) denotes this as a required field. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select the workspace you want to work with. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select the home path by clicking the plus icon. The <guibutton>Select Home Path</guibutton> form will appear: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/select_home_path.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/select_home_path.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the tick icon if you want to select the root path or click the arrow icon to go to the up level path. Click the plus sign to expand the folder. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the tick icon corresponding to the path that you want to select as a home path. + </para> + + <para> + Click <guimenu>Reset</guimenu> if you want to reset values that have just been selected or <guimenu>Next</guimenu> to select permissions for a taxonomy tree. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/taxonomy_permissions.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/taxonomy_permissions.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Select everyone</guilabel> icon to select everyone in order to set permissions. The user or membership that you have selected will be displayed in the <guilabel>User or Group</guilabel> field. + </para> + + <para> + Then, check at least one of the options below to set rights for the selected user to membership: + </para> + + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>Read Right</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + The option is to select the <emphasis>Read</emphasis> right or not. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Add Note Right</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + The option is to select the <emphasis>Add Node</emphasis> right or not. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Set Property Right</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + The option is to select the <emphasis>Set Property</emphasis> right or not. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Remove Right</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + The option is to select the <emphasis>Remove</emphasis> right or not. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guibutton>Save</guibutton> to save all values, or <guibutton>Reset</guibutton> to change values that have just been set. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + After clicking <guibutton>Save</guibutton>, click <guibutton>Next</guibutton> to go to the next step. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/action_gimme.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/action_gimme.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter the name for an action of the taxonomy tree in the Name field. This is a required (*) value. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select values for <guilabel>Life-cycle</guilabel>, <guilabel>NodeTypes</guilabel>, <guilabel>Target workspace</guilabel>, <guilabel>Target path</guilabel>, <guilabel>Affected Node Types</guilabel>. These fields are required (*). + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guibutton>Save</guibutton> to save all values and click <guibutton>Next</guibutton> to go to the next step. + </para> + </step> </procedure> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/accept_delete.png" format="PNG" width="104mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Categories_and_Tags-Manage_Taxonomy"> - <title>Manage Categories</title> - <para> - Category management can be understood as a classification practice. Categories are used to sort documents, so as to facilitate effective searches. - </para> - <para> - In this section, the concept of categorization and classification will be referred to with the term <emphasis>taxonomy</emphasis>. - </para> - <para> - The Site Publisher category management system includes adding, editing and deleting a taxonomy tree. - </para> - <para> - Go to <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Group</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Administration</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice> then click on <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Categories and Tags</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Manage Categories</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice>. - </para> - <para> - The <guilabel>Manage Categories</guilabel> form appears. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/manage_taxonomy_trees.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/manage_taxonomy_trees.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Categories_and_Tags-Add_a_Taxonomy_Tree"> - <title>Add a Taxonomy Tree</title> - <para> - Perform the steps in <xref linkend="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_Taxonomy_Tree-Adding_a_Taxonomy_Tree"/> to add a taxonomy tree. - </para> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_Taxonomy_Tree-Adding_a_Taxonomy_Tree"> - <title>Add a Category Tree</title> - <step> - <para> - Click the <guibutton>Add Category Tree</guibutton> button to add a new category. The <guilabel>Add taxonomy tree</guilabel> form will appear. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/add_category_tree.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/add_category_tree.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter a name for the tree in the <guilabel>Name</guilabel> field. The asterix (*) denotes this as a required field. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the workspace you want to work with. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the home path by clicking the plus icon. The <guibutton>Select Home Path</guibutton> form will appear: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/select_home_path.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/select_home_path.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the tick icon if you want to select the root path or click the arrow icon to go to the up level path. Click the plus sign to expand the folder. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the tick icon corresponding to the path that you want to select as a home path. - </para> - <para> - Click <guimenu>Reset</guimenu> if you want to reset values that have just been selected or <guimenu>Next</guimenu> to select permissions for a taxonomy tree. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/taxonomy_permissions.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/taxonomy_permissions.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/usericon.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Select user</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon to select a user, the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/grouppermission.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Select memberships</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon to select memberships or the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/alluserpermission.png" format="PNG" width="7mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Select everyone</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon to select everyone in order to set permissions. The user or membership that you have selected will be displayed in the <guilabel>User or Group</guilabel> field. - </para> - <para> - Then, check at least one of the options below to set rights for the selected user to membership: - </para> - <variablelist> - <varlistentry> - <term>Read Right</term> - <listitem> - <para> - The option is to select the <emphasis>Read</emphasis> right or not. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>Add Note Right</term> - <listitem> - <para> - The option is to select the <emphasis>Add Node</emphasis> right or not. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>Set Property Right</term> - <listitem> - <para> - The option is to select the <emphasis>Set Property</emphasis> right or not. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>Remove Right</term> - <listitem> - <para> - The option is to select the <emphasis>Remove</emphasis> right or not. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - </variablelist> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guibutton>Save</guibutton> to save all values, or <guibutton>Reset</guibutton> to change values that have just been set. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - After clicking <guibutton>Save</guibutton>, click <guibutton>Next</guibutton> to go to the next step. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/action_gimme.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/action_gimme.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter the name for an action of the taxonomy tree in the Name field. This is a required (*) value. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select values for <guilabel>Life-cycle</guilabel>, <guilabel>NodeTypes</guilabel>, <guilabel>Target workspace</guilabel>, <guilabel>Target path</guilabel>, <guilabel>Affected Node Types</guilabel>. These fields are required (*). - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guibutton>Save</guibutton> to save all values and click <guibutton>Next</guibutton> to go to the next step. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - <note> - <title>Considerations</title> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - Do not use the following special characters in the <guilabel>Name</guilabel> field like: !,@,#,$,%,&amp;,*,(,). - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - Do not add a taxonomy which has the same name and level with existing taxonomies in a node. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - The taxonomy name must contain fewer than thirty (30) characters. - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - </note> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Categories_and_Tags-Edit_a_Taxonomy_Tree"> - <title>Edit a Taxonomy Tree</title> - <para> - To edit a taxonomy tree: - </para> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Edit_a_Taxonomy_Tree-Edit_a_Taxonomy_Tree"> - <title>Edit a Taxonomy Tree</title> - <step> - <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/editicon4.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>pencil</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon that corresponds to the taxonomy tree you want to edit. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/edittaxonomytree.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/edittaxonomytree.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/blueplusicon.png" format="PNG" width="7mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>plus</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon in the <guilabel>Action</guilabel> field to add more taxonomy trees. The Edit taxonomy tree will appear: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/edittaxonomytree2.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/edittaxonomytree2.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter a taxonomy name in the Taxonomy name field. This field is required (*). - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guibutton>Save</guibutton>to save the taxonomy name. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> to return to the previous steps. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guibutton>Save</guibutton> to save all changes and the <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> or <guibutton>Next</guibutton> if you want to edit more. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - <note> - <title>Considerations</title> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - You can delete a taxonomy by clicking the trash icon corresponding to the taxonomy that you want to delete. Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> on the confirmation message to accept deleting this taxonomy, or click Cancel to discard this action. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - You cannot delete taxonomies that have been referenced. - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - </note> - </section> -</section> + + <note> + <title>Considerations</title> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + Do not use the following special characters in the <guilabel>Name</guilabel> field like: !,@,#,$,%,&amp;,*,(,). + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + Do not add a taxonomy which has the same name and level with existing taxonomies in a node. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + The taxonomy name must contain fewer than thirty (30) characters. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </note> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Categories_and_Tags-Edit_a_Taxonomy_Tree"> + <title>Edit a Taxonomy Tree</title> + + <para> + To edit a taxonomy tree: + </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Edit_a_Taxonomy_Tree-Edit_a_Taxonomy_Tree"> + <title>Edit a Taxonomy Tree</title> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>pencil</guilabel> icon that corresponds to the taxonomy tree you want to edit. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/edittaxonomytree.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/edittaxonomytree.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>plus</guilabel> icon in the <guilabel>Action</guilabel> field to add more taxonomy trees. The Edit taxonomy tree will appear: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/edittaxonomytree2.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/edittaxonomytree2.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter a taxonomy name in the Taxonomy name field. This field is required (*). + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guibutton>Save</guibutton>to save the taxonomy name. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> to return to the previous steps. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guibutton>Save</guibutton> to save all changes and the <guibutton>Previous</guibutton> or <guibutton>Next</guibutton> if you want to edit more. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <note> + <title>Considerations</title> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + You can delete a taxonomy by clicking the trash icon corresponding to the taxonomy that you want to delete. Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> on the confirmation message to accept deleting this taxonomy, or click Cancel to discard this action. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + You cannot delete taxonomies that have been referenced. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </note> + </section> + </section> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Advanced/Administration/Presentation.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Advanced/Administration/Presentation.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Advanced/Administration/Presentation.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -3,1147 +3,1055 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "../../../User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<section id="sect-User_Guide-Content_Presentation_Manager"> + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Content_Presentation_Manager"> <!-- This document was created with Syntext Serna Free. --> - <title>Content Presentation Manager</title> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Content_Presentation_Manager-Manage_a_Template"> - <title>Manage a Template</title> - <para> - When creating a node in Site Publisher, you must set its properties. Therefore, each node needs to have a form to enter data for their properties (called the <systemitem>dialog template</systemitem>), and display the existing values (called the <systemitem>view template</systemitem>). - </para> - <para> - The <emphasis>Template Management</emphasis> system allows users to view, delete or modify the predefined templates or to add a new template. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/manage_templates_form.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/manage_templates_form.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_a_Template-Add_a_New_Template"> - <title>Add a New Template</title> - <step> - <para> - Go to <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Group</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Administration</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice> then click <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Content Presentation</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Manage Templates</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice>. - </para> - </step> - <step id="step-User_Guide-Add_a_New_Template-Open_a_new_template_form"> - <para> - Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button in the <guilabel>Manage Templates</guilabel> form to open the <guilabel>Template</guilabel> form. - </para> - </step> - <step id="step-User_Guide-Add_a_New_Template-Select_the_template_type"> - <para> - Select the template type you require from the <guilabel>Name</guilabel> drop-down menu. - </para> - </step> - <step id="step-User_Guide-Add_a_New_Template-Label_the_template"> - <para> - Specify a name for the template in the <guilabel>Label</guilabel> field. - </para> - </step> - <step id="step-User_Guide-Add_a_New_Template-Specify_whether_the_template_is_a_document_template"> - <para> - Click the <guibutton>Document Template</guibutton> check box if the template you are creating should be used as a template for a document. - </para> - </step> - <step id="step-User_Guide-Add_a_New_Template-Open_Permissions_dialog."> - <para> - Click the icon next to the <guilabel>Permissions</guilabel> field to open the <guilabel>Select Permission</guilabel> dialog. - </para> - </step> - <step id="step-User_Guide-Add_a_New_Template-Assign_memberships_to_the_group"> - <para> - Select a group from the left panel and the membership from the right panel. Alternatively you can set permission for everyone by clicking the icon next to <guilabel>Any Permission</guilabel> - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/img-Select_Permissions_Dialog.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/img-Select_Permissions_Dialog.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="146mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step id="step-User_Guide-Add_a_New_Template-Add_dialog_content"> - <para> - Select the <guilabel>Dialog</guilabel> tab and enter the value in the <guilabel>Dialog content</guilabel> field. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/img-Template_Form_Dialog_Content.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/img-Template_Form_Dialog_Content.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step id="step-User_Guide-Add_a_New_Template-Add_view_content"> - <para> - Select the <guilabel>View</guilabel> tab and enter the value in the <guilabel>Dialog content</guilabel> field. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/img-Template_Form_View_Content.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/img-Template_Form_View_Content.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step performance="optional" id="step-User_Guide-Add_a_New_Template-Add_CSS_content"> - <para> - Select the <guilabel>CSS</guilabel> tab and enter the value in the <guilabel>Dialog content</guilabel> field. - </para> - </step> - <step id="step-User_Guide-Add_a_New_Template-Save_template"> - <para> - Click the <guibutton>Save</guibutton> button to create the template. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_a_Template-Edit_a_Template"> - <title>Edit a Template</title> - <step id="step-User_Guide-Edit_a_Template-Go_to_the_Manage_Templates_form"> - <para> - Go to <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Group</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Administration</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice> then click on <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Content Presentation</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Manage Templates</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice>. - </para> - </step> - <step id="step-User_Guide-Edit_a_Template-Open_the_View_and_Edit_Template_form"> - <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/editicon4.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>pencil</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon in the Action column corresponding to the template you want to edit. - </para> - </step> - <step id="step-User_Guide-Edit_a_Template-Edit_the_Template_tab"> - <para> - In the <guilabel>Template</guilabel> tab, you can edit the <guilabel>Label</guilabel> of the <guilabel>Template</guilabel>. - </para> - </step> - <step performance="optional" id="step-User_Guide-Edit_a_Template-Add_a_dialog_to_the_Dialog_tab"> - <para> - To add a dialog, do the following: - </para> - <substeps> - <step> - <para> - Enter content for this dialog in the <guilabel>Content</guilabel> field. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter a name for this dialog. This value is required (*). - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select permissions for a group that can use this dialog. This value is required (*). - </para> - </step> - </substeps> - </step> - <step performance="optional" id="step-User_Guide-Edit_a_Template-Edit_an_existing_dialog_in_the_Dialog_tab"> - <para> - To edit an existing dialog, do the following: - </para> - <substeps> - <step> - <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/editicon4.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>pencil</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon in the dialog row you want to edit. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Edit the dialog properties. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guibutton>Save</guibutton> to accept all changes in the Dialog tab. - </para> - </step> - </substeps> - </step> - <step performance="optional" id="step-User_Guide-Edit_a_Template-Delete_an_existing_dialog"> - <para> - To delete an existing dialog, do the following: - </para> - <substeps> - <step> - <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/trashicon.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>trash can</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon in the dialog row you want to edit. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click OK to continue with deletion. - </para> - </step> - </substeps> - <note> - <para> - You cannot delete the default dialog. You must create a new one before you can delete the current default dialog. - </para> - </note> - </step> - <step performance="optional" id="step-User_Guide-Edit_a_Template-Add_a_View_to_the_view_tab"> - <para> - To add a view, do the following: - </para> - <substeps> - <step> - <para> - Click the View tab and enter content into the content field. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter a name for this view. This field is required (*). - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select permissions for a group that can use this view. This field is required (*). - </para> - </step> - </substeps> - </step> - <step performance="optional" id="step-User_Guide-Edit_a_Template-Edit_an_existing_view_in_the_View_tab"> - <para> - To edit an existing view, do the following: - </para> - <substeps> - <step> - <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/editicon4.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>pencil</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon in the view row you want to edit. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Edit the view properties. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guibutton>Save</guibutton> to accept all changes in the View tab. - </para> - </step> - </substeps> - <note> - <title>Notes about Editing Views</title> - <para> - You cannot change the view name. - </para> - <para> - If you click <guilabel>Enable Version</guilabel> checkbox, this view automatically increments one version after you click <guibutton>Save</guibutton>. It is displayed at <guilabel>version</guilabel> column in the <guilabel>View</guilabel> tab. - </para> - <para> - If the dialog has at least two versions, in the <guilabel>View</guilabel> tab, it displays the <guibutton>Restore</guibutton> button. You can use <guibutton>Restore</guibutton> to roll back to the previous View. - </para> - </note> - </step> - <step performance="optional" id="step-User_Guide-Edit_a_Template-Delete_an_existing_dialog_in_the_Dialog_tab"> - <para> - To delete an existing dialog, do the following: - </para> - <substeps> - <step> - <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/trashicon.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>trash can</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon in the dialog row you want to edit. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to continue with deletion. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guibutton>Save</guibutton> to accept all changes. - </para> - </step> - </substeps> - </step> - </procedure> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_a_Template-Delete_a_Template"> - <title>Delete a Template</title> - <step> - <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/trashicon.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>trash can</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> corresponding to the template that you want to discard. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>OK</guilabel> on the confirmation message to delete the template or <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> to abort the operation. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Content_Presentation_Manager-Metadata_Management"> - <title>Metadata Management</title> - <para> - Metadata in its simplest form is &quot;data about data&quot;. Generally, it may be understood as information that describes, or supplements the central data. - </para> - <para> - Metadata management allows managing nodes in the metadata format in the Site Publisher system. The metadata may be considered as information used to describe the data. When data are provided to the end users, the metadata allow users to understand about information in more details. All metadata nodes can combine with other nodes to create a new node (add mix). - </para> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Metadata_Management-View_Metadata"> - <title>View Metadata</title> - <step id="step-User_Guide-View_Metadata-Go_to_the_Manage_Metadata_form"> - <para> - Go to <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Group</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Administration</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice> then click <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Content Presentation</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Manage Metadata</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice>. - </para> - </step> - <step id="step-User_Guide-View_Metadata-Open_the_Metadata_Information_form"> - <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/magnifyingglassicon.png" format="PNG" width="7mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>magnifying glass</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon corresponding to the metadata you want to view. - </para> - <para> - The <guilabel>Metadata Information</guilabel> Form opens. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/img-Metadata_Form.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/img-Metadata_Form.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - </procedure> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Metadata_Management-Edit_Metadata"> - <title>Edit Metadata</title> - <step id="step-User_Guide-Edit_Metadata-Open_the_Edit_Metadatas_Template_form"> - <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/editicon4.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>pencil</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon in the metadata row you want to edit. - </para> - <para> - The <guilabel>Edit Metadata&apos;s Template</guilabel> form opens. - </para> - </step> - <step id="step-User_Guide-Edit_Metadata-Change_the_properties"> - <para> - Change the required properties of the metadata. - </para> - <note> - <title>Metadata Name</title> - <para> - You cannot edit the metadata name. - </para> - </note> - </step> - <step id="step-User_Guide-Edit_Metadata-Save_changes"> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Apply</guilabel> to save all metadata changes. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Metadata_Management-Delete_Metadata"> - <title>Delete Metadata</title> - <step id="step-User_Guide-Delete_Metadata-Click_the_Trash_Can_button"> - <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/trashicon.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>trash can</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon corresponding to the metadata you want to delete. - </para> - <para> - A confirmation message appears. - </para> - </step> - <step id="step-User_Guide-Delete_Metadata-Confirm_deletion"> - <para> - Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to delete the template, or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to preserve the template. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Content_Presentation_Manager-Manage_Views"> - <title>Manage Views</title> - <para> - The <emphasis>Manage Views</emphasis> function is used to control view ways of a user. It has two tabs: <guilabel>View</guilabel> and <guilabel>ECM Templates</guilabel>. - </para> - <para> - To open the <emphasis role="bold">Manage View</emphasis> function, go to <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Group</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Administration</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice> then click on <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Content Presentation</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Manage View</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice>. The <guilabel>Manage View</guilabel> form opens. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/img-Manage_Views_Form.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/img-Manage_Views_Form.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <formalpara id="form-User_Guide-Manage_Views-Views_Tab"> - <title>Views Tab</title> - <para> - On the <guilabel>Views</guilabel> tab you can add, edit, delete or preview views. - </para> - </formalpara> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_Views-Add_View"> - <title>Add View</title> - <step id="step-User_Guide-Add_View-Open_the_Add_View_form"> - <para> - Click the <guibutton>Add View</guibutton> button located at the bottom of the <guilabel>Manage View</guilabel> form. - </para> - <para> - The <guilabel>Add View</guilabel> form opens. - </para> - </step> - <step id="step-User_Guide-Add_View-Define_View_Name"> - <para> - Specify the name of the view you are creating in the <guilabel>Name</guilabel> field. The name must be unique, and must only contain standard alphanumeric characters. - </para> - </step> - <step id="step-User_Guide-Add_View-Assign_memberships_to_the_group"> - <para> - Select the group from the left panel and the membership from the right panel. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/img-Select_Permissions_Dialog.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/img-Select_Permissions_Dialog.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="146mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step id="step-User_Guide-Add_View-Select_the_Templates_view"> - <para> - Click the <guilabel>Templates</guilabel> field and select the correct template for this view. - </para> - </step> - <step id="step-User_Guide-Add_View-Save_the_View"> - <para> - Click <guibutton>Save</guibutton> to apply all settings and close the form. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_Views-Edit_a_View"> - <title>Edit a View</title> - <step> - <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/editicon4.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>pencil</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon in the view row you want to edit. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Edit the view properties. - </para> - <note> - <title>Notes about Editing Views</title> - <para> - You cannot change the view name. - </para> - <para> - If you click the <guilabel>Enable Version</guilabel> checkbox, this view automatically increments one version after you click <guibutton>Save</guibutton>. It is displayed at <guilabel>version</guilabel> column in the <guilabel>View</guilabel> tab. - </para> - <para> - If the dialog has at least two versions, in the <guilabel>View</guilabel> tab, it displays the <guibutton>Restore</guibutton> button. You can use <guibutton>Restore</guibutton> to roll back to the previous View. - </para> - </note> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the <guibutton>Add Tab</guibutton> button to open the <guilabel>Tab Form</guilabel> tab to add more tabs. - </para> - <substeps> - <step performance="optional"> - <para> - Click the <guibutton>Add Tab</guibutton> button to add more tabs after the initial tab has been added. - </para> - </step> - <step performance="optional"> - <para> - Click the <guibutton>Reset</guibutton> button to apply changes. - </para> - </step> - <step performance="optional"> - <para> - Click the <guibutton>Back</guibutton> button to return to the <guilabel>View Form</guilabel> tab in the <guilabel>Edit View</guilabel> form. - </para> - </step> - </substeps> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guibutton>Save</guibutton> to apply all changes in the View tab. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_Views-Delete_Views"> - <title>Delete Views</title> - <step id="step-User_Guide-Delete_Views-Click_the_Trash_Can_button"> - <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/trashicon.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>trash can</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon corresponding to the view you want to delete. - </para> - <para> - A confirmation message is displayed. - </para> - </step> - <step id="step-User_Guide-Delete_Views-Confirm_deletion"> - <para> - Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to delete the view. - </para> - <note> - <title>Deleting the Current View</title> - <para> - You cannot delete a view that is currently in use. - </para> - </note> - </step> - </procedure> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_Views-Preview_a_View"> - <title>Preview a View</title> - <step> - <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/magnifyingglassicon.png" format="PNG" width="7mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>magnifying glass</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon in the <guilabel>Action</guilabel> column of the view you want to preview. - </para> - <para> - The <guilabel>View Form</guilabel> opens: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/img-View_Form.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/img-View_Form.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Close</guilabel> to exit the <guilabel>View Form</guilabel>. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Views-ECM_Templates"> - <title>ECM Templates</title> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/ecmtemplates.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/ecmtemplates.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-ECM_Templates-Add_a_new_ECM_Template"> - <title>Add a new ECM Template</title> - <step> - <para> - Select the <guilabel>ECM Templates</guilabel> tab. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button to open the <guilabel>Add ECM Template</guilabel> form. - </para> + <title>Content Presentation Manager</title> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Content_Presentation_Manager-Manage_a_Template"> + <title>Manage a Template</title> + + <para> + When creating a node in Site Publisher, you must set its properties. Therefore, each node needs to have a form to enter data for their properties (called the <systemitem>dialog template</systemitem>), and display the existing values (called the <systemitem>view template</systemitem>). + </para> + + <para> + The <emphasis>Template Management</emphasis> system allows users to view, delete or modify the predefined templates or to add a new template. + </para> + <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/addecmtemplate.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/addecmtemplate.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/manage_templates_form.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/manage_templates_form.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter the content of the template in the <guilabel>Content</guilabel> field. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter a name for the template in the <guilabel>Name</guilabel> field. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select a type for the template in the <guilabel>Template Type</guilabel> field. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guibutton>Save</guibutton> to accept adding a new template, or click <guibutton>Reset</guibutton> to change values, or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to quit without any changes. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-ECM_Templates-Editing_a_Template"> - <title>Edit a Template</title> - <step> - <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/editicon4.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>pencil</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon next to the template you want to edit. - </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_a_Template-Add_a_New_Template"> + <title>Add a New Template</title> + + <step> + <para> + Go to <menuchoice> <guimenu>Group</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Administration</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> then click <menuchoice> <guimenu>Content Presentation</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Manage Templates</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>. + </para> + </step> + + <step id="step-User_Guide-Add_a_New_Template-Open_a_new_template_form"> + <para> + Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button in the <guilabel>Manage Templates</guilabel> form to open the <guilabel>Template</guilabel> form. + </para> + </step> + + <step id="step-User_Guide-Add_a_New_Template-Select_the_template_type"> + <para> + Select the template type you require from the <guilabel>Name</guilabel> drop-down menu. + </para> + </step> + + <step id="step-User_Guide-Add_a_New_Template-Label_the_template"> + <para> + Specify a name for the template in the <guilabel>Label</guilabel> field. + </para> + </step> + + <step id="step-User_Guide-Add_a_New_Template-Specify_whether_the_template_is_a_document_template"> + <para> + Click the <guibutton>Document Template</guibutton> check box if the template you are creating should be used as a template for a document. + </para> + </step> + + <step id="step-User_Guide-Add_a_New_Template-Open_Permissions_dialog."> + <para> + Click the icon next to the <guilabel>Permissions</guilabel> field to open the <guilabel>Select Permission</guilabel> dialog. + </para> + </step> + + <step id="step-User_Guide-Add_a_New_Template-Assign_memberships_to_the_group"> + <para> + Select a group from the left panel and the membership from the right panel. Alternatively you can set permission for everyone by clicking the icon next to <guilabel>Any Permission</guilabel> + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/img-Select_Permissions_Dialog.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/img-Select_Permissions_Dialog.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="146mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step id="step-User_Guide-Add_a_New_Template-Add_dialog_content"> + <para> + Select the <guilabel>Dialog</guilabel> tab and enter the value in the <guilabel>Dialog content</guilabel> field. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/img-Template_Form_Dialog_Content.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/img-Template_Form_Dialog_Content.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step id="step-User_Guide-Add_a_New_Template-Add_view_content"> + <para> + Select the <guilabel>View</guilabel> tab and enter the value in the <guilabel>Dialog content</guilabel> field. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/img-Template_Form_View_Content.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/img-Template_Form_View_Content.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step performance="optional" id="step-User_Guide-Add_a_New_Template-Add_CSS_content"> + <para> + Select the <guilabel>CSS</guilabel> tab and enter the value in the <guilabel>Dialog content</guilabel> field. + </para> + </step> + + <step id="step-User_Guide-Add_a_New_Template-Save_template"> + <para> + Click the <guibutton>Save</guibutton> button to create the template. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_a_Template-Edit_a_Template"> + <title>Edit a Template</title> + + <step id="step-User_Guide-Edit_a_Template-Go_to_the_Manage_Templates_form"> + <para> + Go to <menuchoice> <guimenu>Group</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Administration</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> then click on <menuchoice> <guimenu>Content Presentation</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Manage Templates</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>. + </para> + </step> + + <step id="step-User_Guide-Edit_a_Template-Open_the_View_and_Edit_Template_form"> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>pencil</guilabel> icon in the Action column corresponding to the template you want to edit. + </para> + </step> + + <step id="step-User_Guide-Edit_a_Template-Edit_the_Template_tab"> + <para> + In the <guilabel>Template</guilabel> tab, you can edit the <guilabel>Label</guilabel> of the <guilabel>Template</guilabel>. + </para> + </step> + + <step performance="optional" id="step-User_Guide-Edit_a_Template-Add_a_dialog_to_the_Dialog_tab"> + <para> + To add a dialog, do the following: + </para> + + <substeps> + <step> + <para> + Enter content for this dialog in the <guilabel>Content</guilabel> field. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter a name for this dialog. This value is required (*). + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select permissions for a group that can use this dialog. This value is required (*). + </para> + </step> + </substeps> + </step> + + <step performance="optional" id="step-User_Guide-Edit_a_Template-Edit_an_existing_dialog_in_the_Dialog_tab"> + <para> + To edit an existing dialog, do the following: + </para> + + <substeps> + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>pencil</guilabel> icon in the dialog row you want to edit. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Edit the dialog properties. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guibutton>Save</guibutton> to accept all changes in the Dialog tab. + </para> + </step> + </substeps> + </step> + + <step performance="optional" id="step-User_Guide-Edit_a_Template-Delete_an_existing_dialog"> + <para> + To delete an existing dialog, do the following: + </para> + + <substeps> + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>trash can</guilabel> icon in the dialog row you want to edit. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click OK to continue with deletion. + </para> + </step> + </substeps> + + <note> + <para> + You cannot delete the default dialog. You must create a new one before you can delete the current default dialog. + </para> + </note> + </step> + + <step performance="optional" id="step-User_Guide-Edit_a_Template-Add_a_View_to_the_view_tab"> + <para> + To add a view, do the following: + </para> + + <substeps> + <step> + <para> + Click the View tab and enter content into the content field. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter a name for this view. This field is required (*). + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select permissions for a group that can use this view. This field is required (*). + </para> + </step> + </substeps> + </step> + + <step performance="optional" id="step-User_Guide-Edit_a_Template-Edit_an_existing_view_in_the_View_tab"> + <para> + To edit an existing view, do the following: + </para> + + <substeps> + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>pencil</guilabel> icon in the view row you want to edit. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Edit the view properties. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guibutton>Save</guibutton> to accept all changes in the View tab. + </para> + </step> + </substeps> + + <note> + <title>Notes about Editing Views</title> + + <para> + You cannot change the view name. + </para> + + <para> + If you click <guilabel>Enable Version</guilabel> checkbox, this view automatically increments one version after you click <guibutton>Save</guibutton>. It is displayed at <guilabel>version</guilabel> column in the <guilabel>View</guilabel> tab. + </para> + + <para> + If the dialog has at least two versions, in the <guilabel>View</guilabel> tab, it displays the <guibutton>Restore</guibutton> button. You can use <guibutton>Restore</guibutton> to roll back to the previous View. + </para> + </note> + </step> + + <step performance="optional" id="step-User_Guide-Edit_a_Template-Delete_an_existing_dialog_in_the_Dialog_tab"> + <para> + To delete an existing dialog, do the following: + </para> + + <substeps> + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>trash can</guilabel> icon in the dialog row you want to edit. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to continue with deletion. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guibutton>Save</guibutton> to accept all changes. + </para> + </step> + </substeps> + </step> + </procedure> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_a_Template-Delete_a_Template"> + <title>Delete a Template</title> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>trash can</guilabel> corresponding to the template that you want to discard. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>OK</guilabel> on the confirmation message to delete the template or <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> to abort the operation. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Content_Presentation_Manager-Metadata_Management"> + <title>Metadata Management</title> + + <para> + Metadata in its simplest form is &quot;data about data&quot;. Generally, it may be understood as information that describes, or supplements the central data. + </para> + + <para> + Metadata management allows managing nodes in the metadata format in the Site Publisher system. The metadata may be considered as information used to describe the data. When data are provided to the end users, the metadata allow users to understand about information in more details. All metadata nodes can combine with other nodes to create a new node (add mix). + </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Metadata_Management-View_Metadata"> + <title>View Metadata</title> + + <step id="step-User_Guide-View_Metadata-Go_to_the_Manage_Metadata_form"> + <para> + Go to <menuchoice> <guimenu>Group</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Administration</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> then click <menuchoice> <guimenu>Content Presentation</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Manage Metadata</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>. + </para> + </step> + + <step id="step-User_Guide-View_Metadata-Open_the_Metadata_Information_form"> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>magnifying glass</guilabel> icon corresponding to the metadata you want to view. + </para> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Metadata Information</guilabel> Form opens. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/img-Metadata_Form.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/img-Metadata_Form.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + </procedure> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Metadata_Management-Edit_Metadata"> + <title>Edit Metadata</title> + + <step id="step-User_Guide-Edit_Metadata-Open_the_Edit_Metadatas_Template_form"> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>pencil</guilabel> icon in the metadata row you want to edit. + </para> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Edit Metadata&apos;s Template</guilabel> form opens. + </para> + </step> + + <step id="step-User_Guide-Edit_Metadata-Change_the_properties"> + <para> + Change the required properties of the metadata. + </para> + + <note> + <title>Metadata Name</title> + + <para> + You cannot edit the metadata name. + </para> + </note> + </step> + + <step id="step-User_Guide-Edit_Metadata-Save_changes"> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Apply</guilabel> to save all metadata changes. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Metadata_Management-Delete_Metadata"> + <title>Delete Metadata</title> + + <step id="step-User_Guide-Delete_Metadata-Click_the_Trash_Can_button"> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>trash can</guilabel> icon corresponding to the metadata you want to delete. + </para> + + <para> + A confirmation message appears. + </para> + </step> + + <step id="step-User_Guide-Delete_Metadata-Confirm_deletion"> + <para> + Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to delete the template, or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to preserve the template. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Content_Presentation_Manager-Manage_Views"> + <title>Manage Views</title> + + <para> + The <emphasis>Manage Views</emphasis> function is used to control view ways of a user. It has two tabs: <guilabel>View</guilabel> and <guilabel>ECM Templates</guilabel>. + </para> + + <para> + To open the <emphasis role="bold">Manage View</emphasis> function, go to <menuchoice> <guimenu>Group</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Administration</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> then click on <menuchoice> <guimenu>Content Presentation</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Manage View</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>. The <guilabel>Manage View</guilabel> form opens. + </para> + <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/editecmtemplate.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/editecmtemplate.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/img-Manage_Views_Form.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/img-Manage_Views_Form.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <formalpara id="form-User_Guide-Manage_Views-Views_Tab"> + <title>Views Tab</title> <para> + On the <guilabel>Views</guilabel> tab you can add, edit, delete or preview views. + </para> + </formalpara> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_Views-Add_View"> + <title>Add View</title> + + <step id="step-User_Guide-Add_View-Open_the_Add_View_form"> + <para> + Click the <guibutton>Add View</guibutton> button located at the bottom of the <guilabel>Manage View</guilabel> form. + </para> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Add View</guilabel> form opens. + </para> + </step> + + <step id="step-User_Guide-Add_View-Define_View_Name"> + <para> + Specify the name of the view you are creating in the <guilabel>Name</guilabel> field. The name must be unique, and must only contain standard alphanumeric characters. + </para> + </step> + + <step id="step-User_Guide-Add_View-Assign_memberships_to_the_group"> + <para> + Select the group from the left panel and the membership from the right panel. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/img-Select_Permissions_Dialog.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/img-Select_Permissions_Dialog.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="146mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step id="step-User_Guide-Add_View-Select_the_Templates_view"> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Templates</guilabel> field and select the correct template for this view. + </para> + </step> + + <step id="step-User_Guide-Add_View-Save_the_View"> + <para> + Click <guibutton>Save</guibutton> to apply all settings and close the form. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_Views-Edit_a_View"> + <title>Edit a View</title> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>pencil</guilabel> icon in the view row you want to edit. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Edit the view properties. + </para> + + <note> + <title>Notes about Editing Views</title> + + <para> + You cannot change the view name. + </para> + + <para> + If you click the <guilabel>Enable Version</guilabel> checkbox, this view automatically increments one version after you click <guibutton>Save</guibutton>. It is displayed at <guilabel>version</guilabel> column in the <guilabel>View</guilabel> tab. + </para> + + <para> + If the dialog has at least two versions, in the <guilabel>View</guilabel> tab, it displays the <guibutton>Restore</guibutton> button. You can use <guibutton>Restore</guibutton> to roll back to the previous View. + </para> + </note> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guibutton>Add Tab</guibutton> button to open the <guilabel>Tab Form</guilabel> tab to add more tabs. + </para> + + <substeps> + <step performance="optional"> + <para> + Click the <guibutton>Add Tab</guibutton> button to add more tabs after the initial tab has been added. + </para> + </step> + + <step performance="optional"> + <para> + Click the <guibutton>Reset</guibutton> button to apply changes. + </para> + </step> + + <step performance="optional"> + <para> + Click the <guibutton>Back</guibutton> button to return to the <guilabel>View Form</guilabel> tab in the <guilabel>Edit View</guilabel> form. + </para> + </step> + </substeps> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guibutton>Save</guibutton> to apply all changes in the View tab. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_Views-Delete_Views"> + <title>Delete Views</title> + + <step id="step-User_Guide-Delete_Views-Click_the_Trash_Can_button"> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>trash can</guilabel> icon corresponding to the view you want to delete. + </para> + + <para> + A confirmation message is displayed. + </para> + </step> + + <step id="step-User_Guide-Delete_Views-Confirm_deletion"> + <para> + Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to delete the view. + </para> + + <note> + <title>Deleting the Current View</title> + + <para> + You cannot delete a view that is currently in use. + </para> + </note> + </step> + </procedure> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_Views-Preview_a_View"> + <title>Preview a View</title> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>magnifying glass</guilabel> icon in the <guilabel>Action</guilabel> column of the view you want to preview. + </para> + + <para> + The <guilabel>View Form</guilabel> opens: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/img-View_Form.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/img-View_Form.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Close</guilabel> to exit the <guilabel>View Form</guilabel>. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Views-ECM_Templates"> + <title>ECM Templates</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/ecmtemplates.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/ecmtemplates.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Change the current template&apos;s properties. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guibutton>Save</guibutton> to accept all changes. - </para> - <note> - <title>Template Names</title> - <para> - You cannot edit the template name. - </para> - <para> - If you tick the <guilabel>Enable Version</guilabel> checkbox, this template will automatically increase to one version after you have clicked <guilabel>Save</guilabel>. It is displayed at the <guilabel>Base version</guilabel> column in <guilabel>ECM template</guilabel> tab. - </para> - <para> - If the template has at least two versions, in the <guilabel>Edit ECM Template</guilabel> form, it displays the <guilabel>Restore</guilabel> button that allows restoring the template version. - </para> - </note> - </step> - </procedure> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-ECM_Templates-Delete_a_Template"> - <title>Delete a Template</title> - <step> - <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/trashicon.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>trash can</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon corresponding with the template you want to edit. A confirmation message will appear. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to accept deleting this template. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Views-BC_Templates"> - <title>BC Templates</title> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/bctemplatesform.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/bctemplatesform.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-BC_Templates-Adding_a_New_Template"> - <title>Adding a New Template</title> - <step> - <para> - Click <guibutton>Add</guibutton> to open the Add BC Template form. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/addbctemplateform.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/addbctemplateform.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-ECM_Templates-Add_a_new_ECM_Template"> + <title>Add a new ECM Template</title> + + <step> + <para> + Select the <guilabel>ECM Templates</guilabel> tab. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button to open the <guilabel>Add ECM Template</guilabel> form. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/addecmtemplate.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/addecmtemplate.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter the content of the template in the <guilabel>Content</guilabel> field. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter a name for the template in the <guilabel>Name</guilabel> field. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select a type for the template in the <guilabel>Template Type</guilabel> field. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guibutton>Save</guibutton> to accept adding a new template, or click <guibutton>Reset</guibutton> to change values, or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to quit without any changes. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-ECM_Templates-Editing_a_Template"> + <title>Edit a Template</title> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>pencil</guilabel> icon next to the template you want to edit. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/editecmtemplate.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/editecmtemplate.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Change the current template&apos;s properties. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guibutton>Save</guibutton> to accept all changes. + </para> + + <note> + <title>Template Names</title> + + <para> + You cannot edit the template name. + </para> + + <para> + If you tick the <guilabel>Enable Version</guilabel> checkbox, this template will automatically increase to one version after you have clicked <guilabel>Save</guilabel>. It is displayed at the <guilabel>Base version</guilabel> column in <guilabel>ECM template</guilabel> tab. + </para> + + <para> + If the template has at least two versions, in the <guilabel>Edit ECM Template</guilabel> form, it displays the <guilabel>Restore</guilabel> button that allows restoring the template version. + </para> + </note> + </step> + </procedure> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-ECM_Templates-Delete_a_Template"> + <title>Delete a Template</title> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>trash can</guilabel> icon corresponding with the template you want to edit. A confirmation message will appear. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to accept deleting this template. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Views-BC_Templates"> + <title>BC Templates</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/bctemplatesform.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/bctemplatesform.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-BC_Templates-Adding_a_New_Template"> + <title>Adding a New Template</title> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guibutton>Add</guibutton> to open the Add BC Template form. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/addbctemplateform.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/addbctemplateform.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter the content for the template in the <guilabel>Content</guilabel> text box. This field is required (*). + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter the name for the template in the <guilabel>Name</guilabel> field. This field is required (*). + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select the template type from the drop-down box in the <guilabel>Template Type</guilabel> form. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/templatetypedropdownbox.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/templatetypedropdownbox.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="63mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <note> + <para> + The name must be unique. + </para> + + <para> + The name must not contain special characters like !,@,#,$,%,&amp;,*,(,). + </para> + </note> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guibutton>Save</guibutton> to complete adding a new template. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-BC_Templates-Edit_a_BC_Template"> + <title>Edit a BC Template</title> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>pencil</guilabel> icon on a template that you want to edit. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/editbctemplateform.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/editbctemplateform.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Change the current template&apos;s properties. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guibutton>Save</guibutton> to accept all changes. + </para> + + <note> + <title>Uneditable Fields</title> + + <para> + You cannot edit the template name. + </para> + + <para> + You cannot edit the template type. + </para> + + <para> + If you tick the <guilabel>Enable Version</guilabel> checkbox, this template will automatically increase by one version after you have clicked <guilabel>Save</guilabel>. It is displayed at the <guilabel>Base Version</guilabel> column in <guilabel>ECM Template</guilabel> tab. + </para> + + <para> + If the template has at least two versions, in the <guilabel>Edit ECM Template</guilabel> form, it displays the <guilabel>Restore</guilabel> button that allows restoring the template version. + </para> + </note> + </step> + </procedure> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-BC_Templates-Delete_a_Template"> + <title>Delete a Template</title> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>trash can</guilabel> icon corresponding with the template you want to edit. A confirmation message will appear. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to accept deleting the template, or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to discard this action. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Content_Presentation_Manager-Drives_Management"> + <title>Drives Management</title> + + <para> + The function supports to manage drives in the<emphasis role="bold"> File Explorer</emphasis>. It allows adding, editing and deleting drives. + </para> + + <para> + Go to <menuchoice> <guimenu>Group</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Administration</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> the go to <menuchoice> <guimenu>Content Presentation</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Manage Drives</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/manage_drives.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/manage_drives.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter the content for the template in the <guilabel>Content</guilabel> text box. This field is required (*). - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter the name for the template in the <guilabel>Name</guilabel> field. This field is required (*). - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the template type from the drop-down box in the <guilabel>Template Type</guilabel> form. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/templatetypedropdownbox.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/templatetypedropdownbox.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="63mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <note> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Drives_Management-Add_a_new_drive"> + <title>Add a new drive</title> + + <procedure> + <step> + <para> + Click the <guibutton>Add Drive</guibutton> button in the <guibutton>Manage Drives</guibutton> form to open the <guibutton>Add Drive</guibutton> form. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/add_drive.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/add_drive.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="140mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter a name for the new drive in the <guibutton>Name</guibutton> field. This field is required (*). + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select a workspace for the drive. There are four available workspaces: <systemitem>system</systemitem>, <systemitem>collaboration</systemitem>, <systemitem>backup</systemitem>, and <systemitem>dms-system</systemitem>. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/workspaces.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/workspaces.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="63mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select the home path for the drive by clicking the <guilabel>plus</guilabel> icon beside the <guilabel>Home path</guilabel> entry. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/home_path.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/home_path.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Browse for an icon for the workspace by clicking the <guilabel>plus</guilabel> icon beside the <guilabel>Workspace icon</guilabel> entry. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select an icon by clicking the <guilabel>green tick</guilabel> corresponding to the desired icon file: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addiconfileform.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addiconfileform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select permissions for groups that have access rights to this drive by clicking the <guilabel>plus</guilabel> icon beside the <guilabel>Permissions</guilabel> entry. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select or deselect the various checkboxes to hide or show the corresponding drive elements: + </para> + + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>Show referenced document</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + Allows viewing preference documents. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Show non-document</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + Allows viewing non-documents. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Show sidebar</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + Allows showing the sidebar. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Show hidden node</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + Allows showing the hidden nodes. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select the document type that will be created in this drive: + </para> + + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>Folder</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + Only <emphasis role="bold">nt:folder</emphasis> folders can be created in this drive. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Unstructured folder</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + Only <emphasis role="bold">nt:unstructured</emphasis> folders can be created in this drive. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select the <emphasis role="bold">Apply Views</emphasis> tab and select the view type you want to be available in the drive: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/applyviewstab.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/applyviewstab.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to commit the details and create the new drive, <guilabel>Refresh</guilabel> to clear the form or <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> to abort the operation. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Edit a drive</title> + <para> - The name must be unique. - </para> + To edit a drive, do the following: + </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_new_drive-Edit_a_drive"> + <title>Edit a drive</title> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>pencil</guilabel> icon that corresponds to the drive you want to edit. The <guilabel>Edit drive</guilabel> form will appear: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/editdriveform.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/editdriveform.png" format="PNG" width="146mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Edit the properties as required. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to commit the changes. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <note> + <title>Drive Name</title> + + <para> + The drive name cannot be edited in this form. + </para> + </note> + </section> + + <section> + <title>Delete a drive</title> + <para> - The name must not contain special characters like !,@,#,$,%,&amp;,*,(,). - </para> - </note> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guibutton>Save</guibutton> to complete adding a new template. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-BC_Templates-Edit_a_BC_Template"> - <title>Edit a BC Template</title> - <step> - <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/editicon4.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>pencil</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon on a template that you want to edit. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/editbctemplateform.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/editbctemplateform.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Change the current template&apos;s properties. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guibutton>Save</guibutton> to accept all changes.</para> - <note> - <title>Uneditable Fields</title> - <para> - You cannot edit the template name. - </para> - <para> - You cannot edit the template type. - </para> - <para> - If you tick the <guilabel>Enable Version</guilabel> checkbox, this template will automatically increase by one version after you have clicked <guilabel>Save</guilabel>. It is displayed at the <guilabel>Base Version</guilabel> column in <guilabel>ECM Template</guilabel> tab. - </para> - <para> - If the template has at least two versions, in the <guilabel>Edit ECM Template</guilabel> form, it displays the <guilabel>Restore</guilabel> button that allows restoring the template version. - </para> - </note> - </step> - </procedure> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-BC_Templates-Delete_a_Template"> - <title>Delete a Template</title> - <step> - <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/trashicon.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>trash can</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon corresponding with the template you want to edit. A confirmation message will appear. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to accept deleting the template, or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to discard this action. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Content_Presentation_Manager-Drives_Management"> - <title>Drives Management</title> - <para> - The function supports to manage drives in the<emphasis role="bold"> File Explorer</emphasis>. It allows adding, editing and deleting drives. - </para> - <para> - Go to <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Group</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Administration</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice> the go to <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Content Presentation</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Manage Drives</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice>. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/manage_drives.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/manage_drives.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Drives_Management-Add_a_new_drive"> - <title>Add a new drive</title> - <procedure> - <step> - <para> - Click the <guibutton>Add Drive</guibutton> button in the <guibutton>Manage Drives</guibutton> form to open the <guibutton>Add Drive</guibutton> form. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/add_drive.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/add_drive.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="140mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter a name for the new drive in the <guibutton>Name</guibutton> field. This field is required (*). - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select a workspace for the drive. There are four available workspaces: <systemitem>system</systemitem>, <systemitem>collaboration</systemitem>, <systemitem>backup</systemitem>, and <systemitem>dms-system</systemitem>. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/workspaces.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/workspaces.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="63mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the home path for the drive by clicking the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/deplussy.png" format="PNG" width="7mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>plus</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon beside the <guilabel>Home path</guilabel> entry. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/home_path.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/home_path.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Browse for an icon for the workspace by clicking the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/addplusicon.png" format="PNG" width="8mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>plus</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon beside the <guilabel>Workspace icon</guilabel> entry. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select an icon by clicking the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/greentick.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>green tick</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - corresponding to the desired icon file: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addiconfileform.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addiconfileform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select permissions for groups that have access rights to this drive by clicking the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/pluspermissionbutton.png" format="PNG" width="8mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>plus</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon beside the <guilabel>Permissions</guilabel> entry. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select or deselect the various checkboxes to hide or show the corresponding drive elements: - </para> - <variablelist> - <varlistentry> - <term>Show referenced document</term> - <listitem> - <para> - Allows viewing preference documents. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>Show non-document</term> - <listitem> - <para> - Allows viewing non-documents. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>Show sidebar</term> - <listitem> - <para> - Allows showing the sidebar. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>Show hidden node</term> - <listitem> - <para> - Allows showing the hidden nodes. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - </variablelist> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the document type that will be created in this drive: - </para> - <variablelist> - <varlistentry> - <term>Folder</term> - <listitem> - <para> - Only <emphasis role="bold">nt:folder</emphasis> folders can be created in this drive. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>Unstructured folder</term> - <listitem> - <para> - Only <emphasis role="bold">nt:unstructured</emphasis> folders can be created in this drive. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - </variablelist> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the <emphasis role="bold">Apply Views</emphasis> tab and select the view type you want to be available in the drive: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/applyviewstab.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/applyviewstab.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to commit the details and create the new drive, <guilabel>Refresh</guilabel> to clear the form or <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> to abort the operation. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> - - <section> - <title>Edit a drive</title> - <para>To edit a drive, do the following:</para> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_new_drive-Edit_a_drive"> - <title>Edit a drive</title> - <step> - <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/editicon4.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>pencil</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon that corresponds to the drive you want to edit. The <guilabel>Edit drive</guilabel> form will appear: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/editdriveform.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/editdriveform.png" format="PNG" width="146mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Edit the properties as required. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to commit the changes. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - <note> - <title>Drive Name</title> - <para> - The drive name cannot be edited in this form. - </para> - </note> - </section> - <section> - <title>Delete a drive</title> - <para> - To delete a drive, do the following: - </para> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_new_drive-Delete_a_drive"> - <title>Delete a drive</title> - <step> - <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/trashicon.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>trash can</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> that corresponds to the drive you want to delete. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>OK</guilabel> on the confirmation message to delete the drive or click <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> to abort the operation. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> - </section> -</section> \ No newline at end of file + To delete a drive, do the following: + </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_new_drive-Delete_a_drive"> + <title>Delete a drive</title> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>trash can</guilabel> that corresponds to the drive you want to delete. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>OK</guilabel> on the confirmation message to delete the drive or click <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> to abort the operation. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + </section> + </section> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Advanced/Administration/Types.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Advanced/Administration/Types.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Advanced/Administration/Types.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -4,302 +4,300 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "../../../User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<section id="sect-User_Guide-Content_Types"> - <title>Content Types</title> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Content_Types-The_Namespace_Registry"> - <title>The Namespace Registry</title> - <para> - The namespace is a prefix in the node type name. It allows you to create node types without potentially conflicting with existing node types. - </para> - <para> - The registry helps you manage the namespaces used in the system. - </para> - <para> - Go to <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Groups</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Administration</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice> the click on <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Content Types</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Namespace Registry</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice> to open the Namespace Registry form. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/namespaceregistry.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/namespaceregistry.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-The_Namespace_Registry-Registering_a_Namespace"> - <title>Registering a Namespace</title> - <step> - <para> - Click the <guibutton>Register</guibutton> button on the <guilabel>Namespace Registry</guilabel> form to register a new namespace. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/namespaceregistrationform.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/namespaceregistrationform.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter a value for the <guilabel>Namespace Prefix</guilabel> field. This field is required (*). - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter a value for the URI field. This field must be unique. This field is required (*). - </para> - <important> - <title>Special Characters</title> - <para> - The namespace must not contain special characters like !,@,#,$,%,&amp;,*,(,). - </para> - </important> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Content_Types-Manage_Node_Types"> - <title>Manage Node Types</title> - <para> - This function is used to control all node types in Site Publisher. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/themanagenodetypeform.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/themanagenodetypeform.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Content_Types-View_Node_Types"> - <title>View Node Types</title> - <procedure> - <step> - <para> - Click the icon that corresponds to the node to be reviewed. The <guilabel>View Node Type Information</guilabel> form will appear. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/viewnodetypeinformation.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/viewnodetypeinformation.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to exit this form. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-View_Node_Types-Add_Node_Type"> - <title>Add Node Type</title> - <step> - <para> - Open the <guilabel>Add/Edit Node Type Definitions</guilabel> form by clicking the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button on the <guilabel>Manage Node Type</guilabel> form. - </para> - <figure id="figu-User_Guide-Add_Node_Type-Add_Node_Type_Form"> - <title>Add Node Type Form</title> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/addnodetype.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/addnodetype.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </figure> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select a namespace for the node. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para>Enter a name in the Node type name field. This field is mandatory and its value must be unique.</para> - <important> - <title>Special Characters</title> - <para> - The name must not contain special characters like !,@,#,$,%,&amp;,*,(,). - </para> - </important> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select a value for the <guilabel>Is mixin type</guilabel> field. - </para> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - <parameter>True</parameter>: this node is <systemitem>mixin</systemitem> type. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - <parameter>False</parameter>: this node is not <systemitem>mixin</systemitem> type. - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select a value for the <guilabel>Orderable child nodes</guilabel> field: - </para> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - <parameter>True</parameter>: child nodes are ordered. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - <parameter>False</parameter>: child nodes are not ordered. - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter a value for the <guilabel>Primary item name</guilabel> field. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - <parameter>Super Types</parameter>: Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/addplusicon.png" format="PNG" width="8mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>plus</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> button to add more parent types. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - <parameter>Property definitions</parameter>: lists all definition names of <guilabel>Property</guilabel> tab. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - <parameter>Child node definitions</parameter>: lists all definition names of <guilabel>Child node</guilabel> tab. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guibutton>Save</guibutton> to accept adding a new node type, or <guibutton>Save draft</guibutton> to save this node type as a draft, or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to quit. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-View_Node_Types-Export_Node_Types"> - <title>Export Node Types</title> - <step> - <para> - Open the Export Node Types form by clicking the <guibutton>Export</guibutton> button on the <guilabel>Manage Node Type</guilabel> Form. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/exportnodetypes.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/exportnodetypes.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="130mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guibutton>Uncheck all</guibutton> if you do not want to export all node types. After clicking <guibutton>Uncheck all</guibutton>, this button becomes the <guibutton>Check all</guibutton> button. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select nodes that you want to export by ticking the checkboxes. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the <guibutton>Export</guibutton> button in this form. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the location in your computer to save the exported node. - </para> - <important> - <para> - You must select at least one node type to be exported. If you do not want to export the node, click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to quit this pop-up. - </para> - </important> - </step> - </procedure> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-View_Node_Types-Import_Node_Types"> - <title>Import Node Types</title> - <step> - <para> - Open the <guilabel>Import Node Type from XML</guilabel> file form by clicking the <guibutton>Import</guibutton> button on the <guilabel>Manage Node Type</guilabel> form. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/importnodetype.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/importnodetype.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="130mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to upload a file. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/browsefornodes.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/browsefornodes.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="129mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <important> - <para> - You must upload an XML file. This file is in the node type&apos;s format. - </para> - </important> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the <guibutton>Upload</guibutton> button. - </para> - <note> - <para> - If you want to upload a different file, click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/trashicon.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>trash can</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon to delete the file which has just been uploaded, then upload other files. - </para> - </note> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Tick the checkboxes corresponding to the nodes that you want to import. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the <guilabel>Import</guilabel> button to complete importing a node type. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> -</section> + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Content_Types"> + <title>Content Types</title> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Content_Types-The_Namespace_Registry"> + <title>The Namespace Registry</title> + + <para> + The namespace is a prefix in the node type name. It allows you to create node types without potentially conflicting with existing node types. + </para> + + <para> + The registry helps you manage the namespaces used in the system. + </para> + + <para> + Go to <menuchoice> <guimenu>Groups</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Administration</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> the click on <menuchoice> <guimenu>Content Types</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Namespace Registry</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> to open the Namespace Registry form. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/namespaceregistry.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/namespaceregistry.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-The_Namespace_Registry-Registering_a_Namespace"> + <title>Registering a Namespace</title> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guibutton>Register</guibutton> button on the <guilabel>Namespace Registry</guilabel> form to register a new namespace. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/namespaceregistrationform.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/namespaceregistrationform.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter a value for the <guilabel>Namespace Prefix</guilabel> field. This field is required (*). + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter a value for the URI field. This field must be unique. This field is required (*). + </para> + + <important> + <title>Special Characters</title> + + <para> + The namespace must not contain special characters like !,@,#,$,%,&amp;,*,(,). + </para> + </important> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Content_Types-Manage_Node_Types"> + <title>Manage Node Types</title> + + <para> + This function is used to control all node types in Site Publisher. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/themanagenodetypeform.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/themanagenodetypeform.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Content_Types-View_Node_Types"> + <title>View Node Types</title> + + <procedure> + <step> + <para> + Click the icon that corresponds to the node to be reviewed. The <guilabel>View Node Type Information</guilabel> form will appear. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/viewnodetypeinformation.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/viewnodetypeinformation.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guibutton>Close</guibutton> to exit this form. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-View_Node_Types-Add_Node_Type"> + <title>Add Node Type</title> + + <step> + <para> + Open the <guilabel>Add/Edit Node Type Definitions</guilabel> form by clicking the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button on the <guilabel>Manage Node Type</guilabel> form. + </para> + + <figure id="figu-User_Guide-Add_Node_Type-Add_Node_Type_Form"> + <title>Add Node Type Form</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/addnodetype.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/addnodetype.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </figure> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select a namespace for the node. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter a name in the Node type name field. This field is mandatory and its value must be unique. + </para> + + <important> + <title>Special Characters</title> + + <para> + The name must not contain special characters like !,@,#,$,%,&amp;,*,(,). + </para> + </important> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select a value for the <guilabel>Is mixin type</guilabel> field. + </para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + <parameter>True</parameter>: this node is <systemitem>mixin</systemitem> type. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + <parameter>False</parameter>: this node is not <systemitem>mixin</systemitem> type. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select a value for the <guilabel>Orderable child nodes</guilabel> field: + </para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + <parameter>True</parameter>: child nodes are ordered. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + <parameter>False</parameter>: child nodes are not ordered. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter a value for the <guilabel>Primary item name</guilabel> field. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + <parameter>Super Types</parameter>: Click the <guilabel>plus</guilabel> button to add more parent types. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + <parameter>Property definitions</parameter>: lists all definition names of <guilabel>Property</guilabel> tab. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + <parameter>Child node definitions</parameter>: lists all definition names of <guilabel>Child node</guilabel> tab. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guibutton>Save</guibutton> to accept adding a new node type, or <guibutton>Save draft</guibutton> to save this node type as a draft, or <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to quit. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-View_Node_Types-Export_Node_Types"> + <title>Export Node Types</title> + + <step> + <para> + Open the Export Node Types form by clicking the <guibutton>Export</guibutton> button on the <guilabel>Manage Node Type</guilabel> Form. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/exportnodetypes.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/exportnodetypes.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="130mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guibutton>Uncheck all</guibutton> if you do not want to export all node types. After clicking <guibutton>Uncheck all</guibutton>, this button becomes the <guibutton>Check all</guibutton> button. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select nodes that you want to export by ticking the checkboxes. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guibutton>Export</guibutton> button in this form. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select the location in your computer to save the exported node. + </para> + + <important> + <para> + You must select at least one node type to be exported. If you do not want to export the node, click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to quit this pop-up. + </para> + </important> + </step> + </procedure> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-View_Node_Types-Import_Node_Types"> + <title>Import Node Types</title> + + <step> + <para> + Open the <guilabel>Import Node Type from XML</guilabel> file form by clicking the <guibutton>Import</guibutton> button on the <guilabel>Manage Node Type</guilabel> form. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/importnodetype.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/importnodetype.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="130mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guibutton>Browse</guibutton> button to upload a file. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/browsefornodes.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/browsefornodes.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="129mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <important> + <para> + You must upload an XML file. This file is in the node type&apos;s format. + </para> + </important> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guibutton>Upload</guibutton> button. + </para> + + <note> + <para> + If you want to upload a different file, click the <guilabel>trash can</guilabel> icon to delete the file which has just been uploaded, then upload other files. + </para> + </note> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Tick the checkboxes corresponding to the nodes that you want to import. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Import</guilabel> button to complete importing a node type. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + </section> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Advanced/Administration.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Advanced/Administration.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Advanced/Administration.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -4,67 +4,68 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "../../User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<section id="sect-User_Guide-Administration_page"> - <title>Administration Page</title> - <para> - This page is used to manage all workspaces, drives, node types, metadata, templates, queries, etc. Only administrators can access the <guilabel>Administration</guilabel> page. - </para> - <procedure> - <step> + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Administration_page"> + <title>Administration Page</title> + <para> - Click <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Group</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Administration</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice> on the administration bar: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/WCM_admin.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/WCM_admin.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + This page is used to manage all workspaces, drives, node types, metadata, templates, queries, etc. Only administrators can access the <guilabel>Administration</guilabel> page. + </para> + + <procedure> + <step> + <para> + Click <menuchoice> <guimenu>Group</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Administration</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> on the administration bar: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/WCM_admin.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/WCM_admin.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Administration</guilabel> page will appear: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/sites_admin.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/sites_admin.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + </procedure> + <para> - The <guilabel>Administration</guilabel> page will appear: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/sites_admin.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/sites_admin.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - </procedure> - <para> - This page gives you to access to the following sub-pages: - </para> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - <guilabel>Categories and Tags</guilabel>: <emphasis role="bold">Manage Categories</emphasis> and <emphasis role="bold">Manage Tags</emphasis>. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - <guilabel>Content Presentation</guilabel>: <emphasis role="bold">Manage Template</emphasis>, <emphasis role="bold">Manage Metadata</emphasis>, <emphasis role="bold">Manage Views</emphasis> and <emphasis role="bold">Manage Drives</emphasis>. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - <guilabel>Content Types</guilabel>: <emphasis role="bold">Namespace Registry</emphasis> and <emphasis role="bold">Manage Node Type</emphasis>. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - <guilabel>Advanced Configuration</guilabel>: <emphasis role="bold">Manage Queries</emphasis>, <emphasis role="bold">Manage Scripts</emphasis> <emphasis role="bold">Create an Action Type</emphasis> and <emphasis role="bold">Manage Unlocks</emphasis>. - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="Administration/Ontology.xml"/> - <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="Administration/Presentation.xml"/> - <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="Administration/Types.xml"/> - <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="Administration/Advanced.xml"/> -</section> + This page gives you to access to the following sub-pages: + </para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + <guilabel>Categories and Tags</guilabel>: <emphasis role="bold">Manage Categories</emphasis> and <emphasis role="bold">Manage Tags</emphasis>. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + <guilabel>Content Presentation</guilabel>: <emphasis role="bold">Manage Template</emphasis>, <emphasis role="bold">Manage Metadata</emphasis>, <emphasis role="bold">Manage Views</emphasis> and <emphasis role="bold">Manage Drives</emphasis>. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + <guilabel>Content Types</guilabel>: <emphasis role="bold">Namespace Registry</emphasis> and <emphasis role="bold">Manage Node Type</emphasis>. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + <guilabel>Advanced Configuration</guilabel>: <emphasis role="bold">Manage Queries</emphasis>, <emphasis role="bold">Manage Scripts</emphasis> <emphasis role="bold">Create an Action Type</emphasis> and <emphasis role="bold">Manage Unlocks</emphasis>. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="Administration/Ontology.xml"/> + + <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="Administration/Presentation.xml"/> + + <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="Administration/Types.xml"/> + + <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="Administration/Advanced.xml"/> + </section> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Advanced/Manage_Site_Resources.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Advanced/Manage_Site_Resources.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Advanced/Manage_Site_Resources.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -4,127 +4,126 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "../../User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Site_Resources_in_one_place"> - <title>Manage Site Resources in one place</title> - <para> - You can easily manage all the site resources in Content Explorer. - </para> - <para> - Chose <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/sitesmanagementicon.png" format="PNG" width="43mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Sites Management</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> in a <guilabel>General</guilabel> drive. All of your created sites and their resources will be listed in the left panel. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/resourcesleftpanel.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/resourcesleftpanel.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - All sites contain typical folders that are site resources: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/typicalfolders.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/typicalfolders.png" format="PNG" width="109mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Site_Resources_in_one_place-CSS_Folder"> - <title>CSS Folder</title> - <para> - CSS is one of the default files of a site. This folder contains CSS data that is used to present content data in a site and increase that site&apos;s accessibility. - </para> - <note> - <title>CSS</title> + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Site_Resources_in_one_place"> + <title>Manage Site Resources in one place</title> + <para> - Once a new CSS file is created in a site, it will affect how the site is displayed. For example, if your new CSS file is created with a red background color, the site background will then turn to red.</para> - </note> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Site_Resources_in_one_place-Document_Folder"> - <title>Document Folder</title> - <para> - This folder contains all documents used in a site. When you want to add a new document for a site, you can also put them in another folder, but it is recommended to use this one to manage everything easily and conveniently.</para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/documentsview.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/documentsview.png" format="PNG" width="67mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Site_Resources_in_one_place-JS_Folder"> - <title>JS Folder</title> - <para> - This is one of the default files of a site. This file contains Java Script data that is used to make a site more animated and more dynamic. - </para> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Site_Resources_in_one_place-Links_Folder"> - <title>Links Folder</title> - <para> - This file contains all links used in a site. - </para> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Site_Resources_in_one_place-Media_Folder"> - <title>Media Folder</title> - <para> - This folder contains all documents related to videos, images and sounds. It is divided into three sub folders: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/mediafiles.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/mediafiles.png" format="PNG" width="47mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <variablelist> - <varlistentry> - <term>audio:</term> - <listitem> - <para> - This folder contains sound data used in a site. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>images:</term> - <listitem> - <para> - This folder contains images used in a site. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>videos:</term> - <listitem> - <para> - This folder contains videos used in a site. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - </variablelist> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Site_Resources_in_one_place-Web_Content_Folders"> - <title>Web Content Folders</title> - <para> - This folder contains all web content used in sites. It is recommended to put all the web contents files here to manage them more easily, or for easy reuse in another site.</para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/webcontentfiles.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/webcontentfiles.png" format="PNG" width="70mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </section> -</section> + You can easily manage all the site resources in Content Explorer. + </para> + + <para> + Chose <guilabel>Sites Management</guilabel> in a <guilabel>General</guilabel> drive. All of your created sites and their resources will be listed in the left panel. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/resourcesleftpanel.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/resourcesleftpanel.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + All sites contain typical folders that are site resources: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/typicalfolders.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/typicalfolders.png" format="PNG" width="109mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Site_Resources_in_one_place-CSS_Folder"> + <title>CSS Folder</title> + + <para> + CSS is one of the default files of a site. This folder contains CSS data that is used to present content data in a site and increase that site&apos;s accessibility. + </para> + + <note> + <title>CSS</title> + + <para> + Once a new CSS file is created in a site, it will affect how the site is displayed. For example, if your new CSS file is created with a red background color, the site background will then turn to red. + </para> + </note> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Site_Resources_in_one_place-Document_Folder"> + <title>Document Folder</title> + + <para> + This folder contains all documents used in a site. When you want to add a new document for a site, you can also put them in another folder, but it is recommended to use this one to manage everything easily and conveniently. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/documentsview.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/documentsview.png" format="PNG" width="67mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Site_Resources_in_one_place-JS_Folder"> + <title>JS Folder</title> + + <para> + This is one of the default files of a site. This file contains Java Script data that is used to make a site more animated and more dynamic. + </para> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Site_Resources_in_one_place-Links_Folder"> + <title>Links Folder</title> + + <para> + This file contains all links used in a site. + </para> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Site_Resources_in_one_place-Media_Folder"> + <title>Media Folder</title> + + <para> + This folder contains all documents related to videos, images and sounds. It is divided into three sub folders: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/mediafiles.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/mediafiles.png" format="PNG" width="47mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>audio:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + This folder contains sound data used in a site. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>images:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + This folder contains images used in a site. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>videos:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + This folder contains videos used in a site. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Site_Resources_in_one_place-Web_Content_Folders"> + <title>Web Content Folders</title> + + <para> + This folder contains all web content used in sites. It is recommended to put all the web contents files here to manage them more easily, or for easy reuse in another site. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/webcontentfiles.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/webcontentfiles.png" format="PNG" width="70mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + </section> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Advanced/SP_Roles.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Advanced/SP_Roles.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Advanced/SP_Roles.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ The details below refer only to roles and memberships for the Site Publisher extension. For information regarding the roles in the core portal platform, refer to the the <citetitle>JBoss Enterprise Portal Platform User Guide</citetitle> available on <ulink type="http" url="https://access.redhat.com/knowledge/docs/"></ulink>;. </para> </note> - + <itemizedlist> <title>Site Publisher Memberships</title> @@ -71,6 +71,7 @@ <entry> root </entry> + <entry> *:/platform/administrators,*:/platform/users,*:/platform/web-contributors </entry> @@ -80,6 +81,7 @@ <entry> john </entry> + <entry> *:/platform/administrators,*:/platform/web-contributors, *:/platform/users </entry> @@ -89,6 +91,7 @@ <entry> mary </entry> + <entry> member:/platform/users,editor:/platform/web-contributors,manager:/platform/web-contributors,publisher:/platform/web-contributors </entry> @@ -98,6 +101,7 @@ <entry> james </entry> + <entry> member:/platform/users,redactor:/platform/web-contributors,author:/platform/web-contributors </entry> @@ -107,6 +111,7 @@ <entry> demo </entry> + <entry> member:/platform/users </entry> @@ -114,86 +119,106 @@ </tbody> </tgroup> </table> - + <variablelist> <title>Roles</title> + <varlistentry> <term>*:/platform/administrators</term> - <listitem> - <para> - This core portal role extends edit permissions to Site Publisher components such as: Detail, Print Viewer, Group Navigation, Portal Navigation, Parameterized Content List Viewer, Category navigation, Content List Viewer, Single Content Viewer, Newsletter Viewer. Members also have root permissions for JCR repository configuration. - </para> - </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + This core portal role extends edit permissions to Site Publisher components such as: Detail, Print Viewer, Group Navigation, Portal Navigation, Parameterized Content List Viewer, Category navigation, Content List Viewer, Single Content Viewer, Newsletter Viewer. Members also have root permissions for JCR repository configuration. + </para> + </listitem> </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> <term>member:/platform/users</term> - <listitem> - <para> - This core portal role is required for normal users to be able to log in. - </para> - </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + This core portal role is required for normal users to be able to log in. + </para> + </listitem> </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> <term>editor:/platform/web-contributors</term> - <listitem> - <para> - This role can edit pages in the <emphasis>acme</emphasis> portal: Overview, Search Result, Detail, Print Viewer, New Account, News, Events, Confirmation can edit Search Result in classic SP portal portal. - </para> - </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + This role can edit pages in the <emphasis>acme</emphasis> portal: Overview, Search Result, Detail, Print Viewer, New Account, News, Events, Confirmation can edit Search Result in classic SP portal portal. + </para> + </listitem> </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> <term>manager:/platform/web-contributors</term> - <listitem> - <para> - This role can edit WCM Content Explorer, SiteExplorer Content Explorer, Editor, WCM Administration, Newsletter Manager Portlet, Form Generator Portlet and Workflow Controller. - </para> - </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + This role can edit WCM Content Explorer, SiteExplorer Content Explorer, Editor, WCM Administration, Newsletter Manager Portlet, Form Generator Portlet and Workflow Controller. + </para> + </listitem> </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> <term>publisher:/platform/web-contributors</term> - <listitem> - <para> - This role can publish contents, for users to move content to <emphasis>staged</emphasis> and <emphasis>published</emphasis> states in the life cycle of SP and ecmdemo portal (lifecycle1 and lifecycle2). - </para> - </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + This role can publish contents, for users to move content to <emphasis>staged</emphasis> and <emphasis>published</emphasis> states in the life cycle of SP and ecmdemo portal (lifecycle1 and lifecycle2). + </para> + </listitem> </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> <term>redactor:/platform/web-contributors</term> - <listitem> - <para> - This role is for users to access the newsletter management page. - </para> - </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + This role is for users to access the newsletter management page. + </para> + </listitem> </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> <term>author:/platform/web-contributors</term> - <listitem> - <para> - This role can edit contents, for users to create content in <emphasis>draft</emphasis> and <emphasis>pending</emphasis> states in the life cycle of SP and ecmdemo portal (lifecycle1 and lifecycle2). - </para> - </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + This role can edit contents, for users to create content in <emphasis>draft</emphasis> and <emphasis>pending</emphasis> states in the life cycle of SP and ecmdemo portal (lifecycle1 and lifecycle2). + </para> + </listitem> </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> <term>editor:/platform/web-contributors</term> - <listitem> - <para> - This role is for users to get the edit mode drop-down in toolbar visible (<literal>WCMAdminToolbarPortlet</literal>). - </para> - </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + This role is for users to get the edit mode drop-down in toolbar visible (<literal>WCMAdminToolbarPortlet</literal>). + </para> + </listitem> </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> <term>webdesigner:/platform/web-contributors</term> - <listitem> - <para> - This role has access to CSS and JavaScript templates. - </para> - </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + This role has access to CSS and JavaScript templates. + </para> + </listitem> </varlistentry> </variablelist> + <para> <remark>DOCS NOTE: This last paragraph needs to be certified and technically verified.</remark> </para> + <para> It seems that it's possible to remove all memberships in Site Publisher. There is no validation checking for this action. Any membership dependencies may not be available if the parent membership is removed. Administrators will need to add required dependencies to some other membership or group to access or edit it. </para> - </section> \ No newline at end of file + </section> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Advanced.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Advanced.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Advanced.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -4,9 +4,12 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "../User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<chapter id="chap-User_Guide-Advanced_Actions"> - <title>Advanced Actions</title> - <!-- DOCS NOTE: Bug 793802: Added Info about SP roles. Added in discrete file for relocation. --><xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="Advanced/SP_Roles.xml"/> + <chapter id="chap-User_Guide-Advanced_Actions"> + <title>Advanced Actions</title> +<!-- DOCS NOTE: Bug 793802: Added Info about SP roles. Added in discrete file for relocation. --> + <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="Advanced/SP_Roles.xml"/> + <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="Advanced/Manage_Site_Resources.xml"/> + <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="Advanced/Administration.xml"/> -</chapter> + </chapter> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Categories.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Categories.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Categories.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -4,196 +4,152 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "../../User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<section id="sect-User_Guide-Category_Navigation"> - <title>Category Navigation</title> - <para> - The <emphasis>Category Navigation Portlet</emphasis> and <emphasis>Parameterized Content List Viewer</emphasis> portlets avoid the need for long URLs when viewing a content and enable users to see published documents or web contents in specific categories in one page. - </para> - <para> - Using symbolic links, the database can retrieve the content no matter where the object physically resides. The relations between shortcuts can also be managed in this way. - </para> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Category_Navigation-Access_to_Category_Navigation_Portlet"> - <title>Access to Category Navigation Portlet</title> - <step> + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Category_Navigation"> + <title>Category Navigation</title> + <para> - Go to <guilabel>News</guilabel> on the navigation bar: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" scale="100" fileref="images/newsnavigationbar.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsnavigationbar.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + The <emphasis>Category Navigation Portlet</emphasis> and <emphasis>Parameterized Content List Viewer</emphasis> portlets avoid the need for long URLs when viewing a content and enable users to see published documents or web contents in specific categories in one page. + </para> + <para> - The left panel lists all the categories containing documents or web contents. - </para> - <para> - The right panel displays any documents selected in the left pane. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select a category that you want to view on the left, it will be shown on the right (only published documents or web content are shown). - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" scale="" fileref="images/categorypanes.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/categorypanes.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para>Click <guilabel>Go to previous</guilabel> to return to the parent category.</para> - </step> - </procedure> - <formalpara> - <title>The Edit Mode of the Category Navigation Portlet</title> - <para> - Administrators can edit the Category Navigation portlet with the following procedure: - </para> - </formalpara> - <procedure> - <title/> - <step> - <para> - Go to <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Group</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Administration</guimenuitem> - <guimenuitem>Page Management</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice> on the administration bar. The <guilabel>Manage Pages</guilabel> list will appear: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/categorynavigation.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/categorynavigation.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/editicon2.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>pencil</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon in the <emphasis>Category navigation portlet</emphasis> entry to open the page to edit this portlet. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/editcn.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/editcn.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/editicon4.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>pencil</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon to open a form to edit the portlet settings. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/cneditmode.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/cneditmode.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/icon1.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>scroll arrows</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> to select the repository for documents in the Repository field. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter the name of a category in the <guilabel>Title</guilabel> field. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the tree name for a category. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the template for displaying categories. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/magnifyingglassicon.png" format="PNG" width="7mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>magnifying glass</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon to select the target path. The <guilabel>Page Selector</guilabel> form will appear: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/pageselector.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/pageselector.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/bluedroparrow.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>down arrow</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> to select the navigation on the left pane. The corresponding pages will be displayed on the left pane and the corresponding paths will be displayed on the right pane. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/greentick.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>green tick</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon to select the path. This path will be displayed in the <guilabel>Show in Page</guilabel> field of the <guilabel>Edit Mode</guilabel> tab. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to accept saving the configuration for the Category Navigation portlet.</para> - </step> - </procedure> - <note> -<title>Note</title> - <para>In the Edit Mode tab, some options are disable.</para> - </note> -</section> \ No newline at end of file + Using symbolic links, the database can retrieve the content no matter where the object physically resides. The relations between shortcuts can also be managed in this way. + </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Category_Navigation-Access_to_Category_Navigation_Portlet"> + <title>Access to Category Navigation Portlet</title> + + <step> + <para> + Go to <guilabel>News</guilabel> on the navigation bar: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" scale="100" fileref="images/newsnavigationbar.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsnavigationbar.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + The left panel lists all the categories containing documents or web contents. + </para> + + <para> + The right panel displays any documents selected in the left pane. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select a category that you want to view on the left, it will be shown on the right (only published documents or web content are shown). + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" scale="" fileref="images/categorypanes.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/categorypanes.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Go to previous</guilabel> to return to the parent category. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <formalpara> + <title>The Edit Mode of the Category Navigation Portlet</title> <para> + Administrators can edit the Category Navigation portlet with the following procedure: + </para> + </formalpara> + + <procedure> + <title/> + + <step> + <para> + Go to <menuchoice> <guimenu>Group</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Administration</guimenuitem> <guimenuitem>Page Management</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> on the administration bar. The <guilabel>Manage Pages</guilabel> list will appear: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/categorynavigation.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/categorynavigation.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>pencil</guilabel> icon in the <emphasis>Category navigation portlet</emphasis> entry to open the page to edit this portlet. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/editcn.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/editcn.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>pencil</guilabel> icon to open a form to edit the portlet settings. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/cneditmode.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/cneditmode.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>scroll arrows</guilabel> to select the repository for documents in the Repository field. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter the name of a category in the <guilabel>Title</guilabel> field. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select the tree name for a category. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select the template for displaying categories. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>magnifying glass</guilabel> icon to select the target path. The <guilabel>Page Selector</guilabel> form will appear: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/pageselector.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/pageselector.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>down arrow</guilabel> to select the navigation on the left pane. The corresponding pages will be displayed on the left pane and the corresponding paths will be displayed on the right pane. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>green tick</guilabel> icon to select the path. This path will be displayed in the <guilabel>Show in Page</guilabel> field of the <guilabel>Edit Mode</guilabel> tab. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to accept saving the configuration for the Category Navigation portlet. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <note> + <title>Note</title> + + <para> + In the Edit Mode tab, some options are disable. + </para> + </note> + </section> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Content_By_Query.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Content_By_Query.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Content_By_Query.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -20,11 +20,7 @@ <step> <para> - Go to <menuchoice> <guimenu>Site Editor</guimenu> - <guimenuitem> - Add New Page - </guimenuitem> - </menuchoice>, and then fill out all the necessary fields in the Wizard form. + Go to <menuchoice> <guimenu>Site Editor</guimenu> <guimenuitem> Add New Page </guimenuitem> </menuchoice>, and then fill out all the necessary fields in the Wizard form. </para> </step> @@ -34,41 +30,17 @@ </para> <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/content_by_query.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/content_by_query.png" format="PNG" width="210mm"/> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/content_by_query.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/content_by_query.png" format="PNG" width="210mm"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject> </step> <step> <para> - Hover your mouse over the Contents By Query portlet, then click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/editicon4.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - - <textobject> - <phrase> - pencil - </phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon to edit the portlet. + Hover your mouse over the Contents By Query portlet, then click the <guilabel> pencil </guilabel> icon to edit the portlet. </para> <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/query.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/query.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/query.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/query.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject> <para> @@ -76,13 +48,7 @@ </para> <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/edit_mode_query.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/edit_mode_query.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/edit_mode_query.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/edit_mode_query.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject> </step> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Content_Inside_Categories.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Content_Inside_Categories.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Content_Inside_Categories.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -3,92 +3,87 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "../../User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<section id="sect-User_Guide-Content_Inside_Categories"> - <title>Content Inside Categories</title> - <para> - You can create new contents in any folders or directly in a CLV with <emphasis>Incontext Editing</emphasis>. However, creating contents inside a category helps you easily and quickly manage and publish them. - </para> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Content_Inside_Categories-What_is_a_Category_in_eXo_Content"> - <title>Categories in Site Publisher</title> + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Content_Inside_Categories"> + <title>Content Inside Categories</title> + + <para> + You can create new contents in any folders or directly in a CLV with <emphasis>Incontext Editing</emphasis>. However, creating contents inside a category helps you easily and quickly manage and publish them. + </para> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Content_Inside_Categories-What_is_a_Category_in_eXo_Content"> + <title>Categories in Site Publisher</title> + <para> - <emphasis>Categories</emphasis> are used to sort and organize documents to ease searches when browsing documents online. After creating a document, you should categorize it by adding it to a category. + <emphasis>Categories</emphasis> are used to sort and organize documents to ease searches when browsing documents online. After creating a document, you should categorize it by adding it to a category. </para> + <para> Alternatively, creating documents directly in categories automatically creates links to them within the category. When you browse the category, the referenced documents will be found and displayed as children of the category node. - </para> + </para> + <para> Categories are stored in the JCR itself . - </para> - </section> - - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Content_Inside_Categories-Create_a_Content"> - <title>Create a Content</title> + </para> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Content_Inside_Categories-Create_a_Content"> + <title>Create a Content</title> + <para> This section will show you how to create a content in a category. - </para> + </para> + <para> Do the following: - </para> + </para> + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Create_a_Content-Create_a_content"> <title>Create a content</title> - <step> - <para> - Go to <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Group</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Content Explorer</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice> and select a drive. For example; <guilabel>acme-category</guilabel> is available as a drive in the following illustration: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/selectcategory.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/selectcategory.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - + + <step> + <para> + Go to <menuchoice> <guimenu>Group</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Content Explorer</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> and select a drive. For example; <guilabel>acme-category</guilabel> is available as a drive in the following illustration: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/selectcategory.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/selectcategory.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> - <step> - <para> - Highlight a category in the left pane. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/highlight_category.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/highlight_category.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + + <step> + <para> + Highlight a category in the left pane. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/highlight_category.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/highlight_category.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the <guilabel>Add Content</guilabel> button to create a new document under the selected category. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Choose a template and complete the fields in the form presented. - </para> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Add Content</guilabel> button to create a new document under the selected category. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> and the new content is created: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/createdcontent.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/createdcontent.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <para> + Choose a template and complete the fields in the form presented. + </para> </step> - </procedure> - - </section> - - <!-- Remove + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> and the new content is created: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/createdcontent.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/createdcontent.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> +<!-- Remove <section id="sect-User_Guide-Content_Inside_Categories-Organize_Content"> <title>Organize Content</title> <para> After a content is created in a category, it will be stored in Category Navigation. ( See more about Category Navigation at <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Category_Navigation"/> .) </para> @@ -101,6 +96,4 @@ <para>Here, you can edit and publish it. See <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Contribute_Content"/> the to know how to edit and publish a content.</para> </section> --> -</section> - - + </section> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Contribute_Content.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Contribute_Content.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Contribute_Content.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -14,13 +14,7 @@ </para> <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/twomodes.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/twomodes.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="148mm"/> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/twomodes.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/twomodes.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="148mm"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject> <variablelist> @@ -29,21 +23,22 @@ <listitem> <para> - In this mode, you can edit all contents of the current site. - </para> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - You can access <literal>In-line</literal> editing by double-clinking the content, which will open that content to editing without redirecting to another part of the site. This allows for quick, in-place, editing. Read more in <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Contribute_Content-InContext_Editing"/>. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - Or you can access edit tools by hovering the mouse pointer over the content you want to edit. These tools include the publication status, a publish function (for draft contents) and an edit function. - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - + In this mode, you can edit all contents of the current site. + </para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + You can access <literal>In-line</literal> editing by double-clinking the content, which will open that content to editing without redirecting to another part of the site. This allows for quick, in-place, editing. Read more in <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Contribute_Content-InContext_Editing"/>. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + Or you can access edit tools by hovering the mouse pointer over the content you want to edit. These tools include the publication status, a publish function (for draft contents) and an edit function. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> </listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -63,13 +58,7 @@ </para> <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/publishedmode.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/publishedmode.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/publishedmode.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/publishedmode.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject> <para> @@ -81,13 +70,7 @@ </para> <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/singlecontentviewer1.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/singlecontentviewer1.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/singlecontentviewer1.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/singlecontentviewer1.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject> <para> @@ -95,13 +78,7 @@ </para> <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/lcv.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/lcv.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/lcv.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/lcv.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject> </section> @@ -146,29 +123,17 @@ </para> <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/templateform.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/templateform.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/templateform.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/templateform.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject> </step> - + <step> <para> Select a template for your content by clicking it and the corresponding template is opened. Each template has an Info bar on the top of the template: </para> <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/info_bar.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata width="150mm" align="center" fileref="images/info_bar.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/info_bar.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata width="150mm" align="center" fileref="images/info_bar.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject> <para> @@ -202,17 +167,7 @@ <listitem> <para> - The - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/fullscreen_option.png" format="PNG" width="7mm"/> - </imageobject> - - <textobject> - <phrase>fullscreen icon</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - (on the far right of the info bar) allows you to switch on/off the fullscreen mode. + The <guilabel>fullscreen icon</guilabel> (on the far right of the info bar) allows you to switch on/off the fullscreen mode. </para> </listitem> </itemizedlist> @@ -261,27 +216,11 @@ <step> <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/editicon4.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - - <textobject> - <phrase>pencil</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon at the right corner of the content you want to edit. You will be redirected to the Content Explorer with the document form for you to edit. + Click the <guilabel>pencil</guilabel> icon at the right corner of the content you want to edit. You will be redirected to the Content Explorer with the document form for you to edit. </para> <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/editform.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/editform.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/editform.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/editform.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject> </step> @@ -293,45 +232,17 @@ <step> <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/backicon.png" format="PNG" width="9mm"/> - </imageobject> - - <textobject> - <phrase>green reverse arrow</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon to return to the site and in the Edit Mode, the content in the <emphasis>draft</emphasis> state will be visible. + Click the <guilabel>green reverse arrow</guilabel> icon to return to the site and in the Edit Mode, the content in the <emphasis>draft</emphasis> state will be visible. </para> <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/draftcontent.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/draftcontent.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/draftcontent.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/draftcontent.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject> </step> <step> <para> - To publish the edited content, click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata width="5mm" fileref="images/publish-icon.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon, or click - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata width="5mm" fileref="images/ publish_icon1.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - on the action bar and it is now in the published state. + To publish the edited content, click the <guilabel>Publish</guilabel> icon, or click <guilabel>Publish</guilabel> on the action bar and it is now in the published state. </para> </step> </procedure> @@ -363,13 +274,7 @@ </para> <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/managecontent.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/managecontent.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/managecontent.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/managecontent.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject> <para> @@ -377,13 +282,7 @@ </para> <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/managecontent1.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/managecontent1.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/managecontent1.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/managecontent1.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject> </step> @@ -422,13 +321,7 @@ </para> <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/scvpreferences.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/scvpreferences.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/scvpreferences.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/scvpreferences.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject> <para> @@ -436,13 +329,7 @@ </para> <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/scvpreferences1.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/scvpreferences1.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/scvpreferences1.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/scvpreferences1.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject> <table> @@ -468,15 +355,7 @@ </entry> <entry> - Select the path of the content that you want to show by clicking the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/blueplusicon.png" format="PNG" width="7mm"/> - </imageobject> - - <textobject> - <phrase>blue plus</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon. + Select the path of the content that you want to show by clicking the <guilabel>blue plus</guilabel> icon. </entry> </row> @@ -488,7 +367,9 @@ <entry> <para> Allow configuring Title, Date and OptionBar visibility. - </para> <itemizedlist> + </para> + + <itemizedlist> <listitem> <para> <guilabel>Show Title</guilabel>: Specify whether the title of the content is displayed or not. @@ -538,8 +419,11 @@ </entry> <entry> - <para>When clicking on this link, the Advanced pane will be shown. If <guilabel>Contextual Content</guilabel> property is set as<emphasis>Disable</emphasis>, the Advanced pane is closed by default. The content should enable “dynamic navigation” that interprets the URL and shows a content.</para> <para> + When clicking on this link, the Advanced pane will be shown. If <guilabel>Contextual Content</guilabel> property is set as<emphasis>Disable</emphasis>, the Advanced pane is closed by default. The content should enable “dynamic navigation” that interprets the URL and shows a content. + </para> + + <para> The content can be restricted by authorization or by User role. Use the appropriate radio button under <guilabel>Contents Visibility</guilabel> to configure this. </para> </entry> @@ -550,17 +434,7 @@ <note> <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/questionicon.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - - <textobject> - <phrase>question mark</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon to see a quick help pane for each section. + Click the <guilabel>question mark</guilabel> icon to see a quick help pane for each section. </para> </note> </step> @@ -571,13 +445,7 @@ </para> <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/selectcontent.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/selectcontent.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/selectcontent.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/selectcontent.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject> </step> @@ -593,46 +461,28 @@ </para> <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/editedscv.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/editedscv.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/editedscv.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/editedscv.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject> </step> <step> <para> - In the <guilabel>Print Setting</guilabel> area, click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/previewicon2.png" format="PNG" width="7mm"/> - </imageobject> - - <textobject> - <phrase>magnifying glass</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon to open the <guilabel>UIPageselector</guilabel> dialog, you will see <guilabel>Printviewer.</guilabel> + In the <guilabel>Print Setting</guilabel> area, click the <guilabel>magnifying glass</guilabel> icon to open the <guilabel>UIPageselector</guilabel> dialog, you will see <guilabel>Printviewer.</guilabel> </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guibutton>Save</guibutton> and you will be returned to the content, with the print bar showing: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/print_bar.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/print_bar.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="100mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> + </step> + + <step> <para> + Click <guibutton>Save</guibutton> and you will be returned to the content, with the print bar showing: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/print_bar.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/print_bar.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="100mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> Click the <guilabel>Print</guilabel> button and the content is opened in the print viewer page. </para> @@ -640,27 +490,10 @@ <title>Example</title> <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/printreview.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/printreview.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/printreview.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/printreview.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> <caption> <simplelist> - <member> - <emphasis>http://localhost:8080/ecmdemo/private/acme/ <emphasis role="bold"> printviewer?content-id </emphasis> =/repository/collaboration/sites%20content/live/acme/web%20contents/site%20artifacts/Introduce&amp;isPrint=true </emphasis> - </member> - - <member> - <emphasis role="bold">printviewer?</emphasis>: the print viewer page of the content. - </member> - - <member> - <emphasis role="bold">content-id</emphasis>: the parameter containing the content path. - </member> + <member> <emphasis>http://localhost:8080/ecmdemo/private/acme/ <emphasis role="bold"> printviewer?content-id </emphasis> =/repository/collaboration/sites%20content/live/acme/web%20contents/site%20artifacts/Introduce&amp;isPrint=true </emphasis> </member> <member> <emphasis role="bold">printviewer?</emphasis>: the print viewer page of the content. </member> <member> <emphasis role="bold">content-id</emphasis>: the parameter containing the content path. </member> </simplelist> </caption> </mediaobject> @@ -689,13 +522,7 @@ </para> <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/clvpreferences.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/clvpreferences.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/clvpreferences.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/clvpreferences.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject> <para> @@ -703,13 +530,7 @@ </para> <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/clvpreferences1.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/clvpreferences1.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/clvpreferences1.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/clvpreferences1.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject> <table frame="all"> @@ -741,7 +562,9 @@ <entry> <para> This mode is to select web content for list viewer. There are two modes: - </para> <itemizedlist> + </para> + + <itemizedlist> <listitem> <para> <guilabel>By Folder</guilabel>: This mode allows you to select a content folder in the <guilabel>Folder path</guilabel> field. @@ -903,17 +726,7 @@ <step> <para> - Browse the documents or web content of an available site by clicking the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/plusicon.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - - <textobject> - <phrase>blue plus</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon next to the <guilabel>folder path</guilabel> field. + Browse the documents or web content of an available site by clicking the <guilabel>blue plus</guilabel> icon next to the <guilabel>folder path</guilabel> field. </para> </step> @@ -972,13 +785,7 @@ </para> <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/acme_inline_editing.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata width="150mm" align="center" fileref="images/acme_inline_editing.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/acme_inline_editing.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata width="150mm" align="center" fileref="images/acme_inline_editing.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject> </step> @@ -988,13 +795,7 @@ </para> <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/Edit_mode_Inline.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata width="50mm" align="center" fileref="images/Edit_mode_Inline.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/Edit_mode_Inline.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata width="50mm" align="center" fileref="images/Edit_mode_Inline.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject> <para> @@ -1012,13 +813,7 @@ </para> <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/Highlighted_Edit_Area.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata width="150mm" align="center" fileref="images/Highlighted_Edit_Area.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/Highlighted_Edit_Area.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata width="150mm" align="center" fileref="images/Highlighted_Edit_Area.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject> </step> @@ -1028,13 +823,7 @@ </para> <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/edit_area_Inline.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata width="150mm" align="center" fileref="images/edit_area_Inline.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/edit_area_Inline.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata width="150mm" align="center" fileref="images/edit_area_Inline.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject> <para> @@ -1042,43 +831,17 @@ </para> <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/CKEditor_Inline.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata width="150mm" align="center" fileref="images/CKEditor_Inline.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/CKEditor_Inline.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata width="150mm" align="center" fileref="images/CKEditor_Inline.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject> </step> <step> <para> - Make changes on the Edit area, then click - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata width="5mm" fileref="images/Accepticon.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - - <textobject> - <phrase>the Accept icon</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - to accept; + Make changes on the Edit area, then click <guilabel>the Accept icon</guilabel> to accept; </para> <para> - Or click - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata width="5mm" fileref="images/Cancelicon.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - - <textobject> - <phrase>the Cancel icon</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - to discard changes. + Or click <guilabel>the Cancel icon</guilabel> to discard changes. </para> </step> @@ -1092,37 +855,15 @@ </para> <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/publish_Inline.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata width="150mm" align="center" fileref="images/publish_Inline.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/publish_Inline.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata width="150mm" align="center" fileref="images/publish_Inline.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject> <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata width="5mm" fileref="images/publish-icon.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - - <textobject> - <phrase>publish</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon to publish the content, and it is now in the Published state: + Click the <guilabel>publish</guilabel> icon to publish the content, and it is now in the Published state: </para> <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/publish-state.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata width="100mm" align="center" fileref="images/publish-state.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/publish-state.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata width="100mm" align="center" fileref="images/publish-state.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject> </step> </procedure> @@ -1153,19 +894,11 @@ <step> <para> - Click - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/insert_portal_link.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - to open the <emphasis role="bold">InsertPortalLink</emphasis> form: + Click <guilabel>Link</guilabel> to open the <emphasis role="bold">InsertPortalLink</emphasis> form: </para> <mediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/insert_portal_link_form.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> + <imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/insert_portal_link_form.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject> </step> @@ -1199,31 +932,17 @@ <step> <para> - Click - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/insert_content.png"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - to open a page: + Click <guilabel>Insert Content</guilabel> to open a page: </para> <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/content_selector.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/content_selector.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject> </step> <step> <para> - Click + in the left panel to list the contents in the right panel or click - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/upload_file.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - to upload a file from your local device. + Click + in the left panel to list the contents in the right panel or click <guilabel>Upload File</guilabel> to upload a file from your local device. </para> </step> @@ -1244,19 +963,7 @@ </para> <para> - <menuchoice> <guimenu>Request approval</guimenu> - <guimenuitem> - Approval - </guimenuitem> - - <guimenuitem> - Stage - </guimenuitem> - - <guimenuitem> - Publish - </guimenuitem> - </menuchoice> + <menuchoice> <guimenu>Request approval</guimenu> <guimenuitem> Approval </guimenuitem> <guimenuitem> Stage </guimenuitem> <guimenuitem> Publish </guimenuitem> </menuchoice> </para> <para> @@ -1277,14 +984,8 @@ </para> <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/managepublication.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/managepublication.png" format="PNG" align="center" - width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/managepublication.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/managepublication.png" format="PNG" align="center" + width="150mm"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject> </listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -1316,13 +1017,7 @@ </para> <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/stage.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/stage.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/stage.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/stage.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject> </listitem> </varlistentry> @@ -1342,13 +1037,7 @@ </note> <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/bottombar.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/bottombar.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/bottombar.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/bottombar.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject> </listitem> </varlistentry> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Dynamic_Navigation.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Dynamic_Navigation.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Dynamic_Navigation.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -3,174 +3,184 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "../../User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<section id="sect-User_Guide-Dynamic_Navigation"> - <title>Dynamic Navigation</title> - <para> - <emphasis>Dynamic Navigation</emphasis> enables you to set a parameter to configure the portlet by URL. This means that the URL containing the content path can be dynamically changed. - </para> - <para> - This section shows you how to use Dynamic Navigation in Site Publisher. - </para> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Dynamic_Navigation-Access_Dynamic_Navigation"> - <title>Access Dynamic Navigation</title> + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Dynamic_Navigation"> + <title>Dynamic Navigation</title> + + <para> + <emphasis>Dynamic Navigation</emphasis> enables you to set a parameter to configure the portlet by URL. This means that the URL containing the content path can be dynamically changed. + </para> + + <para> + This section shows you how to use Dynamic Navigation in Site Publisher. + </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Dynamic_Navigation-Access_Dynamic_Navigation"> + <title>Access Dynamic Navigation</title> + <step> <para> - Turn on the <emphasis role="bold">Edit Mode</emphasis> and hover the mouse cursor over either an <emphasis role="bold">SCV</emphasis> content element or a <emphasis role="bold">CLV</emphasis> content element. Click the <guilabel>Preferences</guilabel> icon that appears. + Turn on the <emphasis role="bold">Edit Mode</emphasis> and hover the mouse cursor over either an <emphasis role="bold">SCV</emphasis> content element or a <emphasis role="bold">CLV</emphasis> content element. Click the <guilabel>Preferences</guilabel> icon that appears. </para> - </step> + </step> + <step> <para> - Show the Dynamic Navigation pane by clicking the <guilabel>Advanced</guilabel> link at the bottom of the preferences window. + Show the Dynamic Navigation pane by clicking the <guilabel>Advanced</guilabel> link at the bottom of the preferences window. </para> + <example> <title>Dynamic Navigation in SCV</title> + <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/scvpreferences1.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/scvpreferences1.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/scvpreferences1.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/scvpreferences1.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </example> - <table frame="all"> - <title></title> - <tgroup cols="2"> - <thead> + + <table frame="all"> + <title></title> + + <tgroup cols="2"> + <thead> <row> <entry> Field </entry> + <entry> Details </entry> </row> - </thead> - <tbody> - <row> - <entry> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry> <guilabel>Contextual Content</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> + </entry> + + <entry> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> <guilabel>Disable</guilabel>: Means a single content will be opened by an URL containing the Content Path. - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> <guilabel>Enable</guilabel>: This portlet is configured with the provided parameter (content-id by default). - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>By</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry> - This parameter is the key in the URL to let SCV know which is the path in the current URL. It is editable when Contextual Content is enabled. - </entry> - </row> - </tbody> - </tgroup> - </table> - <para> - For example, open a single content with the Content Path <emphasis role="bold">ACME Introduce</emphasis>. The URL of the content is the following: - </para> - <para> - <emphasis>http://example.com:8080/ecmdemo/private/acme/printviewer?<emphasis role="bold">content-id</emphasis>=/repository/collaboration/sites content/live/acme/web contents/site artifacts/<emphasis role="bold">Introduce</emphasis>&amp;isPrint=true</emphasis> - </para> - <para> - <example> - <title>Dynamic Navigation in CLV</title> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/dynamicnavigation-clv.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/dynamicnavigation-clv.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </example> - </para> - <para> - <table frame="all"> - <title></title> - <tgroup cols="2"> - <thead> + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </entry> + </row> + <row> <entry> - Field + <guilabel>By</guilabel> </entry> + <entry> - Details + This parameter is the key in the URL to let SCV know which is the path in the current URL. It is editable when Contextual Content is enabled. </entry> </row> - </thead> - <tbody> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Contextual Folder</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - <guilabel>Disable</guilabel>: A single content will be opened by an URL containing the Folder Path (for CLV) - </para> - - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - <guilabel>Enable</guilabel>: The path of content list (<guilabel>Folder Path</guilabel> in the <guilabel>Content Selection</guilabel> path) can be dynamically changed by URL. - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>By</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry> - This parameter is the key in the URL to let CLV know which is the actual path in the current URL. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <emphasis role="bold">Show in page</emphasis> - </entry> - <entry> - A single content in CLV will be shown in a selected page. You can choose any page but you should take one with a Content Detail Portlet. The Content Detail Portlet should enable “dynamic navigation” that interprets the URL and shows a single content. - </entry> - - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <emphasis role="bold">With</emphasis> - </entry> - <entry> - This parameter is the key in the URL to let SCV know which really is the path in the current URL. - </entry> - - </row> - - </tbody> - - </tgroup> - - </table> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + + <para> + For example, open a single content with the Content Path <emphasis role="bold">ACME Introduce</emphasis>. The URL of the content is the following: </para> - - </step> - - </procedure> - -</section> - - + + <para> + <emphasis>http://example.com:8080/ecmdemo/private/acme/printviewer?<emphasis role="bold">content-id</emphasis>=/repository/collaboration/sites content/live/acme/web contents/site artifacts/<emphasis role="bold">Introduce</emphasis>&amp;isPrint=true</emphasis> + </para> + + <para> + <example> + <title>Dynamic Navigation in CLV</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/dynamicnavigation-clv.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/dynamicnavigation-clv.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </example> + </para> + + <para> + <table frame="all"> + <title></title> + + <tgroup cols="2"> + <thead> + <row> + <entry> + Field + </entry> + + <entry> + Details + </entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Contextual Folder</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + <guilabel>Disable</guilabel>: A single content will be opened by an URL containing the Folder Path (for CLV) + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + <guilabel>Enable</guilabel>: The path of content list (<guilabel>Folder Path</guilabel> in the <guilabel>Content Selection</guilabel> path) can be dynamically changed by URL. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>By</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + This parameter is the key in the URL to let CLV know which is the actual path in the current URL. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <emphasis role="bold">Show in page</emphasis> + </entry> + + <entry> + A single content in CLV will be shown in a selected page. You can choose any page but you should take one with a Content Detail Portlet. The Content Detail Portlet should enable “dynamic navigation” that interprets the URL and shows a single content. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <emphasis role="bold">With</emphasis> + </entry> + + <entry> + This parameter is the key in the URL to let SCV know which really is the path in the current URL. + </entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/FastContentCreator.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/FastContentCreator.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/FastContentCreator.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -4,254 +4,270 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "../../User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<section id="sect-User_Guide-Fast_Content_Creator"> - <title>Fast Content Creator</title> - <para> - The <emphasis>Fast Content Creator</emphasis> portlet in Site Publisher allows you to quickly create and save a new document with only one template in a specific location without having to access <emphasis>Content Explorer</emphasis>. This can dramatically expedite the creation of a single new document. - </para> - <para> - There are two modes in Fast Content Creator: <emphasis>Basic Content Creator</emphasis> and <emphasis>Standard Content Creator</emphasis>. - </para> - <para> - The Standard Content Creator mode adds an <guilabel>Actions</guilabel> section to the <emphasis role="bold">Edit Mode</emphasis> tab (see the details at <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Fast_Content_Creator-Configuration"/>) which allows you to add an action to your document when configuring it. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/standard-mode1.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/standard-mode1.png" format="PNG" width="210mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - To add an action to a document, click <guilabel>Add</guilabel> or the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/plusicon1.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>plus</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon to open the <guilabel>Add action form</guilabel>. Follow the procedure in <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Actions-Add_an_action"/>. - </para> - - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Fast_Content_Creator-Configuration"> - <title>Configuration</title> - <para> - In Site Publisher, the Fast Content Creator is applied in the <guilabel>Contact Us</guilabel> portlet with the <emphasis>Basic Content Creator</emphasis> mode by default. You can configure the <emphasis>Fast Content Creator</emphasis> by editing the <guilabel>Contact Us</guilabel> portlet. - </para> - <para> - To configure the Fast Content Creator, do the following: - </para> - <procedure> - <title>Configuration of Fast Content Creator</title> - <step> - <para> - Go to <emphasis role="bold">Contact Us</emphasis> on the Navigation bar or go to - <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Site</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Acme</guimenuitem> - <guimenuitem>Contact Us</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice> - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Site Editor</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Edit Page</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice> on the administration bar. The <guilabel>Page Editor</guilabel> will be displayed. + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Fast_Content_Creator"> + <title>Fast Content Creator</title> + + <para> + The <emphasis>Fast Content Creator</emphasis> portlet in Site Publisher allows you to quickly create and save a new document with only one template in a specific location without having to access <emphasis>Content Explorer</emphasis>. This can dramatically expedite the creation of a single new document. + </para> + + <para> + There are two modes in Fast Content Creator: <emphasis>Basic Content Creator</emphasis> and <emphasis>Standard Content Creator</emphasis>. + </para> + + <para> + The Standard Content Creator mode adds an <guilabel>Actions</guilabel> section to the <emphasis role="bold">Edit Mode</emphasis> tab (see the details at <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Fast_Content_Creator-Configuration"/>) which allows you to add an action to your document when configuring it. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/standard-mode1.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/standard-mode1.png" format="PNG" width="210mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + To add an action to a document, click <guilabel>Add</guilabel> or the <guilabel>plus</guilabel> icon to open the <guilabel>Add action form</guilabel>. Follow the procedure in <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Actions-Add_an_action"/>. + </para> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Fast_Content_Creator-Configuration"> + <title>Configuration</title> + + <para> + In Site Publisher, the Fast Content Creator is applied in the <guilabel>Contact Us</guilabel> portlet with the <emphasis>Basic Content Creator</emphasis> mode by default. You can configure the <emphasis>Fast Content Creator</emphasis> by editing the <guilabel>Contact Us</guilabel> portlet. </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Hover the mouse pointer over the <guilabel>Contact Us</guilabel> portlet and the toolbar appears. + + <para> + To configure the Fast Content Creator, do the following: </para> + + <procedure> + <title>Configuration of Fast Content Creator</title> + + <step> + <para> + Go to <emphasis role="bold">Contact Us</emphasis> on the Navigation bar or go to <menuchoice> <guimenu>Site</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Acme</guimenuitem> <guimenuitem>Contact Us</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <menuchoice> <guimenu>Site Editor</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Edit Page</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> on the administration bar. The <guilabel>Page Editor</guilabel> will be displayed. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Hover the mouse pointer over the <guilabel>Contact Us</guilabel> portlet and the toolbar appears. + </para> + + <para> + Click the <guilabel>pencil</guilabel> icon to edit the portlet. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/contactusportlet.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/contactusportlet.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + The form with the <emphasis>Edit Mode</emphasis> tab appears: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/editnodetab.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/editnodetab.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <table> + <title/> + + <tgroup cols="2"> + <thead> + <row> + <entry> + Field + </entry> + + <entry> + Details + </entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Location to save</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + Select the location to save documents or messages. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Select template</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + Select a document template. There are different input fields corresponding to each template. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Custom save button</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + Change the label for the save button. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Custom save message</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + Show a custom message that informs you have just saved a document. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Redirect</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + Allow you to redirect the path in the Redirect path field. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Redirect path</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + Show a path to which you will be directed after clicking <emphasis role="bold">OK</emphasis> in the confirmation message. + </entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select the location to save: + </para> + + <substeps> + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>magnifying glass</guilabel> icon to select a specific location to save documents. The <guilabel>Select Location</guilabel> form appears: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/selectlocationform.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/selectlocationform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select the parent node on the left panel and click the <guilabel>green tick</guilabel> icon in the <guilabel>Action</guilabel> column to choose the child node on the right panel. After being selected, this location will be displayed on the <guilabel>Location to save</guilabel> field. Created documents will be saved in this location. + </para> + </step> + </substeps> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select a template which is used to create a new document. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Change the label for the <guilabel>Custom save</guilabel> button, and the content for the <guilabel>Custom save message</guilabel>. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Tick the <guilabel>Redirect</guilabel> checkbox if you want to redirect to the path in the <guilabel>Redirect path</guilabel> field after clicking <guilabel>OK</guilabel> in the save message. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to finish the configuration of the <emphasis>Fast Content Creator</emphasis> portlet. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>OK</guilabel> in the confirmation message. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Close</guilabel> to quit the form. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Fast_Content_Creator-Create_a_new_document"> + <title>Create a new document</title> + <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/editicon4.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>pencil</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon to edit the portlet. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/contactusportlet.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/contactusportlet.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - The form with the <emphasis>Edit Mode</emphasis> tab appears: + To create a new document with the Fast Content Creator, do the following: </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/editnodetab.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/editnodetab.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <table> - <title/> - <tgroup cols="2"> - <thead> - <row> - <entry> Field </entry> - <entry> Details </entry> - </row> - </thead> - <tbody> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Location to save</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> Select the location to save documents or messages. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Select template</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> Select a document template. There are different input fields corresponding to each template.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Custom save button</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> Change the label for the save button. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Custom save message</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> Show a custom message that informs you have just saved a document. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Redirect</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> Allow you to redirect the path in the Redirect path field. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Redirect path</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> Show a path to which you will be directed after clicking <emphasis role="bold">OK</emphasis> in the confirmation message. </entry> - </row> - </tbody> - </tgroup> - </table> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the location to save: - </para> - <substeps> - <step> - <para>Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/previewicon.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>magnifying glass</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon to select a specific location to save documents. The <guilabel>Select Location</guilabel> form appears: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/selectlocationform.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/selectlocationform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para>Select the parent node on the left panel and click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/greentick.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>green tick</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon in the <guilabel>Action</guilabel> column to choose the child node on the right panel. After being selected, this location will be displayed on the <guilabel>Location to save</guilabel> field. Created documents will be saved in this location. - </para> - </step> - </substeps> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select a template which is used to create a new document. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Change the label for the <guilabel>Custom save</guilabel> button, and the content for the <guilabel>Custom save message</guilabel>. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Tick the <guilabel>Redirect</guilabel> checkbox if you want to redirect to the path in the <guilabel>Redirect path</guilabel> field after clicking <guilabel>OK</guilabel> in the save message. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to finish the configuration of the <emphasis>Fast Content Creator</emphasis> portlet. - </para> - </step> - <step> + + <procedure> + <title>Create a new document</title> + + <step> + <para> + Go to <menuchoice> <guimenu>Site</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Acme</guimenuitem> <guimenuitem>Contact Us</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter values into all the fields in the <guilabel>Contact Us</guilabel> portlet. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to accept creating the new document. A message appears to let you know that the document is created successfully at the location that you established in the <guilabel>location to save</guilabel> field. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Fast_Content_Creator-View_a_new_document"> + <title>View a new document</title> + <para> - Click <guilabel>OK</guilabel> in the confirmation message. + After creating a new document, you can view it by do the following: </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Close</guilabel> to quit the form. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> - - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Fast_Content_Creator-Create_a_new_document"> - <title>Create a new document</title> - <para> - To create a new document with the Fast Content Creator, do the following: - </para> - <procedure> - <title>Create a new document</title> - <step> - <para> - Go to - <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Site</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Acme</guimenuitem> - <guimenuitem>Contact Us</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice>. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter values into all the fields in the <guilabel>Contact Us</guilabel> portlet. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to accept creating the new document. A message appears to let you know that the document is created successfully at the location that you established in the <guilabel>location to save</guilabel> field. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> - - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Fast_Content_Creator-View_a_new_document"> - <title>View a new document</title> - <para> - After creating a new document, you can view it by do the following: - </para> - <procedure> - <title> View a new document</title> - <step> - <para> - Go to <guilabel>Content Explorer</guilabel>. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the drive and the path that you established in the configuration of Fast Content Creator to view the new document. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> -</section> \ No newline at end of file + + <procedure> + <title>View a new document</title> + + <step> + <para> + Go to <guilabel>Content Explorer</guilabel>. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select the drive and the path that you established in the configuration of Fast Content Creator to view the new document. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + </section> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/FormGenerator.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/FormGenerator.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/FormGenerator.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -4,187 +4,164 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "../../User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<section id="sect-User_Guide-Form_Builder"> - <title>Form Builder</title> - <para> - The <emphasis>Form Builder</emphasis> portlet enables users to create and to edit various document type templates. Documents are stored in a node; therefore, the term <emphasis>node</emphasis> and node types are often applied. - </para> - <procedure> - <title/> - <step> + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Form_Builder"> + <title>Form Builder</title> + <para> - Go to <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Group</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Form Builder</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice> on the administration bar. The <emphasis>Form Builder</emphasis> will appear: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/formgeneratorform.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/formgeneratorform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter the node name into the <emphasis role="bold">Name</emphasis> field (an asterix [*] indicates that this a required value). - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter a brief description of the node. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the <guilabel>Form Builder</guilabel> tab. Items on this tab allow you to set properties for a node. Available components are displayed on the left pane. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/formbuildertab.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/formbuildertab.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the desired components on the left pane. The selected components will be displayed on the right pane. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/componentuparrow.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>up arrow</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - corresponding to the component to move this component up or the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/componentdownarrow.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>down arrow</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - to move the component down. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/editcomponenticon.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>pencil</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon that corresponds to the component to edit properties of that component. The form to edit properties appears like the illustration below: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/editcomponentpropertiesform.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/editcomponentpropertiesform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <table> - <title/> - <tgroup cols="2"> - <thead> - <row> - <entry> Field </entry> - <entry> Details </entry> - </row> - </thead> - <tbody> - <row> - <entry> Field Label </entry> - <entry> To enter the field label. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> Width </entry> - <entry>To enter the field width. If the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/rulesrequiredbox.png" format="PNG" width="39mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Rules:</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> checkbox is marked, the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/redstarasterix.png" format="PNG" width="4mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>red asterix</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> will appear beside the text box, indicating that values in this box are required. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> Height </entry> - <entry> To enter the field height. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> Default Value </entry> - <entry> To display the default value </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> Guidelines for User </entry> - <entry> To display instructions about this component. </entry> - </row> - </tbody> - </tgroup> - </table> - <para> - To delete the component, click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/trashicon.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>trash can</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> corresponding to the component. - </para> - <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/editcomponenticon.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>pencil</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon again to hide the form to edit the properties. - </para> - <para> - After editing the properties of the components, the components will appear similar to the illustration below: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/formgenerator.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/formgenerator.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to create the new node, or <guilabel>Reset</guilabel> to edit the node again before saving. - </para> - <para> - A message will inform that you created a node successfully. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> -</section> + The <emphasis>Form Builder</emphasis> portlet enables users to create and to edit various document type templates. Documents are stored in a node; therefore, the term <emphasis>node</emphasis> and node types are often applied. + </para> + + <procedure> + <title/> + + <step> + <para> + Go to <menuchoice> <guimenu>Group</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Form Builder</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> on the administration bar. The <emphasis>Form Builder</emphasis> will appear: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/formgeneratorform.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/formgeneratorform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter the node name into the <emphasis role="bold">Name</emphasis> field (an asterix [*] indicates that this a required value). + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter a brief description of the node. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Form Builder</guilabel> tab. Items on this tab allow you to set properties for a node. Available components are displayed on the left pane. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/formbuildertab.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/formbuildertab.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the desired components on the left pane. The selected components will be displayed on the right pane. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>down arrow</guilabel> to move the component down. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>pencil</guilabel> icon that corresponds to the component to edit properties of that component. The form to edit properties appears like the illustration below: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/editcomponentpropertiesform.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/editcomponentpropertiesform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <table> + <title/> + + <tgroup cols="2"> + <thead> + <row> + <entry> + Field + </entry> + + <entry> + Details + </entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry> + Field Label + </entry> + + <entry> + To enter the field label. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + Width + </entry> + + <entry> + To enter the field width. If the <guilabel>red asterix</guilabel> will appear beside the text box, indicating that values in this box are required. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + Height + </entry> + + <entry> + To enter the field height. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + Default Value + </entry> + + <entry> + To display the default value + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + Guidelines for User + </entry> + + <entry> + To display instructions about this component. + </entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + + <para> + To delete the component, click the <guilabel>trash can</guilabel> corresponding to the component. + </para> + + <para> + Click the <guilabel>pencil</guilabel> icon again to hide the form to edit the properties. + </para> + + <para> + After editing the properties of the components, the components will appear similar to the illustration below: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/formgenerator.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/formgenerator.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to create the new node, or <guilabel>Reset</guilabel> to edit the node again before saving. + </para> + + <para> + A message will inform that you created a node successfully. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Newsletters.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Newsletters.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Newsletters.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -4,1002 +4,1096 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "../../User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<section id="sect-User_Guide-Newsletters"> - <title>Newsletters</title> - <para> - Site Publisher provides a newsletter service aimed at helping users quickly get updated news from a website. - </para> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Newsletters-Newsletter_Viewer"> - <title>Newsletter Viewer</title> - <para> - With <emphasis>Newsletters</emphasis>, you can instantly get newsletters from your email to update the last information about categories and subscription. - </para> - <para> - Do the following to subscribe to newsletters: - </para> - <procedure> - <step> - <para> - Go to <menuchoice><guimenu>Newsletters</guimenu></menuchoice> on the navigation bar. The Newsletters page will appear: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/newsletters-newsletter_viewer.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/newsletters-newsletter_viewer.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter your email address in the <guilabel>Your Email</guilabel> field. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the checkbox corresponding to the subscription that you want to get newsletters. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/newsletters-subscription.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/newsletters-subscription.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="143mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Subscribe</guilabel>. A message informs that you have just subscribed to the selected newsletter will appear. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>OK</guilabel> in the confirmation message. You can reselect the subscription that you want or do not want to receive newsletters by re-selecting the checkbox in the <guilabel>Check to subscribe</guilabel> column. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/newsletters-subscript_select.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/newsletters-subscript_select.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Change your subscriptions</guilabel> to update your changes. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Forget this email</guilabel> if you want to unsubscribe from newsletters. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Newsletters-Manage_Newsletters"> - <title>Manage Newsletters</title> - <para> - Site Publisher allows administrators to easily and quickly manage newsletters. Go to <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Group</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Newsletters</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice> on the administration bar to access the Newsletters functionality. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/newsletters-newsletter_manager.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/newsletters-newsletter_manager.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Newsletters-Category_Management"> - <title>Category Management</title> + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Newsletters"> + <title>Newsletters</title> + <para> - Administrators can manage the <emphasis>categories</emphasis> that newsletters are distributed under. - </para> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Category_Management-Add_a_new_category"> - <title>Add a new category</title> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_new_category-Add_a_new_category"> - <title>Add a new category</title> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>New Category</guilabel> on the action bar of the Newsletters page. The Category form will appear. + Site Publisher provides a newsletter service aimed at helping users quickly get updated news from a website. </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/newsletters-category_form.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/newsletters-category_form.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="116mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <table id="tabl-User_Guide-Add_a_new_category-Category_Form_Field_Details"> - <title>Category Form Field Details</title> - <tgroup cols="2"> - <thead> - <row> - <entry> Field </entry> - <entry> Description </entry> - </row> - </thead> - <tbody> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Name</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> The name of a category. This field is required. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Title</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> The title of a category. This field is required. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Description</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> A brief description of the category. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Moderator</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> Select users/groups who have rights to manage this category.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Save</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> Accepts the addition of a new category. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> Quits the category form without adding a category. </entry> - </row> - </tbody> - </tgroup> - </table> - </step> - <step id="step-User_Guide-Add_a_new_category-Input_values_for_fields"> - <title>Input values for fields</title> - <substeps> - <step> - <para>Select a moderator for a category by clicking the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/usericon.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Select user</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon next to the Moderator field to select a user. The form to select users will appear. + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Newsletters-Newsletter_Viewer"> + <title>Newsletter Viewer</title> + + <para> + With <emphasis>Newsletters</emphasis>, you can instantly get newsletters from your email to update the last information about categories and subscription. + </para> + + <para> + Do the following to subscribe to newsletters: + </para> + + <procedure> + <step> + <para> + Go to <menuchoice><guimenu>Newsletters</guimenu></menuchoice> on the navigation bar. The Newsletters page will appear: </para> + <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/newsletters-user_selector_form.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/newsletters-user_selector_form.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/newsletters-newsletter_viewer.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/newsletters-newsletter_viewer.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> + <step> <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/greentick.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>green tick</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> corresponding to the user in the list that you want to select. + Enter your email address in the <guilabel>Your Email</guilabel> field. </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select the checkbox corresponding to the subscription that you want to get newsletters. + </para> + <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/newsletters-user_selector_form.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/newsletters-user_selector_form.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/newsletters-subscription.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/newsletters-subscription.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="143mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/grouppermission.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Select membership</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon to select users in a specific group. The <guilabel>Group selector</guilabel> will appear.</para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/newsletters-group_selector_form.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/newsletters-group_selector_form.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="139mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - Select a group from the left panel and a membership type in the right panel. The membership and group selected will be displayed in the <guilabel>Moderator</guilabel> field. After adding new categories, they will be added in the list of categories. + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Subscribe</guilabel>. A message informs that you have just subscribed to the selected newsletter will appear. </para> - </step> - </substeps> - <para> - After creating a category, you can create new subscriptions or newsletters for this category. - </para> - <para> - When you click the <guilabel>Administration</guilabel> button, you will see a drop-down menu consisting of all actions on this category. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>OK</guilabel> in the confirmation message. You can reselect the subscription that you want or do not want to receive newsletters by re-selecting the checkbox in the <guilabel>Check to subscribe</guilabel> column. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/newsletters-subscript_select.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/newsletters-subscript_select.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Change your subscriptions</guilabel> to update your changes. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Forget this email</guilabel> if you want to unsubscribe from newsletters. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Category_Management-Edit_a_category"> - <title>Edit a category</title> - <procedure> - <step> - <para> - Select a category that you want to edit and click <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Administration</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Edit Category</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice> in the drop-down menu to bring up the Category form. - </para> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Newsletters-Manage_Newsletters"> + <title>Manage Newsletters</title> + + <para> + Site Publisher allows administrators to easily and quickly manage newsletters. Go to <menuchoice> <guimenu>Group</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Newsletters</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> on the administration bar to access the Newsletters functionality. + </para> + <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/newsletters-existing_category_form.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/newsletters-existing_category_form.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="124mm" /> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/newsletters-newsletter_manager.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/newsletters-newsletter_manager.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Newsletters-Category_Management"> + <title>Category Management</title> + <para> - Change the values in the <guilabel>Title</guilabel> and <guilabel>Description</guilabel> fields as required (Note that you cannot change the name of the category). - </para> - </step> - <step> + Administrators can manage the <emphasis>categories</emphasis> that newsletters are distributed under. + </para> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Category_Management-Add_a_new_category"> + <title>Add a new category</title> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_new_category-Add_a_new_category"> + <title>Add a new category</title> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>New Category</guilabel> on the action bar of the Newsletters page. The Category form will appear. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/newsletters-category_form.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/newsletters-category_form.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="116mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <table id="tabl-User_Guide-Add_a_new_category-Category_Form_Field_Details"> + <title>Category Form Field Details</title> + + <tgroup cols="2"> + <thead> + <row> + <entry> + Field + </entry> + + <entry> + Description + </entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Name</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The name of a category. This field is required. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Title</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The title of a category. This field is required. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Description</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + A brief description of the category. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Moderator</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + Select users/groups who have rights to manage this category. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Save</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + Accepts the addition of a new category. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + Quits the category form without adding a category. + </entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + </step> + + <step id="step-User_Guide-Add_a_new_category-Input_values_for_fields"> + <title>Input values for fields</title> + + <substeps> + <step> + <para> + Select a moderator for a category by clicking the <guilabel>Select user</guilabel> icon next to the Moderator field to select a user. The form to select users will appear. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/newsletters-user_selector_form.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/newsletters-user_selector_form.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>green tick</guilabel> corresponding to the user in the list that you want to select. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/newsletters-user_selector_form.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/newsletters-user_selector_form.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Select membership</guilabel> icon to select users in a specific group. The <guilabel>Group selector</guilabel> will appear. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/newsletters-group_selector_form.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/newsletters-group_selector_form.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="139mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + Select a group from the left panel and a membership type in the right panel. The membership and group selected will be displayed in the <guilabel>Moderator</guilabel> field. After adding new categories, they will be added in the list of categories. + </para> + </step> + </substeps> + + <para> + After creating a category, you can create new subscriptions or newsletters for this category. + </para> + + <para> + When you click the <guilabel>Administration</guilabel> button, you will see a drop-down menu consisting of all actions on this category. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Category_Management-Edit_a_category"> + <title>Edit a category</title> + + <procedure> + <step> + <para> + Select a category that you want to edit and click <menuchoice> <guimenu>Administration</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Edit Category</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> in the drop-down menu to bring up the Category form. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/newsletters-existing_category_form.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/newsletters-existing_category_form.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="124mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Change the values in the <guilabel>Title</guilabel> and <guilabel>Description</guilabel> fields as required (Note that you cannot change the name of the category). + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to save all changes. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Category_Management-Delete_a_category"> + <title>Delete a category</title> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Delete_a_category-Delete_a_category"> + <title>Delete a category</title> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Delete category</guilabel> in the menu. A confirmation will appear: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_category_delete_confirm.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_category_delete_confirm.png" format="PNG" width="104mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>OK</guilabel> to delete the category or <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> to exit without deleting. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Category_Management-Manage_Users"> + <title>Manage Users</title> + + <para> + Administrators can manage users accounts and activity with <emphasis>edit</emphasis>, <emphasis>ban</emphasis>, <emphasis>remove ban</emphasis> or <emphasis>delete</emphasis> actions. + </para> + + <procedure> + <title/> + + <step> + <para> + Click <menuchoice> <guimenu>Administration</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Manage Users</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> in the menu. The <guilabel>Manage Users</guilabel> form will appear: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_manage_users_form.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_manage_users_form.png" format="PNG" width="142mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <table> + <title/> + + <tgroup cols="2"> + <thead> + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Field</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + Details + </entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Email</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The email address of user who has subscribed this subscription. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Banned</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + <para> + This field has two values: + </para> + + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>False</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + The user is allowed to get email. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>True</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + The user is not allowed to get email. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Page with closed lock icon</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + To ban this user from receiving email. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Page with closed lock icon</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + To remove a ban on a user. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>trash can icon</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + To delete the user. + </entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Close</guilabel> to close the form. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Newsletters-Subscriptions"> + <title>Subscriptions</title> + <para> - Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to save all changes. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Category_Management-Delete_a_category"> - <title>Delete a category</title> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Delete_a_category-Delete_a_category"> - <title>Delete a category</title> - <step> + An administrator can add more subscriptions to any category. There are two ways to do this: + </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Subscriptions-Method_One"> + <title>Method One:</title> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>New Subscriptions</guilabel> on the action bar. + </para> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Subscription</guilabel> form will appear: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_subscription_form.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_subscription_form.png" format="PNG" width="128mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <table> + <title/> + + <tgroup cols="2"> + <thead> + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Field</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + Details + </entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Category</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The category that contains this subscription. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Name</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The name of the subscription. This field is required. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Title</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The title of the subscription. This field is required. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Description</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The brief description about the subscription. This field is not required. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Redactor</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + Select users/groups who have rights to manage this subscription This field is required. + </entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>scroll arrows</guilabel> icon and select the category from the drop-down menu. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter the rest of their values in the form. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to create the new subscription or <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> to quit without creating a new subscription. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Subscriptions-Method_Two"> + <title>Method Two:</title> + + <step> + <para> + Click directly on the category to which you want to create a new subscription: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_direct_category_subscription.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_direct_category_subscription.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>New Subscriptions</guilabel> on the action bar. + </para> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Subscription</guilabel> form appears: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_category_prepopulated.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_category_prepopulated.png" format="PNG" width="128mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + </procedure> + <para> - Click <guilabel>Delete category</guilabel> in the menu. A confirmation will appear: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_category_delete_confirm.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_category_delete_confirm.png" format="PNG" width="104mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> + Follow the same steps as <emphasis role="bold">Method One</emphasis>. + </para> + <para> - Click <guilabel>OK</guilabel> to delete the category or <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> to exit without deleting. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Category_Management-Manage_Users"> - <title>Manage Users</title> - <para> - Administrators can manage users accounts and activity with <emphasis>edit</emphasis>, <emphasis>ban</emphasis>, <emphasis>remove ban</emphasis> or <emphasis>delete</emphasis> actions. - </para> - <procedure> - <title/> - <step> + Administrators can create newsletters for each subscription. + </para> + <para> - Click <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Administration</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Manage Users</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice> in the menu. The <guilabel>Manage Users</guilabel> form will appear: - </para> + These Newsletters can be opened, edited, deleted or converted to a template for reuse. + </para> + <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_manage_users_form.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_manage_users_form.png" format="PNG" width="142mm"/> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_manage_subscriptions.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_manage_subscriptions.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject> + <table> - <title/> - <tgroup cols="2"> - <thead> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Field</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> Details </entry> - </row> - </thead> - <tbody> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Email</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> The email address of user who has subscribed this subscription. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Banned</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> - <para> - This field has two values: - </para> - <variablelist> - <varlistentry> - <term>False</term> - <listitem> - <para> - The user is allowed to get email. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>True</term> - <listitem> - <para> - The user is not allowed to get email. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - </variablelist> - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/newsletters_ban_icon.png" format="PNG" width="8mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Page with closed lock icon</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry> To ban this user from receiving email. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/newsletters_unban_icon.png" format="PNG" width="7mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Page with closed lock icon</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry> To remove a ban on a user. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/trashicon.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>trash can icon</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry> To delete the user. </entry> - </row> - </tbody> - </tgroup> + <title/> + + <tgroup cols="2"> + <thead> + <row> + <entry> + Element + </entry> + + <entry> + Details + </entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry> + <emphasis role="bold">Shoes</emphasis> + </entry> + + <entry> + The name of the subscription. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <emphasis role="bold">Fashion Shoes</emphasis> + </entry> + + <entry> + The brief description about the subscription. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <emphasis role="bold">Letter</emphasis> + </entry> + + <entry> + The list of all letters of this subscription. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <emphasis role="bold">Date</emphasis> + </entry> + + <entry> + The date and time when creating this letter. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <emphasis role="bold">Status</emphasis> + </entry> + + <entry> + There are three types of status: draft, awaiting and sent. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <emphasis role="bold">Moderation</emphasis> + </entry> + + <entry> + This button allows you to take actions on a newsletter that you select. + </entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> </table> - </step> - <step> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Newsletters-Open_a_Newsletter"> + <title>Open a Newsletter</title> + <para> - Click <guilabel>Close</guilabel> to close the form. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> + Administrators can easily view the content of a newsletter. + </para> + + <procedure> + <title/> + + <step> + <para> + Choose a category by clicking it or checking the box and then selecting <menuchoice> <guimenu>Administration</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Open</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_newsletter_administration.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_newsletter_administration.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select the newsletter that you want to open by clicking it or selecting the checkbox. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_newsletter_administration2.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_newsletter_administration2.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Moderation</guilabel> button then select <guilabel>Open</guilabel> in the menu: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_moderation_open.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_moderation_open.png" format="PNG" width="41mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + The <guilabel>View Newsletter&apos;s Content</guilabel> form appears: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_newsletters_content.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_newsletters_content.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Close</guilabel> to exit. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Newsletters-Edit_a_newsletter"> + <title>Edit a newsletter</title> + + <para> + Do the following to edit a newsletter. + </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Edit_a_newsletter-Edit_a_newsletter"> + <title>Edit a newsletter</title> + + <step> + <para> + In a specific subscription, select the newsletter you want to edit by selecting the checkbox. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Moderation</guilabel> button then select <guilabel>Edit</guilabel> in the menu. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/newsletter-editmenu.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/newsletter-editmenu.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="41mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Newsletter entry form</guilabel> appears: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/newsletterentryform.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/newsletterentryform.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Change the values in the fields that you want to edit: <guilabel>Template</guilabel>, <guilabel>Send date</guilabel>, <guilabel>Category</guilabel>, <guilabel>Subscription</guilabel>. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Update a Newsletter&apos;s info</guilabel> button. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Change the values in the fields <guilabel>Title</guilabel> and <guilabel>Main content</guilabel>. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to save as a draft or click <guilabel>Send</guilabel>. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Newsletters-Delete_a_newsletter"> + <title>Delete a newsletter</title> + + <para> + Administrators can delete obsolete newsletters. + </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Delete_a_newsletter-Delete_a_newsletter"> + <title>Delete a newsletter</title> + + <step> + <para> + In a specific subscription, select the newsletter that you want to delete by selecting the checkbox. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/newsletter-deletebutton.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/newsletter-deletebutton.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="40mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Moderation</guilabel> button then click <guilabel>Delete</guilabel> in the menu. + </para> + + <para> + A confirmation message will be displayed: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/newsletter-deleteconfirmdialog.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/newsletter-deleteconfirmdialog.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="96mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>OK</guilabel> to accept deleting this newsletter or <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> to quit without deleting. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Newsletters-Convert_as_Template"> + <title>Convert as Template</title> + + <para> + Administrators can reuse a popular newsletter template. + </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Convert_as_Template-Convert_to_template"> + <title>Convert to template</title> + + <step> + <para> + Select the newsletter that you want to create as a template. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Moderation</guilabel> button then select <guilabel>Convert as Template</guilabel> in the menu. The next time when you create a newsletter, this template will be listed in the <guilabel>Template</guilabel> field of the <guilabel>Newsletter entry form</guilabel>. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Newsletters-Newsletters"> + <title>Newsletters</title> + + <para> + Each subscription consists of many newsletters. Site Publisher helps you easily create newsletters by following these steps. + </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Newsletters-Creating_Newsletters"> + <title>Creating Newsletters</title> + + <step> + <para> + Go to <menuchoice> <guimenu>Group</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Newsletters</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> on the administration bar. The <guilabel>Newsletter</guilabel> portlet appears. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>New Letter</guilabel> button on the action bar. The <guilabel>Newsletter entry form</guilabel> appears: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletterentryform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + Details: + </para> + + <table> + <title/> + + <tgroup cols="2"> + <thead> + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Field</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + Details + </entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Template</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The template for your newsletter form. <emphasis role="bold">Basic Template</emphasis> is set by default. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Send date</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The date and time to send the newsletter. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Category</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The category contains this newsletter. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Subscription</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The subscription contains this newsletter. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Update sending parameters</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + This button allows you to update information about this newsletter. + </entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>scroll arrows</guilabel> icon to select the template for the newsletter. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Send Date</guilabel> field. The calendar will appear to allow you to choose the date and time when you want to send the newsletter. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/newslettercalendar.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/newslettercalendar.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="59mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>scroll arrows</guilabel> icon in the category field to select the category and the subscription in list. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Update sending parameters</guilabel> button to update information about this newsletter. A message pops up and informs you that you have updated information successfully. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Input a title for the newsletter into the <guilabel>Title</guilabel> field. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Create a content for a newsletter by inputting information into the <guilabel>Main content</guilabel> text box. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to save this newsletter as a draft or click <guilabel>Send</guilabel> to send this newsletter. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select <guilabel>Contact Us</guilabel> on the navigation bar or go to <menuchoice> <guimenu>Site</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Acme</guimenuitem> <guimenuitem>Contact Us</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/contactus.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/contactus.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Contact Us</guilabel> page appears: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/contactuspage.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/contactuspage.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <table> + <title/> + + <tgroup cols="2"> + <thead> + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Field</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + Details + </entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Select a recipient</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The recipient who will receive a message + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Your name</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The name of a person who leaves a message + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Your address</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The address of a person who leaves a message + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Your Email Address</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The email address of a person who leaves a message + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Your Phone Number</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The phone number of a person who leaves a message + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Your message</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + Write a message that you want to leave + </entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select a recipient and enter values in this form. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to save a message. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> </section> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Newsletters-Subscriptions"> - <title>Subscriptions</title> - <para> - An administrator can add more subscriptions to any category. There are two ways to do this: - </para> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Subscriptions-Method_One"> - <title>Method One:</title> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>New Subscriptions</guilabel> on the action bar. - </para> - <para> - The <guilabel>Subscription</guilabel> form will appear: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_subscription_form.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_subscription_form.png" format="PNG" width="128mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <table> - <title/> - <tgroup cols="2"> - <thead> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Field</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> Details </entry> - </row> - </thead> - <tbody> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Category</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> The category that contains this subscription. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Name</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> The name of the subscription. This field is required. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Title</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> The title of the subscription. This field is required. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Description</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> The brief description about the subscription. This field is not required. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Redactor</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> Select users/groups who have rights to manage this subscription This field is required. </entry> - </row> - </tbody> - </tgroup> - </table> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/icon1.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>scroll arrows</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon and select the category from the drop-down menu. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter the rest of their values in the form. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to create the new subscription or <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> to quit without creating a new subscription. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Subscriptions-Method_Two"> - <title>Method Two:</title> - <step> - <para> - Click directly on the category to which you want to create a new subscription: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_direct_category_subscription.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_direct_category_subscription.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>New Subscriptions</guilabel> on the action bar. - </para> - <para> - The <guilabel>Subscription</guilabel> form appears: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_category_prepopulated.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_category_prepopulated.png" format="PNG" width="128mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - </procedure> - <para> - Follow the same steps as <emphasis role="bold">Method One</emphasis>. - </para> - <para> - Administrators can create newsletters for each subscription. - </para> - <para> - These Newsletters can be opened, edited, deleted or converted to a template for reuse. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_manage_subscriptions.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_manage_subscriptions.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <table> - <title/> - <tgroup cols="2"> - <thead> - <row> - <entry> Element </entry> - <entry> Details </entry> - </row> - </thead> - <tbody> - <row> - <entry> - <emphasis role="bold">Shoes</emphasis> - </entry> - <entry> The name of the subscription. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <emphasis role="bold">Fashion Shoes</emphasis> - </entry> - <entry> The brief description about the subscription. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <emphasis role="bold">Letter</emphasis> - </entry> - <entry> The list of all letters of this subscription. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <emphasis role="bold">Date</emphasis> - </entry> - <entry> The date and time when creating this letter. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <emphasis role="bold">Status</emphasis> - </entry> - <entry> There are three types of status: draft, awaiting and sent. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <emphasis role="bold">Moderation</emphasis> - </entry> - <entry> This button allows you to take actions on a newsletter that you select. </entry> - </row> - </tbody> - </tgroup> - </table> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Newsletters-Open_a_Newsletter"> - <title>Open a Newsletter</title> - <para> - Administrators can easily view the content of a newsletter. - </para> - <procedure> - <title/> - <step> - <para> - Choose a category by clicking it or checking the box and then selecting <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Administration</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Open</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice>. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_newsletter_administration.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_newsletter_administration.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the newsletter that you want to open by clicking it or selecting the checkbox. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_newsletter_administration2.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_newsletter_administration2.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/newsletters_moderation_icon.png" format="PNG" width="32mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Moderation</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> button then select <guilabel>Open</guilabel> in the menu: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_moderation_open.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_moderation_open.png" format="PNG" width="41mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - The <guilabel>View Newsletter&apos;s Content</guilabel> form appears: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_newsletters_content.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletters_newsletters_content.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Close</guilabel> to exit. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Newsletters-Edit_a_newsletter"> - <title>Edit a newsletter</title> - <para> - Do the following to edit a newsletter. - </para> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Edit_a_newsletter-Edit_a_newsletter"> - <title>Edit a newsletter</title> - <step> - <para> - In a specific subscription, select the newsletter you want to edit by selecting the checkbox. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/moderationbutton.png" format="PNG" width="31mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Moderation</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> button then select <guilabel>Edit</guilabel> in the menu. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/newsletter-editmenu.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/newsletter-editmenu.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="41mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - The <guilabel>Newsletter entry form</guilabel> appears: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/newsletterentryform.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/newsletterentryform.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Change the values in the fields that you want to edit: <guilabel>Template</guilabel>, <guilabel>Send date</guilabel>, <guilabel>Category</guilabel>, <guilabel>Subscription</guilabel>. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the <guilabel>Update a Newsletter&apos;s info</guilabel> button. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Change the values in the fields <guilabel>Title</guilabel> and <guilabel>Main content</guilabel>. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to save as a draft or click <guilabel>Send</guilabel>. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Newsletters-Delete_a_newsletter"> - <title>Delete a newsletter</title> - <para> - Administrators can delete obsolete newsletters. - </para> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Delete_a_newsletter-Delete_a_newsletter"> - <title>Delete a newsletter</title> - <step> - <para> - In a specific subscription, select the newsletter that you want to delete by selecting the checkbox. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/newsletter-deletebutton.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/newsletter-deletebutton.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="40mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/moderationbutton.png" format="PNG" width="31mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Moderation</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> button then click <guilabel>Delete</guilabel> in the menu. - </para> - <para> - A confirmation message will be displayed: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/newsletter-deleteconfirmdialog.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/newsletter-deleteconfirmdialog.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="96mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>OK</guilabel> to accept deleting this newsletter or <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> to quit without deleting. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Newsletters-Convert_as_Template"> - <title>Convert as Template</title> - <para> - Administrators can reuse a popular newsletter template. - </para> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Convert_as_Template-Convert_to_template"> - <title>Convert to template</title> - <step> - <para> - Select the newsletter that you want to create as a template. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/moderationbutton.png" format="PNG" width="31mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Moderation</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> button then select <guilabel>Convert as Template</guilabel> in the menu. The next time when you create a newsletter, this template will be listed in the <guilabel>Template</guilabel> field of the <guilabel>Newsletter entry form</guilabel>. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Newsletters-Newsletters"> - <title>Newsletters</title> - <para> - Each subscription consists of many newsletters. Site Publisher helps you easily create newsletters by following these steps. - </para> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Newsletters-Creating_Newsletters"> - <title>Creating Newsletters</title> - <step> - <para> - Go to <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Group</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Newsletters</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice> on the administration bar. The <guilabel>Newsletter</guilabel> portlet appears. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/newletterbutton.png" format="PNG" width="35mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>New Letter</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> button on the action bar. The <guilabel>Newsletter entry form</guilabel> appears: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newsletterentryform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - Details: - </para> - <table> - <title/> - <tgroup cols="2"> - <thead> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Field</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> Details </entry> - </row> - </thead> - <tbody> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Template</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> The template for your newsletter form. <emphasis role="bold">Basic Template</emphasis> is set by default. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Send date</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> The date and time to send the newsletter.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Category</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> The category contains this newsletter. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Subscription</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> The subscription contains this newsletter. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Update sending parameters</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> This button allows you to update information about this newsletter. </entry> - </row> - </tbody> - </tgroup> - </table> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/icon1.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>scroll arrows</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon to select the template for the newsletter. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the <guilabel>Send Date</guilabel> field. The calendar will appear to allow you to choose the date and time when you want to send the newsletter. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/newslettercalendar.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/newslettercalendar.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="59mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/icon1.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>scroll arrows</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon in the category field to select the category and the subscription in list. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the <guilabel>Update sending parameters</guilabel> button to update information about this newsletter. A message pops up and informs you that you have updated information successfully. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Input a title for the newsletter into the <guilabel>Title</guilabel> field. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Create a content for a newsletter by inputting information into the <guilabel>Main content</guilabel> text box. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to save this newsletter as a draft or click <guilabel>Send</guilabel> to send this newsletter. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select <guilabel>Contact Us</guilabel> on the navigation bar or go to <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Site</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Acme</guimenuitem> - <guimenuitem>Contact Us</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice>. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/contactus.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/contactus.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - The <guilabel>Contact Us</guilabel> page appears: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/contactuspage.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/contactuspage.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <table> - <title/> - <tgroup cols="2"> - <thead> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Field</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> Details </entry> - </row> - </thead> - <tbody> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Select a recipient</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> The recipient who will receive a message </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Your name</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> The name of a person who leaves a message </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Your address</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> The address of a person who leaves a message </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Your Email Address</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> The email address of a person who leaves a message </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Your Phone Number</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> The phone number of a person who leaves a message </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Your message</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> Write a message that you want to leave </entry> - </row> - </tbody> - </tgroup> - </table> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select a recipient and enter values in this form. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to save a message. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> - </section> -</section> + </section> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Preferences.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Preferences.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Preferences.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -4,92 +4,148 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "../../User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<section id="sect-User_Guide-Preferences"> - <title>Preferences</title> - <para> - This function is used to set up your browsing preferences. - </para> - <procedure> - <title/> - <step> + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Preferences"> + <title>Preferences</title> + <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/preferencesettingicon.png" format="PNG" width="10mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>sprocket</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon on the right side of the <emphasis role="bold">Content Explorer</emphasis> portlet. - </para> - <para> - The <guilabel>Preference Setting</guilabel> window will appear: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/preferencesettingform.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/preferencesettingform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <table> - <title/> - <tgroup cols="2"> - <thead> - <row> - <entry> Setting </entry> - <entry> Details </entry> - </row> - </thead> - <tbody> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Sort by</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> To sort nodes in the nodes list by Alphabetic, Type, Created Date, or Modified Date</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Show sidebar</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> To display/hide the sidebar. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Enable drag and drop</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> To enable/disable the “drag and drop” action. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Nodes per page</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> This number of nodes that will be displayed per page. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Show non document nodes</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> To display/hide nodes that are non–documents. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Show referenced documents</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> To display/hide referenced documents. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Show hidden nodes</guilabel> </entry> - <entry>To display/hide hidden nodes. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Query Type</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> This query type. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Enable DMS structure</guilabel> </entry> - <entry>To display/hide nodes in a document in tree structure. </entry> - </row> - </tbody> - </tgroup> - </table> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Configure the preferences as required and click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to set them. - </para> - <para> - Or click <guilabel>Back</guilabel> to quit without submitting changes. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> -</section> + This function is used to set up your browsing preferences. + </para> + + <procedure> + <title/> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>sprocket</guilabel> icon on the right side of the <emphasis role="bold">Content Explorer</emphasis> portlet. + </para> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Preference Setting</guilabel> window will appear: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/preferencesettingform.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/preferencesettingform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <table> + <title/> + + <tgroup cols="2"> + <thead> + <row> + <entry> + Setting + </entry> + + <entry> + Details + </entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Sort by</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + To sort nodes in the nodes list by Alphabetic, Type, Created Date, or Modified Date + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Show sidebar</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + To display/hide the sidebar. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Enable drag and drop</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + To enable/disable the “drag and drop” action. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Nodes per page</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + This number of nodes that will be displayed per page. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Show non document nodes</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + To display/hide nodes that are non–documents. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Show referenced documents</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + To display/hide referenced documents. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Show hidden nodes</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + To display/hide hidden nodes. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Query Type</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + This query type. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Enable DMS structure</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + To display/hide nodes in a document in tree structure. + </entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Configure the preferences as required and click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to set them. + </para> + + <para> + Or click <guilabel>Back</guilabel> to quit without submitting changes. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Print.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Print.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Print.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -3,43 +3,40 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "../../User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<section id="sect-User_Guide-Print_content"> - <title>Print content</title> - <para> - Users can easily print any content in a site by following these steps: - </para> - <procedure> - <title>Printing content</title> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Read more</guilabel> to read all the content of a document or an article in a site. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/readmore.png" format="PNG" /> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/readmore.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the <guilabel>Print</guilabel> button, the <guilabel>Print Preview</guilabel> page will be displayed on another tab. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/printpreview.png" format="PNG" /> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/printpreview.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Print</guilabel> to print the content of this page or <guilabel>Close</guilabel> to close this tab without printing. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> -</section> \ No newline at end of file + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Print_content"> + <title>Print content</title> + + <para> + Users can easily print any content in a site by following these steps: + </para> + + <procedure> + <title>Printing content</title> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Read more</guilabel> to read all the content of a document or an article in a site. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/readmore.png" format="PNG" /> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/readmore.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Print</guilabel> button, the <guilabel>Print Preview</guilabel> page will be displayed on another tab. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/printpreview.png" format="PNG" /> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/printpreview.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Print</guilabel> to print the content of this page or <guilabel>Close</guilabel> to close this tab without printing. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/SEO_management.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/SEO_management.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/SEO_management.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -23,38 +23,16 @@ <step> <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/SEO_red_icon.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - - <textobject> - <phrase> red </phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon on the Administration bar and the SEO Management form appears. Depending on your SEO management for a page or a content, the content of the SEO Management form will be different: + Click the <guilabel> red </guilabel> icon on the Administration bar and the SEO Management form appears. Depending on your SEO management for a page or a content, the content of the SEO Management form will be different: </para> <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/SEO_management_content.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/SEO_management_content.png" format="PNG" - width="210mm"/> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/SEO_management_content.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/SEO_management_content.png" format="PNG" + width="210mm"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject> <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/SEO_management_page.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/SEO_management_page.png" format="PNG" width="210mm"/> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/SEO_management_page.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/SEO_management_page.png" format="PNG" width="210mm"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject> <table> @@ -100,7 +78,8 @@ </entry> <entry> - Search engines can access the whole directories on a web site, or individual pages, or individual links on a page and list your page/content or not, it depends on your options: <itemizedlist> + Search engines can access the whole directories on a web site, or individual pages, or individual links on a page and list your page/content or not, it depends on your options: + <itemizedlist> <listitem> <para> <guilabel>INDEX</guilabel>: Allows search engines to index your page/content on the search engine results page. @@ -181,65 +160,25 @@ <itemizedlist> <listitem> <para> - A - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/SEO_red_icon.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - - <textobject> - <phrase>red icon</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - means that the SEO information is empty. + A <guilabel>red icon</guilabel> means that the SEO information is empty. </para> </listitem> <listitem> <para> - An - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/SEO_orange_icon.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - - <textobject> - <phrase>orange icon</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - means that the SEO information has been updated but some information is not filled out yet. + An <guilabel>orange icon</guilabel> means that the SEO information has been updated but some information is not filled out yet. </para> </listitem> <listitem> <para> - A - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/SEO_green_icon.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - - <textobject> - <phrase>green icon</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - means that the SEO Management form is filled out with the full SEO information. + A <guilabel>green icon</guilabel> means that the SEO Management form is filled out with the full SEO information. </para> </listitem> <listitem> <para> - A - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/SEO_gray_icon.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - - <textobject> - <phrase>gray icon</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - means that the SEO Management feature is disabled. + A <guilabel>gray icon</guilabel> means that the SEO Management feature is disabled. </para> </listitem> </itemizedlist> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Search.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Search.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Search.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -4,799 +4,752 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "../../User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<section id="sect-User_Guide-Search_in_Content_Explorer"> - <title>Search in Content Explorer</title> - <para> - There are three ways to search an existing node: - </para> - <orderedlist> - <listitem> + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Search_in_Content_Explorer"> + <title>Search in Content Explorer</title> + <para> - <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Search_in_Content_Explorer-Simple_Search"/>. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Search_in_Content_Explorer-Advanced_Search"/>. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Search_in_Content_Explorer-Quick_Search"/> - </para> - </listitem> - </orderedlist> - - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Search_in_Content_Explorer-Simple_Search"> - <title>Quick Search</title> - <para> - With the quick search, you can directly type a search term in the search field. All documents whose keywords match the search term are retrieved and listed in the <guilabel>Search results</guilabel> form. + There are three ways to search an existing node: </para> - <procedure> - <step> - <para> - Enter a search string into the search text box. + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Search_in_Content_Explorer-Simple_Search"/>. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Search_in_Content_Explorer-Advanced_Search"/>. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Search_in_Content_Explorer-Quick_Search"/> + </para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Search_in_Content_Explorer-Simple_Search"> + <title>Quick Search</title> + + <para> + With the quick search, you can directly type a search term in the search field. All documents whose keywords match the search term are retrieved and listed in the <guilabel>Search results</guilabel> form. </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/magnifyingglassicon.png" format="PNG" width="7mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>magnifying glass</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon to perform the search. - </para> - <para> - Search results will be displayed in the right pane. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/searchresults.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/searchresults.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - The search results will be empty if no document contains the search string. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/emptysearch.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/emptysearch.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/previewicon2.png" format="PNG" width="7mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>magnifying glass</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon to view the content containing the search string. - </para> - <para> - Or click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/previewicon2.png" format="PNG" width="7mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>preview</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon to go to the node that contains the search result. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Search_in_Content_Explorer-Advanced_Search"> - <title>Advanced Search</title> - <para> - To perform an advanced search: - </para> - <procedure> - <step> - <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/savedsearchicon.png" format="PNG" width="12mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>"Saved Search"</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/savedsearches.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/savedsearches.png" format="PNG" width="65mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Then click the <emphasis role="bold">Advanced Search</emphasis> <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/magnifyingglassicon.png" format="PNG" width="7mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>magnifying glass</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon to open the <guilabel>Advanced Search</guilabel> form. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/advancedsearches.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/advancedsearches.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - The <guilabel>Advanced Search</guilabel> form will open: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/advancedsearchform.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/advancedsearchform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - </procedure> - <para> - The tabs in this form offer different search functions: - </para> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Advanced_Search-Search_by_Name"/> - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Advanced_Search-Search_with_constraints"/> - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Advanced_Search-Search_by_creating_a_new_query"/> - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Advanced_Search-Search_by_existing_queries"/> - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Advanced_Search-Search_by_Name"> - <title>Search by Name</title> - <para> - Use the <guilabel>Search by Name</guilabel> tab to search nodes by name: - </para> - <procedure> - <step> - <para> - Enter the exact name you wish to search in the <guilabel>Content name</guilabel> field. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Search</guilabel>. - </para> - <para> - Results will return with the message <emphasis>“No result found”</emphasis> if there is no node with the specified name. - </para> - <para> - Results will be returned in the <guilabel>Search Results</guilabel> tab if the requested name is found. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Advanced_Search-Search_with_constraints"> - <title>Search with constraints</title> - <para> - This search enables you to search with more constraints to limit the returned results. - </para> - <para> - Extra search constraints are entered in the <guilabel>Advanced Search</guilabel> tab of the <guilabel>Advanced Search</guilabel> form. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/advancedsearchtab.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/advancedsearchtab.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - The <guilabel>Current location</guilabel> field is not editable; it shows the path selected to search. - </para> - <procedure> - <title/> - <step> - <para> - Enter search terms in the <guilabel>A word or phrase in content</guilabel> field. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the <guilabel>Operator</guilabel>. - </para> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - Select the <emphasis role="bold">AND</emphasis> operator to only return results that meet <emphasis>both</emphasis> the search terms and the entered constraints (see Step 3). - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - Select the <emphasis role="bold">OR</emphasis> operator to return results that meet <emphasis>either</emphasis> the search terms or the entered constraints (see Step 3). - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Show/hide constraints form</guilabel> to add more constraints. - </para> - <para> - A further constraint options window will appear: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/furtherconstraintform.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/furtherconstraintform.png" format="PNG" width="141mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <table> - <title/> - <tgroup cols="2"> - <thead> - <row> - <entry> Item </entry> - <entry> Details </entry> - </row> - </thead> - <tbody> - <row> - <entry> 1 </entry> - <entry> You can add more than one constraint with either of two operators (AND and OR).</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> 2 </entry> - <entry> These fields allow you to add a constraint to search by a property with specific values. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> 3 </entry> - <entry> These fields allow you to add a constraint to search by a property that contains one of the word in the specific string. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> 4 </entry> - <entry> These fields allow you to add a constraint to search by a property that does not contain the specific string. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> 5 </entry> - <entry> These fields allow you to add a constraint to search by a duration of date (created, modified). </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> 6 </entry> - <entry> This field allows you to add a constraint to search by a document type, including File, Article, Podcast, Sample node, File Plan, Kofax). </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> 7 </entry> - <entry> This field allows you to add a constraint to search by categories. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - 6 - </entry> - <entry> Add a document type. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - 7 - </entry> - <entry> Add a category. </entry> - </row> - </tbody> - </tgroup> - </table> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the constraint operator(<emphasis role="bold">AND/OR</emphasis>). - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Add the required constraints using one of the following methods: - </para> - <orderedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - <xref linkend="proc-User_Guide-Search_with_constraints-Add_a_constraint_for_exact_values"/> - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - <xref linkend="proc-User_Guide-Search_with_constraints-Add_a_constraint_including_or_excluding_values_"/> - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - <xref linkend="proc-User_Guide-Search_with_constraints-Add_a_constraint_by_date"/> - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - <xref linkend="proc-User_Guide-Search_with_constraints-Add_a_constraint_by_document_type"/> - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - <xref linkend="proc-User_Guide-Search_with_constraints-Add_a_constraint_by_category"/> - </para> - </listitem> - </orderedlist> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Search_with_constraints-Add_a_constraint_for_exact_values"> - <title>Add a constraint for exact values</title> + + <procedure> <step> - <para> - Check the box that corresponds to the constraint you want. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter the property you want to locate or click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/furtherpropertyicon.png" format="PNG" width="9mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Add property</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon. + <para> + Enter a search string into the search text box. </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addpropertyiconform.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addpropertyiconform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - A list of possible properties appears: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/propertieslist.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/propertieslist.png" format="PNG" width="129mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> </step> + <step> - <para> - Select a property from the list and click <guilabel>Add</guilabel>. The selected property will populate <guilabel>Properties</guilabel> field. + <para> + Click the <guilabel>magnifying glass</guilabel> icon to perform the search. </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Define the property value to search for by entering a value into the <guilabel>Contain exactly</guilabel> field or click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/furtherpropertyicon.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Find exactly</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon. + + <para> + Search results will be displayed in the right pane. </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/containexactlyform.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/containexactlyform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - The <guilabel>Filter form</guilabel> will appear: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/filterform.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/filterform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - All pre-existing values for the property you selected will appear. - </para> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - If the value you require is in the list, select it and click <guilabel>Select</guilabel>. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - If the value you require is not in the list, enter it in the <guilabel>Filter:</guilabel> field and click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/furtherpropertyicon.png" format="PNG" width="9mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>corresponding</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon. The value will populate the <emphasis role="bold">Contain exactly</emphasis> field of the constraints form. - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/containexactlypopulated.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/containexactlypopulated.png" format="PNG" width="141mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - </procedure> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Search_with_constraints-Add_a_constraint_including_or_excluding_values_"> - <title>Add a constraint including or excluding values</title> - <step> - <para> - Check the box corresponding to the <guilabel>Contain</guilabel> or <guilabel>Not Contain</guilabel> constraint, as appropriate. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter the required property in the <guilabel>Property</guilabel> field or click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/furtherpropertyicon.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Add Property</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon (refer to <emphasis role="bold">Step 2</emphasis> in <xref linkend="proc-User_Guide-Search_with_constraints-Add_a_constraint_for_exact_values"/> for more information). + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/searchresults.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/searchresults.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + The search results will be empty if no document contains the search string. </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/emptysearch.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/emptysearch.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> + <step> - <para> - Enter the required values in the <emphasis role="bold">Contain</emphasis> or <emphasis role="bold">Not Contain</emphasis> fields. + <para> + Click the <guilabel>magnifying glass</guilabel> icon to view the content containing the search string. </para> - </step> - </procedure> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Search_with_constraints-Add_a_constraint_by_date"> - <title>Add a constraint by date</title> - <step> - <para> - Click the check box beside the field with the drop-down menu (below the <guilabel>Property</guilabel> entries). + + <para> + Or click the <guilabel>preview</guilabel> icon to go to the node that contains the search result. </para> </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Search_in_Content_Explorer-Advanced_Search"> + <title>Advanced Search</title> + + <para> + To perform an advanced search: + </para> + + <procedure> <step> - <para> - Define the search condition from the drop-down list (<emphasis role="bold">CREATED</emphasis>/<emphasis role="bold">MODIFIED</emphasis>). - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click in the <guilabel>From</guilabel> field. - </para> - <para> - A small calendar will appear; + <para> + Click the <guilabel>"Saved Search"</guilabel> icon. </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/datesearchcondition.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/datesearchcondition.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - Select the date you want to use as a constraint. - </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/savedsearches.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/savedsearches.png" format="PNG" width="65mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> + <step> - <para> - Repeat the above steps for the <guilabel>To</guilabel> field. + <para> + Then click the <emphasis role="bold">Advanced Search</emphasis> <guilabel>magnifying glass</guilabel> icon to open the <guilabel>Advanced Search</guilabel> form. </para> - <para> - The selected dates will populate the <guilabel>From</guilabel> and <guilabel>To</guilabel> fields in the <guilabel>Add constraint</guilabel> form. - </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/advancedsearches.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/advancedsearches.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Advanced Search</guilabel> form will open: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/advancedsearchform.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/advancedsearchform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> - </procedure> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Search_with_constraints-Add_a_constraint_by_document_type"> - <title>Add a constraint by document type</title> + </procedure> + + <para> + The tabs in this form offer different search functions: + </para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Advanced_Search-Search_by_Name"/> + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Advanced_Search-Search_with_constraints"/> + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Advanced_Search-Search_by_creating_a_new_query"/> + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Advanced_Search-Search_by_existing_queries"/> + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Advanced_Search-Search_by_Name"> + <title>Search by Name</title> + + <para> + Use the <guilabel>Search by Name</guilabel> tab to search nodes by name: + </para> + + <procedure> + <step> + <para> + Enter the exact name you wish to search in the <guilabel>Content name</guilabel> field. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Search</guilabel>. + </para> + + <para> + Results will return with the message <emphasis>“No result found”</emphasis> if there is no node with the specified name. + </para> + + <para> + Results will be returned in the <guilabel>Search Results</guilabel> tab if the requested name is found. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Advanced_Search-Search_with_constraints"> + <title>Search with constraints</title> + + <para> + This search enables you to search with more constraints to limit the returned results. + </para> + + <para> + Extra search constraints are entered in the <guilabel>Advanced Search</guilabel> tab of the <guilabel>Advanced Search</guilabel> form. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/advancedsearchtab.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/advancedsearchtab.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Current location</guilabel> field is not editable; it shows the path selected to search. + </para> + + <procedure> + <title/> + + <step> + <para> + Enter search terms in the <guilabel>A word or phrase in content</guilabel> field. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select the <guilabel>Operator</guilabel>. + </para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + Select the <emphasis role="bold">AND</emphasis> operator to only return results that meet <emphasis>both</emphasis> the search terms and the entered constraints (see Step 3). + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + Select the <emphasis role="bold">OR</emphasis> operator to return results that meet <emphasis>either</emphasis> the search terms or the entered constraints (see Step 3). + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Show/hide constraints form</guilabel> to add more constraints. + </para> + + <para> + A further constraint options window will appear: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/furtherconstraintform.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/furtherconstraintform.png" format="PNG" width="141mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <table> + <title/> + + <tgroup cols="2"> + <thead> + <row> + <entry> + Item + </entry> + + <entry> + Details + </entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry> + 1 + </entry> + + <entry> + You can add more than one constraint with either of two operators (AND and OR). + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + 2 + </entry> + + <entry> + These fields allow you to add a constraint to search by a property with specific values. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + 3 + </entry> + + <entry> + These fields allow you to add a constraint to search by a property that contains one of the word in the specific string. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + 4 + </entry> + + <entry> + These fields allow you to add a constraint to search by a property that does not contain the specific string. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + 5 + </entry> + + <entry> + These fields allow you to add a constraint to search by a duration of date (created, modified). + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + 6 + </entry> + + <entry> + This field allows you to add a constraint to search by a document type, including File, Article, Podcast, Sample node, File Plan, Kofax). + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + 7 + </entry> + + <entry> + This field allows you to add a constraint to search by categories. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + 6 + </entry> + + <entry> + Add a document type. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + 7 + </entry> + + <entry> + Add a category. + </entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select the constraint operator(<emphasis role="bold">AND/OR</emphasis>). + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Add the required constraints using one of the following methods: + </para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + <xref linkend="proc-User_Guide-Search_with_constraints-Add_a_constraint_for_exact_values"/> + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + <xref linkend="proc-User_Guide-Search_with_constraints-Add_a_constraint_including_or_excluding_values_"/> + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + <xref linkend="proc-User_Guide-Search_with_constraints-Add_a_constraint_by_date"/> + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + <xref linkend="proc-User_Guide-Search_with_constraints-Add_a_constraint_by_document_type"/> + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + <xref linkend="proc-User_Guide-Search_with_constraints-Add_a_constraint_by_category"/> + </para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Search_with_constraints-Add_a_constraint_for_exact_values"> + <title>Add a constraint for exact values</title> + + <step> + <para> + Check the box that corresponds to the constraint you want. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter the property you want to locate or click the <guilabel>Add property</guilabel> icon. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addpropertyiconform.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addpropertyiconform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + A list of possible properties appears: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/propertieslist.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/propertieslist.png" format="PNG" width="129mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select a property from the list and click <guilabel>Add</guilabel>. The selected property will populate <guilabel>Properties</guilabel> field. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Define the property value to search for by entering a value into the <guilabel>Contain exactly</guilabel> field or click the <guilabel>Find exactly</guilabel> icon. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/containexactlyform.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/containexactlyform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Filter form</guilabel> will appear: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/filterform.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/filterform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + All pre-existing values for the property you selected will appear. + </para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + If the value you require is in the list, select it and click <guilabel>Select</guilabel>. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + If the value you require is not in the list, enter it in the <guilabel>Filter:</guilabel> field and click the <guilabel>corresponding</guilabel> icon. The value will populate the <emphasis role="bold">Contain exactly</emphasis> field of the constraints form. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/containexactlypopulated.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/containexactlypopulated.png" format="PNG" width="141mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + </procedure> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Search_with_constraints-Add_a_constraint_including_or_excluding_values_"> + <title>Add a constraint including or excluding values</title> + + <step> + <para> + Check the box corresponding to the <guilabel>Contain</guilabel> or <guilabel>Not Contain</guilabel> constraint, as appropriate. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter the required property in the <guilabel>Property</guilabel> field or click the <guilabel>Add Property</guilabel> icon (refer to <emphasis role="bold">Step 2</emphasis> in <xref linkend="proc-User_Guide-Search_with_constraints-Add_a_constraint_for_exact_values"/> for more information). + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter the required values in the <emphasis role="bold">Contain</emphasis> or <emphasis role="bold">Not Contain</emphasis> fields. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Search_with_constraints-Add_a_constraint_by_date"> + <title>Add a constraint by date</title> + + <step> + <para> + Click the check box beside the field with the drop-down menu (below the <guilabel>Property</guilabel> entries). + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Define the search condition from the drop-down list (<emphasis role="bold">CREATED</emphasis>/<emphasis role="bold">MODIFIED</emphasis>). + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click in the <guilabel>From</guilabel> field. + </para> + + <para> + A small calendar will appear; + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/datesearchcondition.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/datesearchcondition.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + Select the date you want to use as a constraint. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Repeat the above steps for the <guilabel>To</guilabel> field. + </para> + + <para> + The selected dates will populate the <guilabel>From</guilabel> and <guilabel>To</guilabel> fields in the <guilabel>Add constraint</guilabel> form. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Search_with_constraints-Add_a_constraint_by_document_type"> + <title>Add a constraint by document type</title> + + <step> + <para> + Click the checkbox beside the <guilabel>Document Type</guilabel> field. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter the document type you want to search for or click the <guilabel>Add node type</guilabel> icon to open a list of document types: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/documenttypelist.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/documenttypelist.png" format="PNG" width="103mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the checkbox of the document type you want and click <guilabel>Save</guilabel>. + </para> + + <para> + The selected document type will populate the <guilabel>Document Type</guilabel> field. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/documenttypepopulated.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/documenttypepopulated.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + </procedure> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Search_with_constraints-Add_a_constraint_by_category"> + <title>Add a constraint by category</title> + + <step> + <para> + Click the checkbox beside the <guilabel>Category</guilabel> field. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter the category you want to search for or click the <guilabel>Add category</guilabel> icon for a list of categories: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/categorylist.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/categorylist.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>green tick</guilabel> that corresponds to the category you want. + </para> + + <para> + The selected category will populate the <guilabel>Category</guilabel> field. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/documenttypepopulated.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/documenttypepopulated.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + </procedure> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Add</guilabel> to add any/all activated constraints. + </para> + + <para> + The constraints will be converted to an <guilabel>SQL</guilabel> query and displayed in the search form: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/SQLsearchform.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/SQLsearchform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + Remove unnecessary constraints with the <guilabel>trash can</guilabel> icon. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Search</guilabel> to launch the search. Results will be displayed in the <guilabel>Search Results</guilabel> tab. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> and put a name for this search configuration if you want to save it to use at another time. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Advanced_Search-Search_by_creating_a_new_query"> + <title>Search by creating a new query</title> + + <para> + You need a knowledge of the structure of query statements in order to configure a search using the parameters on the <guilabel>New Query</guilabel> tab. + </para> + + <procedure> + <step> + <para> + Enter a unique name for this query in the <guilabel>Name</guilabel> field. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Choose a query type from the drop-down menu; <guilabel>SQL</guilabel> or <guilabel>xPath</guilabel>. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter a query statement. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Search</guilabel> to perform the search and display the results in the <guilabel>Search Results</guilabel> tab. + </para> + + <para> + Or click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to save the search query to the <guilabel>Saved Query</guilabel> tab. + </para> + + <para> + Or click <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> to quit. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Advanced_Search-Search_by_existing_queries"> + <title>Search by existing queries</title> + + <para> + This tab lists all saved search queries (that you have access rights to use). + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/savedquerytab.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/savedquerytab.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>sprocket</guilabel> icon to perform the search and see the results in the <guilabel>Search Results</guilabel> tab. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>pencil</guilabel> icon to edit the query statement. The query form will appear like when creating a query (see <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Advanced_Search-Search_by_creating_a_new_query"/>); however, you cannot edit the name of the saved search. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>trash can</guilabel> to delete a query (provided you have the access rights to that query). + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Search_in_Content_Explorer-Quick_Search"> + <title>Search with saved queries</title> + + <para> + Do the following to perform a search with saved queries: + </para> + + <procedure> <step> - <para> - Click the checkbox beside the <guilabel>Document Type</guilabel> field. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter the document type you want to search for or click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/addnodetypeicon.png" format="PNG" width="9mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Add node type</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon to open a list of document types: + <para> + Click the <guilabel>magnifying glass</guilabel> icon to see the list of existing queries. </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/documenttypelist.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/documenttypelist.png" format="PNG" width="103mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/savedsearches.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/savedsearches.png" format="PNG" width="65mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + A query list will appear. It contains the sections, including <guilabel>All Articles</guilabel>, <guilabel>Created Documents</guilabel>, <guilabel>CreatedDocumentDayBefore</guilabel> and <guilabel>allArticles</guilabel>. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/querylistsections.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/querylistsections.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the checkbox of the document type you want and click <guilabel>Save</guilabel>. - </para> - <para> - The selected document type will populate the <guilabel>Document Type</guilabel> field. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/documenttypepopulated.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/documenttypepopulated.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - </procedure> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Search_with_constraints-Add_a_constraint_by_category"> - <title>Add a constraint by category</title> - <step> - <para> - Click the checkbox beside the <guilabel>Category</guilabel> field. + <para> + Launch, modify or delete the queries as required (see <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Advanced_Search-Search_by_creating_a_new_query"/> for more information). </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Enter the category you want to search for or click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/addcategoryicon.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Add category</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon for a list of categories: + <para> + Filter results with the entries in the <guilabel>All Items</guilabel> and/or <guilabel>By Type</guilabel> panes on the left of the tab. Items matching the selections will appear in the right pane. </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/categorylist.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/categorylist.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/greentick.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>green tick</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> that corresponds to the category you want. - </para> <para> - The selected category will populate the <guilabel>Category</guilabel> field. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/documenttypepopulated.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/documenttypepopulated.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + Click the required document or folder name to view or download them. + </para> </step> - </procedure> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Add</guilabel> to add any/all activated constraints. - </para> - <para> - The constraints will be converted to an <guilabel>SQL</guilabel> query and displayed in the search form: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/SQLsearchform.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/SQLsearchform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - Remove unnecessary constraints with the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/trashicon.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>trash can</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Search</guilabel> to launch the search. Results will be displayed in the <guilabel>Search Results</guilabel> tab. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> and put a name for this search configuration if you want to save it to use at another time. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Advanced_Search-Search_by_creating_a_new_query"> - <title>Search by creating a new query</title> - <para> - You need a knowledge of the structure of query statements in order to configure a search using the parameters on the <guilabel>New Query</guilabel> tab. - </para> - <procedure> - <step> - <para> - Enter a unique name for this query in the <guilabel>Name</guilabel> field. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Choose a query type from the drop-down menu; <guilabel>SQL</guilabel> or <guilabel>xPath</guilabel>. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter a query statement. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Search</guilabel> to perform the search and display the results in the <guilabel>Search Results</guilabel> tab. - </para> - <para> - Or click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to save the search query to the <guilabel>Saved Query</guilabel> tab. - </para> - <para> - Or click <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> to quit. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Advanced_Search-Search_by_existing_queries"> - <title>Search by existing queries</title> - <para> - This tab lists all saved search queries (that you have access rights to use). - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/savedquerytab.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/savedquerytab.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/searchsprocket.png" format="PNG" width="7mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>sprocket</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon to perform the search and see the results in the <guilabel>Search Results</guilabel> tab. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/editicon4.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>pencil</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon to edit the query statement. The query form will appear like when creating a query (see <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Advanced_Search-Search_by_creating_a_new_query"/>); however, you cannot edit the name of the saved search. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/trashicon.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>trash can</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> to delete a query (provided you have the access rights to that query). - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - </section> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Search_in_Content_Explorer-Quick_Search"> - <title>Search with saved queries</title> - <para> - Do the following to perform a search with saved queries: - </para> - <procedure> - <step> - <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/savedsearchicon.png" format="PNG" width="12mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>magnifying glass</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon to see the list of existing queries. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/savedsearches.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/savedsearches.png" format="PNG" width="65mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - A query list will appear. It contains the sections, including <guilabel>All Articles</guilabel>, <guilabel>Created Documents</guilabel>, <guilabel>CreatedDocumentDayBefore</guilabel> and <guilabel>allArticles</guilabel>. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/querylistsections.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/querylistsections.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Launch, modify or delete the queries as required (see <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Advanced_Search-Search_by_creating_a_new_query"/> for more information). - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Filter results with the entries in the <guilabel>All Items</guilabel> and/or <guilabel>By Type</guilabel> panes on the left of the tab. Items matching the selections will appear in the right pane. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the required document or folder name to view or download them. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> -</section> \ No newline at end of file + </procedure> + </section> + </section> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/SearchPortlet.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/SearchPortlet.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/SearchPortlet.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -33,13 +33,7 @@ </para> <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/searchpage.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/searchpage.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/searchpage.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/searchpage.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject> <para> @@ -47,13 +41,7 @@ </para> <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/nosearchresult.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/nosearchresult.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/nosearchresult.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/nosearchresult.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject> <para> @@ -171,38 +159,18 @@ <itemizedlist> <listitem> <para> - <emphasis role="bold">The 1st way</emphasis>: Turn on the Edit mode, and then click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/editicon4.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - - <textobject> - <phrase> pencil </phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon: + <emphasis role="bold">The 1st way</emphasis>: Turn on the Edit mode, and then click the <guilabel> pencil </guilabel> icon: </para> <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/search-editmode.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/search-editmode.png" format="PNG" - width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/search-editmode.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/search-editmode.png" format="PNG" + width="150mm"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject> </listitem> <listitem> <para> - <emphasis role="bold">The 2nd way</emphasis>: Click <menuchoice> <guimenu>Site Editor</guimenu> - <guimenuitem> - Edit Page - </guimenuitem> - </menuchoice> on the administration bar. The <guilabel>Page Editor</guilabel> will be displayed. + <emphasis role="bold">The 2nd way</emphasis>: Click <menuchoice> <guimenu>Site Editor</guimenu> <guimenuitem> Edit Page </guimenuitem> </menuchoice> on the administration bar. The <guilabel>Page Editor</guilabel> will be displayed. </para> <itemizedlist> @@ -212,30 +180,14 @@ </para> <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/edit_searchresult.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/edit_searchresult.png" format="PNG" - width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/edit_searchresult.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/edit_searchresult.png" format="PNG" + width="150mm"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject> </listitem> <listitem> <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/editicon4.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - - <textobject> - <phrase> pencil </phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon to edit the portlet. + Click the <guilabel> pencil </guilabel> icon to edit the portlet. </para> </listitem> </itemizedlist> @@ -247,13 +199,7 @@ </para> <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/editsearchportlet.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/editsearchportlet.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/editsearchportlet.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/editsearchportlet.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject> <para> @@ -299,7 +245,8 @@ </entry> <entry> - The way to display the search results. There are 3 options: <itemizedlist> + The way to display the search results. There are 3 options: + <itemizedlist> <listitem> <para> <guilabel>None</guilabel>: Only the first page of search results is displayed in the search page. Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Sites.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Sites.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Sites.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -3,1014 +3,1126 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "../../User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_a_site"> - <title>Manage a site</title> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_a_site-Create_a_new_site"> - <title>Create a new site</title> - <para> - </para> - <note> - <para> - Only administrators have the authorization rights required to create a new site in Site Publisher. - </para> - </note> - <para> - Site Publisher administrators can create a site (portal) to meet their specific needs. - </para> - <para> - Do the following: - </para> - <procedure> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Site</guilabel> on the administration bar to see a list of existing portals. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/site.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/site.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the <guilabel>Add New Portal</guilabel> button to open the form to add a new portal. - </para> - <para> - In the <guilabel>Portal Setting</guilabel> tab, set some properties for this site including the portal name, locale and skin. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newportal.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newportal.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <table id="tabl-User_Guide-Create_a_new_site-Details"> - <title>Details:</title> - <tgroup cols="2"> - <thead> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Field</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> Information </entry> - </row> - </thead> - <tbody> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Portal name</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> The name of the portal. This field is required and must be unique. Only alphabetical, numerical, dash and underscore characters are allowed for this field and the name must be between 3 and 30 characters.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Locale</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> The interface language of the portal. This field is required. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Skin</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> The skin of the portal. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Label</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry> - A label for the site. This field is optional. Labels are localizable with the new Extended Label Mode. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Description</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry> - A descriptions of the site. - </entry> - </row> - </tbody> - </tgroup> - </table> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the <guilabel>Properties</guilabel> tab to keep sessions alive. - </para> - <para> - The <guilabel>Keep session alive</guilabel> option defines the working session so as to avoid timeouts. There are three options available: - </para> - <variablelist> - <varlistentry> - <term>Never</term> - <listitem> - <para> - The session will never timeout, even if an application requests it. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>On-demand</term> - <listitem> - <para> - The session will timeout if an application requests it - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>Always</term> - <listitem> - <para> - The session will time out after a set period. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - </variablelist> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/portalproperties.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/portalproperties.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_a_site"> + <title>Manage a site</title> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_a_site-Create_a_new_site"> + <title>Create a new site</title> + + <para></para> + + <note> <para> - Also while on the <guilabel>Properties</guilabel> tab, check or uncheck the box labeled <guilabel>Show info bar by default</guilabel>. If checked, portlets show an information bar containing the portlet's name, a <emphasis>help</emphasis> drop-down menu and <guilabel>minimize/maximize</guilabel> buttons after being added to a page. + Only administrators have the authorization rights required to create a new site in Site Publisher. </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the <guilabel>Permission Setting</guilabel> tab to set access and edit permission for this portal. - </para> + </note> + + <para> + Site Publisher administrators can create a site (portal) to meet their specific needs. + </para> + + <para> + Do the following: + </para> + + <procedure> + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Site</guilabel> on the administration bar to see a list of existing portals. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/site.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/site.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Add New Portal</guilabel> button to open the form to add a new portal. + </para> + + <para> + In the <guilabel>Portal Setting</guilabel> tab, set some properties for this site including the portal name, locale and skin. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newportal.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newportal.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <table id="tabl-User_Guide-Create_a_new_site-Details"> + <title>Details:</title> + + <tgroup cols="2"> + <thead> + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Field</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + Information + </entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Portal name</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The name of the portal. This field is required and must be unique. Only alphabetical, numerical, dash and underscore characters are allowed for this field and the name must be between 3 and 30 characters. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Locale</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The interface language of the portal. This field is required. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Skin</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The skin of the portal. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Label</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + A label for the site. This field is optional. Labels are localizable with the new Extended Label Mode. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Description</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + A descriptions of the site. + </entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select the <guilabel>Properties</guilabel> tab to keep sessions alive. + </para> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Keep session alive</guilabel> option defines the working session so as to avoid timeouts. There are three options available: + </para> + + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>Never</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + The session will never timeout, even if an application requests it. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>On-demand</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + The session will timeout if an application requests it + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Always</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + The session will time out after a set period. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/portalproperties.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/portalproperties.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Also while on the <guilabel>Properties</guilabel> tab, check or uncheck the box labeled <guilabel>Show info bar by default</guilabel>. If checked, portlets show an information bar containing the portlet's name, a <emphasis>help</emphasis> drop-down menu and <guilabel>minimize/maximize</guilabel> buttons after being added to a page. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select the <guilabel>Permission Setting</guilabel> tab to set access and edit permission for this portal. + </para> <!-- Doc Note: The content from this point until the next comment 'END' should probably be moved to a breakout explanation. Having it in the middle of a procedure breaks the flow of the steps. --> - <para> - The <guilabel>Permission Setting</guilabel> tab includes two sub-tabs: <guilabel>Access Permission Setting</guilabel> and <guilabel>Edit Permission Setting</guilabel>. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/permissionsetting.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/accesspermission.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <variablelist> - <varlistentry> - <term>Access Permission Setting tab</term> + <para> + The <guilabel>Permission Setting</guilabel> tab includes two sub-tabs: <guilabel>Access Permission Setting</guilabel> and <guilabel>Edit Permission Setting</guilabel>. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/permissionsetting.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>Access Permission Setting tab</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + The access permission list of the portal is empty by default: + </para> + + <para> + Check the <guilabel>Make it public</guilabel> check box to assign the access permission to everyone or click the <guilabel>Add Permission</guilabel> button to assign access permissions to a specific group (select the group you want to grant permission to from the <guilabel>Select Permissions</guilabel> form by selecting a group on the left and a corresponding membership on the right). + </para> + + <para> + Once the desired groups have been selected the access permission list is displayed: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/permissionlist.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/permissionlist.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + Groups can be removed from the <guilabel>Access Permission</guilabel> list by clicking the <guilabel>trash can</guilabel> icon. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Edit Permission Setting</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + The <guilabel>Edit Permission Setting</guilabel> tab is also empty by default. You must assign the edit permission to a specific group. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/editpermission.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/editpermission.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + You can assign the edit permission to a group with a specific membership by clicking the <guilabel>Select Permission</guilabel> button to open the <guilabel>Permission Selector</guilabel> form. Select a group on the left panel and a corresponding membership on the right panel: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/permissionselector.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/permissionselector.png" format="PNG" width="140mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + The asterix (<guilabel>*</guilabel>) in the <guilabel>Select a Membership</guilabel> panel is used to assign the right to everyone in the group selected in the left panel. + </para> + + <para> + After selecting a group, the <guilabel>Current Permission</guilabel> will be displayed with detailed information: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/currentpermission.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/currentpermission.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + The edit permission is assigned for only one group at one time. You can click the <guilabel>Delete Permission</guilabel> button to remove the current edit permission of the selected group or re–assign the edit permission to another group by clicking the <guilabel>Select Permission</guilabel> button again and selecting another group. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> +<!-- END --> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to create the new portal. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <para> + After creating a new site, the list of the existing sites will be displayed on the screen. + </para> + + <para> + The new site will be added to the site list in <guilabel>Site</guilabel> on the administration bar and to a drive list that includes all its default files. + </para> + + <para> + To see it in the drive list, click <menuchoice> <guimenu>Group</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Content Explorer</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> on the administrator bar. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/sitesexplorer.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/sitesexplorer.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + For example, after creating a portal named <literal>acme</literal> there is a drive named <literal>acme-category</literal> in <guilabel>Content Explorer</guilabel>: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/exosite.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/exosite.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_a_site-Edit_a_Site"> + <title>Edit a site</title> + + <para> + This function enables you to edit a site, including the settings, permissions and other configuration options as well as the navigation and the layout components. + </para> + + <para> + There are two ways to approach a site that you want to edit: + </para> + + <orderedlist> <listitem> - <para> - The access permission list of the portal is empty by default: - </para> - <para> - Check the <guilabel>Make it public</guilabel> check box to assign the access permission to everyone or click the <guilabel>Add Permission</guilabel> button to assign access permissions to a specific group (select the group you want to grant permission to from the <guilabel>Select Permissions</guilabel> form by selecting a group on the left and a corresponding membership on the right). - </para> - <para> - Once the desired groups have been selected the access permission list is displayed: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/permissionlist.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/permissionlist.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - Groups can be removed from the <guilabel>Access Permission</guilabel> list by clicking the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/trashicon.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>trash can</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon. - </para> + <para> + Edit the site that you are browsing through the <guilabel>Site Editor</guilabel> menu on the administration bar. + </para> </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>Edit Permission Setting</term> + <listitem> - <para> - The <guilabel>Edit Permission Setting</guilabel> tab is also empty by default. You must assign the edit permission to a specific group. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/editpermission.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/editpermission.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - You can assign the edit permission to a group with a specific membership by clicking the <guilabel>Select Permission</guilabel> button to open the <guilabel>Permission Selector</guilabel> form. Select a group on the left panel and a corresponding membership on the right panel: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/permissionselector.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/permissionselector.png" format="PNG" width="140mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - The asterix (<guilabel>*</guilabel>) in the <guilabel>Select a Membership</guilabel> panel is used to assign the right to everyone in the group selected in the left panel. - </para> - <para> - After selecting a group, the <guilabel>Current Permission</guilabel> will be displayed with detailed information: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/currentpermission.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/currentpermission.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - The edit permission is assigned for only one group at one time. You can click the <guilabel>Delete Permission</guilabel> button to remove the current edit permission of the selected group or re–assign the edit permission to another group by clicking the <guilabel>Select Permission</guilabel> button again and selecting another group. - </para> + <para> + Edit another site by accessing it through the <guilabel>Sites</guilabel> menu on the administration bar. + </para> </listitem> - </varlistentry> - </variablelist> -<!-- END --> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to create the new portal. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - <para> - After creating a new site, the list of the existing sites will be displayed on the screen. - </para> - <para> - The new site will be added to the site list in <guilabel>Site</guilabel> on the administration bar and to a drive list that includes all its default files. - </para> - <para> - To see it in the drive list, click <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Group</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Content Explorer</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice> on the administrator bar. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/sitesexplorer.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/sitesexplorer.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - For example, after creating a portal named <literal>acme</literal> there is a drive named <literal>acme-category</literal> in <guilabel>Content Explorer</guilabel>: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/exosite.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/exosite.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_a_site-Edit_a_Site"> - <title>Edit a site</title> - <para> - This function enables you to edit a site, including the settings, permissions and other configuration options as well as the navigation and the layout components. - </para> - <para> - There are two ways to approach a site that you want to edit: - </para> - <orderedlist> - <listitem> - <para>Edit the site that you are browsing through the <guilabel>Site Editor</guilabel> menu on the administration bar.</para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para>Edit another site by accessing it through the <guilabel>Sites</guilabel> menu on the administration bar.</para> - </listitem> - </orderedlist> - - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Edit_a_Site-How_to_edit_the_current_Site"> - <title>By accessing the Site Editor</title> - <para> - Directly edit the site you are browsing by navigating to <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Site Editor</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Edit Layout</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice>. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/editlayout.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/editlayout.png" format="PNG" width="138mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - An editable layout of the site appears: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/editportalform.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/editportalform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <table> - <title/> - <tgroup cols="2"> - <thead> - <row> - <entry> Field </entry> - <entry> Details </entry> - </row> - </thead> - <tbody> - <row> - <entry> - <para> - <guilabel>Site&apos;s config</guilabel> - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/site-config.png" format="PNG" width="34mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </entry> - <entry>Allows editing the site&apos;s configuration.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <para> - <guilabel>Switch View Mode</guilabel> - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/switchviewbutton.png" format="PNG" width="44mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </entry> - <entry>Displays a view of the current layout with content.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <para> - <guilabel>Finish</guilabel> - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/finishbutton.png" format="PNG" width="9mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </entry> - <entry>Saves all changes and exits the Edit page. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <para> - <guilabel>Abort</guilabel> - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/abortbutton.png" format="PNG" width="7mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </entry> - <entry>Cancels all changes that have not been saved and quits the edit page. </entry> - </row> - </tbody> - </tgroup> - </table> - <para> - Using this method you can only edit the layout and the configuration of site. - </para> - <formalpara id="form-User_Guide-How_to_edit_the_current_Site-Edit_layout"> - <title>Edit layout</title> - <para> - Editing the layout allows more aspects of a site, including the banner, navigation bar, breadcrumb bar, homepage or footer to be edited. - </para> - </formalpara> - <para> - You can add more portlets to the site by dragging and dropping them from the <guilabel>Applications</guilabel> tab of the <guilabel>Edit Inline Composer form</guilabel> to the main pane. Portlets can also be moved within the main content pane by dragging them from one location to another. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/moveportlet.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/moveportlet.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <note> - <title>Editing Portlets</title> + </orderedlist> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Edit_a_Site-How_to_edit_the_current_Site"> + <title>By accessing the Site Editor</title> + <para> - The editing process is similar for all portlets, therefore this guide will outline how to edit the site logo portlet as an example. + Directly edit the site you are browsing by navigating to <menuchoice> <guimenu>Site Editor</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Edit Layout</guimenuitem> </menuchoice>. </para> - </note> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-How_to_edit_the_current_Site-Edit_Banner"> - <title>Edit Logo Portlet</title> - <step> - <para> - Open the form to edit a portlet by clicking the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/editicon3.png" format="PNG" width="13mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>pencil</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon of the portlet in the <guilabel>Edit Portal</guilabel> form: + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/editlayout.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/editlayout.png" format="PNG" width="138mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + An editable layout of the site appears: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/editportalform.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/editportalform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <table> + <title/> + + <tgroup cols="2"> + <thead> + <row> + <entry> + Field + </entry> + + <entry> + Details + </entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry> + <para> + <guilabel>Site&apos;s config</guilabel> + </para> + </entry> + + <entry> + Allows editing the site&apos;s configuration. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <para> + <guilabel>Switch View Mode</guilabel> + </para> + </entry> + + <entry> + Displays a view of the current layout with content. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <para> + <guilabel>Finish</guilabel> + </para> + </entry> + + <entry> + Saves all changes and exits the Edit page. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <para> + <guilabel>Abort</guilabel> + </para> + </entry> + + <entry> + Cancels all changes that have not been saved and quits the edit page. + </entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + + <para> + Using this method you can only edit the layout and the configuration of site. + </para> + + <formalpara id="form-User_Guide-How_to_edit_the_current_Site-Edit_layout"> + <title>Edit layout</title> <para> + Editing the layout allows more aspects of a site, including the banner, navigation bar, breadcrumb bar, homepage or footer to be edited. </para> - - <para> - A form to edit the current banner will appear: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/editbannerform.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/editbannerform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the <guilabel>Edit Mode</guilabel> tab: - </para> - <table> - <title></title> - <tgroup cols="2"> - <thead> - <row> - <entry> - Field - </entry> - <entry> - Details - </entry> - </row> - </thead> - <tbody> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Content Selection</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry> - Select the path of the content that you want to show by clicking the <guilabel>plus</guilabel> icon. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Display Settings</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - <guilabel>Show Title</guilabel>: specify whether the title of the content is displayed or not. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - <guilabel>Show Date</guilabel>: specify whether the date of the content publication is displayed or not. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - <guilabel>Show Option Bar:</guilabel> show or hide the Option bar used to show the print link. - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Print Setting</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - <guilabel>Show in page</guilabel>: choose a page for the print review. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - <guilabel>with</guilabel>: parameters contain the content path. - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Advanced</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry> - <para> - The content should enable <guilabel>Dynamic Navigation</guilabel> that interprets the URL and shows a content. - </para> - <para> - The content can be restricted by authorization or by User role. Use the appropriate radio button under <guilabel>Contents Visibility</guilabel> to configure this. - </para> - </entry> - </row> - </tbody> - </tgroup> - </table> + </formalpara> + + <para> + You can add more portlets to the site by dragging and dropping them from the <guilabel>Applications</guilabel> tab of the <guilabel>Edit Inline Composer form</guilabel> to the main pane. Portlets can also be moved within the main content pane by dragging them from one location to another. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/moveportlet.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/moveportlet.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <note> - <title>More Info</title> + <title>Editing Portlets</title> + <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/questionicon.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>question mark</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon to see more information about each field. + The editing process is similar for all portlets, therefore this guide will outline how to edit the site logo portlet as an example. </para> </note> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the <guilabel>Portlet Setting</guilabel> tab: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/portletsettingtab.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/portletsettingtab.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <table frame="all"> - <title/> - <tgroup cols="2"> - <thead> - <row> - <entry> - Field - </entry> - <entry> - Details - </entry> - </row> - </thead> - <tbody> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Display name</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry> The display name of the portlet (not editable).</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Portlet Title</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry> The title of the portlet (editable). </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Width</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry> The display width of the portlet. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Height</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry> The display height of the portlet. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Show info bar.</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry> Tick the check box if you want to show the info bar of the portlet. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Show Portlet mode</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry> Tick the check box if you want to show the portlet mode. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel> Show window state</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry> Tick the check box if you want to show the window state. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Description</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry> Enter a description about the portlet. </entry> - </row> - </tbody> - </tgroup> - </table> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Switch to the <guilabel>Icon</guilabel> tab and designate an icon for the portlet by clicking it. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Switch to the <guilabel>Decoration Theme</guilabel> tab and chose a decoration theme for the portlet. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the <guilabel>Access Permission</guilabel> tab and set the access permissions for the portlet. - </para> - <para> - By default, all users can access the portlet: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/defaultaccess.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/defaultaccess.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - However, you can edit the access permission by clearing the checkbox and clicking <guilabel>Add Permission</guilabel>: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/accesspermission1.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/accesspermission1.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - The <guilabel>ListPermissionSelector</guilabel> form appears. Select a group on the left pane and a membership on the right pane. - </para> - <note> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-How_to_edit_the_current_Site-Edit_Banner"> + <title>Edit Logo Portlet</title> + + <step> + <para> + Open the form to edit a portlet by clicking the <guilabel>pencil</guilabel> icon of the portlet in the <guilabel>Edit Portal</guilabel> form: + </para> + + <para> + A form to edit the current banner will appear: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/editbannerform.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/editbannerform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select the <guilabel>Edit Mode</guilabel> tab: + </para> + + <table> + <title></title> + + <tgroup cols="2"> + <thead> + <row> + <entry> + Field + </entry> + + <entry> + Details + </entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Content Selection</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + Select the path of the content that you want to show by clicking the <guilabel>plus</guilabel> icon. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Display Settings</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + <guilabel>Show Title</guilabel>: specify whether the title of the content is displayed or not. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + <guilabel>Show Date</guilabel>: specify whether the date of the content publication is displayed or not. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + <guilabel>Show Option Bar:</guilabel> show or hide the Option bar used to show the print link. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Print Setting</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + <guilabel>Show in page</guilabel>: choose a page for the print review. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + <guilabel>with</guilabel>: parameters contain the content path. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Advanced</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + <para> + The content should enable <guilabel>Dynamic Navigation</guilabel> that interprets the URL and shows a content. + </para> + + <para> + The content can be restricted by authorization or by User role. Use the appropriate radio button under <guilabel>Contents Visibility</guilabel> to configure this. + </para> + </entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + + <note> + <title>More Info</title> + + <para> + Click the <guilabel>question mark</guilabel> icon to see more information about each field. + </para> + </note> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select the <guilabel>Portlet Setting</guilabel> tab: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/portletsettingtab.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/portletsettingtab.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <table frame="all"> + <title/> + + <tgroup cols="2"> + <thead> + <row> + <entry> + Field + </entry> + + <entry> + Details + </entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Display name</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The display name of the portlet (not editable). + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Portlet Title</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The title of the portlet (editable). + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Width</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The display width of the portlet. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Height</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The display height of the portlet. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Show info bar.</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + Tick the check box if you want to show the info bar of the portlet. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Show Portlet mode</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + Tick the check box if you want to show the portlet mode. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel> Show window state</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + Tick the check box if you want to show the window state. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Description</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + Enter a description about the portlet. + </entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Switch to the <guilabel>Icon</guilabel> tab and designate an icon for the portlet by clicking it. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Switch to the <guilabel>Decoration Theme</guilabel> tab and chose a decoration theme for the portlet. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select the <guilabel>Access Permission</guilabel> tab and set the access permissions for the portlet. + </para> + + <para> + By default, all users can access the portlet: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/defaultaccess.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/defaultaccess.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + However, you can edit the access permission by clearing the checkbox and clicking <guilabel>Add Permission</guilabel>: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/accesspermission1.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/accesspermission1.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + The <guilabel>ListPermissionSelector</guilabel> form appears. Select a group on the left pane and a membership on the right pane. + </para> + + <note> + <para> + The asterix (*) on the right pane denotes all members in the group. + </para> + </note> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save and Close</guilabel> to commit. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>disk</guilabel> icon to quit the form to edit the current site. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <formalpara> + <title>Edit Configuration</title> <para> + To edit the configuration (including language, skin and permissions) of the site, click the <guilabel>Site's Config</guilabel> button to open the same form as the form to add a new portal. + </para> + </formalpara> + <para> - The asterix (*) on the right pane denotes all members in the group. - </para> - </note> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Save and Close</guilabel> to commit. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/finishbutton.png" format="PNG" width="9mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject role="fo"> - <phrase>disk</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon to quit the form to edit the current site. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - <formalpara> - <title>Edit Configuration</title> - <para> - To edit the configuration (including language, skin and permissions) of the site, click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/site-config.png" format="PNG" width="34mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Site's Config</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> button to open the same form as the form to add a new portal. + Follow the same steps as in <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Manage_a_site-Create_a_new_site"/>. + </para> + + <note> + <para> + You cannot change the name of the site. + </para> + </note> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Edit_a_Site-How_to_edit_an_existing_site"> + <title>By accessing the Site</title> + + <para> + This approach way enables you to edit the layout, configuration and navigation bar of a site by going to <guilabel>Sites</guilabel> and selecting the site from the existing site list. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/existingsites.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/existingsites.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <formalpara id="form-User_Guide-How_to_edit_an_existing_site-Edit_Layout"> + <title>Edit Layout</title> <para> + Do the following to edit the layout of an existing site. + </para> + </formalpara> + + <procedure> + <step> + <para> + Click <menuchoice> <guimenu>Site</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Edit Layout</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> to open a form to edit the site layout. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Follow the steps in the <xref linkend="form-User_Guide-How_to_edit_the_current_Site-Edit_layout"/> process. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <formalpara id="form-User_Guide-How_to_edit_an_existing_site-Edit_Navigation"> + <title>Edit Navigation</title> <para> + Do the following to edit the navigation of a site. + </para> + </formalpara> + + <procedure> + <step> + <para> + Click <menuchoice> <guimenu>Site</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Edit Navigation</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> to open the <guilabel>Navigation Management</guilabel> form. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/navigationmanagement.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/navigationmanagement.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="104mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Add Node</guilabel> to open the <guilabel>ADD/EDIT PAGE NODE</guilabel> form. +<!-- (For more details, refer to the Section 5.3.1, Add a new node, GateIn User Guide 3.1.). Commentted reference to Gatein User Guide as not cross-product compatible--> + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + In the <guilabel>Page Node Setting</guilabel> tab, enter a name for the node. This is a required value. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/add-editnode.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/add-editnode.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <table frame="all"> + <title/> + + <tgroup cols="2"> + <thead> + <row> + <entry> + Field + </entry> + + <entry> + Details + </entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Uri</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The node&apos;s identification. The URI is automatically created once a new node has been created. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Node Name</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The node's name. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Extended Label Mode</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + This feature allows localized labels to be attached to nodes. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Language</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + Set the default language for the node. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Label</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The node&apos;s display name on the screen. This field may be changed and its length must be between 3 and 60 characters. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Visible</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + This checkbox allows the page and its node to be shown or hidden on the navigation bar, the page navigation bar and the sitemap. See above for more details. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Publication date &amp; time</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + This option allows this node to be published for a period of time. Two fields, including <literal>Start Publication Date</literal> and <literal>End Publication Date</literal> only display when this option is checked. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Start Publication Date</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The start date and time to publish the node. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>End Publication Date</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The end date and time to publish the node. + </entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select the <guilabel>Page Selector</guilabel> tab: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/pageselector.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/pageselector.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <table frame="all"> + <title/> + + <tgroup cols="2"> + <thead> + <row> + <entry> + Field + </entry> + + <entry> + Details + </entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Page Id</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The identification string of the page. It is created automatically when the page is created. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Name</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The selected page&apos;s name. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Title</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The selected page&apos;s title. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Clear Page</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + To remove the input page information in the fields + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Create Page</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + To create a new page with the input name and the title. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Search and Select Page</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + To search and select an existing page. + </entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + Enter a title for the page. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Create Page</guilabel> to create a new page or <guilabel>Search and Select Page</guilabel> to select an existing page for the node. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select the <guilabel>Icon</guilabel> tab to choose an icon for the node. This is optional. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to create a node for the navigation. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <note> + <title>Editing via Navigation Management</title> + + <para> + You can edit/delete a node, edit a node&apos;s page, copy/cut a node and more by right-clicking the node in the <guilabel>Navigation Management</guilabel> form. + </para> + </note> + + <formalpara id="form-User_Guide-How_to_edit_an_existing_site-Edit_Properties"> + <title>Edit Configuration</title> <para> + The portal&apos;s configuration including language, skin and permissions can be edited by doing the following: + </para> + </formalpara> + + <procedure> + <step> + <para> + Click <menuchoice> <guimenu>Site</guimenu> <guimenuitem> Edit Portal's Config</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> to open the same form as the form to create a site. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Follow the steps in <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Manage_a_site-Create_a_new_site"/>. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_a_site-Switch_between_sites"> + <title>Switch between sites</title> + + <para> + This function is used to move from the current web site to another one. </para> - </formalpara> - <para> - Follow the same steps as in <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Manage_a_site-Create_a_new_site"/>. - </para> - <note> - <para> - You cannot change the name of the site. - </para> - </note> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Edit_a_Site-How_to_edit_an_existing_site"> - <title>By accessing the Site</title> - <para> - This approach way enables you to edit the layout, configuration and navigation bar of a site by going to <guilabel>Sites</guilabel> and selecting the site from the existing site list. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/existingsites.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/existingsites.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <formalpara id="form-User_Guide-How_to_edit_an_existing_site-Edit_Layout"> - <title>Edit Layout</title> - <para> - Do the following to edit the layout of an existing site. - </para> - </formalpara> - <procedure> - <step> - <para> - Click <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Site</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Edit Layout</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice> to open a form to edit the site layout. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Follow the steps in the <xref linkend="form-User_Guide-How_to_edit_the_current_Site-Edit_layout"/> process. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - <formalpara id="form-User_Guide-How_to_edit_an_existing_site-Edit_Navigation"> - <title>Edit Navigation</title> - <para> - Do the following to edit the navigation of a site. + + <procedure> + <title/> + + <step> + <para> + Hover your mouse cursor over <guilabel>Sites</guilabel> on the administration bar and choose a new site from the site list that appears: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/sitelist.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/sitelist.png" format="PNG" width="101mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + The child pages of the new site will now be available in the site's entry under <guilabel>Site</guilabel> on the administration bar: + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_a_site-Delete_a_site"> + <title>Delete a site</title> + + <para> + This function is used to delete a portal (site) from the portal list. </para> - </formalpara> - <procedure> - <step> - <para> - Click <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Site</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Edit Navigation</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice> to open the <guilabel>Navigation Management</guilabel> form.</para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/navigationmanagement.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/navigationmanagement.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="104mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Add Node</guilabel> to open the <guilabel>ADD/EDIT PAGE NODE</guilabel> form. - <!-- (For more details, refer to the Section 5.3.1, Add a new node, GateIn User Guide 3.1.). Commentted reference to Gatein User Guide as not cross-product compatible--> - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - In the <guilabel>Page Node Setting</guilabel> tab, enter a name for the node. This is a required value. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/add-editnode.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/add-editnode.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <table frame="all"> - <title/> - <tgroup cols="2"> - <thead> - <row> - <entry> - Field - </entry> - <entry> - Details - </entry> - </row> - </thead> - <tbody> - <row> - <entry><guilabel>Uri</guilabel></entry> - <entry> The node&apos;s identification. The URI is automatically created once a new node has been created. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Node Name</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry> - The node's name. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Extended Label Mode</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry> - This feature allows localized labels to be attached to nodes. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Language</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry> - Set the default language for the node. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry><guilabel>Label</guilabel></entry> - <entry> The node&apos;s display name on the screen. This field may be changed and its length must be between 3 and 60 characters. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry><guilabel>Visible</guilabel></entry> - <entry> This checkbox allows the page and its node to be shown or hidden on the navigation bar, the page navigation bar and the sitemap. See above for more details. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry><guilabel>Publication date &amp; time</guilabel></entry> - <entry> This option allows this node to be published for a period of time. Two fields, including <literal>Start Publication Date</literal> and <literal>End Publication Date</literal> only display when this option is checked. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry><guilabel>Start Publication Date</guilabel></entry> - <entry> The start date and time to publish the node. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry><guilabel>End Publication Date</guilabel></entry> - <entry> The end date and time to publish the node. </entry> - </row> - </tbody> - </tgroup> - </table> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the <guilabel>Page Selector</guilabel> tab: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/pageselector.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/pageselector.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <table frame="all"> + + <para> + Do the following: + </para> + + <procedure> <title/> - <tgroup cols="2"> - <thead> - <row> - <entry> - Field - </entry> - <entry> - Details - </entry> - </row> - </thead> - <tbody> - <row> - <entry><guilabel>Page Id</guilabel></entry> - <entry> The identification string of the page. It is created automatically when the page is created. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry><guilabel>Name</guilabel></entry> - <entry> The selected page&apos;s name. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry><guilabel>Title</guilabel></entry> - <entry> The selected page&apos;s title. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry><guilabel>Clear Page</guilabel></entry> - <entry> To remove the input page information in the fields </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry><guilabel>Create Page</guilabel></entry> - <entry> To create a new page with the input name and the title. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry><guilabel>Search and Select Page</guilabel></entry> - <entry> To search and select an existing page. </entry> - </row> - </tbody> - </tgroup> - </table> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - Enter a title for the page. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Create Page</guilabel> to create a new page or <guilabel>Search and Select Page</guilabel> to select an existing page for the node. - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the <guilabel>Icon</guilabel> tab to choose an icon for the node. This is optional. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to create a node for the navigation. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - <note> - <title>Editing via Navigation Management</title> - <para> - You can edit/delete a node, edit a node&apos;s page, copy/cut a node and more by right-clicking the node in the <guilabel>Navigation Management</guilabel> form. - </para> - </note> - <formalpara id="form-User_Guide-How_to_edit_an_existing_site-Edit_Properties"> - <title>Edit Configuration</title> - <para> - The portal&apos;s configuration including language, skin and permissions can be edited by doing the following: - </para> - </formalpara> - <procedure> - <step> - <para> - Click <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Site</guimenu> - <guimenuitem> Edit Portal's Config</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice> to open the same form as the form to create a site. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Follow the steps in <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Manage_a_site-Create_a_new_site"/>. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> - </section> - - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_a_site-Switch_between_sites"> - <title>Switch between sites</title> - <para> - This function is used to move from the current web site to another one. - </para> - <procedure> - <title/> - <step> - <para> - Hover your mouse cursor over <guilabel>Sites</guilabel> on the administration bar and choose a new site from the site list that appears: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/sitelist.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/sitelist.png" format="PNG" width="101mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - The child pages of the new site will now be available in the site's entry under <guilabel>Site</guilabel> on the administration bar: - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_a_site-Delete_a_site"> - <title>Delete a site</title> - <para> - This function is used to delete a portal (site) from the portal list. - </para> - <para> - Do the following: - </para> - <procedure> - <title/> - <step> - <para> - Show the portal list by clicking <guilabel>Site</guilabel> on the administration bar: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/sitelistclick.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/sitelistclick.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/deletebutton.png" format="PNG" width="23mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Delete</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> button in the row of the portal that you want to delete. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> in the confirmation message to accept deleting. - </para> - <note> - <para>You cannot delete the <guilabel>Classic</guilabel> site by default.</para> - </note> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> -</section> + + <step> + <para> + Show the portal list by clicking <guilabel>Site</guilabel> on the administration bar: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/sitelistclick.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/sitelistclick.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Delete</guilabel> button in the row of the portal that you want to delete. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> in the confirmation message to accept deleting. + </para> + + <note> + <para> + You cannot delete the <guilabel>Classic</guilabel> site by default. + </para> + </note> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + </section> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/SitesExplorer/Access_Sites_Explorer.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/SitesExplorer/Access_Sites_Explorer.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/SitesExplorer/Access_Sites_Explorer.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -3,87 +3,78 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "../../../User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<section id="sect-User_Guide-Access_Content_Explorer"> - <title>Access Content Explorer</title> - <para> - <emphasis>Content Explorer</emphasis> is used to manage all site documents in different drives. Content Explorer offers network access to the content, regardless of where the user is located. By default, any user can access Content Explorer but only users holding particular roles can perform actions in Content Explorer. - </para> - <procedure> - <title></title> - <step> - <para> - Go to <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Group</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Content Explorer</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice> on the administration bar: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/sitesexplorer.png" format="PNG" /> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/sitesexplorer.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - - </mediaobject> - <para> - A list of all drives (organized into the groups; <emphasis>Personal drives</emphasis>, <emphasis>Group drives</emphasis> and <emphasis>General drives</emphasis>) is displayed: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/alldrives.png" format="PNG" /> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/alldrives.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - </para> - <variablelist> - <varlistentry> - <term>Personal drives:</term> - <listitem> - <para> - A <emphasis>Personal drive</emphasis> is the working space of a user. Within this space there is a <emphasis>Private drive</emphasis> which is locked to anyone but the user and a <emphasis>Public drive</emphasis> for shared resources and collaboration. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/personaldrivesharing.png" format="PNG" /> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/personaldrivesharing.png" format="PNG" width="86mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>Group drives:</term> - <listitem> - <para> - A <emphasis>Group drive</emphasis> is a working space for all members of that group. - </para> - <para> - In the following example, the user <systemitem>root</systemitem> joins in three groups : <emphasis>executive-board</emphasis>, <emphasis>administrators</emphasis> and <emphasis>users</emphasis> so he has the right to access these groups' drives. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/groupdrives.png" format="PNG" /> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/groupdrives.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>General drives:</term> - <listitem> - <para> - A <emphasis>General drive</emphasis> is the working space for all users, however your access rights in different drives depends on your role. If you access in an administrator role you can see all drives, otherwise, as a web-contributor, you can only see some drives. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - </variablelist> - </step> - </procedure> -</section> \ No newline at end of file + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Access_Content_Explorer"> + <title>Access Content Explorer</title> + + <para> + <emphasis>Content Explorer</emphasis> is used to manage all site documents in different drives. Content Explorer offers network access to the content, regardless of where the user is located. By default, any user can access Content Explorer but only users holding particular roles can perform actions in Content Explorer. + </para> + + <procedure> + <title></title> + + <step> + <para> + Go to <menuchoice> <guimenu>Group</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Content Explorer</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> on the administration bar: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/sitesexplorer.png" format="PNG" /> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/sitesexplorer.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + A list of all drives (organized into the groups; <emphasis>Personal drives</emphasis>, <emphasis>Group drives</emphasis> and <emphasis>General drives</emphasis>) is displayed: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/alldrives.png" format="PNG" /> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/alldrives.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para></para> + + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>Personal drives:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + A <emphasis>Personal drive</emphasis> is the working space of a user. Within this space there is a <emphasis>Private drive</emphasis> which is locked to anyone but the user and a <emphasis>Public drive</emphasis> for shared resources and collaboration. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/personaldrivesharing.png" format="PNG" /> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/personaldrivesharing.png" format="PNG" width="86mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Group drives:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + A <emphasis>Group drive</emphasis> is a working space for all members of that group. + </para> + + <para> + In the following example, the user <systemitem>root</systemitem> joins in three groups : <emphasis>executive-board</emphasis>, <emphasis>administrators</emphasis> and <emphasis>users</emphasis> so he has the right to access these groups' drives. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/groupdrives.png" format="PNG" /> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/groupdrives.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>General drives:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + A <emphasis>General drive</emphasis> is the working space for all users, however your access rights in different drives depends on your role. If you access in an administrator role you can see all drives, otherwise, as a web-contributor, you can only see some drives. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/SitesExplorer/Actions.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/SitesExplorer/Actions.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/SitesExplorer/Actions.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -4,37 +4,41 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "../../../User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions"> - <title>Actions</title> - <para> - Actions appear as tabs on the action bar of the Content Explorer pane. They are managed by administrators. The - actions visible to any given user will depend on their role permissions and the tab and drive they are browsing. - </para> - <para> - This section discusses the actions available in Site Publisher's - <guilabel>Content Explorer</guilabel> - and how to use them. - </para> - <important id="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"> - <title>Button Visibility in Views</title> - <para> + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions"> + <title>Actions</title> + + <para> + Actions appear as tabs on the action bar of the Content Explorer pane. They are managed by administrators. The actions visible to any given user will depend on their role permissions and the tab and drive they are browsing. + </para> + + <para> + This section discusses the actions available in Site Publisher's <guilabel>Content Explorer</guilabel> and how to use them. + </para> + + <important id="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"> + <title>Button Visibility in Views</title> + + <para> Certain buttons mentioned in this section may not be visible on the tabs in the <guilabel>Content Explorer</guilabel>. These buttons may need to be enabled in the Administration portlet. - </para> - <para> + </para> + + <para> Navigate to <menuchoice><guimenu>Group</guimenu><guimenuitem>Administration</guimenuitem><guimenuitem>Content Presentation</guimenuitem><guimenuitem>Manage View</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, click on the pencil icon corresponding to the appropriate <guilabel>View</guilabel> to edit that view. - </para> - <para> + </para> + + <para> Choose the tab you would like the required button to appear on (<guilabel>Publication</guilabel>, <guilabel>Collaboration</guilabel>, <guilabel>System</guilabel> or another) and check the check-box which corresponds to the button you wish to enable. - </para> - <para> + </para> + + <para> If the button has been recently enabled, you may need to refresh the <guilabel>Content Explorer</guilabel> page using the <guilabel>Refresh</guilabel> button. - </para> - <para> + </para> + + <para> More information about managing views can be found in <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Content_Presentation_Manager-Manage_Views"/> - </para> - </important> - - <!--DOCS NOTE: This section removed as there is another section about adding a catergory at Manage Categories -> Add a category for a node + </para> + </important> +<!--DOCS NOTE: This section removed as there is another section about adding a catergory at Manage Categories -> Add a category for a node <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Add_Category"> <title>Add a category</title> <para>This function enables you to add a category to a node.</para> @@ -50,16 +54,7 @@ </step> <step> <para> - Select the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/addcategorybutton.png" format="PNG" width="27mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Add category</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button on the action bar and the + Select the <guilabel>Add category</guilabel> button on the action bar and the <guilabel>Add Category</guilabel> form appears: </para> @@ -89,525 +84,419 @@ </procedure> </section> --> - - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Add_a_document"> - <title>Add a document</title> - <para> - There are several types of document in Site Publisher, including <emphasis>File</emphasis>,<emphasis> - Article</emphasis>,<emphasis>Podcast</emphasis>,<emphasis>Sample node</emphasis>, - <emphasis>File Plan</emphasis> - and<emphasis>Kofax</emphasis>. - </para> - <para> - The table below shows nodes types to which different document types can be added. The rows indicate what the - node in the left column can be added to. The columns indicate what the node at the top can contain. - </para> - <table> + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Add_a_document"> + <title>Add a document</title> + + <para> + There are several types of document in Site Publisher, including <emphasis>File</emphasis>,<emphasis> Article</emphasis>,<emphasis>Podcast</emphasis>,<emphasis>Sample node</emphasis>, <emphasis>File Plan</emphasis> and<emphasis>Kofax</emphasis>. + </para> + + <para> + The table below shows nodes types to which different document types can be added. The rows indicate what the node in the left column can be added to. The columns indicate what the node at the top can contain. + </para> + + <table> <title/> + <tgroup cols="9"> - <thead> - <row> - <entry/> - <entry>File</entry> - <entry>Article</entry> - <entry>Podcast</entry> - <entry>Sample node</entry> - <entry>File Plan</entry> - <entry>Kofax document</entry> - <entry>Content folder</entry> - <entry>Document folder</entry> - </row> - </thead> - <tbody> - <row> - <entry>File</entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry>Article</entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry/> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"/> - <entry align="center"/> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"/> - </row> - <row> - <entry>Podcast</entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry>Sample node</entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"/> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"/> - <entry align="center"/> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"/> - </row> - <row> - <entry>File Plan</entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"/> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"/> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry>Kofax</entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"/> - </row> - <row> - <entry>Uploaded file</entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry>Content folder</entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"/> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"/> - </row> - <row> - <entry>Document folder</entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"/> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"/> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - <entry align="center"> - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - </entry> - </row> - </tbody> + <thead> + <row> + <entry/> + + <entry> + File + </entry> + + <entry> + Article + </entry> + + <entry> + Podcast + </entry> + + <entry> + Sample node + </entry> + + <entry> + File Plan + </entry> + + <entry> + Kofax document + </entry> + + <entry> + Content folder + </entry> + + <entry> + Document folder + </entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry> + File + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + Article + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry/> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"/> + + <entry align="center"/> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"/> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + Podcast + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + Sample node + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"/> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"/> + + <entry align="center"/> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"/> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + File Plan + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"/> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"/> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + Kofax + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"/> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + Uploaded file + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + Content folder + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"/> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"/> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + Document folder + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"/> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"/> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry align="center"> + <inlinemediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> </imageobject> </inlinemediaobject> + </entry> + </row> + </tbody> </tgroup> - </table> - <note> + </table> + + <note> <title>Legend</title> + <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - The - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/affirm.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>green tick</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon indicates that the corresponding document can be added into. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - A blank entry means the corresponding document cannot be added into. - </para> - </listitem> + <listitem> + <para> + The <guilabel>green tick</guilabel> icon indicates that the corresponding document can be added into. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + A blank entry means the corresponding document cannot be added into. + </para> + </listitem> </itemizedlist> + <para> - Follow the horizontal, you will know what the node can be added to. + Follow the horizontal, you will know what the node can be added to. </para> + <para> - Follow the vertical, you will know what the node can include. + Follow the vertical, you will know what the node can include. </para> - </note> - <para> + </note> + + <para> Do the following to add a new document: - </para> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_document-Add_a_new_document"> + </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_document-Add_a_new_document"> <title>Add a new document</title> + <step> - <para> - Select a folder from the left panel where you want to add a new document. - </para> + <para> + Select a folder from the left panel where you want to add a new document. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the Add Contents button on the <guilabel>Actions</guilabel> tab. - </para> - <!-- DOCS NOTE: BZ#814395: + <para> + Click the Add Contents button on the <guilabel>Actions</guilabel> tab. + </para> +<!-- DOCS NOTE: BZ#814395: <mediaobject> <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/actionstab.png" format="PNG"/> @@ -618,1668 +507,1481 @@ </mediaobject> --> </step> + <step> - <para> - You will be presented with a page to choose a content template . - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/templateform.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/templateform.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="XXXmm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <para> + You will be presented with a page to choose a content template . + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/templateform.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/templateform.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="XXXmm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> - </procedure> - <!-- DOC NOTE: The procedure below was not in the 2.1.1 .odt. It has been re-included as is it linked to in "Create a new Article" --> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_document-Attach_files_to_a_document"> + </procedure> +<!-- DOC NOTE: The procedure below was not in the 2.1.1 .odt. It has been re-included as is it linked to in "Create a new Article" --> + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_document-Attach_files_to_a_document"> <title>Attach files to a document</title> + <step> - <para> - Select a document that you want to attach files to and click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/uploadicon2.png" format="PNG" width="17mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Upload Files</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button on the <guilabel>Actions</guilabel> tab. - </para> - <note> - <title>Upload Files Button</title> - <para> - In some instances the <guilabel>Upload Files</guilabel> and <guilabel>Add Symlinks</guilabel> buttons may be located under a drop-down menu labeled <guilabel>More</guilabel>: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/more_drop_menu.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/more_drop_menu.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </note> - <para> - The - <guilabel>Upload File</guilabel> - form will appear. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/uploadfilewindow.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/uploadfilewindow.png" format="PNG" width="141mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <para> + Select a document that you want to attach files to and click the <guilabel>Upload Files</guilabel> button on the <guilabel>Actions</guilabel> tab. + </para> + + <note> + <title>Upload Files Button</title> + + <para> + In some instances the <guilabel>Upload Files</guilabel> and <guilabel>Add Symlinks</guilabel> buttons may be located under a drop-down menu labeled <guilabel>More</guilabel>: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/more_drop_menu.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/more_drop_menu.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </note> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Upload File</guilabel> form will appear. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/uploadfilewindow.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/uploadfilewindow.png" format="PNG" width="141mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> + <step> - <para> - Enter a name into the - <guilabel>Name</guilabel> - field, otherwise, the - <guilabel>Name</guilabel> - field is automatically added with the name of the file. - </para> + <para> + Enter a name into the <guilabel>Name</guilabel> field, otherwise, the <guilabel>Name</guilabel> field is automatically added with the name of the file. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click - <guilabel>Browse</guilabel> - to select the attachment file. You can click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/addplusicon.png" format="PNG" width="8mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>plus</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon to add multiple files. - </para> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Browse</guilabel> to select the attachment file. You can click the <guilabel>plus</guilabel> icon to add multiple files. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click - <guilabel>Save</guilabel> - to attach the files or - <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> - to quit. - </para> - <note> - <title>File Types</title> - <para>Site Publisher enables you to view all types of documents, such as Open Office files, Microsoft Office files and PDF format files.</para> - </note> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to attach the files or <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> to quit. + </para> + + <note> + <title>File Types</title> + + <para> + Site Publisher enables you to view all types of documents, such as Open Office files, Microsoft Office files and PDF format files. + </para> + </note> </step> - </procedure> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_document-Create_a_new_File_document"> + </procedure> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_document-Create_a_new_File_document"> <title>Create a new File document</title> + <step> - <para> - Follow the steps in - <xref linkend="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_document-Add_a_new_document"/> and click the <guilabel>File</guilabel> template. - </para> + <para> + Follow the steps in <xref linkend="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_document-Add_a_new_document"/> and click the <guilabel>File</guilabel> template. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Enter a name for the file document in the - <guilabel>Name</guilabel> - field. Some special characters cannot be used in the - <guilabel>Name</guilabel> - field: @ # % &amp; * ( ) “ &apos; : ; [ ] {} / ! - </para> + <para> + Enter a name for the file document in the <guilabel>Name</guilabel> field. Some special characters cannot be used in the <guilabel>Name</guilabel> field: @ # % &amp; * ( ) “ &apos; : ; [ ] {} / ! + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the scroll arrows to see the <guilabel>Mime Type</guilabel> - list and select one. There are two types of File document for you to choose: - </para> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - <emphasis>text/html</emphasis>: When creating a - <emphasis>text/html</emphasis> - File document, you can input source code (<emphasis>HTML</emphasis>, for example) in the - <guilabel>Content</guilabel> - field. After being created, the desired content will be generated, then you can see both the - input source code and the generated content in that document. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - <guilabel>text/plain</guilabel>: After being created, the content will display exactly what - you entered in the - <guilabel>Content</guilabel> - field. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - <guilabel>application/x-groovy+html</guilabel>:After being created the content will be marked up as appropriate for display. - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> + <para> + Click the scroll arrows to see the <guilabel>Mime Type</guilabel> list and select one. There are two types of File document for you to choose: + </para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + <emphasis>text/html</emphasis>: When creating a <emphasis>text/html</emphasis> File document, you can input source code (<emphasis>HTML</emphasis>, for example) in the <guilabel>Content</guilabel> field. After being created, the desired content will be generated, then you can see both the input source code and the generated content in that document. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + <guilabel>text/plain</guilabel>: After being created, the content will display exactly what you entered in the <guilabel>Content</guilabel> field. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + <guilabel>application/x-groovy+html</guilabel>:After being created the content will be marked up as appropriate for display. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> </step> + <step> - <para> - Input a value in the - <guilabel>Content</guilabel> - field: - </para> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - <emphasis>text/html</emphasis>: If chose to create a File document with source code and then - generated content (in<emphasis role="bold">Step 3</emphasis>), click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/sourceicon.png" format="PNG" width="21mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Source</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button in the editor bar. In this mode, only the<guilabel>Save</guilabel>, - <guilabel>New Page</guilabel> - and - <guilabel>Preview</guilabel> - icons are available. Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/previewicon.png" format="PNG" width="7mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>magnifying glass</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon to preview the generated content. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - <guilabel>text/plain</guilabel>: If you selected text/plain type in<emphasis role="bold"> - Step 3</emphasis>, the content field will be displayed like so: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/plaintextcontentform.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/plaintextcontentform.png" format="PNG" - width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> + <para> + Input a value in the <guilabel>Content</guilabel> field: + </para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + <emphasis>text/html</emphasis>: If chose to create a File document with source code and then generated content (in<emphasis role="bold">Step 3</emphasis>), click the <guilabel>magnifying glass</guilabel> icon to preview the generated content. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + <guilabel>text/plain</guilabel>: If you selected text/plain type in<emphasis role="bold"> Step 3</emphasis>, the content field will be displayed like so: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/plaintextcontentform.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/plaintextcontentform.png" format="PNG" + width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> </step> + <step> - <para> - Fill values in all the fields, including <guilabel>Title</guilabel>, <guilabel>Description</guilabel>, <guilabel>Creator</guilabel> and <guilabel>Source</guilabel>. - </para> - <para> - Click the plus icon to open more fields. - </para> + <para> + Fill values in all the fields, including <guilabel>Title</guilabel>, <guilabel>Description</guilabel>, <guilabel>Creator</guilabel> and <guilabel>Source</guilabel>. + </para> + + <para> + Click the plus icon to open more fields. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click - <guilabel>Save as Draft</guilabel> - to create a new File document. - </para> - <para> - After being created successfully, a - <emphasis>text/html</emphasis> - File document will be displayed as: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/htmltab.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/htmltab.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - You can see both the original and rendered views in the respective tabs at the top of the window: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/texttab.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/texttab.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save as Draft</guilabel> to create a new File document. + </para> + + <para> + After being created successfully, a <emphasis>text/html</emphasis> File document will be displayed as: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/htmltab.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/htmltab.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + You can see both the original and rendered views in the respective tabs at the top of the window: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/texttab.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/texttab.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> - </procedure> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_document-Create_a_new_Article"> + </procedure> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_document-Create_a_new_Article"> <title>Create a new Article</title> + <step> - <para> - Follow the steps in - <xref linkend="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_document-Add_a_new_document"/> and click the <guilabel>Article</guilabel> template. - </para> + <para> + Follow the steps in <xref linkend="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_document-Add_a_new_document"/> and click the <guilabel>Article</guilabel> template. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Input the name and the title of the Article in the - <guilabel>Name</guilabel> - and - <guilabel>Title</guilabel> - field, some special characters cannot be used in the - <guilabel>Name</guilabel> - field (@ # % &amp; * ( ) “ &apos; : ; [ ] {} / !). - </para> + <para> + Input the name and the title of the Article in the <guilabel>Name</guilabel> and <guilabel>Title</guilabel> field, some special characters cannot be used in the <guilabel>Name</guilabel> field (@ # % &amp; * ( ) “ &apos; : ; [ ] {} / !). + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Enter some content in the - <guilabel>Summary</guilabel> - and - <guilabel>Content</guilabel> - fields. - </para> + <para> + Enter some content in the <guilabel>Summary</guilabel> and <guilabel>Content</guilabel> fields. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click - <guilabel>Save as Draft</guilabel> - to save the entered content or - <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> - to quit without saving. - </para> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save as Draft</guilabel> to save the entered content or <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> to quit without saving. + </para> </step> - </procedure> - <para> + </procedure> + + <para> After being created, the new added Article document will appear as so: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newarticle.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newarticle.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - The - <guilabel>Links</guilabel> - section is used to list all its related documents. After adding relations for a document you can click these - links to view the content of the related documents. - </para> - <para> - The - <guilabel>Attachments</guilabel> - section is used to list all its uploaded files/documents that is attached with the Article. You can remove - the attachments by clicking the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/trashicon.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>trash can</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/attachments.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/attachments.png" format="PNG" width="114mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newarticle.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newarticle.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Links</guilabel> section is used to list all its related documents. After adding relations for a document you can click these links to view the content of the related documents. + </para> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Attachments</guilabel> section is used to list all its uploaded files/documents that is attached with the Article. You can remove the attachments by clicking the <guilabel>trash can</guilabel> icon. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/attachments.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/attachments.png" format="PNG" width="114mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> For more details about how to add an attachment, see<xref linkend="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_document-Attach_files_to_a_document"/>. - </para> - <note> + </para> + + <note> <title>Existing Names</title> + <para> - Document names can be the same as an existing document. When a new document is created with the same - name as another document, the new document name will have an added index (e.g:<emphasis>test - [2]</emphasis>). + Document names can be the same as an existing document. When a new document is created with the same name as another document, the new document name will have an added index (e.g:<emphasis>test [2]</emphasis>). </para> - </note> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_document-Create_a_New_Podcast"> + </note> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_document-Create_a_New_Podcast"> <title>Create a new Podcast</title> + <step> - <para> - Follow the steps in - <xref linkend="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_document-Add_a_new_document"/> and click the <guilabel>Podcast</guilabel> template. - </para> - <table> - <title/> - <tgroup cols="2"> - <thead> - <row> - <entry>Field</entry> - <entry>Details</entry> - </row> - </thead> - <tbody> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Name</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>The name of a document. This field is required. Some special characters (@ # % - &amp; * ( ) “ &apos; : ; [ ] {} / !) are not allowed. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Title</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>The title of a document.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Categories</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>The categories of a document.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Link</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>The link to the source path of the uploaded media file. This field is required. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Author</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>The author of the uploaded media file.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Explicit</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry> - <para> - This field is used to indicate whether or not your Podcast episodes contain an - explicit content. - </para> - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Category</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>The category of the uploaded media file, example: music, film, short clip, etc. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Keyword</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>Keyword allows you to search your Podcast files more quickly. You can use commas - to separate between keywords. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Publish date</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>The date when an episode was released.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Description</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>Information about the uploaded media file.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Mime type</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>The type of the uploaded media file.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Length</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>The length of the uploaded media file.</entry> - </row> - </tbody> - </tgroup> - </table> + <para> + Follow the steps in <xref linkend="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_document-Add_a_new_document"/> and click the <guilabel>Podcast</guilabel> template. + </para> + + <table> + <title/> + + <tgroup cols="2"> + <thead> + <row> + <entry> + Field + </entry> + + <entry> + Details + </entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Name</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The name of a document. This field is required. Some special characters (@ # % &amp; * ( ) “ &apos; : ; [ ] {} / !) are not allowed. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Title</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The title of a document. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Categories</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The categories of a document. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Link</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The link to the source path of the uploaded media file. This field is required. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Author</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The author of the uploaded media file. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Explicit</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + <para> + This field is used to indicate whether or not your Podcast episodes contain an explicit content. + </para> + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Category</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The category of the uploaded media file, example: music, film, short clip, etc. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Keyword</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + Keyword allows you to search your Podcast files more quickly. You can use commas to separate between keywords. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Publish date</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The date when an episode was released. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Description</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + Information about the uploaded media file. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Mime type</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The type of the uploaded media file. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Length</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The length of the uploaded media file. + </entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> </step> + <step> - <para> - Enter values for the above fields. To upload a media file, click the - <guilabel>Browse...</guilabel> - button and select the media file from your machine. - </para> + <para> + Enter values for the above fields. To upload a media file, click the <guilabel>Browse...</guilabel> button and select the media file from your machine. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click - <guilabel>Save as Draft</guilabel> - to finish. - </para> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save as Draft</guilabel> to finish. + </para> </step> - </procedure> - <note> + </procedure> + + <note> <title>Existing Names</title> + <para> - Document names can be the same as an existing document. When a new document is created with the same - name as another document, the new name will have an index added (e.g:<emphasis>test [2]</emphasis>) + Document names can be the same as an existing document. When a new document is created with the same name as another document, the new name will have an index added (e.g:<emphasis>test [2]</emphasis>) </para> - </note> - <para> + </note> + + <para> Once created, a Podcast will appear as so: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/podcastscreen.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/podcastscreen.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/podcastscreen.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/podcastscreen.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> Podcasts can be listened to immediately, or transferred to another device. - </para> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_document-Create_a_new_Sample_node"> + </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_document-Create_a_new_Sample_node"> <title>Create a new Sample node</title> + <step> - <para> - Follow the steps in - <xref linkend="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_document-Add_a_new_document"/> and click the <guilabel>Sample node</guilabel> template. - </para> + <para> + Follow the steps in <xref linkend="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_document-Add_a_new_document"/> and click the <guilabel>Sample node</guilabel> template. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Complete the appropriate fields. - </para> + <para> + Complete the appropriate fields. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - To upload an image, click the - <guilabel>Browse...</guilabel> - button and select an image from your computer. - </para> + <para> + To upload an image, click the <guilabel>Browse...</guilabel> button and select an image from your computer. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click - <guilabel>Save as Draft</guilabel> - to accept. - </para> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save as Draft</guilabel> to accept. + </para> </step> - </procedure> - <para> + </procedure> + + <para> After being created, a new sample node will be displayed like the illustration below: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/samplenodeformcompleted.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/samplenodeformcompleted.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - The - <guilabel>Relations</guilabel> - area is used to list all related documents. See<xref + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/samplenodeformcompleted.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/samplenodeformcompleted.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Relations</guilabel> area is used to list all related documents. See<xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Relations-View_Relations"/>. - </para> - <para> + </para> + + <para> You can click the links to view content of the related document. - </para> - <para> - The - <guilabel>Attachments</guilabel> - area is used to list all its uploaded files. See<xref + </para> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Attachments</guilabel> area is used to list all its uploaded files. See<xref linkend="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_document-Attach_files_to_a_document"/>. - </para> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_document-Create_a_new_File_Plan"> + </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_document-Create_a_new_File_Plan"> <title>Create a new File Plan</title> + <step> - <para> - Follow the steps in - <xref linkend="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_document-Add_a_new_document"/> and click the <guilabel>File Plan</guilabel> template. - </para> + <para> + Follow the steps in <xref linkend="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_document-Add_a_new_document"/> and click the <guilabel>File Plan</guilabel> template. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Fill in the appropriate fields of the tabs in the Add File plan form. - </para> + <para> + Fill in the appropriate fields of the tabs in the Add File plan form. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click - <guilabel>Save as Draft</guilabel> - to accept creating a file plan. - </para> - <!-- Doc Note: The content from this point until the next comment 'END' should probably be moved to a breakout explanation. Having it in the middle of a procedure breaks the flow of the steps. --> - <variablelist id="vari-User_Guide-Create_a_new_File_Plan-Tabs_in_the_Add_File_plan_form"> - <title>Tabs in the - <guilabel>Add File plan</guilabel> - form - </title> - <varlistentry> - <term>The - <guilabel>Name</guilabel> - tab - </term> - <listitem> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addfileplanform.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addfileplanform.png" format="PNG" - width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <table> - <title/> - <tgroup cols="2"> - <thead> - <row> - <entry>Field</entry> - <entry>Details</entry> - </row> - </thead> - <tbody> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Name</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>The name of the file plan.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Categories</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>The categories of your file plan. Select the categories for your file - plan by clicking the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/addplusicon.png" format="PNG" - width="8mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>plus</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>File Plan note</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>A Note can be added to offer further information to users.</entry> - </row> - </tbody> - </tgroup> - </table> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>The - <guilabel>Record properties</guilabel> - tab - </term> - <listitem> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/recordpropertiestab.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/recordpropertiestab.png" format="PNG" - width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <table> - <title/> - <tgroup cols="2"> - <thead> - <row> - <entry>Field</entry> - <entry>Details</entry> - </row> - </thead> - <tbody> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Record category identifier</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>The alphanumeric identifier indicating a unique record category. This - must be a unique ID and if left blank will be created automatically by - the system. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Disposition authority</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>A reference number to the regulations that govern the disposition. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Permanent record indicator</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>A type of record indicators which should never be deleted.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Disposition instructions</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>A readable guidelines on how the records associated with the file - plan will be handled. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Contains records folder</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>The confirmation is about whether the records folder is contained or - not. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Default media type</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>The choice for preset media types which are made available to - simplify the data entry for the record. This is usually set to - <emphasis>electronic</emphasis> - or<emphasis>paper</emphasis>. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Default marking list</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>Handling and classification information that are printed at the - bottom of the record, such as - <emphasis role="bold">UNCLASSIFIED</emphasis> - or <emphasis role="bold">NOCONTRACT</emphasis>. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Default originating organization</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>This option will set a default <emphasis>originating - organization</emphasis>. This can simplify the data entry that needs for - record keeping. It assumes that the originating organization is the same - for all the information in the file plan. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Vital record indicator</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>This flag is to allow whether tracking or reminding you of the record - as essential or not. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Vital record review period</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>The choice for the interval of time between vital record reviews. - </entry> - </row> - </tbody> - </tgroup> - </table> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>The - <guilabel>Process Properties</guilabel> - tab: - </term> - <listitem> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/processproperties.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/processproperties.png" format="PNG" - width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <table> - <title/> - <tgroup cols="2"> - <thead> - <row> - <entry>Field</entry> - <entry>Details</entry> - </row> - </thead> - <tbody> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Process cutoffs</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>The boolean data type is used to break a process. If the process - cutoff flag is set in the file plan, the record is cutoff after the - expiration, or after it has been obsolete or superseded, depending on - the information in the file plan. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Event trigger</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>The text data type is an automatic executing code which is used to - tell the event to perform some actions. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Cutoff period</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>The duration for the record cutoff performance.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Cutoff on obsolete</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>The record is cutoff when it is obsolete.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Cutoff on superseded</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>The record is cutoff when it is removed or replaced.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Process hold</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>This boolean data type is used when a record process may be held - before the further disposition is handled. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Hold period</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>The duration when a record may be held after cutoff which is normally - measured in years. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Discretionary Hold</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>The boolean data type is used when a hold may be discretionary, such - as after a command change. So, the discretionary hold flag allows the - records management module to track these manual checks. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Process transfer</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>The boolean data type is used to determine how a record process will - be transferred. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Default transfer location</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>The text data type is used to determine where a record is transferred - by default. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Transfer block size</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>The float data type is used to determine in what size blocks for - organizational purposes that is normally measured in Years. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Process accession</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>The boolean data type is flagged when a record which is held - permanently must be ultimately transferred to the national records - authority. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Accession location</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>The text data type is flagged to specify an area for the accession - transfer. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Accession block size</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>The text data type is flagged to determine the blocks size for - organizational purposes which is normally measured in years. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Process destruction</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>The boolean data type is flagged if there is any record to be - destroyed. After that, the record is marked in the Alfresco system to be - permanently destroyed so that all information, metadata and physical - traces are removed and cannot be recovered. - </entry> - </row> - </tbody> - </tgroup> - </table> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - </variablelist> - <!-- END --> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save as Draft</guilabel> to accept creating a file plan. + </para> +<!-- Doc Note: The content from this point until the next comment 'END' should probably be moved to a breakout explanation. Having it in the middle of a procedure breaks the flow of the steps. --> + <variablelist id="vari-User_Guide-Create_a_new_File_Plan-Tabs_in_the_Add_File_plan_form"> + <title>Tabs in the <guilabel>Add File plan</guilabel> form</title> + + <varlistentry> + <term>The <guilabel>Name</guilabel> tab</term> + + <listitem> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addfileplanform.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addfileplanform.png" format="PNG" + width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <table> + <title/> + + <tgroup cols="2"> + <thead> + <row> + <entry> + Field + </entry> + + <entry> + Details + </entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Name</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The name of the file plan. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Categories</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The categories of your file plan. Select the categories for your file plan by clicking the <guilabel>plus</guilabel> icon. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>File Plan note</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + A Note can be added to offer further information to users. + </entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>The <guilabel>Record properties</guilabel> tab</term> + + <listitem> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/recordpropertiestab.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/recordpropertiestab.png" format="PNG" + width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <table> + <title/> + + <tgroup cols="2"> + <thead> + <row> + <entry> + Field + </entry> + + <entry> + Details + </entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Record category identifier</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The alphanumeric identifier indicating a unique record category. This must be a unique ID and if left blank will be created automatically by the system. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Disposition authority</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + A reference number to the regulations that govern the disposition. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Permanent record indicator</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + A type of record indicators which should never be deleted. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Disposition instructions</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + A readable guidelines on how the records associated with the file plan will be handled. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Contains records folder</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The confirmation is about whether the records folder is contained or not. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Default media type</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The choice for preset media types which are made available to simplify the data entry for the record. This is usually set to <emphasis>electronic</emphasis> or<emphasis>paper</emphasis>. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Default marking list</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + Handling and classification information that are printed at the bottom of the record, such as <emphasis role="bold">UNCLASSIFIED</emphasis> or <emphasis role="bold">NOCONTRACT</emphasis>. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Default originating organization</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + This option will set a default <emphasis>originating organization</emphasis>. This can simplify the data entry that needs for record keeping. It assumes that the originating organization is the same for all the information in the file plan. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Vital record indicator</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + This flag is to allow whether tracking or reminding you of the record as essential or not. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Vital record review period</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The choice for the interval of time between vital record reviews. + </entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>The <guilabel>Process Properties</guilabel> tab:</term> + + <listitem> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/processproperties.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/processproperties.png" format="PNG" + width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <table> + <title/> + + <tgroup cols="2"> + <thead> + <row> + <entry> + Field + </entry> + + <entry> + Details + </entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Process cutoffs</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The boolean data type is used to break a process. If the process cutoff flag is set in the file plan, the record is cutoff after the expiration, or after it has been obsolete or superseded, depending on the information in the file plan. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Event trigger</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The text data type is an automatic executing code which is used to tell the event to perform some actions. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Cutoff period</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The duration for the record cutoff performance. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Cutoff on obsolete</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The record is cutoff when it is obsolete. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Cutoff on superseded</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The record is cutoff when it is removed or replaced. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Process hold</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + This boolean data type is used when a record process may be held before the further disposition is handled. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Hold period</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The duration when a record may be held after cutoff which is normally measured in years. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Discretionary Hold</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The boolean data type is used when a hold may be discretionary, such as after a command change. So, the discretionary hold flag allows the records management module to track these manual checks. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Process transfer</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The boolean data type is used to determine how a record process will be transferred. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Default transfer location</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The text data type is used to determine where a record is transferred by default. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Transfer block size</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The float data type is used to determine in what size blocks for organizational purposes that is normally measured in Years. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Process accession</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The boolean data type is flagged when a record which is held permanently must be ultimately transferred to the national records authority. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Accession location</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The text data type is flagged to specify an area for the accession transfer. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Accession block size</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The text data type is flagged to determine the blocks size for organizational purposes which is normally measured in years. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Process destruction</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The boolean data type is flagged if there is any record to be destroyed. After that, the record is marked in the Alfresco system to be permanently destroyed so that all information, metadata and physical traces are removed and cannot be recovered. + </entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> +<!-- END --> </step> - </procedure> - <para> + </procedure> + + <para> After being created, the new File Plan will be displayed: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/fileplancontent.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/fileplancontent.png" format="PNG" width="146mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_document-Create_a_new_Kofax"> + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/fileplancontent.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/fileplancontent.png" format="PNG" width="146mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_document-Create_a_new_Kofax"> <title>Create a new Kofax</title> + <step> - <para> - Follow the steps in - <xref linkend="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_document-Add_a_new_document"/> and click the <guilabel>Kofax document</guilabel> template. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addnewkofax.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addnewkofax.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <para> + Follow the steps in <xref linkend="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_document-Add_a_new_document"/> and click the <guilabel>Kofax document</guilabel> template. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addnewkofax.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addnewkofax.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> + <step> - <para> - Enter a name for a Kofax document in the Name field. This field is required. Some special characters - cannot be used in the Name field(@ # % &amp; * ( ) “ &apos; : ; [ ] { } / !). - </para> + <para> + Enter a name for a Kofax document in the Name field. This field is required. Some special characters cannot be used in the Name field(@ # % &amp; * ( ) “ &apos; : ; [ ] { } / !). + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Select categories for the document by clicking the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/addplusicon.png" format="PNG" width="8mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>plus</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon. - </para> + <para> + Select categories for the document by clicking the <guilabel>plus</guilabel> icon. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click - <guilabel>Save as Draft</guilabel> - to create the document. - </para> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save as Draft</guilabel> to create the document. + </para> </step> - </procedure> - <para> + </procedure> + + <para> A newly created kofax document will be displayed like this: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/kofaxdocument.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/kofaxdocument.png" format="PNG" width="147mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - The - <guilabel>File View</guilabel> - tab is used to display all added nodes in that Kofax. All added files in that Kofax are also displayed in - the - <guilabel>Document View</guilabel> - tab: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/kofaxdocumentview.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/kofaxdocumentview.png" format="PNG" width="147mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_document-Create_new_Event"> + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/kofaxdocument.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/kofaxdocument.png" format="PNG" width="147mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + The <guilabel>File View</guilabel> tab is used to display all added nodes in that Kofax. All added files in that Kofax are also displayed in the <guilabel>Document View</guilabel> tab: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/kofaxdocumentview.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/kofaxdocumentview.png" format="PNG" width="147mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_document-Create_new_Event"> <title>Create new Event</title> + <step> - <para> - Follow the steps in - <xref linkend="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_document-Add_a_new_document"/> and click the <guilabel>Event</guilabel> template. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/neweventform.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/neweventform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <para> + Follow the steps in <xref linkend="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_document-Add_a_new_document"/> and click the <guilabel>Event</guilabel> template. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/neweventform.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/neweventform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> + <step> - <para> - Enter a title for the event. - </para> + <para> + Enter a title for the event. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Enter the location where the event will take place in the - <guilabel>Location</guilabel> - field. Check the Google Maps checkbox if you want the location of the event shown on Google Maps. - </para> + <para> + Enter the location where the event will take place in the <guilabel>Location</guilabel> field. Check the Google Maps checkbox if you want the location of the event shown on Google Maps. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Enter the - <guilabel>Start</guilabel> - and - <guilabel>End Date/time</guilabel> - of the event. - </para> + <para> + Enter the <guilabel>Start</guilabel> and <guilabel>End Date/time</guilabel> of the event. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Fill the - <guilabel>Summary</guilabel> - and - <guilabel>Content</guilabel> - fields. - </para> + <para> + Fill the <guilabel>Summary</guilabel> and <guilabel>Content</guilabel> fields. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click - <guilabel>Save</guilabel> - to commit the event. - </para> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to commit the event. + </para> </step> - </procedure> - <para> + </procedure> + + <para> After being created, the event will be displayed like the illustration bellow: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/eventdisplay.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/eventdisplay.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/eventdisplay.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/eventdisplay.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> The event will be displayed in a website as: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/eventdisplayweb.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/eventdisplayweb.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Add_Folder"> - <title>Add a folder</title> - <para> - You can create a document directly in a specific drive; however, adding documents to a specific folders - allows more effective document management. - </para> - <para> + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/eventdisplayweb.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/eventdisplayweb.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Add_Folder"> + <title>Add a folder</title> + + <para> + You can create a document directly in a specific drive; however, adding documents to a specific folders allows more effective document management. + </para> + + <para> There are two types of folder: - </para> - <itemizedlist> + </para> + + <itemizedlist> <listitem> - <para> - Content folder. - </para> + <para> + Content folder. + </para> </listitem> + <listitem> - <para> - Document folder. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/documentfolder.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/documentfolder.png" format="PNG" width="43mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <para> + Document folder. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/documentfolder.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/documentfolder.png" format="PNG" width="43mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - <para> - In the default Portal skin, the icon for a content folder node is displayed in blue and the icon for a - document folder node is displayed in yellow. - </para> - <variablelist id="vari-User_Guide-Add_Folder-File_and_folder_types_in_a_folder"> + </itemizedlist> + + <para> + In the default Portal skin, the icon for a content folder node is displayed in blue and the icon for a document folder node is displayed in yellow. + </para> + + <variablelist id="vari-User_Guide-Add_Folder-File_and_folder_types_in_a_folder"> <title>File and folder types in a folder</title> + <varlistentry> - <term>Content folder</term> - <listitem> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - You can add a Content Folder into a Content Folder. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - You can add a Document Folder into a Content Folder. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - You can add documents into a Content Folder. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - You can upload files into a Content Folder. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - You can import subnodes exported into a Content Folder. - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - </listitem> + <term>Content folder</term> + + <listitem> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + You can add a Content Folder into a Content Folder. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + You can add a Document Folder into a Content Folder. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + You can add documents into a Content Folder. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + You can upload files into a Content Folder. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + You can import subnodes exported into a Content Folder. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> </varlistentry> + <varlistentry> - <term>Document folder</term> - <listitem> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - You can add a new Document Folder into a Document Folder. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - You can add File, Podcast, File Plan documents into a Document Folder. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - You can upload files into a Document Folder. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - You - <emphasis role="bold">cannot</emphasis> - add a Content Folder into a Document Folder - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - You - <emphasis role="bold">cannot</emphasis> - import an exported a Content Folder into a Document Folder. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - You - <emphasis role="bold">cannot</emphasis> - import an exported Article, Sample node, Kofax into a Document Folder. - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - </listitem> + <term>Document folder</term> + + <listitem> + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + You can add a new Document Folder into a Document Folder. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + You can add File, Podcast, File Plan documents into a Document Folder. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + You can upload files into a Document Folder. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + You <emphasis role="bold">cannot</emphasis> add a Content Folder into a Document Folder + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + You <emphasis role="bold">cannot</emphasis> import an exported a Content Folder into a Document Folder. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + You <emphasis role="bold">cannot</emphasis> import an exported Article, Sample node, Kofax into a Document Folder. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </listitem> </varlistentry> - </variablelist> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Add_Folder-Create_a_folder"> + </variablelist> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Add_Folder-Create_a_folder"> <title>Create a folder</title> + <step> - <para> - Select the path to create a folder. - </para> + <para> + Select the path to create a folder. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/addfolderbutton.png" format="PNG" width="24mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Add Folder</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button on the action bar. The - <guilabel>Add a Folder</guilabel> - form is displayed: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addfolderwindow.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addfolderwindow.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Add Folder</guilabel> button on the action bar. The <guilabel>Add a Folder</guilabel> form is displayed: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addfolderwindow.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addfolderwindow.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/icon1.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>scroll arrows</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon to see the type list and select a folder type. - </para> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>scroll arrows</guilabel> icon to see the type list and select a folder type. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Enter a name in the - <guilabel>Name</guilabel> - field. This field is required. You cannot use some special characters in this field (@ # % &amp; * - ( ) &quot; &apos; : ; [ ] {} / !) - </para> + <para> + Enter a name in the <guilabel>Name</guilabel> field. This field is required. You cannot use some special characters in this field (@ # % &amp; * ( ) &quot; &apos; : ; [ ] {} / !) + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click - <guilabel>Save</guilabel> - to create a new folder. - </para> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to create a new folder. + </para> </step> - </procedure> - <note> + </procedure> + + <note> <title>Duplicate Names</title> + <para> - A folder can have the same name as an existing folder. When a new folder is created with the same name - with another, the new name will have an index number added (e.g:<emphasis>test[2]</emphasis>). + A folder can have the same name as an existing folder. When a new folder is created with the same name with another, the new name will have an index number added (e.g:<emphasis>test[2]</emphasis>). </para> + <para> - You can only create a content folder in another content folder. + You can only create a content folder in another content folder. </para> + <para> - You can create a document folder in a content folder or a document folder. + You can create a document folder in a content folder or a document folder. </para> - </note> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Add_translations_to_a_document"> - <title>Add translations to a document</title> - <para> - This function enables users to add multiple languages for a document. This action is similar to adding a - language. - </para> - <para> - By default, the - <guilabel>Add translation</guilabel> - button is not displayed on the action bar. - </para> - <para>Enable this function by navigating to - <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Administration</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Content Presentation</guimenuitem> - <guimenuitem>Manage Views</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice> - . See - <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Content_Presentation_Manager-Manage_Views"/> - to know how to add the - <guilabel>Add translation</guilabel> - button to the tabs on the action bar in Content Explorer. - </para> - <procedure> + </note> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Add_translations_to_a_document"> + <title>Add translations to a document</title> + + <para> + This function enables users to add multiple languages for a document. This action is similar to adding a language. + </para> + + <para> + By default, the <guilabel>Add translation</guilabel> button is not displayed on the action bar. + </para> + + <para> + Enable this function by navigating to <menuchoice> <guimenu>Administration</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Content Presentation</guimenuitem> <guimenuitem>Manage Views</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> . See <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Content_Presentation_Manager-Manage_Views"/> to know how to add the <guilabel>Add translation</guilabel> button to the tabs on the action bar in Content Explorer. + </para> + + <procedure> <title/> + <step> - <para> - Select a document you want to add the translation for. For example, select an - <guilabel>Article</guilabel> - which is in <emphasis>English</emphasis>: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/selectarticle.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/selectarticle.png" format="PNG" width="50mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <para> + Select a document you want to add the translation for. For example, select an <guilabel>Article</guilabel> which is in <emphasis>English</emphasis>: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/selectarticle.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/selectarticle.png" format="PNG" width="50mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/addtranslationicon.png" format="PNG" width="31mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Add Translation</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button on the action bar. The - <guilabel>Symlink Manager</guilabel> - will appear: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/symlinkmanager2.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/symlinkmanager2.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Add Translation</guilabel> button on the action bar. The <guilabel>Symlink Manager</guilabel> will appear: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/symlinkmanager2.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/symlinkmanager2.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/addplusicon.png" format="PNG" width="8mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>plus</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon, then browse to the target document that has different language with the first document. For - example, the - <guilabel>Article</guilabel> - version in French. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/choosetargetnode.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/choosetargetnode.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>plus</guilabel> icon, then browse to the target document that has different language with the first document. For example, the <guilabel>Article</guilabel> version in French. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/choosetargetnode.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/choosetargetnode.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> + <step> - <para> - After you have selected the document, click - <guilabel>Save</guilabel> - on the - <guilabel>Symlink Manager</guilabel> - form: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/symlinkmanagersave.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/symlinkmanagersave.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <para> + After you have selected the document, click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> on the <guilabel>Symlink Manager</guilabel> form: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/symlinkmanagersave.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/symlinkmanagersave.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> + <step> - <para> - Select the document which you have added the translation to, then click the - <guilabel>Relation</guilabel> - button on the sidebar. - </para> - <para> - You will see the available language for the selected document. Click the language on this panel to - view the document in the corresponding language version. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/availablelanguages.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/availablelanguages.png" format="PNG" width="51mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <para> + Select the document which you have added the translation to, then click the <guilabel>Relation</guilabel> button on the sidebar. + </para> + + <para> + You will see the available language for the selected document. Click the language on this panel to view the document in the corresponding language version. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/availablelanguages.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/availablelanguages.png" format="PNG" width="51mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> - </procedure> - </section> - - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Add_symlink"> - <title>Add Symlink</title> - <para> - You also easily add a Symlink for a document for the purpose of fast accessing the document that you are - looking for: - </para> - <para> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Add_symlink"> + <title>Add Symlink</title> + + <para> + You also easily add a Symlink for a document for the purpose of fast accessing the document that you are looking for: + </para> + + <para> Do the following to add a Symlink: - </para> - <procedure> + </para> + + <procedure> <title/> + <step> - <para> - Select a document that you want to point a Symlink to. - </para> + <para> + Select a document that you want to point a Symlink to. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/addsymlinkbutton.png" format="PNG" width="27mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Add Sym Link</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button on the action bar. The Sym Link Manager pop-up will appear: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/symlinkmanager.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/symlinkmanager.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <table> - <title/> - <tgroup cols="2"> - <thead> - <row> - <entry>Field</entry> - <entry>Details</entry> - </row> - </thead> - <tbody> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Path Node</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>The path of a link</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Symlink name</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>The name of the link.</entry> - </row> - </tbody> - </tgroup> - </table> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Add Sym Link</guilabel> button on the action bar. The Sym Link Manager pop-up will appear: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/symlinkmanager.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/symlinkmanager.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <table> + <title/> + + <tgroup cols="2"> + <thead> + <row> + <entry> + Field + </entry> + + <entry> + Details + </entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Path Node</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The path of a link + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Symlink name</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The name of the link. + </entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/addplusicon.png" format="PNG" width="8mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>plus</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon to open the - <guilabel>Choose Target Node</guilabel> - form. - </para> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>plus</guilabel> icon to open the <guilabel>Choose Target Node</guilabel> form. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Choose the workspace which contains the node that you want to add a Symlink: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/workspacelist.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/workspacelist.png" format="PNG" width="61mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <para> + Choose the workspace which contains the node that you want to add a Symlink: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/workspacelist.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/workspacelist.png" format="PNG" width="61mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/greentick.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>green tick</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon in the row of the node that you want to add, the path of the node will appear in the - <guilabel>Path Node</guilabel> - field and the name of the node is set by the name of the selected node. You can also edit this name. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/symlinkmanagercompleted.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/symlinkmanagercompleted.png" format="PNG" - width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>green tick</guilabel> icon in the row of the node that you want to add, the path of the node will appear in the <guilabel>Path Node</guilabel> field and the name of the node is set by the name of the selected node. You can also edit this name. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/symlinkmanagercompleted.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/symlinkmanagercompleted.png" format="PNG" + width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click - <guilabel>Save</guilabel> - to add Symlink. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/symlinkadded.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/symlinkadded.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to add Symlink. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/symlinkadded.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/symlinkadded.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Comment"> - <title>Comment</title> - <para> - This function is used to comment on a document (Note: you cannot comment for a - <emphasis>File Plan</emphasis> - document). - </para> - <procedure> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Comment"> + <title>Comment</title> + + <para> + This function is used to comment on a document (Note: you cannot comment for a <emphasis>File Plan</emphasis> document). + </para> + + <procedure> <title/> + <step> - <para> - Select a document that you want to add a comment to. - </para> + <para> + Select a document that you want to add a comment to. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/commentdocumentbutton.png" format="PNG" width="39mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Comment this document</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button on the action bar. - </para> - <para> - The - <guilabel>Add Comment</guilabel> - form appears: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addcommentform.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addcommentform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Comment this document</guilabel> button on the action bar. + </para> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Add Comment</guilabel> form appears: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addcommentform.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addcommentform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> + <step> - <para> - Add your comment in the - <guilabel>Comment</guilabel> - field. - </para> + <para> + Add your comment in the <guilabel>Comment</guilabel> field. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel>. - </para> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel>. + </para> </step> - </procedure> - <para> + </procedure> + + <para> Comments are shown at the bottom of the document: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/commentdisplay.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/commentdisplay.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - To view your comment click the - <guilabel>Show Comments</guilabel> - link: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/commentview.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/commentview.png" format="PNG" width="110mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - You can edit your comment by clicking the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/editicon2.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>pencil</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon or delete it by clicking the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/trashicon.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>trash can</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon. - </para> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Edit_documents"> - <title>Edit a document</title> - <para> + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/commentdisplay.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/commentdisplay.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + To view your comment click the <guilabel>Show Comments</guilabel> link: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/commentview.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/commentview.png" format="PNG" width="110mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + You can edit your comment by clicking the <guilabel>trash can</guilabel> icon. + </para> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Edit_documents"> + <title>Edit a document</title> + + <para> There are two ways to edit a document. - </para> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Edit_documents-Method_One"> + </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Edit_documents-Method_One"> <title>Method One</title> + <step> - <para> - Select a document you want to edit in the left panel. - </para> + <para> + Select a document you want to edit in the left panel. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/editdocumenticon.png" format="PNG" width="38mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Edit Document</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button on the action bar. - </para> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Edit Document</guilabel> button on the action bar. + </para> </step> - </procedure> - <para> + </procedure> + + <para> Or: - </para> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Edit_documents-Method_Two"> + </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Edit_documents-Method_Two"> <title>Method Two</title> + <step> - <para> - Select a folder that contains the document you want to edit. - </para> + <para> + Select a folder that contains the document you want to edit. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Right-click the document you want to edit and select Edit from the menu. - </para> - <para> - The - <guilabel>Edit Document</guilabel> - form will appear. All information of the selected document will be displayed in this form and ready - for you to change except the - <guilabel>Name</guilabel> - field. - </para> + <para> + Right-click the document you want to edit and select Edit from the menu. + </para> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Edit Document</guilabel> form will appear. All information of the selected document will be displayed in this form and ready for you to change except the <guilabel>Name</guilabel> field. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click - <guilabel>Save</guilabel> - to commit the changes. - </para> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to commit the changes. + </para> </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Export_nodes"> - <title>Export nodes</title> - <para> - Nodes can be exported into either - <filename>.xml</filename> - or - <filename>.zip</filename> - file types. - </para> - <procedure> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Export_nodes"> + <title>Export nodes</title> + + <para> + Nodes can be exported into either <filename>.xml</filename> or <filename>.zip</filename> file types. + </para> + + <procedure> <title/> + <step> - <para> - Select a node that you want to export. - </para> + <para> + Select a node that you want to export. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the Export Node button on the action bar to show the - <guilabel>Export Node</guilabel> - form: - </para> - <!-- DOCS NOTE: BZ#814395: + <para> + Click the Export Node button on the action bar to show the <guilabel>Export Node</guilabel> form: + </para> +<!-- DOCS NOTE: BZ#814395: <mediaobject> <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/exportnodeform.png" format="PNG"/> @@ -2289,3208 +1991,2472 @@ </imageobject> </mediaobject> --> - <table> - <title/> - <tgroup cols="2"> - <thead> - <row> - <entry>Fields</entry> - <entry>Details</entry> - </row> - </thead> - <tbody> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Path to Export</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>The path of the node being exported. This field will be pre-populated.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Format</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>The format of the original node.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Document View</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>Each node is a tag and properties of that node are considered to be elements of - that tag. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>System View</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>Each node and each property of that node is included in a different tag.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Zip</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>If this field is checked, the node will be exported as a - <guilabel>.zip</guilabel> - file. - </entry> - </row> - </tbody> - </tgroup> - </table> + <table> + <title/> + + <tgroup cols="2"> + <thead> + <row> + <entry> + Fields + </entry> + + <entry> + Details + </entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Path to Export</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The path of the node being exported. This field will be pre-populated. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Format</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The format of the original node. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Document View</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + Each node is a tag and properties of that node are considered to be elements of that tag. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>System View</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + Each node and each property of that node is included in a different tag. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Zip</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + If this field is checked, the node will be exported as a <guilabel>.zip</guilabel> file. + </entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click - <guilabel>Export</guilabel> - and choose a location to save the exported file. - </para> - <note> - <title>Exporting Versioned nodes</title> - <para> - The - <guilabel>Export Node</guilabel> - form will offer an - <guilabel>Export version history</guilabel> - button if the node being exported, or any of its child nodes, is versioned. - </para> - <para> - This action exports all of the node&apos;s version history. - </para> - </note> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Export</guilabel> and choose a location to save the exported file. + </para> + + <note> + <title>Exporting Versioned nodes</title> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Export Node</guilabel> form will offer an <guilabel>Export version history</guilabel> button if the node being exported, or any of its child nodes, is versioned. + </para> + + <para> + This action exports all of the node&apos;s version history. + </para> + </note> </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Import_Nodes"> - <title>Import Nodes</title> - <para> - Nodes that are in the - <filename>.xml</filename> - file format can be imported in to the JCR Explorer system. - </para> - <procedure> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Import_Nodes"> + <title>Import Nodes</title> + + <para> + Nodes that are in the <filename>.xml</filename> file format can be imported in to the JCR Explorer system. + </para> + + <procedure> <title/> + <step> - <para> - Select the location that you want to import the new node to. - </para> + <para> + Select the location that you want to import the new node to. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/importnodebutton.png" format="PNG" width="25mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Import Node</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button which can be found on the <guilabel>System</guilabel> tab of the action bar. - </para> - <note> - <title>The <guilabel>More</guilabel> Menu</title> - <para> - Depending on your browsing circumstances, the <guilabel>Import Node</guilabel> button may be located under the <guilabel>More</guilabel> drop-down menu. - </para> - </note> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/import_button.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/import_button.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - The <guilabel>Import Node</guilabel> form appears. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/importnodeform.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/importnodeform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Import Node</guilabel> button which can be found on the <guilabel>System</guilabel> tab of the action bar. + </para> + + <note> + <title>The <guilabel>More</guilabel> Menu</title> + + <para> + Depending on your browsing circumstances, the <guilabel>Import Node</guilabel> button may be located under the <guilabel>More</guilabel> drop-down menu. + </para> + </note> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/import_button.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/import_button.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Import Node</guilabel> form appears. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/importnodeform.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/importnodeform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click - <guilabel>Browse</guilabel> - next to the - <guilabel>Upload File</guilabel> - field and navigate to the file you want to import. - </para> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Browse</guilabel> next to the <guilabel>Upload File</guilabel> field and navigate to the file you want to import. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Select the - <guilabel>UUID</guilabel> - from the drop down menu: - </para> - <variablelist> - <varlistentry> - <term>Create new</term> - <listitem> - <para> - A new UUID will be created for the new node. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>Remove existing</term> - <listitem> - <para> - The new node will be created in the selected path with the UUID it was exported with. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>Replace existing</term> - <listitem> - <para> - The imported node will replace the existing node and UUID. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>Throw Exception</term> - <listitem> - <para> - This option will display an alert informing you if you cannot import the file. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - </variablelist> + <para> + Select the <guilabel>UUID</guilabel> from the drop down menu: + </para> + + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>Create new</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + A new UUID will be created for the new node. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Remove existing</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + The new node will be created in the selected path with the UUID it was exported with. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Replace existing</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + The imported node will replace the existing node and UUID. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Throw Exception</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + This option will display an alert informing you if you cannot import the file. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click - <guilabel>Browse</guilabel> - next to the - <guilabel>Version history</guilabel> - to select a version to import. - </para> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Browse</guilabel> next to the <guilabel>Version history</guilabel> to select a version to import. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Select a format. - </para> + <para> + Select a format. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click - <guilabel>Import</guilabel> - to import the chosen version of the selected file. - </para> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Import</guilabel> to import the chosen version of the selected file. + </para> </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Manage_Actions"> - <title>Manage Actions</title> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Actions-Add_an_action"> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Manage_Actions"> + <title>Manage Actions</title> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Actions-Add_an_action"> <title>Add an action</title> + <procedure> - <title/> - <step> - <para> - Select the node you want to add an action to. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/manageactionsbutton.png" format="PNG" width="31mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Manage Actions</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). - </para> - <para> - The - <guilabel>Manage Actions</guilabel> - form will appear. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the - <guilabel>Add Actions</guilabel> - tab to open the form to add an action to the folder. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addactionstab.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addactionstab.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/icon1.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>scroll arrows</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon and select the type of action from the drop-down menu. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/typeactions.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/typeactions.png" format="PNG" width="64mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <table> + <title/> + + <step> + <para> + Select the node you want to add an action to. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Manage Actions</guilabel> button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). + </para> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Manage Actions</guilabel> form will appear. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select the <guilabel>Add Actions</guilabel> tab to open the form to add an action to the folder. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addactionstab.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addactionstab.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>scroll arrows</guilabel> icon and select the type of action from the drop-down menu. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/typeactions.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/typeactions.png" format="PNG" width="64mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <table> + <title/> + + <tgroup cols="2"> + <thead> + <row> + <entry> + Field + </entry> + + <entry> + Details + </entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>exo:action</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + This action is not supported. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>exo:AddMetadataAction</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + This action adds metadata + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>exo:autoVersioning</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + This action automatically adds a version. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>exo:createRSSFeedAction</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + This action creates an RSS file. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>exo:enableVersioning</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + This action enables versioning. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>exo:getMailAction</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + This action fetches mail + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>exo:sendMailAction</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + This action sends mail. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>exo:taxonomy/Action</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + This action creates categories + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>exo:transformBinaryTo TextAction</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + This action converts <emphasis>.pdf</emphasis> or <emphasis>.doc</emphasis> file types to plain text. + </entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Complete the required fields in the form for the selected action. + </para> + + <para> + <table frame="all"> <title/> + <tgroup cols="2"> - <thead> - <row> - <entry>Field</entry> - <entry>Details</entry> - </row> - </thead> - <tbody> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>exo:action</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>This action is not supported.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>exo:AddMetadataAction</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>This action adds metadata</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>exo:autoVersioning</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>This action automatically adds a version.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>exo:createRSSFeedAction</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>This action creates an RSS file.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>exo:enableVersioning</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>This action enables versioning.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>exo:getMailAction</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>This action fetches mail</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>exo:sendMailAction</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>This action sends mail.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>exo:taxonomy/Action</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>This action creates categories</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>exo:transformBinaryTo TextAction</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>This action converts - <emphasis>.pdf</emphasis> - or - <emphasis>.doc</emphasis> - file types to plain text. - </entry> - </row> - </tbody> + <colspec colname="c1"/> + + <colspec colname="c2"/> + + <thead> + <row> + <entry> + Field + </entry> + + <entry> + Details + </entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>ID</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The Id of action. This field is created automatically and cannot be modified. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Name</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The name of this action. This name is internal to the JCR explorer. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Lifecycle</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + Select the lifecycle for this action. The action will be executed depending on the lifecycle: + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + <guilabel>Add</guilabel>: The action will be executed to a new document, but not to a subfolder when the document or the subfolder is created in the folder in which an action has been added to. It&apos;s also applied to a new document in the subfolder of the folder. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + <guilabel>Modify</guilabel>: the action will be executed when a folder /node is modified. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + <guilabel>User action</guilabel>: The action is executed when right-clicking on the folder and then selecting the action. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + <guilabel>Remove</guilabel>: The action will be executed to a document, but not to a sub-folder in the folder when the document or the sub-folder is moved. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + <guilabel>Schedule</guilabel>: the action is done at specific time. There are 2 schedule lifeless types: period and cron. (See more about Schedule lifecycle). + </para> + + <para> + If you need the same action to be executed in several lifecycles, you have to create several actions. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </entry> + </row> + </tbody> </tgroup> - </table> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Complete the required fields in the form for the selected action. - </para> - <para> - <table frame="all"> - <title/> - <tgroup cols="2"> - <colspec colname="c1"/> - <colspec colname="c2"/> - <thead> - <row> - <entry> - Field - </entry> - <entry> - Details - </entry> - </row> - </thead> - <tbody> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>ID</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>The Id of action. This field is created automatically and cannot be - modified. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Name</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>The name of this action. This name is internal to the JCR explorer. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Lifecycle</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>Select the lifecycle for this action. The action will be executed - depending on the lifecycle: - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - <guilabel>Add</guilabel>: The action will be executed to a new - document, but not to a subfolder when the document or the - subfolder is created in the folder in which an action has been - added to. It&apos;s also applied to a new document in the - subfolder of the folder. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - <guilabel>Modify</guilabel>: the action will be executed when a - folder /node is modified. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - <guilabel>User action</guilabel>: The action is executed when - right-clicking on the folder and then selecting the action. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - <guilabel>Remove</guilabel>: The action will be executed to a - document, but not to a sub-folder in the folder when the - document or the sub-folder is moved. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - <guilabel>Schedule</guilabel>: the action is done at specific - time. There are 2 schedule lifeless types: period and cron. (See - more about Schedule lifecycle). - </para> - <para> - If you need the same action to be executed in several - lifecycles, you have to create several actions. - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - </entry> - </row> - </tbody> - </tgroup> - </table> - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click - <guilabel>Save</guilabel> - to commit the action. - </para> - </step> + </table> + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to commit the action. + </para> + </step> </procedure> + <para> - All actions of a node are listed in the - <guilabel>Available Actions</guilabel> - tab. + All actions of a node are listed in the <guilabel>Available Actions</guilabel> tab. </para> + <para> - Once an action is added to a node it is automatically added to any child nodes of the selected node. + Once an action is added to a node it is automatically added to any child nodes of the selected node. </para> + <para> - If an action added with the lifecycle<guilabel>user action</guilabel>, it will be applied for the - current node. And an action added with other lifestyles, it will be applied for the child nodes. + If an action added with the lifecycle<guilabel>user action</guilabel>, it will be applied for the current node. And an action added with other lifestyles, it will be applied for the child nodes. </para> + <note> - <title>Actions in menus</title> - <para> - Not all actions are listed in a nodes right-click menu. Some will be performed immediately when that - action is added. - </para> + <title>Actions in menus</title> + + <para> + Not all actions are listed in a nodes right-click menu. Some will be performed immediately when that action is added. + </para> </note> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Actions-View_Actions"> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Actions-View_Actions"> <title>View Actions</title> + <procedure> - <title/> - <step> - <para> - Open the - <guilabel>Manage Actions</guilabel> - form and select the - <guilabel>Available Actions</guilabel> - tab. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/previewicon.png" format="PNG" width="7mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>magnifying glass</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon that corresponds to the action you want to view. - </para> - <para> - The details will be displayed in the - <guilabel>Action info</guilabel> - tab: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/actionsinfotab.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/actionsinfotab.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> + <title/> + + <step> + <para> + Open the <guilabel>Manage Actions</guilabel> form and select the <guilabel>Available Actions</guilabel> tab. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>magnifying glass</guilabel> icon that corresponds to the action you want to view. + </para> + + <para> + The details will be displayed in the <guilabel>Action info</guilabel> tab: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/actionsinfotab.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/actionsinfotab.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Actions-Edit_an_action"> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Actions-Edit_an_action"> <title>Edit an action</title> + <procedure> - <title/> - <step> - <para> - Open the - <guilabel>Manage Actions</guilabel> - form and select the - <guilabel>Available Actions</guilabel> - tab. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/availableactions.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/availableactions.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/editicon4.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>pencil</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon that corresponds to the action you want to modify. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Edit the properties in the<guilabel>Actions form</guilabel>: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/editactionform.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/editactionform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click - <guilabel>Save</guilabel> - to commit the changes. - </para> - </step> + <title/> + + <step> + <para> + Open the <guilabel>Manage Actions</guilabel> form and select the <guilabel>Available Actions</guilabel> tab. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/availableactions.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/availableactions.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>pencil</guilabel> icon that corresponds to the action you want to modify. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Edit the properties in the<guilabel>Actions form</guilabel>: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/editactionform.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/editactionform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to commit the changes. + </para> + </step> </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Actions-Delete_an_action"> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Actions-Delete_an_action"> <title>Delete an action</title> + <procedure> - <title/> - <step> - <para> - Open the - <guilabel>Manage Actions</guilabel> - form and select the - <guilabel>Available Actions</guilabel> - tab. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/availableactions.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/availableactions.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/trashicon.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>trash can</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon that corresponds to the action you want to modify. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click - <guilabel>OK</guilabel> - on the confirmation dialog box to delete the action. - </para> - </step> + <title/> + + <step> + <para> + Open the <guilabel>Manage Actions</guilabel> form and select the <guilabel>Available Actions</guilabel> tab. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/availableactions.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/availableactions.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>trash can</guilabel> icon that corresponds to the action you want to modify. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>OK</guilabel> on the confirmation dialog box to delete the action. + </para> + </step> </procedure> - </section> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Manage_Auditing"> - <title>Manage Auditing</title> - <para> + </section> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Manage_Auditing"> + <title>Manage Auditing</title> + + <para> This function logs property changes in nodes. - </para> - <procedure> + </para> + + <procedure> <title/> + <step> - <para> - Select a node. - </para> + <para> + Select a node. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/manageauditing.png" format="PNG" width="30mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Manage Auditing</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/auditingactivated.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/auditingactivated.png" format="PNG" width="103mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Manage Auditing</guilabel> button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/auditingactivated.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/auditingactivated.png" format="PNG" width="103mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click - <guilabel>Activate</guilabel> - to activate auditing on the selected node. - </para> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Activate</guilabel> to activate auditing on the selected node. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/manageauditing.png" format="PNG" width="30mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Manage Audit</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button again to view audit information for the selected node. - </para> - <para> - The - <guilabel>Auditing Information</guilabel> - list appears. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/auditinformation.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/auditinformation.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - If the node has no audit information the form will appear like this: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/noauditinformation.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/noauditinformation.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Manage Audit</guilabel> button again to view audit information for the selected node. + </para> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Auditing Information</guilabel> list appears. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/auditinformation.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/auditinformation.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + If the node has no audit information the form will appear like this: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/noauditinformation.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/noauditinformation.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Manage_Categories"> - <title>Manage Categories</title> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Categories-Add_a_category_for_a_node"> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Manage_Categories"> + <title>Manage Categories</title> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Categories-Add_a_category_for_a_node"> <title>Add a category for a node</title> + <para> - You can add categories to document type nodes only: + You can add categories to document type nodes only: </para> + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_category_for_a_node-_Add_a_category"> - <title>Add a category</title> - <step> - <para> - Select the node that you want to add a category to. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/managecategoriesicon.png" format="PNG" width="33mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Manage Categories</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). - </para> - <para> - The - <guilabel>Add category</guilabel> - form appears. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the - <guilabel>Select category</guilabel> - tab to show the available categories. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/showcategoriestab.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/showcategoriestab.png" format="PNG" - width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/greentick.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>green tick</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon to add the corresponding category to the node. - </para> - </step> + <title>Add a category</title> + + <step> + <para> + Select the node that you want to add a category to. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Manage Categories</guilabel> button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). + </para> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Add category</guilabel> form appears. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select the <guilabel>Select category</guilabel> tab to show the available categories. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/showcategoriestab.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/showcategoriestab.png" format="PNG" + width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>green tick</guilabel> icon to add the corresponding category to the node. + </para> + </step> </procedure> + <para> - Categories that have been added to a node are listed in the - <guilabel>Referenced categories</guilabel> - tab of the - <guilabel>Add categories</guilabel> - form. + Categories that have been added to a node are listed in the <guilabel>Referenced categories</guilabel> tab of the <guilabel>Add categories</guilabel> form. </para> + <para> - All nodes belonging to a category can be viewed by doing the following: + All nodes belonging to a category can be viewed by doing the following: </para> + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_category_for_a_node-_View_a_category"> - <title>View a category</title> - <step> - <para> - Go to the drive that contains the category you have added. There will be a list of categories - available. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select a category you want. The documents in that category will be listed. - </para> - </step> + <title>View a category</title> + + <step> + <para> + Go to the drive that contains the category you have added. There will be a list of categories available. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select a category you want. The documents in that category will be listed. + </para> + </step> </procedure> + <note> - <title>Copy/paste nodes</title> - <para> - When copying and pasting a node in a drive, a new node with the same content will be created with a - different name. - </para> - <para> - When copying and pasting a node in the category tree, a reference to the original node will be - created. This reference is a link rather than a copy. This feature preserves disk space. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/categoryreferencednodes.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/categoryreferencednodes.png" format="PNG" - width="105mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <title>Copy/paste nodes</title> + + <para> + When copying and pasting a node in a drive, a new node with the same content will be created with a different name. + </para> + + <para> + When copying and pasting a node in the category tree, a reference to the original node will be created. This reference is a link rather than a copy. This feature preserves disk space. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/categoryreferencednodes.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/categoryreferencednodes.png" format="PNG" + width="105mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </note> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Categories-Delete_a_Category"> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Categories-Delete_a_Category"> <title>Delete a Category</title> + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Delete_a_Category-_Delete_a_category"> - <title>Delete a category</title> - <step> - <para> - Select a categorized node. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/managecategoriesicon.png" format="PNG" width="33mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Manage Categories</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the - <guilabel>Referenced categories</guilabel> - tab. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/trashicon.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>trash can</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon that corresponds to the category you want to delete. - </para> - </step> + <title>Delete a category</title> + + <step> + <para> + Select a categorized node. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Manage Categories</guilabel> button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select the <guilabel>Referenced categories</guilabel> tab. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>trash can</guilabel> icon that corresponds to the category you want to delete. + </para> + </step> </procedure> - </section> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-ShowHide_Content"> - <title>Show/Hide a content</title> - <para> + </section> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-ShowHide_Content"> + <title>Show/Hide a content</title> + + <para> Nodes can be hidden or revealed as desired. - </para> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-ShowHide_Content-Hide_a_Node"> + </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-ShowHide_Content-Hide_a_Node"> <title>Hide a Node</title> + <step> - <para> - Select the node you want to hide. - </para> + <para> + Select the node you want to hide. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/hideshowcontentbutton.png" format="PNG" width="35mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Hide/Show content</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). - </para> - <para> - A message box will appear with a confirmation that the node has been hidden. - </para> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Hide/Show content</guilabel> button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). + </para> + + <para> + A message box will appear with a confirmation that the node has been hidden. + </para> </step> + <step id="step-User_Guide-Hide_a_Node-Show_a_Node"> - <title>Show a Node</title> - <para> - To reveal a hidden node, click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/hideshowcontentbutton.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Hide/Show content</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button again. - </para> + <title>Show a Node</title> + + <para> + To reveal a hidden node, click the <guilabel>Hide/Show content</guilabel> button again. + </para> </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Manage_Publications"> - <title>Manage Publications</title> - <para>This function is used to manage node publication.</para> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_Publications-Manage_Publications"> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Manage_Publications"> + <title>Manage Publications</title> + + <para> + This function is used to manage node publication. + </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_Publications-Manage_Publications"> <title>Manage Publications</title> + <step> - <para> - Select a node (on the left or right panel) which you want to manage the publication. - </para> + <para> + Select a node (on the left or right panel) which you want to manage the publication. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/managepublicationsbutton.png" format="PNG" width="34mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Manage Publications</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). - </para> - <para> - The - <guilabel>Manage Publications</guilabel> - form appears: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/managepublicationsform.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/managepublicationsform.png" format="PNG" - width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - The - <guilabel>Revision</guilabel> - tab displays some basic information and the current state of the selected node. - </para> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Manage Publications</guilabel> button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). + </para> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Manage Publications</guilabel> form appears: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/managepublicationsform.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/managepublicationsform.png" format="PNG" + width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Revision</guilabel> tab displays some basic information and the current state of the selected node. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/previewicon2.png" format="PNG" width="7mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>magnifying glass</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon to view the content of the node or click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/restoreversionicon.png" format="PNG" width="10mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Restore Version</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon to restore a version (refer to - <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Manage_Versions"/> - for information about versioning). - </para> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Restore Version</guilabel> icon to restore a version (refer to <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Manage_Versions"/> for information about versioning). + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Select the - <guilabel>History</guilabel> - tab to view the publication history of the node. - </para> + <para> + Select the <guilabel>History</guilabel> tab to view the publication history of the node. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click - <guilabel>Save</guilabel> - to commit any changes made. - </para> - <important> - <para> - See - <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Contribute_Content-Publication_Process"/> - to understand more Manage Publication - </para> - </important> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to commit any changes made. + </para> + + <important> + <para> + See <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Contribute_Content-Publication_Process"/> to understand more Manage Publication + </para> + </important> </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Manage_Relations"> - <title>Manage Relations</title> - <para>You can use this function to create relationships between nodes </para> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Relations-Add_a_relation"> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Manage_Relations"> + <title>Manage Relations</title> + + <para> + You can use this function to create relationships between nodes + </para> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Relations-Add_a_relation"> <title>Add a relation</title> + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Add_a_relation-_Add_a_relation"> - <title>Add a relation</title> - <step> - <para> - Select the node you want to add a relations to. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/managerelationsicon.png" format="PNG" width="31mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Manage Relations</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). - </para> - <para> - The - <guilabel>Add relation</guilabel> - form appears. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the - <guilabel>Select relation</guilabel> - tab to see a list of other documents. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/greentick.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>green tick</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - that corresponds to the document(s) that relate to the document selected in<emphasis + <title>Add a relation</title> + + <step> + <para> + Select the node you want to add a relations to. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Manage Relations</guilabel> button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). + </para> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Add relation</guilabel> form appears. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select the <guilabel>Select relation</guilabel> tab to see a list of other documents. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>green tick</guilabel> that corresponds to the document(s) that relate to the document selected in<emphasis role="bold">Step 1</emphasis>. - </para> - <para> - Documents linked to the original via a relation will be listed in the - <guilabel>Relation List</guilabel> - tab. - </para> - </step> + </para> + + <para> + Documents linked to the original via a relation will be listed in the <guilabel>Relation List</guilabel> tab. + </para> + </step> </procedure> + <note> - <title>Relation Rules</title> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - Relations can only be added to document and uploaded file node types. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - A node cannot have a relation to itself. - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> + <title>Relation Rules</title> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + Relations can only be added to document and uploaded file node types. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + A node cannot have a relation to itself. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> </note> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Relations-Delete_a_relation"> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Relations-Delete_a_relation"> <title>Delete a relation</title> + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Delete_a_relation-_Delete_a_relation"> - <title>Delete a relation</title> - <step> - <para> - Select a node that has links to related documents. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/managerelationsicon.png" format="PNG" width="31mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Manage Relations</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the - <guilabel>Relation List</guilabel> - to view the relations for the selected node. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/trashicon.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>trash can</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - corresponding to the relation you want to remove. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click - <guilabel>OK</guilabel> - on the confirmation message to delete the relation. - </para> - <para> - The related document will be removed from the list. - </para> - </step> + <title>Delete a relation</title> + + <step> + <para> + Select a node that has links to related documents. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Manage Relations</guilabel> button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select the <guilabel>Relation List</guilabel> to view the relations for the selected node. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>trash can</guilabel> corresponding to the relation you want to remove. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>OK</guilabel> on the confirmation message to delete the relation. + </para> + + <para> + The related document will be removed from the list. + </para> + </step> </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Relations-View_Relations"> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Relations-View_Relations"> <title>View Relations</title> + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-View_Relations-View_Relations"> - <title>View Relations</title> - <step> - <para> - Select a node that has links to related documents. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the relation button on the side panel: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/relationsbutton.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/relationsbutton.png" format="PNG" width="67mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - All nodes related to the selected node will be displayed in the left pane: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/relationslist.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/relationslist.png" format="PNG" width="62mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the name of the related node to view the document. - </para> - </step> + <title>View Relations</title> + + <step> + <para> + Select a node that has links to related documents. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the relation button on the side panel: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/relationsbutton.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/relationsbutton.png" format="PNG" width="67mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + All nodes related to the selected node will be displayed in the left pane: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/relationslist.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/relationslist.png" format="PNG" width="62mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the name of the related node to view the document. + </para> + </step> </procedure> - </section> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Manage_Versions"> - <title>Manage Versions</title> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Versions-Add_versions_for_nodes"> + </section> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Manage_Versions"> + <title>Manage Versions</title> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Versions-Add_versions_for_nodes"> <title>Add versions for nodes</title> + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Add_versions_for_nodes-_Add_version"> - <title>Add version</title> - <step> - <para> - Select a node to add a version to. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/manageversionsbutton.png" format="PNG" width="30mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Manage Relations</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). - </para> - <para> - The following message box will appear: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/activateversionmessage.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/activateversionmessage.png" format="PNG" - width="103mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click - <guilabel>Activate</guilabel> - to activate a version for the node. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Right-click the selected node and select - <guilabel>CheckIn</guilabel> - from the right menu: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/versionmenu.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/versionmenu.png" format="PNG" width="61mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/manageversionsbutton.png" format="PNG" width="30mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Manage Versions</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button again to open the - <guilabel>Version Info</guilabel> - window. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/versioninfo.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/versioninfo.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - The node selected in - <emphasis role="bold">Step 1</emphasis> - has been added as the<emphasis>Base version</emphasis>. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Right-click the node again and select - <guilabel>Check out</guilabel> - to obtain a version of this node. - </para> - </step> + <title>Add version</title> + + <step> + <para> + Select a node to add a version to. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Manage Relations</guilabel> button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). + </para> + + <para> + The following message box will appear: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/activateversionmessage.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/activateversionmessage.png" format="PNG" + width="103mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Activate</guilabel> to activate a version for the node. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Right-click the selected node and select <guilabel>CheckIn</guilabel> from the right menu: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/versionmenu.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/versionmenu.png" format="PNG" width="61mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Manage Versions</guilabel> button again to open the <guilabel>Version Info</guilabel> window. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/versioninfo.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/versioninfo.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + The node selected in <emphasis role="bold">Step 1</emphasis> has been added as the<emphasis>Base version</emphasis>. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Right-click the node again and select <guilabel>Check out</guilabel> to obtain a version of this node. + </para> + </step> </procedure> + <note> - <para> - No actions (copy/cut/rename) can be taken on a node in - <emphasis>Check In</emphasis> - status. You must check it out before you can perform any actions on it. - </para> - <para> - If you want to add more versions for a node, right-click the selected node above and select - <guilabel>Check In</guilabel> - and then<guilabel>Check Out</guilabel>. - </para> + <para> + No actions (copy/cut/rename) can be taken on a node in <emphasis>Check In</emphasis> status. You must check it out before you can perform any actions on it. + </para> + + <para> + If you want to add more versions for a node, right-click the selected node above and select <guilabel>Check In</guilabel> and then<guilabel>Check Out</guilabel>. + </para> </note> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Versions-Add_and_Remov_labels_for_Versions"> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Versions-Add_and_Remov_labels_for_Versions"> <title>Add and Remove labels for Versions</title> + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Add_and_Remov_labels_for_Versions-Add_a_label"> - <title>Add a label</title> - <step> - <para> - Select a versioned node. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/manageversionsbutton.png" format="PNG" width="30mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Manage Versions</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/versionplusicon.png" format="PNG" width="9mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>plus</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon on the - <guilabel>Version Info</guilabel> - window to show the - <guilabel>Add label</guilabel> - field under the version list. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addlabelform.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addlabelform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter a value into the - <guilabel>Label</guilabel> - field. - </para> - <para> - The label must be unique and cannot use special characters such as @, #, $. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click - <guilabel>Save</guilabel> - to submit the new label. - </para> - </step> + <title>Add a label</title> + + <step> + <para> + Select a versioned node. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Manage Versions</guilabel> button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>plus</guilabel> icon on the <guilabel>Version Info</guilabel> window to show the <guilabel>Add label</guilabel> field under the version list. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addlabelform.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addlabelform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter a value into the <guilabel>Label</guilabel> field. + </para> + + <para> + The label must be unique and cannot use special characters such as @, #, $. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to submit the new label. + </para> + </step> </procedure> + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Add_and_Remov_labels_for_Versions-Remove_a_label"> - <title>Remove a label</title> - <step> - <para> - Select a versioned node that has at least one label. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/manageversionsbutton.png" format="PNG" width="30mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Manage Versions</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/versionminusicon.png" format="PNG" width="8mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>minus</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon on the - <guilabel>Version Info</guilabel> - window to show the - <guilabel>Remove label</guilabel> - field under the version list. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/removelabelform.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/removelabelform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the label you want to remove from the drop down menu: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/labellist.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/labellist.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <guilabel>Remove</guilabel> - button to remove the selected label. - </para> - </step> + <title>Remove a label</title> + + <step> + <para> + Select a versioned node that has at least one label. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Manage Versions</guilabel> button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>minus</guilabel> icon on the <guilabel>Version Info</guilabel> window to show the <guilabel>Remove label</guilabel> field under the version list. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/removelabelform.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/removelabelform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select the label you want to remove from the drop down menu: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/labellist.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/labellist.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Remove</guilabel> button to remove the selected label. + </para> + </step> </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Versions-View_versions"> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Versions-View_versions"> <title>View versions</title> + <procedure> - <title/> - <step> - <para> - Select a versioned node. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/manageversionsbutton.png" format="PNG" width="30mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Manage Versions</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/previewicon2.png" format="PNG" width="7mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>magnifying glass</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon to see the current versions of the selected node. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/versionviewlist.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/versionviewlist.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> + <title/> + + <step> + <para> + Select a versioned node. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Manage Versions</guilabel> button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>magnifying glass</guilabel> icon to see the current versions of the selected node. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/versionviewlist.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/versionviewlist.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> </procedure> + <note> - <title>Folder Nodes</title> - <para> - Version viewing is not supported on folder nodes. - </para> - <para> - If you click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/previewicon2.png" format="PNG" width="7mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>magnifying glass</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon while the selected node is a folder, a message to this effect will appear. - </para> + <title>Folder Nodes</title> + + <para> + Version viewing is not supported on folder nodes. + </para> + + <para> + If you click the <guilabel>magnifying glass</guilabel> icon while the selected node is a folder, a message to this effect will appear. + </para> </note> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Versions-Restore_versions"> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Versions-Restore_versions"> <title>Restore versions</title> + <procedure> - <title/> - <step> - <para> - Select a node that has at least two versions stored. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/manageversionsbutton.png" format="PNG" width="30mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Manage Versions</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/versionlist.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/versionlist.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the version that you wish to restore as the base version. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/restoreversionicon.png" format="PNG" width="10mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>"Restore Version"</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon to restore the selected version - </para> - </step> + <title/> + + <step> + <para> + Select a node that has at least two versions stored. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Manage Versions</guilabel> button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/versionlist.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/versionlist.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select the version that you wish to restore as the base version. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>"Restore Version"</guilabel> icon to restore the selected version + </para> + </step> </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Versions-Delete_versions"> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Versions-Delete_versions"> <title>Delete versions</title> + <procedure> - <title/> - <step> - <para> - Select a node with at least two versions: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/versionlist.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/versionlist.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/manageversionsbutton.png" format="PNG" width="30mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Manage Versions</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/trashicon.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>trash can</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon corresponding to the version you want to delete. - </para> - <para> - A confirmation message will appear. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click - <guilabel>OK</guilabel> - to delete the version or - <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> - to quit. - </para> - </step> + <title/> + + <step> + <para> + Select a node with at least two versions: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/versionlist.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/versionlist.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Manage Versions</guilabel> button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>trash can</guilabel> icon corresponding to the version you want to delete. + </para> + + <para> + A confirmation message will appear. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>OK</guilabel> to delete the version or <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> to quit. + </para> + </step> </procedure> + <note> - <title>Base Versions</title> - <para> - You cannot delete a base version. - </para> + <title>Base Versions</title> + + <para> + You cannot delete a base version. + </para> </note> - </section> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Multi_Languages"> - <title>Multi Languages</title> - <para> - This function is used to support users to add multiple languages for a document. Each document can be - displayed in many languages. - </para> - <procedure> + </section> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Multi_Languages"> + <title>Multi Languages</title> + + <para> + This function is used to support users to add multiple languages for a document. Each document can be displayed in many languages. + </para> + + <procedure> <title/> + <step> - <para> - Select a document that you want to add language(s). - </para> + <para> + Select a document that you want to add language(s). + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/localisedcontents.png" format="PNG" width="59mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Add/Edit localized contents</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). - </para> - <para> - The - <guilabel>Multi-language</guilabel> - form will appear. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/multi-language.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/multi-language.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - The - <guilabel>View language</guilabel> - tab contains a list of all languages. The default language for the document will be automatically - populated. - </para> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Add/Edit localized contents</guilabel> button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). + </para> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Multi-language</guilabel> form will appear. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/multi-language.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/multi-language.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + The <guilabel>View language</guilabel> tab contains a list of all languages. The default language for the document will be automatically populated. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Select the - <guilabel>Add language</guilabel> - tab. This tab will be displayed differently, depending on what file you selected. However, the area - where you can add languages for document is the same. The below illustration shows the - <guilabel>Add language</guilabel> - tab for a - <guilabel>Sample node</guilabel> - file. - </para> - <para> - The foreground sections of this image may appear differently depending on which file you selected:. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addlanguageform.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addlanguageform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <para> + Select the <guilabel>Add language</guilabel> tab. This tab will be displayed differently, depending on what file you selected. However, the area where you can add languages for document is the same. The below illustration shows the <guilabel>Add language</guilabel> tab for a <guilabel>Sample node</guilabel> file. + </para> + + <para> + The foreground sections of this image may appear differently depending on which file you selected:. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addlanguageform.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addlanguageform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> + <step> - <para> - Select a language you want to add from the - <guilabel>Language</guilabel> - drop-down list. - </para> - <para> - If the selected language has not been added for current document, the content field will be blank. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/selectlanguage.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/selectlanguage.png" format="PNG" width="91mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - Select the - <guilabel>Set default</guilabel> - checkbox if you want to set your selected language as default language. - </para> + <para> + Select a language you want to add from the <guilabel>Language</guilabel> drop-down list. + </para> + + <para> + If the selected language has not been added for current document, the content field will be blank. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/selectlanguage.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/selectlanguage.png" format="PNG" width="91mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + Select the <guilabel>Set default</guilabel> checkbox if you want to set your selected language as default language. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click<guilabel>Save</guilabel>, you will be returned to the - <guilabel>View language</guilabel> tab. Your selected language is now added to the - <guilabel>Language</guilabel> - field: - </para> - <para> - You can view this document in the new added language by selecting the language from the language - drop-down list then click the - <guilabel>View</guilabel> - button. - </para> + <para> + Click<guilabel>Save</guilabel>, you will be returned to the <guilabel>View language</guilabel> tab. Your selected language is now added to the <guilabel>Language</guilabel> field: + </para> + + <para> + You can view this document in the new added language by selecting the language from the language drop-down list then click the <guilabel>View</guilabel> button. + </para> </step> - </procedure> - <para> + </procedure> + + <para> To view the languages list of a document, do the following: - </para> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Multi_Languages-View_the_language_list"> + </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Multi_Languages-View_the_language_list"> <title>View the language list</title> + <step> - <para> - Select a document that you want to view the language list, then click the - <guilabel>Relation</guilabel> - button on side panel: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/relationbutton.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/relationbutton.png" format="PNG" width="67mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <para> + Select a document that you want to view the language list, then click the <guilabel>Relation</guilabel> button on side panel: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/relationbutton.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/relationbutton.png" format="PNG" width="67mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> + <step> - <para> - The list of language (and all related documents) will be displayed on the left panel: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/languagelist.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/languagelist.png" format="PNG" width="62mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - You can view the document in the new language by clicking the corresponding link in the<guilabel> - Languages List</guilabel>. - </para> - <para> - For more details about Relations, refer to<xref + <para> + The list of language (and all related documents) will be displayed on the left panel: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/languagelist.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/languagelist.png" format="PNG" width="62mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + You can view the document in the new language by clicking the corresponding link in the<guilabel> Languages List</guilabel>. + </para> + + <para> + For more details about Relations, refer to<xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Relations-View_Relations"/>. - </para> + </para> </step> - </procedure> - <note> + </procedure> + + <note> <title>File Plan Language</title> + <para> - You cannot add multiple languages to a File Plan or any subnodes of a File Plan. + You cannot add multiple languages to a File Plan or any subnodes of a File Plan. </para> - </note> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Overload_Thumbnails"> - <title>Overload Thumbnails</title> - <para> - You can - <emphasis>overload</emphasis> - a thumbnail image for a folder. Overloading allows a folder to be represented by a thumbnail image, rather - than a folder icon. - </para> - <para> + </note> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Overload_Thumbnails"> + <title>Overload Thumbnails</title> + + <para> + You can <emphasis>overload</emphasis> a thumbnail image for a folder. Overloading allows a folder to be represented by a thumbnail image, rather than a folder icon. + </para> + + <para> To overload a thumbnail, do the following - </para> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Overload_Thumbnails-Overload_thumbnails"> + </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Overload_Thumbnails-Overload_thumbnails"> <title>Overload thumbnails</title> + <step> - <para> - Select the folder you wish to overload with a thumbnail image. - </para> + <para> + Select the folder you wish to overload with a thumbnail image. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/overloadthumbnail.png" format="PNG" width="34mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Overload thumbnail</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). - </para> - <para> - The - <guilabel>Add thumbnail image</guilabel> - form appears: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addthumbnail.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addthumbnail.png" format="PNG" width="129mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Overload thumbnail</guilabel> button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). + </para> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Add thumbnail image</guilabel> form appears: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addthumbnail.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addthumbnail.png" format="PNG" width="129mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click - <guilabel>Browse...</guilabel> - button to select the image to use as the display icon for the selected folder. - </para> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Browse...</guilabel> button to select the image to use as the display icon for the selected folder. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click - <guilabel>Save</guilabel> - to commit the change. The node will be stored in an - <guilabel>exo:thumbnails</guilabel> - folder. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/exothumbnailsfolder.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/exothumbnailsfolder.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to commit the change. The node will be stored in an <guilabel>exo:thumbnails</guilabel> folder. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/exothumbnailsfolder.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/exothumbnailsfolder.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Request_Approval"> - <title>Request Approval</title> - <para> - When a content is created, if you want to publish it but you do not have the right to publish the content, - you must send an approval request for your content. - </para> - <para> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Request_Approval"> + <title>Request Approval</title> + + <para> + When a content is created, if you want to publish it but you do not have the right to publish the content, you must send an approval request for your content. + </para> + + <para> Do the following: - </para> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Request_Approval-Request_Approval"> + </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Request_Approval-Request_Approval"> <title>Request Approval</title> + <step> - <para> - Select a content that you want to send an approval request to publish. - </para> + <para> + Select a content that you want to send an approval request to publish. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the - <guilabel>Request Approval</guilabel> - button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). - </para> - <para> - The content is displayed at the bottom of the Content Explorer of the people who have the right to - approve contents. - </para> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Request Approval</guilabel> button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). + </para> + + <para> + The content is displayed at the bottom of the Content Explorer of the people who have the right to approve contents. + </para> </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Approve_Content"> - <title>Approve a content</title> - <para> - When a content is created by users, it maybe need approved to publish if there is a approval request. To - approve a content, do the following: - </para> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Approve_Content-Approve_a_content"> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Approve_Content"> + <title>Approve a content</title> + + <para> + When a content is created by users, it maybe need approved to publish if there is a approval request. To approve a content, do the following: + </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Approve_Content-Approve_a_content"> <title>Approve a content</title> + <step> - <para> - Select a content that needs approving. - </para> + <para> + Select a content that needs approving. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the - <guilabel>Approve Content</guilabel> - button on the action bar and the content is ready to be published. - </para> - <note> - <para> - The Approve Content button is only invisible for users who have the right to approve contents. - </para> - <para> - By default, the button is not displayed on the action bar. - </para> - <para> - Enable this function by navigating to - <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Administration</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Content Presentation</guimenuitem> - <guimenuitem>Manage Views</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice> - . See - <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Content_Presentation_Manager-Manage_Views"/> - to know how to add the - <guilabel>Approve Content</guilabel> - button to the tabs on the action bar in Content Explorer. - </para> - </note> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Approve Content</guilabel> button on the action bar and the content is ready to be published. + </para> + + <note> + <para> + The Approve Content button is only invisible for users who have the right to approve contents. + </para> + + <para> + By default, the button is not displayed on the action bar. + </para> + + <para> + Enable this function by navigating to <menuchoice> <guimenu>Administration</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Content Presentation</guimenuitem> <guimenuitem>Manage Views</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> . See <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Content_Presentation_Manager-Manage_Views"/> to know how to add the <guilabel>Approve Content</guilabel> button to the tabs on the action bar in Content Explorer. + </para> + </note> </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Publish_Content"> - <title>Publish a content</title> - <para>After the content is approved, it can be published by the people who have the permission to publish - contents. - </para> - <para>Do the following:</para> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Publish_Content-_Publish_a_content"> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Publish_Content"> + <title>Publish a content</title> + + <para> + After the content is approved, it can be published by the people who have the permission to publish contents. + </para> + + <para> + Do the following: + </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Publish_Content-_Publish_a_content"> <title>Publish a content</title> + <step> - <para> - Select a content that you want to publish. - </para> + <para> + Select a content that you want to publish. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the - <guilabel>Publish</guilabel> - button on the action bar. The content will be published as the schedule that you set up. - </para> - <note> - <para> - The - <guilabel>Publish</guilabel> - button is only visible to users who have the right to publish contents. - </para> - <para> - By default, the button is not displayed on the action bar. - </para> - <para> - Enable this function by navigating to - <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Administration</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Content Presentation</guimenuitem> - <guimenuitem>Manage Views</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice> - . See - <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Content_Presentation_Manager-Manage_Views"/> - to know how to add the - <guilabel>Publish</guilabel> - button to the tabs on the action bar in Content Explorer. - </para> - </note> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Publish</guilabel> button on the action bar. The content will be published as the schedule that you set up. + </para> + + <note> + <para> + The <guilabel>Publish</guilabel> button is only visible to users who have the right to publish contents. + </para> + + <para> + By default, the button is not displayed on the action bar. + </para> + + <para> + Enable this function by navigating to <menuchoice> <guimenu>Administration</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Content Presentation</guimenuitem> <guimenuitem>Manage Views</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> . See <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Content_Presentation_Manager-Manage_Views"/> to know how to add the <guilabel>Publish</guilabel> button to the tabs on the action bar in Content Explorer. + </para> + </note> </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Show_Drives"> - <title>Show Drives</title> - <para> This function enables you to show or hide all the drives in Content Explorer.</para> - <para>To show drives, click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/showhidedrives.png" format="PNG" width="44mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Show Drives</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). - </para> - <para>To hide drives, click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/showhidedrives.png" format="PNG" width="44mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Show Drives</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button again. - </para> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Show_JCR_Structure"> - <title>Show JCR Structure</title> - <para>This function allows you to view nodes in documents in a tree structure. </para> - <para> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Show_Drives"> + <title>Show Drives</title> + + <para> + This function enables you to show or hide all the drives in Content Explorer. + </para> + + <para> + To show drives, click the <guilabel>Show Drives</guilabel> button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). + </para> + + <para> + To hide drives, click the <guilabel>Show Drives</guilabel> button again. + </para> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Show_JCR_Structure"> + <title>Show JCR Structure</title> + + <para> + This function allows you to view nodes in documents in a tree structure. + </para> + + <para> <emphasis role="bold">Show the JCR structure</emphasis> - </para> - <procedure> + </para> + + <procedure> <step> - <para> - Select a document. - </para> + <para> + Select a document. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Select the - <guilabel>Info</guilabel> - tab (if the tab is not visible, it may need to be added, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). - </para> + <para> + Select the <guilabel>Info</guilabel> tab (if the tab is not visible, it may need to be added, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/jcrstructure.png" format="PNG" width="46mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Show JCR Structure</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). - </para> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Show JCR Structure</guilabel> button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/discsave.png" format="PNG" width="8mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>disk</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon to save the view. - </para> - <para> - The following information message will appear: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/savemessage.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/savemessage.png" format="PNG" width="142mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>disk</guilabel> icon to save the view. + </para> + + <para> + The following information message will appear: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/savemessage.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/savemessage.png" format="PNG" width="142mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> - </procedure> - <para><emphasis role="bold">Hide the JCR structure</emphasis>: select a document is showing the JCR structure, - then click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/jcrstructure.png" format="PNG" width="46mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Show JCR Structure</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button again. - </para> - - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Tag_Documents"> - <title>Tag Documents</title> - <para> - A - <emphasis>tag</emphasis> - is a (relevant) keyword or term associated with or assigned to a piece of information (a picture, a - geographic map, a blog entry, a video clip etc.). Tags describe the item and enable keyword-based - classification and searching. - </para> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Tag_Documents-Add_a_new_tag_for_a_document"> + </procedure> + + <para> + <emphasis role="bold">Hide the JCR structure</emphasis>: select a document is showing the JCR structure, then click the <guilabel>Show JCR Structure</guilabel> button again. + </para> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Tag_Documents"> + <title>Tag Documents</title> + + <para> + A <emphasis>tag</emphasis> is a (relevant) keyword or term associated with or assigned to a piece of information (a picture, a geographic map, a blog entry, a video clip etc.). Tags describe the item and enable keyword-based classification and searching. + </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Tag_Documents-Add_a_new_tag_for_a_document"> <title>Add a new tag for a document</title> + <step> - <para> - Select a document that you want to add tags to. - </para> + <para> + Select a document that you want to add tags to. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/taggingdocument.png" format="PNG" width="51mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Tag document</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). - </para> - <para> - The - <guilabel>Tag Manager</guilabel> - will be displayed: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/tagmanager.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/tagmanager.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <table> - <title/> - <tgroup cols="2"> - <thead> - <row> - <entry>Fields</entry> - <entry>Details</entry> - </row> - </thead> - <tbody> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Tag names</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>The tag names that users want to add tags for documents.</entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Tag Scopes</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>To classify tags. There are four tag types: private, public, group, site. - Currently, the two first types are activated(Private: a user who create tags can - view and edit tags; public: all users can view and edit tags). - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Linked tags</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry>To list all tags of a document after you click the Add Tags button.</entry> - </row> - </tbody> - </tgroup> - </table> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Tag document</guilabel> button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). + </para> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Tag Manager</guilabel> will be displayed: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/tagmanager.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/tagmanager.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <table> + <title/> + + <tgroup cols="2"> + <thead> + <row> + <entry> + Fields + </entry> + + <entry> + Details + </entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Tag names</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The tag names that users want to add tags for documents. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Tag Scopes</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + To classify tags. There are four tag types: private, public, group, site. Currently, the two first types are activated(Private: a user who create tags can view and edit tags; public: all users can view and edit tags). + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Linked tags</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + To list all tags of a document after you click the Add Tags button. + </entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> </step> + <step> - <para> - Enter a value in the - <guilabel>Tag names</guilabel> - field. A document can be added several tags at a time by entering multiple tags in the - <guilabel>Tag names</guilabel> - field and separate by a comma (,). - </para> + <para> + Enter a value in the <guilabel>Tag names</guilabel> field. A document can be added several tags at a time by entering multiple tags in the <guilabel>Tag names</guilabel> field and separate by a comma (,). + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Select a value for the - <guilabel>Tag Scopes</guilabel> - field. - </para> + <para> + Select a value for the <guilabel>Tag Scopes</guilabel> field. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click - <guilabel>Add Tags</guilabel> - to accept, or - <guilabel>Close</guilabel> - to quit. Only you can see this tag in this document. - </para> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Add Tags</guilabel> to accept, or <guilabel>Close</guilabel> to quit. Only you can see this tag in this document. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/trashicon.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>trash can</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon to delete tags. - </para> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>trash can</guilabel> icon to delete tags. + </para> </step> - </procedure> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Tag_Documents-Remove_tags_from_a_document"> + </procedure> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Tag_Documents-Remove_tags_from_a_document"> <title>Remove tags from a document</title> + <step> - <para> - Select a document with tags that you want to remove. - </para> + <para> + Select a document with tags that you want to remove. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/taggingdocument.png" format="PNG" width="51mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Tag document</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button on the action bar to open the - <guilabel>Tag Manager</guilabel> - form. - </para> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Tag document</guilabel> button on the action bar to open the <guilabel>Tag Manager</guilabel> form. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/trashicon.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>trash can</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - corresponding to the tags you want to delete. - </para> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>trash can</guilabel> corresponding to the tags you want to delete. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click - <guilabel>OK</guilabel> - on the confirmation message to delete the tags. - </para> + <para> + Click <guilabel>OK</guilabel> on the confirmation message to delete the tags. + </para> </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Upload_files_into_folders"> - <title>Upload files into folders</title> - <para> - This function allows you to upload a file from your machine. All file types can be uploaded. The uploaded - file name cannot include the special characters: ! @ $ % &amp; [ ]. - </para> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Upload_files_into_folders-To_upload_file_into_folder_do_as_follows"> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Upload_files_into_folders"> + <title>Upload files into folders</title> + + <para> + This function allows you to upload a file from your machine. All file types can be uploaded. The uploaded file name cannot include the special characters: ! @ $ % &amp; [ ]. + </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Upload_files_into_folders-To_upload_file_into_folder_do_as_follows"> <title>Uploading a File into a Folder</title> + <step> - <para> - Select the folder that you want to upload a file into (you can select from either the left or right - panels). - </para> + <para> + Select the folder that you want to upload a file into (you can select from either the left or right panels). + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Select the - <guilabel>Actions</guilabel> - tab to show some actions on the action bar. - </para> + <para> + Select the <guilabel>Actions</guilabel> tab to show some actions on the action bar. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the <guilabel>Upload</guilabel> - button on the action bar to open the - <guilabel>Upload a file</guilabel> - form: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/uploadfilewindow.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/uploadfilewindow.png" format="PNG" width="141mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Upload</guilabel> button on the action bar to open the <guilabel>Upload a file</guilabel> form: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/uploadfilewindow.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/uploadfilewindow.png" format="PNG" width="141mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> + <step> - <para> - Browse and select a file on your device by clicking the - <guilabel>Browse...</guilabel> - button. The selected file name will be displayed in the - <guilabel>Select a file</guilabel> - field. - </para> - <para> - If you want to upload multi files at the same time, click the plus icon to open more forms to upload more files: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/multipleuploadform.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/multipleuploadform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - The - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/trashicon.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>trash can</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon closes the upload file form. - </para> + <para> + Browse and select a file on your device by clicking the <guilabel>Browse...</guilabel> button. The selected file name will be displayed in the <guilabel>Select a file</guilabel> field. + </para> + + <para> + If you want to upload multi files at the same time, click the plus icon to open more forms to upload more files: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/multipleuploadform.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/multipleuploadform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + The <guilabel>trash can</guilabel> icon closes the upload file form. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - You can change the uploaded file by clicking the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/trashicon.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>trash can</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon and clicking the - <guilabel>Browse...</guilabel> - button again to select another file. - </para> + <para> + You can change the uploaded file by clicking the <guilabel>trash can</guilabel> icon and clicking the <guilabel>Browse...</guilabel> button again to select another file. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - By default, the name of the uploaded file will be kept as original but if you want to change, you - can type a new name in the - <guilabel>Name</guilabel> - field (the new name must not contain the special characters: ! @ $ % &amp; [ ]). This field is not - required. - </para> + <para> + By default, the name of the uploaded file will be kept as original but if you want to change, you can type a new name in the <guilabel>Name</guilabel> field (the new name must not contain the special characters: ! @ $ % &amp; [ ]). This field is not required. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - You can click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/addplusicon.png" format="PNG" width="8mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>plus</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon next to the - <guilabel>List Taxonomy</guilabel> - field to add categories for this file: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addcategories.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addcategories.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <para> + You can click the <guilabel>plus</guilabel> icon next to the <guilabel>List Taxonomy</guilabel> field to add categories for this file: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addcategories.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addcategories.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> + <step> - <para> - Select categories by clicking the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/greentick.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>green tick</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon. Click the - <guilabel>plus</guilabel> - to open child nodes of categories. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addcategoriesexpanded.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addcategoriesexpanded.png" format="PNG" - width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <note> - <para> - You can add more categories for a file by clicking the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/addplusicon.png" format="PNG" width="8mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>plus</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon again to open the - <guilabel>Add Categories</guilabel> - form. - </para> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/trashicon.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>trash can</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon to delete a category in - <guilabel>Upload a file</guilabel> - form. - </para> - <para> - You can also manage categories which were added to files by using the - <guilabel>Manage Categories</guilabel> - function. See<xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Manage_Categories"/>. - </para> - </note> + <para> + Select categories by clicking the <guilabel>green tick</guilabel> icon. Click the <guilabel>plus</guilabel> to open child nodes of categories. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addcategoriesexpanded.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addcategoriesexpanded.png" format="PNG" + width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <note> + <para> + You can add more categories for a file by clicking the <guilabel>plus</guilabel> icon again to open the <guilabel>Add Categories</guilabel> form. + </para> + + <para> + Click the <guilabel>trash can</guilabel> icon to delete a category in <guilabel>Upload a file</guilabel> form. + </para> + + <para> + You can also manage categories which were added to files by using the <guilabel>Manage Categories</guilabel> function. See<xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Manage_Categories"/>. + </para> + </note> </step> + <step> - <para> - Complete uploading file by clicking - <guilabel>Save.</guilabel> - </para> + <para> + Complete uploading file by clicking <guilabel>Save.</guilabel> + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - After being saved, the main information of the uploaded file will be displayed: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/uploadedfileview.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/uploadedfileview.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <para> + After being saved, the main information of the uploaded file will be displayed: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/uploadedfileview.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/uploadedfileview.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/editicon4.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>pencil</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon to see more details of its external metadata information. The - <guilabel>List external metadata</guilabel> - tab will be enabled. Values can be entered into fields on this tab. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/externalmetadata.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/externalmetadata.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>pencil</guilabel> icon to see more details of its external metadata information. The <guilabel>List external metadata</guilabel> tab will be enabled. Values can be entered into fields on this tab. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/externalmetadata.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/externalmetadata.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click - <guilabel>Save</guilabel> - to accept changes or - <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> - to quit without any changes. - </para> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to accept changes or <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> to quit without any changes. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Data can be added to the uploaded file. Check the checkbox, then click - <guilabel>Add</guilabel> - or - <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> - to quit without adding anything. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addexternalmetadata.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addexternalmetadata.png" format="PNG" width="103mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <para> + Data can be added to the uploaded file. Check the checkbox, then click <guilabel>Add</guilabel> or <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> to quit without adding anything. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addexternalmetadata.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addexternalmetadata.png" format="PNG" width="103mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> + <step> - <para> - New metadata is displayed in the - <guilabel>External Metadatas</guilabel> - list and this can be edited it by clicking the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/editicon4.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>pencil</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon. - </para> + <para> + New metadata is displayed in the <guilabel>External Metadatas</guilabel> list and this can be edited it by clicking the <guilabel>pencil</guilabel> icon. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click - <guilabel>Close</guilabel> - to quit the - <guilabel>Uploaded information</guilabel> - form. - </para> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Close</guilabel> to quit the <guilabel>Uploaded information</guilabel> form. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - After being uploaded, the tree is displayed in the left panel: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/uploadtree.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/uploadtree.png" format="PNG" width="50mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <note> - <title>File Size Limits</title> - <para> - The size of the uploaded file depends on the size limit of the uploaded file that you set up in - the Edit mode of Content Explorer. If your file size exceeds the limit, a pop-up message will - appears to alert you. - </para> - </note> + <para> + After being uploaded, the tree is displayed in the left panel: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/uploadtree.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/uploadtree.png" format="PNG" width="50mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <note> + <title>File Size Limits</title> + + <para> + The size of the uploaded file depends on the size limit of the uploaded file that you set up in the Edit mode of Content Explorer. If your file size exceeds the limit, a pop-up message will appears to alert you. + </para> + </note> </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-View_Metadata"> - <title>View Metadata</title> - <para> - This function allows you to view the metadata attached to File nodes, Podcast nodes, File Plan child nodes - and uploaded file nodes ( - <guilabel>nt:file</guilabel> - nodes) - </para> - <procedure> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-View_Metadata"> + <title>View Metadata</title> + + <para> + This function allows you to view the metadata attached to File nodes, Podcast nodes, File Plan child nodes and uploaded file nodes ( <guilabel>nt:file</guilabel> nodes) + </para> + + <procedure> <title/> + <step> - <para> - Select an appropriate (<guilabel>nt:file</guilabel>) node. - </para> + <para> + Select an appropriate (<guilabel>nt:file</guilabel>) node. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/viewmetadatasbutton.png" format="PNG" width="28mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>View Metadatas</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). - </para> - <para> - The - <guilabel>View Metadata</guilabel> - form appears: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/viewmetadatasform.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/viewmetadatasform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>View Metadatas</guilabel> button (if the button is not visible, it may need to be enabled, refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>). + </para> + + <para> + The <guilabel>View Metadata</guilabel> form appears: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/viewmetadatasform.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/viewmetadatasform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the - <guilabel>Add/Edit</guilabel> - button at the bottom of the - <guilabel>View Metadata</guilabel> - form to add metadata. - </para> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Add/Edit</guilabel> button at the bottom of the <guilabel>View Metadata</guilabel> form to add metadata. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Complete the desired fields in the - <guilabel>Add/Edit Properties</guilabel> - form. Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/addplusicon.png" format="PNG" width="8mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>plus</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon to add further metadata. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addeditpropertiesform.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addeditpropertiesform.png" format="PNG" - width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <para> + Complete the desired fields in the <guilabel>Add/Edit Properties</guilabel> form. Click the <guilabel>plus</guilabel> icon to add further metadata. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addeditpropertiesform.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addeditpropertiesform.png" format="PNG" + width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click - <guilabel>Save</guilabel> - to commit the new metadata values. - </para> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to commit the new metadata values. + </para> </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-View_Node_Types"> - <title>View Node Types</title> - <para> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-View_Node_Types"> + <title>View Node Types</title> + + <para> To view detailed information about a node: - </para> - <procedure> + </para> + + <procedure> <title/> + <step> - <para> - Select a node that you want to view the detailed information for. - </para> + <para> + Select a node that you want to view the detailed information for. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/viewnodetypesbutton.png" format="PNG" width="30mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>View Node Types</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button to view detailed information about the selected node. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/nodetypesinformation.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/nodetypesinformation.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>View Node Types</guilabel> button to view detailed information about the selected node. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/nodetypesinformation.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/nodetypesinformation.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the tabs at the top of the form to view categorized information. - </para> + <para> + Click the tabs at the top of the form to view categorized information. + </para> </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-View_Permissions"> - <title>View Permissions</title> - <para> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-View_Permissions"> + <title>View Permissions</title> + + <para> This function enables an administrator to manage the permissions for nodes. - </para> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-View_Permissions-View_Permissions"> + </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-View_Permissions-View_Permissions"> <title>View Permissions</title> + <step> - <para> - Select a node. - </para> + <para> + Select a node. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/viewpermissionsbutton.png" format="PNG" width="30mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>View Permissions</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button. The - <guilabel>Permissions Management</guilabel> - form appears. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/permissionsmanagementform.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/permissionsmanagementform.png" format="PNG" - width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>View Permissions</guilabel> button. The <guilabel>Permissions Management</guilabel> form appears. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/permissionsmanagementform.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/permissionsmanagementform.png" format="PNG" + width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> - </procedure> - <para> - With the - <guilabel>Permissions Management</guilabel> - form open you can perform the following actions: - </para> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-View_Permissions-Add_Permissions"> + </procedure> + + <para> + With the <guilabel>Permissions Management</guilabel> form open you can perform the following actions: + </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-View_Permissions-Add_Permissions"> <title>Add Permissions</title> + <step id="step-User_Guide-Add_Permissions-To_add_permission_for_specific_users"> - <title>To add permission for specific users</title> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/usericon.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>"Select user"</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon next to the - <guilabel>User Or Group</guilabel> - field. - </para> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/greentick.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>green tick</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - beside the users you want to grant permissions to. - </para> + <title>To add permission for specific users</title> + + <para> + Click the <guilabel>"Select user"</guilabel> icon next to the <guilabel>User Or Group</guilabel> field. + </para> + + <para> + Click the <guilabel>green tick</guilabel> beside the users you want to grant permissions to. + </para> </step> + <step id="step-User_Guide-Add_Permissions-To_select_users_from_a_specific_group"> - <title>To select users from a specific group</title> - <para> - Enter a group name in the - <guilabel>Group</guilabel> - field at the top of the form (for example, <emphasis>/platform/users</emphasis>). All users in the - nominated group will be displayed. - </para> - <para> - Or; - </para> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/magnifyingglassicon.png" format="PNG" width="7mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>magnifying glass</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon beside the - <guilabel>Group</guilabel> - field to open a form that lists groups and their sub-groups. Select a sub-group to add all users in - that sub-group. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/groupssubgroups.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/groupssubgroups.png" format="PNG" width="140mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <title>To select users from a specific group</title> + + <para> + Enter a group name in the <guilabel>Group</guilabel> field at the top of the form (for example, <emphasis>/platform/users</emphasis>). All users in the nominated group will be displayed. + </para> + + <para> + Or; + </para> + + <para> + Click the <guilabel>magnifying glass</guilabel> icon beside the <guilabel>Group</guilabel> field to open a form that lists groups and their sub-groups. Select a sub-group to add all users in that sub-group. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/groupssubgroups.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/groupssubgroups.png" format="PNG" width="140mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> + <step id="step-User_Guide-Add_Permissions-To_search_for_a_user"> - <title>To search for a user</title> - <para> - Select an information parameter (<guilabel>User Name</guilabel>,<guilabel>First Name</guilabel>, - <guilabel>Last Name</guilabel>,<guilabel>Email</guilabel>) from the drop down menu in the other - field at the top of the page and enter the information into the text box. Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/magnifyingglassicon.png" format="PNG" width="7mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>magnifying glass</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - to search for users that match that information. - </para> + <title>To search for a user</title> + + <para> + Select an information parameter (<guilabel>User Name</guilabel>,<guilabel>First Name</guilabel>, <guilabel>Last Name</guilabel>,<guilabel>Email</guilabel>) from the drop down menu in the other field at the top of the page and enter the information into the text box. Click the <guilabel>magnifying glass</guilabel> to search for users that match that information. + </para> </step> + <step id="step-User_Guide-Add_Permissions-To_add_permissions_based_on_memberships"> - <title>To add permissions based on memberships</title> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/userpermissionbutton.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Select membership</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button next to the - <guilabel>User Or Group</guilabel> - field. - </para> - <para> - The - <guilabel>Select membership</guilabel> - form that appears allows you to select users by membership. Select a group on the left pane and then - select membership types on the right. - </para> + <title>To add permissions based on memberships</title> + + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Select membership</guilabel> button next to the <guilabel>User Or Group</guilabel> field. + </para> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Select membership</guilabel> form that appears allows you to select users by membership. Select a group on the left pane and then select membership types on the right. + </para> </step> + <step id="step-User_Guide-Add_Permissions-To_add_all_usersgroups_with_read_access"> - <title>To add all users/groups with read access</title> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/grouppermission.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Select everyone</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon next to the - <guilabel>User Or Group</guilabel> - field. - </para> + <title>To add all users/groups with read access</title> + + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Select everyone</guilabel> icon next to the <guilabel>User Or Group</guilabel> field. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Select the permission you want to grant the chosen users or groups by ticking the corresponding - checkboxes beside the rights you want to add. - </para> + <para> + Select the permission you want to grant the chosen users or groups by ticking the corresponding checkboxes beside the rights you want to add. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click - <guilabel>Save</guilabel> - to commit the changes. The new permissions will appear in the permissions table above. - </para> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to commit the changes. The new permissions will appear in the permissions table above. + </para> </step> - </procedure> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-View_Permissions-Edit_Permissions"> + </procedure> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-View_Permissions-Edit_Permissions"> <title>Edit Permissions</title> + <step> - <para> - Select the permission of a user or a group in the table of list permissions. - </para> + <para> + Select the permission of a user or a group in the table of list permissions. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/editicon4.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>pencil</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon. - </para> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>pencil</guilabel> icon. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Change the permissions as desired. - </para> + <para> + Change the permissions as desired. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click - <guilabel>Save</guilabel> - to commit the changed permissions. - </para> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to commit the changed permissions. + </para> </step> - </procedure> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-View_Permissions-Delete_Permissions"> + </procedure> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-View_Permissions-Delete_Permissions"> <title>Delete Permissions</title> + <step> - <para> - Select the permission of a user or a group in the table of list permissions. - </para> + <para> + Select the permission of a user or a group in the table of list permissions. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/trashicon.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>trash can</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon. - </para> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>trash can</guilabel> icon. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click - <guilabel>OK</guilabel> - in the confirmation message to remove the permission. - </para> + <para> + Click <guilabel>OK</guilabel> in the confirmation message to remove the permission. + </para> </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-View_Properties"> - <title>View Properties</title> - <para> - This function allows users to review all the properties and values of a node. It can also be used to add - values to a node. - </para> - <procedure> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-View_Properties"> + <title>View Properties</title> + + <para> + This function allows users to review all the properties and values of a node. It can also be used to add values to a node. + </para> + + <procedure> <step> - <para> - Select the node that you want to review or add values to. - </para> + <para> + Select the node that you want to review or add values to. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/viewnodepropertiesbutton.png" format="PNG" width="48mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>View Node Properties</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button to show the - <guilabel>Properties Management</guilabel> - form: - </para> - <para> - This form has two tabs: - </para> - <variablelist> - <varlistentry> - <term>Properties</term> - <listitem> - <para> - This tab displays all properties and values for the selected node. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/propertiesmanagement.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/propertiesmanagement.png" format="PNG" - width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - Select this tab to review the properties for the selected node without making any - changes. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>Add New Property</term> - <listitem> - <para> - This tab contains fields to add new properties to the selected node. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addnewproperties.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addnewproperties.png" format="PNG" - width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - Select this node if you want to make changes to the properties of the selected node. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - </variablelist> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>View Node Properties</guilabel> button to show the <guilabel>Properties Management</guilabel> form: + </para> + + <para> + This form has two tabs: + </para> + + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>Properties</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + This tab displays all properties and values for the selected node. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/propertiesmanagement.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/propertiesmanagement.png" format="PNG" + width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + Select this tab to review the properties for the selected node without making any changes. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Add New Property</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + This tab contains fields to add new properties to the selected node. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addnewproperties.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/addnewproperties.png" format="PNG" + width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + Select this node if you want to make changes to the properties of the selected node. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> </step> + <step id="step-User_Guide-View_Properties-To_add_new_properties"> - <title>To add new properties:</title> - <para> - Select the namespace for the property. - </para> + <title>To add new properties:</title> + + <para> + Select the namespace for the property. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Enter a name for the new property in the - <guilabel>Name</guilabel> - field. - </para> + <para> + Enter a name for the new property in the <guilabel>Name</guilabel> field. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Select a - <guilabel>Type</guilabel> - for the property from the drop-down menu for the field Type. - </para> + <para> + Select a <guilabel>Type</guilabel> for the property from the drop-down menu for the field Type. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Enter a value for the property in the <guilabel>Value</guilabel>. - </para> + <para> + Enter a value for the property in the <guilabel>Value</guilabel>. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - To add multiple new values, click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/addplusicon.png" format="PNG" width="8mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>plus</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon and repeat the above steps. - </para> - <para> - To remove a value, click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/trashicon.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>trash can</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - . - </para> + <para> + To add multiple new values, click the <guilabel>plus</guilabel> icon and repeat the above steps. + </para> + + <para> + To remove a value, click the <guilabel>trash can</guilabel> . + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click - <guilabel>Save</guilabel> - to commit the new values or - <guilabel>Reset</guilabel> - to clear any modified fields. - </para> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to commit the new values or <guilabel>Reset</guilabel> to clear any modified fields. + </para> </step> - </procedure> - <para> - After you commit new properties, you will be returned to the - <guilabel>Properties</guilabel> - tab. The newly added values will be displayed. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newpropertiesmanagement.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newpropertiesmanagement.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - In this form you can edit a property by clicking the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/editicon4.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>pencil</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon or delete it by clicking the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/trashicon.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>trash can</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - . - </para> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-View_Relations"> - <title>View Relations</title> - <para> + </procedure> + + <para> + After you commit new properties, you will be returned to the <guilabel>Properties</guilabel> tab. The newly added values will be displayed. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newpropertiesmanagement.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newpropertiesmanagement.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + In this form you can edit a property by clicking the <guilabel>trash can</guilabel> . + </para> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-View_Relations"> + <title>View Relations</title> + + <para> This function shows documents related to a selected node. - </para> - <procedure> + </para> + + <procedure> <step id="step-User_Guide-View_Relations-To_View_Relations"> - <title>To View Relations</title> - <para> - Select a node then click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/showhiderelations.png" format="PNG" width="34mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Show/Hide Relations</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button. Documents related to the selected node will be shown in the sidebar. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/relationssidebar.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/relationssidebar.png" format="PNG" width="53mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - If the node does not have any related documents the message - <guilabel>No related document</guilabel> - will appear instead. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/norelateddocument.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/norelateddocument.png" format="PNG" width="53mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <title>To View Relations</title> + + <para> + Select a node then click the <guilabel>Show/Hide Relations</guilabel> button. Documents related to the selected node will be shown in the sidebar. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/relationssidebar.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/relationssidebar.png" format="PNG" width="53mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + If the node does not have any related documents the message <guilabel>No related document</guilabel> will appear instead. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/norelateddocument.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/norelateddocument.png" format="PNG" width="53mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> + <step id="step-User_Guide-View_Relations-To_Hide_Relations"> - <title>To Hide Relations</title> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/showhiderelations.png" format="PNG" width="34mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Show/Hide Relations</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button again to hide relations. - </para> + <title>To Hide Relations</title> + + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Show/Hide Relations</guilabel> button again to hide relations. + </para> </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Vote"> - <title>Vote</title> - <para> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Vote"> + <title>Vote</title> + + <para> This function is used to vote for a document (Note: you cannot vote for a File Plan document). - </para> - <procedure> + </para> + + <procedure> <title/> + <step> - <para> - Open the document you want to vote for. - </para> + <para> + Open the document you want to vote for. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/votefordocument.png" format="PNG" width="44mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Vote for document</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - button on the action bar. - </para> - <para> - The - <guilabel>Vote Document</guilabel> - form will appear: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/votedocumentform.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/votedocumentform.png" format="PNG" width="77mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Vote for document</guilabel> button on the action bar. + </para> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Vote Document</guilabel> form will appear: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/votedocumentform.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/votedocumentform.png" format="PNG" width="77mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> + <step> - <para> - Rate the document by clicking on the appropriate star level for your vote: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/votestars.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/votestars.png" format="PNG" width="82mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <para> + Rate the document by clicking on the appropriate star level for your vote: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/votestars.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/votestars.png" format="PNG" width="82mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> - </procedure> - <para> + </procedure> + + <para> After a vote has been added, the rating will appear at the bottom of the document: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/voteinfo.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/voteinfo.png" format="PNG" width="112mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Watch_Documents"> - <title>Watch Documents</title> - <para> - By using this function, whenever a change is made on the document, an email notification will be sent to - your email address. To receive that email, you must configure in your mail server. - </para> - <procedure> + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/voteinfo.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/voteinfo.png" format="PNG" width="112mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Watch_Documents"> + <title>Watch Documents</title> + + <para> + By using this function, whenever a change is made on the document, an email notification will be sent to your email address. To receive that email, you must configure in your mail server. + </para> + + <procedure> <title/> + <step> - <para> - Select the document you want to watch. - </para> + <para> + Select the document you want to watch. + </para> </step> + <step> - <para> - Click the <guilabel>Watch/Unwatch Document</guilabel> button. This button's location will depend on how it was enabled (refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/> for details). - </para> - <note> - <title>The <guilabel>More</guilabel> Menu</title> - <para> - Depending on your browsing environment, the <guilabel>Watch/Unwatch Document</guilabel> button may be located under the <guilabel>More</guilabel> drop-down menu. - </para> - </note> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/watch_button.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/watch_button.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Watch/Unwatch Document</guilabel> button. This button's location will depend on how it was enabled (refer to <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/> for details). + </para> + + <note> + <title>The <guilabel>More</guilabel> Menu</title> + + <para> + Depending on your browsing environment, the <guilabel>Watch/Unwatch Document</guilabel> button may be located under the <guilabel>More</guilabel> drop-down menu. + </para> + </note> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/watch_button.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/watch_button.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> + <step> - <para> - The - <guilabel>Watching Document</guilabel> - form will appear. Click the - <guilabel>Watch</guilabel> - button to finish. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/watchingdocumentform.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/watchingdocumentform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <para> + The <guilabel>Watching Document</guilabel> form will appear. Click the <guilabel>Watch</guilabel> button to finish. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/watchingdocumentform.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/watchingdocumentform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> - </procedure> - <para> - To stop watching a document, select the document and click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/watchicon.png" format="PNG" width="8mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>eye</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> - icon. - </para> - <para> + </procedure> + + <para> + To stop watching a document, select the document and click the <guilabel>eye</guilabel> icon. + </para> + + <para> A message will appear for you to confirm the action. - </para> - </section> -</section> + </para> + </section> + </section> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/SitesExplorer/Drives.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/SitesExplorer/Drives.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/SitesExplorer/Drives.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -3,98 +3,103 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "../../../User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<section id="sect-User_Guide-Drives"> - <title>Drives</title> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Drives-Private_drive"> - <title>Private drive</title> + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Drives"> + <title>Drives</title> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Drives-Private_drive"> + <title>Private drive</title> + <para> - <emphasis role="bold">Private drives</emphasis> contain personal data of registered users. Hence, only these individuals can access data in this drive type. - </para> - <para> + <emphasis role="bold">Private drives</emphasis> contain personal data of registered users. Hence, only these individuals can access data in this drive type. + </para> + + <para> There are some default folders set up to store a user's private resources. - </para> + </para> + <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/privatedrive.png" format="PNG" /> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/privatedrive.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/privatedrive.png" format="PNG" /> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/privatedrive.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> - In this drive you can: - </para> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - Add a new folder. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - Add a new content. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - Upload file from your device. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - Add Symlinks. - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> + In this drive you can: + </para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + Add a new folder. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + Add a new content. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + Upload file from your device. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + Add Symlinks. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <para> + If you click on a content in this drive, the <guilabel>Actions</guilabel> and <guilabel>Collaboration</guilabel> tabs appear. + </para> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Actions</guilabel> tab offers the same options as the parent drive. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/collaborationtab.png" format="PNG" /> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/collaborationtab.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + By selecting the <guilabel>Collaboration</guilabel> tab, you can: + </para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + Watch/Unwatch a document. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + Add tags for a document. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + Set multi-display languages for document (<emphasis>Add/Edit Localized Contents</emphasis>). + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + Vote for a document. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + Comment for a document. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> +<!-- <para> - If you click on a content in this drive, the <guilabel>Actions</guilabel> and <guilabel>Collaboration</guilabel> tabs appear. - </para> - <para> - The <guilabel>Actions</guilabel> tab offers the same options as the parent drive. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/collaborationtab.png" format="PNG" /> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/collaborationtab.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - By selecting the <guilabel>Collaboration</guilabel> tab, you can: - </para> - - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - Watch/Unwatch a document. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - Add tags for a document. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - Set multi-display languages for document (<emphasis>Add/Edit Localized Contents</emphasis>). - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - Vote for a document. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - Comment for a document. - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - - <!-- - <para> By selecting the Search tab, you can: </para> <itemizedlist> @@ -114,246 +119,240 @@ </para> </listitem> </itemizedlist>--> - - <para> - In addition, you can: - </para> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - Set up your browsing preferences. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - Cut/paste, Copy/paste, Delete a node. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - Lock a node. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - Rename a node. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - Use the view WebDAV function to view document content. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - Download documents (folders) to your machine. - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - - <note> - <title>Available Actions</title> - <para> - The actions available in these tabs will depend on which actions the site Administrator has set. - </para> - <para> - Instructions on how to enable or disable actions in these tabs is in <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>. - </para> - </note> - - </section> - - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Drives-Public_drive"> - <title>Public drive</title> <para> + In addition, you can: + </para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + Set up your browsing preferences. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + Cut/paste, Copy/paste, Delete a node. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + Lock a node. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + Rename a node. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + Use the view WebDAV function to view document content. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + Download documents (folders) to your machine. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + + <note> + <title>Available Actions</title> + + <para> + The actions available in these tabs will depend on which actions the site Administrator has set. + </para> + + <para> + Instructions on how to enable or disable actions in these tabs is in <xref linkend="impo-User_Guide-Actions-Button_Visibility_in_Views"/>. + </para> + </note> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Drives-Public_drive"> + <title>Public drive</title> + + <para> There are no default folders in a Public drive, but users can create any folders they require. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/publicdrive.png" format="PNG" /> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/publicdrive.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - - </mediaobject> + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/publicdrive.png" format="PNG" /> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/publicdrive.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> All actions available to users in Private drives are also available in Public drives. - </para> - </section> - - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Drives-Drive_of_a_specific_group"> - <title>Drive of a specific group</title> + </para> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Drives-Drive_of_a_specific_group"> + <title>Drive of a specific group</title> + <para> Group drives have two default folders, but others can be added as needed. Users can utilize the same actions as in Private drives, the only difference being that only users in the drive's owner group can access the drive. - </para> + </para> + <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/groupdrive.png" format="PNG" /> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/groupdrive.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </section> - - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Drives-Shared_Users_Space_drive"> - <title>Shared Users Space drive</title> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/shared_user_space.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/shared_user_space.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/groupdrive.png" format="PNG" /> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/groupdrive.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Drives-Shared_Users_Space_drive"> + <title>Shared Users Space drive</title> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/shared_user_space.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/shared_user_space.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> By default, there will be a list of all existing users, each user has a folder with their username. Each user's folder includes two sub-folders (private and public). You can see both your private and public folders here but you only can see the public folder of other users. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/shareddrive.png" format="PNG" /> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/shareddrive.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/shareddrive.png" format="PNG" /> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/shareddrive.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <itemizedlist> <listitem> - <para> - In this drive, you can: - </para> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - Perform all actions that you can do in your private drive. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - View nodes from public folder of others. - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> + <para> + In this drive, you can: + </para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + Perform all actions that you can do in your private drive. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + View nodes from public folder of others. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - In this drive, you <emphasis role="bold">cannot</emphasis>: - </para> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - Add a folder/document in a root node. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - Add a folder/document in another users' folder or to child nodes of this folder. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - Add folders/documents to the top-level folder (the one bearing your username), only in its child nodes <emphasis>public</emphasis> and <emphasis>private</emphasis>. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - Rename a default folder. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - Lock folders belonging to another user. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - Delete a default folder. - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> + + <listitem> + <para> + In this drive, you <emphasis role="bold">cannot</emphasis>: + </para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + Add a folder/document in a root node. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + Add a folder/document in another users' folder or to child nodes of this folder. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + Add folders/documents to the top-level folder (the one bearing your username), only in its child nodes <emphasis>public</emphasis> and <emphasis>private</emphasis>. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + Rename a default folder. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + Lock folders belonging to another user. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + Delete a default folder. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - </section> - - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Drives-Showhide_the_sidebar_in_a_drive"> - <title>Show/hide the sidebar in a drive</title> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Drives-Showhide_the_sidebar_in_a_drive"> + <title>Show/hide the sidebar in a drive</title> + <para> The sidebar is used to show nodes like a tree or show the related documents, tags, clipboard and saved searches. - </para> + </para> + <para> You can show/hide the sidebar in two ways: - </para> + </para> + <orderedlist numeration="arabic"> <listitem> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Showhide_the_sidebar_in_a_drive-Method_1"> - <title>Method 1</title> - <step> - <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/preferencesettingicon.png" format="PNG" width="10mm" /> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>sprocket</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon on the far right of the <guilabel>Action Bar</guilabel> to open the <emphasis role="bold">Preferences</emphasis>: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/preferencesetting.png" format="PNG" /> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/preferencesetting.png" format="PNG" width="143mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Untick the <guilabel>Show sidebar</guilabel> checkbox then click <guilabel>Save</guilabel>. - </para> - <para> - The drive will be displayed like the illustration below: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/hidesidebar.png" format="PNG" /> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/hidesidebar.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - To show the sidebar, tick the <guilabel>Show sidebar</guilabel> checkbox in <guilabel>Preferences</guilabel>. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Showhide_the_sidebar_in_a_drive-Method_1"> + <title>Method 1</title> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>sprocket</guilabel> icon on the far right of the <guilabel>Action Bar</guilabel> to open the <emphasis role="bold">Preferences</emphasis>: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/preferencesetting.png" format="PNG" /> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/preferencesetting.png" format="PNG" width="143mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Untick the <guilabel>Show sidebar</guilabel> checkbox then click <guilabel>Save</guilabel>. + </para> + + <para> + The drive will be displayed like the illustration below: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/hidesidebar.png" format="PNG" /> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/hidesidebar.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + To show the sidebar, tick the <guilabel>Show sidebar</guilabel> checkbox in <guilabel>Preferences</guilabel>. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> </listitem> - <listitem> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Showhide_the_sidebar_in_a_drive-Method_2"> - <title>Method 2</title> - <step> - <para> - Click the <guilabel>Expand</guilabel> icon to hide the sidebar: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/sidebarborder.png" format="PNG" /> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/sidebarborder.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the <guilabel>Collapse</guilabel> icon to reveal the sidebar again. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> + + <listitem> + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Showhide_the_sidebar_in_a_drive-Method_2"> + <title>Method 2</title> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Expand</guilabel> icon to hide the sidebar: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/sidebarborder.png" format="PNG" /> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/sidebarborder.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Collapse</guilabel> icon to reveal the sidebar again. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> </listitem> - </orderedlist> - </section> -</section> \ No newline at end of file + </orderedlist> + </section> + </section> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/SitesExplorer/Folders_and_Documents.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/SitesExplorer/Folders_and_Documents.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/SitesExplorer/Folders_and_Documents.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -4,847 +4,863 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "../../../User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions_on_Folders_and_Documents"> - <title>Actions on Folders and Documents</title> - <para> - This section will discuss actions that can be performed on folders and document, both from the right-click menu (<emphasis>Cut</emphasis> and <emphasis>Paste</emphasis> for example) and manual actions (like dragging and dropping). - </para> - <para> - The actions available in the right-click menu are different for folders and documents. - </para> - <para> - The actions available for documents are: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/documentactions.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/documentactions.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="68mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - The actions available for folders are: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/folderactions.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/folderactions.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="65mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions_on_Folders_and_Documents-Add_to_favorites"> - <title>Add to favorites</title> - <para> - This function helps users easily add nodes (documents, folders or files) as favorite. - </para> - <procedure> - <title/> - <step> - <para> - Right-click a node you want to add as a favorite - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/addfavorite.png" format="PNG" width="27mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Add to favorite</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> entry in the drop-down menu.</para> - </step> - </procedure> - <para> - A symlink of your favorite nodes will be created in the <guilabel>Favorite</guilabel> folder. - </para> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions_on_Folders_and_Documents-CopyPaste"> - <title>Copy/Paste</title> - <para> - This function is used to make a copy of a node (including subnodes) in other places. - </para> - <para> - There are two ways to cut/copy/paste the node: - </para> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-CopyPaste-Method_One"> - <title>Method One</title> - <step> - <para> - Right-click the node then select <guilabel>Copy</guilabel> from the drop-down menu. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select a destination node that you want to be the parent node of the cut/copied node. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Right-click the destination node and select <guilabel>Paste</guilabel> from the drop-down menu. - <note> - <title>Pasting Content</title> - <para> - The <guilabel>Paste</guilabel> function is only enabled after some form of data (a document, for example) has been added to the Clipboard through the <guilabel>Copy</guilabel> or <guilabel>Cut</guilabel> action. - </para> - </note> - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - The copied folder (and any sub-folders) will be pasted to the new selected path. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-CopyPaste-Method_Two"> - <title>Method Two</title> - <step> - <para> - Right-click the node and select the <guilabel>Copy</guilabel> from the drop-down menu. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the destination node that you want to be the parent node of the copied node. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the <guilabel>Clipboard</guilabel> icon on the sidebar: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/clipboarditem.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/clipboarditem.png" format="PNG" width="60mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the clipboard window will appear: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/clipboarditemlist.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/clipboarditemlist.png" format="PNG" width="61mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/clipboardicon.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>clipboard</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon in the clipboard window to paste the copied node into the selected destination node in <emphasis role="bold">Step 3</emphasis>. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - You can click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/trashicon.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>trash can</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon to delete a specific waiting statement. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - You can also click the <guilabel>Clear All</guilabel> link to delete all waiting statements in the list. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - <para> - After the action has been taken, a confirmation message will appear with detailed information about the destination path. - </para> - <note> - <title>Copy/Paste Considerations</title> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - You only can use the <guilabel>Copy</guilabel> action if you have the appropriate permissions on the source node. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - You only can use the <guilabel>Paste</guilabel> action if you have a right on the destination node. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - If the destination node contains a file with the same name as the copied file, the pasted file will have an index integer added to its name. + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions_on_Folders_and_Documents"> + <title>Actions on Folders and Documents</title> + + <para> + This section will discuss actions that can be performed on folders and document, both from the right-click menu (<emphasis>Cut</emphasis> and <emphasis>Paste</emphasis> for example) and manual actions (like dragging and dropping). </para> + <para> - For example; <emphasis>New Folder</emphasis> contains a node named <filename>Live</filename> which is copied and pasted into a location that already contains a node named <filename>Live</filename>. After the paste action the new file will be named <filename>Live[2]</filename>. The original <filename>Live</filename> file will be unchanged. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - You cannot copy a content folder into a document folder. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - <emphasis>Pasting</emphasis> a node does not remove it from the Clipboard. Therefore, after using the <guilabel>Copy</guilabel> action you can use <guilabel>Paste</guilabel> to copy the node into multiple nodes without needing to use the <guilabel>Copy</guilabel> action again. - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - </note> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions_on_Folders_and_Documents-Edit_documents"> - <title>Edit documents</title> - <para> - To edit a document, refer to <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Content_In_Content_Explorer-Edit_a_web_content"/>. - </para> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions_on_Folders_and_Documents-CutPaste"> - <title>Cut/Paste</title> - <para> - This function is used to move a node (include subnodes) to other places. There are two ways to cut/paste documents: - </para> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-CutPaste-Method_One"> - <title>Method One</title> - <step> - <para> - Right-click a node and select <guilabel>Cut</guilabel> from the drop-down menu. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the destination node that you want to be the parent node of the cut node. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Right-click the destination node and select <guilabel>Paste</guilabel> in the drop-down menu. - </para> - <note> - <title>Pasting Content</title> - <para> - The <guilabel>Paste</guilabel> function is only enabled after some form of data (a document, for example) has been added to the Clipboard through the <guilabel>Copy</guilabel> or <guilabel>Cut</guilabel> action. - </para> - </note> - </step> - <step> - <para> - The cut node (and its subnodes) will be pasted to the new selected path. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-CutPaste-Method_Two"> - <title>Method Two</title> - <step> - <para> - Right-click a node and select <guilabel>Cut</guilabel> from the drop-down menu. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the destination node that you want to be the parent node of the cut node. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the Clipboard icon: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/clipboarditem.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/clipboarditem.png" format="PNG" width="60mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the Clipboard window will appear: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/clipboarditemlist.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/clipboarditemlist.png" format="PNG" width="61mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/clipboardicon.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>clipboard</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon in the clipboard window to paste the copied node into the selected destination node in <emphasis role="bold">Step 3</emphasis>. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - You can click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/trashicon.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>trash can</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon to delete a specific waiting statement. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - You can also click the <guilabel>Clear All</guilabel> link to delete all waiting statements in the list. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - <note> - <title>Cut/Paste Considerations</title> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - You only can use the <guilabel>Cut</guilabel> action if you have the appropriate permissions on the source node. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - You only can use the <guilabel>Paste</guilabel> action if you have a right on the destination node. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - If the destination node contains a file with the same name as the copied file, the pasted file will have an index integer added to its name. + The actions available in the right-click menu are different for folders and documents. </para> + <para> - For example; <emphasis>New Folder</emphasis> contains a node named <filename>Live</filename> which is cut and pasted into a location that already contains a node named <filename>Live</filename>. After the paste action the new file will be named <filename>Live[2]</filename>. The original <filename>Live</filename> file will be unchanged. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - You cannot Cut a content folder into a document folder. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - <emphasis>Pasting</emphasis> a node does not remove it from the Clipboard. Therefore, after using the <guilabel>Cut</guilabel> action you can use <guilabel>Paste</guilabel> to copy the node into multiple nodes without needing to use the <guilabel>Cut</guilabel> action again. - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - </note> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions_on_Folders_and_Documents-Delete_folders_and_documents"> - <title>Delete folders and documents</title> - <para> - This function helps you remove folders/documents from theirs location easily. Follow the steps in <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Content_In_Content_Explorer-Delete_a_web_content"/> - </para> - <note> - <title>Delete Rights</title> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - You can only use the <guilabel>Delete</guilabel> action if you have the appropriate permissions on the node. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - If the deleted node contains subnodes, these will also be deleted. - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - </note> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions_on_Folders_and_Documents-Drag_and_drop_folders_and_documents"> - <title>Drag and drop folders and documents</title> + The actions available for documents are: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/documentactions.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/documentactions.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="68mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + <para> - This function allows you to move folders or documents from their current location to another by using the drag and drop feature. - </para> - <procedure> - <title/> - <step> - <para> - Move the cursor to the folder(s) or document(s) in the right panel until the cursor changes to <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/handcursor.png" format="PNG" width="9mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>a pointing hand</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject>. You can hold the <keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap></keycombo> key to select multiple contiguous folders/documents at once or the <keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap></keycombo> key to select multiple non-contiguous files. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/selectfolders.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/selectfolders.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Hold the left mouse button and then <emphasis>drag</emphasis> the selected folder(s)/document(s) to another folder on either the right or left panes. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/draggingfolders.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/draggingfolders.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - <emphasis>Drop</emphasis> them into the selected folder by releasing the left mouse button. All dragged folders/documents will be relocated to the destination folder. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions_on_Folders_and_Documents-LockUnlock_folders_and_Documents"> - <title>Lock/Unlock folders and Documents</title> - <para> - This function prevents other users from changing specific folders/documents for a specific period. - </para> - <formalpara id="form-User_Guide-LockUnlock_folders_and_Documents-Lock_foldersdocuments"> - <title>Lock folders/documents</title> - <para> - Right-click a folder or document (on either the right or left window pane) and select <guilabel>Lock</guilabel> from the menu. The selected node will be locked. - </para> - </formalpara> - <note> - <title>Locking Rights</title> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - Only users with appropriate rights can lock folders or documents. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - After a node is locked, other users can view the locked node, but cannot alter or remove it. They can, however, create and edit a <emphasis>copy</emphasis> of the locked node (using the Copy/Paste functions outlined above). - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - A lock will be kept on a node for the current session only. The lock will be automatically removed when the user who locked the node signs out. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - A lock will also be automatically removed if no action is taken on the locked node for thirty (30) minutes. - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - </note> - <formalpara id="form-User_Guide-LockUnlock_folders_and_Documents-Unlock_foldersdocuments"> - <title>Unlock folders/documents</title> - <para> - To unlock a node you have locked, right-click it and select <guilabel>Unlock</guilabel> from the menu. The folder/document will then be unlocked and other users can take actions on it. - </para> - </formalpara> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions_on_Folders_and_Documents-Rename_folders_and_Documents"> - <title>Rename folders and Documents</title> - <para> - This function is used to change the name of a folder/documents. - </para> - <procedure> - <title/> - <step> - <para> - Right-click a folder/document that you want to rename then select <guilabel>Rename</guilabel> from the menu: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/renameoption.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/renameoption.png" format="PNG" width="62mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - The rename form will appear: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/renameform.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/renameform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter a new name in the <guilabel>Name</guilabel> field. You can also change the title of this folder by entering a new one in the <guilabel>Title</guilabel> field. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to commit the new details. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions_on_Folders_and_Documents-Add_a_symlink"> - <title>Add a symlink</title> - <para> - Creating a symbolic link (<emphasis>symlink</emphasis>) to a node is an effective way to quickly access that node from other nodes without having to navigate through the content structure manually. - </para> - <procedure> - <title/> - <step> - <para> - Right-click a document that you want to add a symlink to (in this instance the term <emphasis>to</emphasis> is used to describe the node as the target of the symlink, not an addition to the original node itself) and select <guilabel>Add SymLink</guilabel> from the menu. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - A symlink to the selected document will be created immediately. You can click the symlink to view its content. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions_on_Folders_and_Documents-View_WebDAV"> - <title>View WebDAV</title> - <para> - WebDAV allows users to access (read and write) files and folders over the web. WebDAV is used to view nodes because it offers easy, quick, flexible and efficient data manipulation. - </para> - <procedure> - <title/> - <step> - <para> - Select the path of node you want to view via webDAV or open that folder from the left/right panel. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Right-click the node and select the <guilabel>Download and Allow Edition</guilabel> item in the menu. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - The view in WebDAV form will be different for different node types: - </para> - <table> - <title></title> - <tgroup cols="2"> - <thead> - <row> - <entry> - Node Type - </entry> - <entry> - WebDAV Details - </entry> - </row> - </thead> - <tbody> - <row> - <entry> - <emphasis role="bold">Folder</emphasis> - </entry> - <entry> - The subnodes list of the current folder will be displayed in WebDAV. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <emphasis role="bold">nt:file</emphasis> - </entry> - <entry> - The content of the document will be shown. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <emphasis role="bold">Article</emphasis> - </entry> - <entry> - This node type does not, by default, list any folders. However, if the Article includes actions, added language or other data, all folders will be listed and named; <emphasis>exo:actions</emphasis>, <emphasis>exo:language</emphasis> and so on. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <emphasis role="bold">Podcast</emphasis> - </entry> - <entry> - Viewed in WebDAV, this node type will have a form attached that users have to complete to download this document. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <emphasis role="bold">Sample node</emphasis> - </entry> - <entry> - This node lists folder names as <emphasis>exo:images</emphasis>. Like Article nodes, if the Sample node contains actions or added languages, folders will be named <emphasis>exo:actions</emphasis>, <emphasis>exo:language</emphasis> and so on. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <emphasis role="bold">File Plan</emphasis> - </entry> - <entry> - This node behaves the same way as Article and Sample node. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <emphasis role="bold">Kofax</emphasis> - </entry> - <entry> - This node behaves the same way as Article and Sample node. - </entry> - </row> - </tbody> - </tgroup> - </table> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section> - <title>View Information</title> - <para>eXo Content 2.2.0 supports you to view all information of a document, such as the name, the title, the creator, the publication state of the document and more.</para> - <para>Do the following to view the information of a document:</para> - <procedure> - <title>View Information</title> - <step> - <para> - Right-click a document that you want to view <emphasis role="bold">&gt;</emphasis> Select<emphasis role="bold"> View Information</emphasis> in the drop menu.</para> - <para>The <emphasis role="bold">View Information</emphasis> form appears like this:</para> - - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/view-information1.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata width="150mm" align="center" fileref="images/view-information1.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - </procedure> -</section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions_on_Folders_and_Documents-View_Document"> - <title>View Document</title> - <para> - This function opens a document on another tab with a link containing the document path. - </para> - <para> - Do the following to view a document. - </para> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-View_Document-View_a_document"> - <title>View a document</title> - <step> - <para> - Right-click the document that you want to view and select <guilabel>View Document</guilabel> in the drop menu. - </para> - <para> - The document is opened in another browser: - </para> - <para> - The URL of the document is structured as; <uri>http://example.com:8080/ecmdemo/private/acme/siteExplorer/repository/path/to/document</uri> - </para> - <para> - - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions_on_Folders_and_Documents-Copy_URL_to_Clipboard"> - <title>Copy URL to Clipboard</title> - <para> - The Copy URL to Clipboard enables you to copy the WebDAV URL of a selected folder or a document and then you can view it by WebDAV view on a browser. - </para> - <para> - Do the following: - </para> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Copy_URL_to_Clipboard-Copy_URL_to_Clipboard"> - <title>Copy URL to Clipboard</title> - <step> - <para> - Right-click a folder/document and select <guilabel>Copy URL to Clipboard</guilabel>. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata fileref="images/copyurl.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata fileref="images/copyurl.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="104mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Paste the URL into another browser window (or another tab in the same browser window). - </para> - - <para> - You can view the folders of the node or download documents to your device. You also view other nodes by clicking the folder named <guilabel>..</guilabel> to go up to the parent node. See the below illustration: - </para> - - </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions_on_Folders_and_Documents-Manage_Tags"> - <title>Manage Tags</title> - <para> - Tags are easily managed by editing or deleting them with the <guilabel>Tag Manager</guilabel>. - </para> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_Tags-Edit_a_tag"> - <title>Edit a tag</title> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/cloudicon.png" format="PNG" width="8mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>tag</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon at the upper-right corner of the tags panel. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/taglistiediticon.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/taglistiediticon.png" format="PNG" width="65mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - The <emphasis role="bold">Edit tag form</emphasis> will appear: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/tageditform.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/tageditform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/editicon4.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>pencil</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon that corresponds to the tag you want to edit. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Edit the tag as desired. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/tagform.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/tagform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> button to commit the change or <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> to quit without changes. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_Tags-Delete_a_tag"> - <title>Delete a tag</title> - <step> - <para> - Perform <emphasis role="bold">Step 1</emphasis> from the procedure above. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/trashicon.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>trash can</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon. - - </para> - <para> - A confirmation box will appear: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/tagdelete.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/tagdelete.png" format="PNG" width="105mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - Click <guilabel>OK</guilabel> button to delete the tag or <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> to quit. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_Tags-Use_Created_tags"> - <title>Use Created tags</title> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/cloudicon.png" format="PNG" width="8mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>tag</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon. You will see all existing tags. All existing tags are listed and classified by private or public tags. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/taglistiediticon.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/taglistiediticon.png" format="PNG" width="65mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - Tags will be displayed differently depending on popularity. The font-size, font-weight, color, font-family, text-decoration will change to visually represent popularity. - </para> - <para> - For example, when a tag is added to more than ten documents it will be displayed in red with in a 20px size, bold font. These details can be configured in the Administration portlet. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Each tag is also like a link used list all documents that it is added. Click a tag name to see a list of documents with that tag displayed in the right panel. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> -</section> + The actions available for folders are: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/folderactions.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/folderactions.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="65mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions_on_Folders_and_Documents-Add_to_favorites"> + <title>Add to favorites</title> + + <para> + This function helps users easily add nodes (documents, folders or files) as favorite. + </para> + + <procedure> + <title/> + + <step> + <para> + Right-click a node you want to add as a favorite + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Add to favorite</guilabel> entry in the drop-down menu. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <para> + A symlink of your favorite nodes will be created in the <guilabel>Favorite</guilabel> folder. + </para> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions_on_Folders_and_Documents-CopyPaste"> + <title>Copy/Paste</title> + + <para> + This function is used to make a copy of a node (including subnodes) in other places. + </para> + + <para> + There are two ways to cut/copy/paste the node: + </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-CopyPaste-Method_One"> + <title>Method One</title> + + <step> + <para> + Right-click the node then select <guilabel>Copy</guilabel> from the drop-down menu. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select a destination node that you want to be the parent node of the cut/copied node. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Right-click the destination node and select <guilabel>Paste</guilabel> from the drop-down menu. + <note> + <title>Pasting Content</title> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Paste</guilabel> function is only enabled after some form of data (a document, for example) has been added to the Clipboard through the <guilabel>Copy</guilabel> or <guilabel>Cut</guilabel> action. + </para> + </note> + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + The copied folder (and any sub-folders) will be pasted to the new selected path. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-CopyPaste-Method_Two"> + <title>Method Two</title> + + <step> + <para> + Right-click the node and select the <guilabel>Copy</guilabel> from the drop-down menu. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select the destination node that you want to be the parent node of the copied node. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select the <guilabel>Clipboard</guilabel> icon on the sidebar: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/clipboarditem.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/clipboarditem.png" format="PNG" width="60mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the clipboard window will appear: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/clipboarditemlist.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/clipboarditemlist.png" format="PNG" width="61mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>clipboard</guilabel> icon in the clipboard window to paste the copied node into the selected destination node in <emphasis role="bold">Step 3</emphasis>. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + You can click the <guilabel>trash can</guilabel> icon to delete a specific waiting statement. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + You can also click the <guilabel>Clear All</guilabel> link to delete all waiting statements in the list. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <para> + After the action has been taken, a confirmation message will appear with detailed information about the destination path. + </para> + + <note> + <title>Copy/Paste Considerations</title> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + You only can use the <guilabel>Copy</guilabel> action if you have the appropriate permissions on the source node. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + You only can use the <guilabel>Paste</guilabel> action if you have a right on the destination node. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + If the destination node contains a file with the same name as the copied file, the pasted file will have an index integer added to its name. + </para> + + <para> + For example; <emphasis>New Folder</emphasis> contains a node named <filename>Live</filename> which is copied and pasted into a location that already contains a node named <filename>Live</filename>. After the paste action the new file will be named <filename>Live[2]</filename>. The original <filename>Live</filename> file will be unchanged. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + You cannot copy a content folder into a document folder. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + <emphasis>Pasting</emphasis> a node does not remove it from the Clipboard. Therefore, after using the <guilabel>Copy</guilabel> action you can use <guilabel>Paste</guilabel> to copy the node into multiple nodes without needing to use the <guilabel>Copy</guilabel> action again. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </note> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions_on_Folders_and_Documents-Edit_documents"> + <title>Edit documents</title> + + <para> + To edit a document, refer to <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Content_In_Content_Explorer-Edit_a_web_content"/>. + </para> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions_on_Folders_and_Documents-CutPaste"> + <title>Cut/Paste</title> + + <para> + This function is used to move a node (include subnodes) to other places. There are two ways to cut/paste documents: + </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-CutPaste-Method_One"> + <title>Method One</title> + + <step> + <para> + Right-click a node and select <guilabel>Cut</guilabel> from the drop-down menu. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select the destination node that you want to be the parent node of the cut node. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Right-click the destination node and select <guilabel>Paste</guilabel> in the drop-down menu. + </para> + + <note> + <title>Pasting Content</title> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Paste</guilabel> function is only enabled after some form of data (a document, for example) has been added to the Clipboard through the <guilabel>Copy</guilabel> or <guilabel>Cut</guilabel> action. + </para> + </note> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + The cut node (and its subnodes) will be pasted to the new selected path. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-CutPaste-Method_Two"> + <title>Method Two</title> + + <step> + <para> + Right-click a node and select <guilabel>Cut</guilabel> from the drop-down menu. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select the destination node that you want to be the parent node of the cut node. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select the Clipboard icon: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/clipboarditem.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/clipboarditem.png" format="PNG" width="60mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the Clipboard window will appear: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/clipboarditemlist.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/clipboarditemlist.png" format="PNG" width="61mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>clipboard</guilabel> icon in the clipboard window to paste the copied node into the selected destination node in <emphasis role="bold">Step 3</emphasis>. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + You can click the <guilabel>trash can</guilabel> icon to delete a specific waiting statement. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + You can also click the <guilabel>Clear All</guilabel> link to delete all waiting statements in the list. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <note> + <title>Cut/Paste Considerations</title> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + You only can use the <guilabel>Cut</guilabel> action if you have the appropriate permissions on the source node. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + You only can use the <guilabel>Paste</guilabel> action if you have a right on the destination node. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + If the destination node contains a file with the same name as the copied file, the pasted file will have an index integer added to its name. + </para> + + <para> + For example; <emphasis>New Folder</emphasis> contains a node named <filename>Live</filename> which is cut and pasted into a location that already contains a node named <filename>Live</filename>. After the paste action the new file will be named <filename>Live[2]</filename>. The original <filename>Live</filename> file will be unchanged. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + You cannot Cut a content folder into a document folder. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + <emphasis>Pasting</emphasis> a node does not remove it from the Clipboard. Therefore, after using the <guilabel>Cut</guilabel> action you can use <guilabel>Paste</guilabel> to copy the node into multiple nodes without needing to use the <guilabel>Cut</guilabel> action again. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </note> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions_on_Folders_and_Documents-Delete_folders_and_documents"> + <title>Delete folders and documents</title> + + <para> + This function helps you remove folders/documents from theirs location easily. Follow the steps in <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Content_In_Content_Explorer-Delete_a_web_content"/> + </para> + + <note> + <title>Delete Rights</title> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + You can only use the <guilabel>Delete</guilabel> action if you have the appropriate permissions on the node. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + If the deleted node contains subnodes, these will also be deleted. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </note> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions_on_Folders_and_Documents-Drag_and_drop_folders_and_documents"> + <title>Drag and drop folders and documents</title> + + <para> + This function allows you to move folders or documents from their current location to another by using the drag and drop feature. + </para> + + <procedure> + <title/> + + <step> + <para> + Move the cursor to the folder(s) or document(s) in the right panel until the cursor changes to <guilabel>a pointing hand</guilabel> . You can hold the + <keycombo> + <keycap>Shift</keycap> + </keycombo> + key to select multiple contiguous folders/documents at once or the + <keycombo> + <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> + </keycombo> + key to select multiple non-contiguous files. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/selectfolders.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/selectfolders.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Hold the left mouse button and then <emphasis>drag</emphasis> the selected folder(s)/document(s) to another folder on either the right or left panes. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/draggingfolders.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/draggingfolders.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + <emphasis>Drop</emphasis> them into the selected folder by releasing the left mouse button. All dragged folders/documents will be relocated to the destination folder. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions_on_Folders_and_Documents-LockUnlock_folders_and_Documents"> + <title>Lock/Unlock folders and Documents</title> + + <para> + This function prevents other users from changing specific folders/documents for a specific period. + </para> + + <formalpara id="form-User_Guide-LockUnlock_folders_and_Documents-Lock_foldersdocuments"> + <title>Lock folders/documents</title> <para> + Right-click a folder or document (on either the right or left window pane) and select <guilabel>Lock</guilabel> from the menu. The selected node will be locked. + </para> + </formalpara> + + <note> + <title>Locking Rights</title> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + Only users with appropriate rights can lock folders or documents. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + After a node is locked, other users can view the locked node, but cannot alter or remove it. They can, however, create and edit a <emphasis>copy</emphasis> of the locked node (using the Copy/Paste functions outlined above). + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + A lock will be kept on a node for the current session only. The lock will be automatically removed when the user who locked the node signs out. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + A lock will also be automatically removed if no action is taken on the locked node for thirty (30) minutes. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </note> + + <formalpara id="form-User_Guide-LockUnlock_folders_and_Documents-Unlock_foldersdocuments"> + <title>Unlock folders/documents</title> <para> + To unlock a node you have locked, right-click it and select <guilabel>Unlock</guilabel> from the menu. The folder/document will then be unlocked and other users can take actions on it. + </para> + </formalpara> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions_on_Folders_and_Documents-Rename_folders_and_Documents"> + <title>Rename folders and Documents</title> + + <para> + This function is used to change the name of a folder/documents. + </para> + + <procedure> + <title/> + + <step> + <para> + Right-click a folder/document that you want to rename then select <guilabel>Rename</guilabel> from the menu: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/renameoption.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/renameoption.png" format="PNG" width="62mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + The rename form will appear: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/renameform.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/renameform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter a new name in the <guilabel>Name</guilabel> field. You can also change the title of this folder by entering a new one in the <guilabel>Title</guilabel> field. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to commit the new details. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions_on_Folders_and_Documents-Add_a_symlink"> + <title>Add a symlink</title> + + <para> + Creating a symbolic link (<emphasis>symlink</emphasis>) to a node is an effective way to quickly access that node from other nodes without having to navigate through the content structure manually. + </para> + + <procedure> + <title/> + + <step> + <para> + Right-click a document that you want to add a symlink to (in this instance the term <emphasis>to</emphasis> is used to describe the node as the target of the symlink, not an addition to the original node itself) and select <guilabel>Add SymLink</guilabel> from the menu. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + A symlink to the selected document will be created immediately. You can click the symlink to view its content. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions_on_Folders_and_Documents-View_WebDAV"> + <title>View WebDAV</title> + + <para> + WebDAV allows users to access (read and write) files and folders over the web. WebDAV is used to view nodes because it offers easy, quick, flexible and efficient data manipulation. + </para> + + <procedure> + <title/> + + <step> + <para> + Select the path of node you want to view via webDAV or open that folder from the left/right panel. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Right-click the node and select the <guilabel>Download and Allow Edition</guilabel> item in the menu. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + The view in WebDAV form will be different for different node types: + </para> + + <table> + <title></title> + + <tgroup cols="2"> + <thead> + <row> + <entry> + Node Type + </entry> + + <entry> + WebDAV Details + </entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry> + <emphasis role="bold">Folder</emphasis> + </entry> + + <entry> + The subnodes list of the current folder will be displayed in WebDAV. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <emphasis role="bold">nt:file</emphasis> + </entry> + + <entry> + The content of the document will be shown. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <emphasis role="bold">Article</emphasis> + </entry> + + <entry> + This node type does not, by default, list any folders. However, if the Article includes actions, added language or other data, all folders will be listed and named; <emphasis>exo:actions</emphasis>, <emphasis>exo:language</emphasis> and so on. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <emphasis role="bold">Podcast</emphasis> + </entry> + + <entry> + Viewed in WebDAV, this node type will have a form attached that users have to complete to download this document. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <emphasis role="bold">Sample node</emphasis> + </entry> + + <entry> + This node lists folder names as <emphasis>exo:images</emphasis>. Like Article nodes, if the Sample node contains actions or added languages, folders will be named <emphasis>exo:actions</emphasis>, <emphasis>exo:language</emphasis> and so on. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <emphasis role="bold">File Plan</emphasis> + </entry> + + <entry> + This node behaves the same way as Article and Sample node. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <emphasis role="bold">Kofax</emphasis> + </entry> + + <entry> + This node behaves the same way as Article and Sample node. + </entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section> + <title>View Information</title> + + <para> + eXo Content 2.2.0 supports you to view all information of a document, such as the name, the title, the creator, the publication state of the document and more. + </para> + + <para> + Do the following to view the information of a document: + </para> + + <procedure> + <title>View Information</title> + + <step> + <para> + Right-click a document that you want to view <emphasis role="bold">&gt;</emphasis> Select<emphasis role="bold"> View Information</emphasis> in the drop menu. + </para> + + <para> + The <emphasis role="bold">View Information</emphasis> form appears like this: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/view-information1.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata width="150mm" align="center" fileref="images/view-information1.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions_on_Folders_and_Documents-View_Document"> + <title>View Document</title> + + <para> + This function opens a document on another tab with a link containing the document path. + </para> + + <para> + Do the following to view a document. + </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-View_Document-View_a_document"> + <title>View a document</title> + + <step> + <para> + Right-click the document that you want to view and select <guilabel>View Document</guilabel> in the drop menu. + </para> + + <para> + The document is opened in another browser: + </para> + + <para> + The URL of the document is structured as; <uri>http://example.com:8080/ecmdemo/private/acme/siteExplorer/repository/path/to/document</uri> + </para> + + <para></para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions_on_Folders_and_Documents-Copy_URL_to_Clipboard"> + <title>Copy URL to Clipboard</title> + + <para> + The Copy URL to Clipboard enables you to copy the WebDAV URL of a selected folder or a document and then you can view it by WebDAV view on a browser. + </para> + + <para> + Do the following: + </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Copy_URL_to_Clipboard-Copy_URL_to_Clipboard"> + <title>Copy URL to Clipboard</title> + + <step> + <para> + Right-click a folder/document and select <guilabel>Copy URL to Clipboard</guilabel>. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata fileref="images/copyurl.png" format="PNG" align="center"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata fileref="images/copyurl.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="104mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Paste the URL into another browser window (or another tab in the same browser window). + </para> + + <para> + You can view the folders of the node or download documents to your device. You also view other nodes by clicking the folder named <guilabel>..</guilabel> to go up to the parent node. See the below illustration: + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions_on_Folders_and_Documents-Manage_Tags"> + <title>Manage Tags</title> + + <para> + Tags are easily managed by editing or deleting them with the <guilabel>Tag Manager</guilabel>. + </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_Tags-Edit_a_tag"> + <title>Edit a tag</title> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>tag</guilabel> icon at the upper-right corner of the tags panel. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/taglistiediticon.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/taglistiediticon.png" format="PNG" width="65mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + The <emphasis role="bold">Edit tag form</emphasis> will appear: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/tageditform.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/tageditform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>pencil</guilabel> icon that corresponds to the tag you want to edit. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Edit the tag as desired. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/tagform.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/tagform.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> button to commit the change or <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> to quit without changes. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_Tags-Delete_a_tag"> + <title>Delete a tag</title> + + <step> + <para> + Perform <emphasis role="bold">Step 1</emphasis> from the procedure above. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>trash can</guilabel> icon. + </para> + + <para> + A confirmation box will appear: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/tagdelete.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/tagdelete.png" format="PNG" width="105mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + Click <guilabel>OK</guilabel> button to delete the tag or <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> to quit. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Manage_Tags-Use_Created_tags"> + <title>Use Created tags</title> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>tag</guilabel> icon. You will see all existing tags. All existing tags are listed and classified by private or public tags. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/taglistiediticon.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/taglistiediticon.png" format="PNG" width="65mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + Tags will be displayed differently depending on popularity. The font-size, font-weight, color, font-family, text-decoration will change to visually represent popularity. + </para> + + <para> + For example, when a tag is added to more than ten documents it will be displayed in red with in a 20px size, bold font. These details can be configured in the Administration portlet. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Each tag is also like a link used list all documents that it is added. Click a tag name to see a list of documents with that tag displayed in the right panel. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + </section> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/SitesExplorer/Manage_Content.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/SitesExplorer/Manage_Content.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/SitesExplorer/Manage_Content.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -3,403 +3,422 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "../../../User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Content_In_Content_Explorer"> - <title>Manage Content In Content Explorer</title> - <para> - A web content is a key resource in creating a site. Other resources make a site more dynamic and animated by using layout, color, font, and more. This section focuses on how to manage a web content in a specific site. - </para> - <note> - <para> - Only users who have the right to access the <guilabel>Sites Management</guilabel> drive can manage web content. - </para> - - </note> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Content_In_Content_Explorer-Create_a_new_web_content"> - <title>Create a new web content</title> + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Content_In_Content_Explorer"> + <title>Manage Content In Content Explorer</title> + + <para> + A web content is a key resource in creating a site. Other resources make a site more dynamic and animated by using layout, color, font, and more. This section focuses on how to manage a web content in a specific site. + </para> + + <note> <para> + Only users who have the right to access the <guilabel>Sites Management</guilabel> drive can manage web content. + </para> + </note> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Content_In_Content_Explorer-Create_a_new_web_content"> + <title>Create a new web content</title> + + <para> This function is used to add a new web content into a specific site. - </para> + </para> + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Create_a_new_web_content-Add_new_content"> <title>Add new content</title> - <step> - <para> - Go to the <guilabel>Sites Management</guilabel> drive and select a site that you want to add a web content to. - </para> - + + <step> + <para> + Go to the <guilabel>Sites Management</guilabel> drive and select a site that you want to add a web content to. + </para> </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the <filename>web contents</filename> folder on the left: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/webcontentfolder.png" format="PNG" /> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/webcontentfolder.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - - </mediaobject> - <note> - <para> - You also can add the new web content into other folders (documents and media folder) of a site but it is recommended that you add new content to the web content folder because: - </para> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - It will allow you to manage web content of a site more easily. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - If you add a new web content in this folder, you don't need to select a web content document in the list of document types. This makes adding a new web content more flexible. - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - </note> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Open the <guilabel>Add New Document</guilabel> form by clicking the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/adddocumenticon.png" format="PNG" width="28mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Add Content</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon on the Action bar. - </para> - - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select a template in the <guilabel>Select Template</guilabel> field to present web content: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/maincontenttab.png" format="PNG" /> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/maincontenttab.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - - </mediaobject> - <para> - The <guilabel>Select Template</guilabel> field has two options: - </para> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> + + <step> + <para> + Select the <filename>web contents</filename> folder on the left: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/webcontentfolder.png" format="PNG" /> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/webcontentfolder.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <note> + <para> + You also can add the new web content into other folders (documents and media folder) of a site but it is recommended that you add new content to the web content folder because: + </para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> <para> - <guilabel>Picture on head layout web content:</guilabel> The site's content is presented in two spaces. One for inserting an image and one for editing the site's content. In which, the image is put at the head of a site. + It will allow you to manage web content of a site more easily. </para> - - </listitem> + </listitem> + <listitem> <para> - <guilabel>Free layout web content:</guilabel> This template is a free layout. + If you add a new web content in this folder, you don't need to select a web content document in the list of document types. This makes adding a new web content more flexible. </para> - - </listitem> - - </itemizedlist> - <!-- Doc Note: The content from this point until the next comment 'END' should probably be moved to a breakout explanation. Having it in the middle of a procedure breaks the flow of the steps. --> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </note> </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter values in the fields of the <guilabel>Add New Document</guilabel> form. - </para> - + + <step> + <para> + Open the <guilabel>Add New Document</guilabel> form by clicking the <guilabel>Add Content</guilabel> icon on the Action bar. + </para> </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Save as Draft</guilabel> to save the content or <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> to exit the form. - </para> - + + <step> + <para> + Select a template in the <guilabel>Select Template</guilabel> field to present web content: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/maincontenttab.png" format="PNG" /> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/maincontenttab.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Select Template</guilabel> field has two options: + </para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + <guilabel>Picture on head layout web content:</guilabel> The site's content is presented in two spaces. One for inserting an image and one for editing the site's content. In which, the image is put at the head of a site. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + <guilabel>Free layout web content:</guilabel> This template is a free layout. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> +<!-- Doc Note: The content from this point until the next comment 'END' should probably be moved to a breakout explanation. Having it in the middle of a procedure breaks the flow of the steps. --> </step> - <step> - <title>Tabs in the Add New Document form</title> - <para> - The <guilabel>Main Content</guilabel> Tab includes: - </para> - <table> - <title></title> - <tgroup cols="2"> - <thead> - <row> - <entry> - Field - </entry> - <entry> - Options - </entry> - </row> - </thead> - <tbody> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Name</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry> - The name of a web content that you want to add new - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Title</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry> - The title of a web content - </entry> - - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Main content</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry> - The main content that you want to display when publishing this web content - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Save button</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry> - To save the inputted values - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Cancel button</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry> - To exit the current form - </entry> - </row> - </tbody> - </tgroup> - </table> - <para> - The <guilabel>Illustration Tab</guilabel> allows you to upload an illustration that makes the site's content more attractive. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/illustrationtab.png" format="PNG" /> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/illustrationtab.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - - </mediaobject> - <table> - <title></title> - <tgroup cols="2"> - <thead> - <row> - <entry> - Field - </entry> - <entry> - Option - </entry> - </row> - </thead> - <tbody> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Illustration Image</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry> - The path to an image that you want to upload into a site. This image will be used like an illustration of that site. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Image Type</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry> - The image format that you want to upload to the site. It can be: image/gif; image/png; image/jpg; image/jpeg. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>Summary</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry> - You can supply a short description about the web content that will be displayed with the illustration image when the web content is listed. The main content will be shown when it is selected to be viewed. - </entry> - </row> - </tbody> - </tgroup> - </table> - <para> - Do the following to upload an image: - </para> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Add_new_content-_Upload_an_image"> - <title> Upload an image</title> - <step> - <para> - Browse an image list on your local device by clicking the <guilabel>Browse...</guilabel> button and then select a specific location. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select an image in the list to upload. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - <para> - The <guilabel>Advanced</guilabel> tab: - </para> - <para> - This tab includes two parts: <guilabel>CSS data</guilabel> and <guilabel>JS data</guilabel>: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/advancedtab.png" format="PNG" /> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/advancedtab.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <table> - <title></title> - <tgroup cols="2"> - <thead> - <row> - <entry> - Field - </entry> - <entry> - Information - </entry> - </row> - </thead> - <tbody> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>CSS data</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry> - Contains CSS definition to present data in a web content. You can optionally enter CSS data into this field to specify the style. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <guilabel>JS data</guilabel> - </entry> - <entry> - Contains JS content to make the web content more dynamic when after publishing. You can optionally enter JS content in this field. - </entry> - </row> - </tbody> - </tgroup> - </table> - <!-- END --> + + <step> + <para> + Enter values in the fields of the <guilabel>Add New Document</guilabel> form. + </para> </step> - </procedure> - </section> - - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Content_In_Content_Explorer-Edit_a_web_content"> - <title>Edit a web content</title> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save as Draft</guilabel> to save the content or <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> to exit the form. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <title>Tabs in the Add New Document form</title> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Main Content</guilabel> Tab includes: + </para> + + <table> + <title></title> + + <tgroup cols="2"> + <thead> + <row> + <entry> + Field + </entry> + + <entry> + Options + </entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Name</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The name of a web content that you want to add new + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Title</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The title of a web content + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Main content</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The main content that you want to display when publishing this web content + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Save button</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + To save the inputted values + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Cancel button</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + To exit the current form + </entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Illustration Tab</guilabel> allows you to upload an illustration that makes the site's content more attractive. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/illustrationtab.png" format="PNG" /> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/illustrationtab.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <table> + <title></title> + + <tgroup cols="2"> + <thead> + <row> + <entry> + Field + </entry> + + <entry> + Option + </entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Illustration Image</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The path to an image that you want to upload into a site. This image will be used like an illustration of that site. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Image Type</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The image format that you want to upload to the site. It can be: image/gif; image/png; image/jpg; image/jpeg. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Summary</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + You can supply a short description about the web content that will be displayed with the illustration image when the web content is listed. The main content will be shown when it is selected to be viewed. + </entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + + <para> + Do the following to upload an image: + </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Add_new_content-_Upload_an_image"> + <title>Upload an image</title> + + <step> + <para> + Browse an image list on your local device by clicking the <guilabel>Browse...</guilabel> button and then select a specific location. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select an image in the list to upload. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Advanced</guilabel> tab: + </para> + + <para> + This tab includes two parts: <guilabel>CSS data</guilabel> and <guilabel>JS data</guilabel>: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/advancedtab.png" format="PNG" /> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/advancedtab.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <table> + <title></title> + + <tgroup cols="2"> + <thead> + <row> + <entry> + Field + </entry> + + <entry> + Information + </entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>CSS data</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + Contains CSS definition to present data in a web content. You can optionally enter CSS data into this field to specify the style. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>JS data</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + Contains JS content to make the web content more dynamic when after publishing. You can optionally enter JS content in this field. + </entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> +<!-- END --> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Content_In_Content_Explorer-Edit_a_web_content"> + <title>Edit a web content</title> + <para> This function is used to edit a web content in a specific drive of an existing site. - </para> + </para> + <para> Do the following: - </para> + </para> + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Edit_a_web_content-Edit_a_web_content"> <title>Edit a web content</title> - <step> - <para> - Go into the folder of a site which contains the web content that you want to edit. - </para> + + <step> + <para> + Go into the folder of a site which contains the web content that you want to edit. + </para> </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the web content by double-clicking it on the left tree or on the right panel. The detailed information of web content will be viewed on the right panel. - </para> + + <step> + <para> + Select the web content by double-clicking it on the left tree or on the right panel. The detailed information of web content will be viewed on the right panel. + </para> </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/editdocumenticon.png" format="PNG" width="38mm" /> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Edit Document</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon on the action bar to show the edit form of the selected web content as the <guilabel>Add New Document</guilabel> form. - </para> - + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Edit Document</guilabel> icon on the action bar to show the edit form of the selected web content as the <guilabel>Add New Document</guilabel> form. + </para> </step> - <step> - <para> - Change the current values in the fields of this edit form. - </para> - + + <step> + <para> + Change the current values in the fields of this edit form. + </para> </step> - <step> - <para> - Complete editing the selected web content by clicking <guilabel>Save</guilabel>. - </para> - + + <step> + <para> + Complete editing the selected web content by clicking <guilabel>Save</guilabel>. + </para> </step> - - </procedure> - + </procedure> + <note> <title>Auto-lock</title> - <para> - When you click <guilabel>Edit Document</guilabel>, the web-content will be auto-locked for editing. After finishing, the content reverts to unlocked status. You can manage Locks in the Administration portlet. + + <para> + When you click <guilabel>Edit Document</guilabel>, the web-content will be auto-locked for editing. After finishing, the content reverts to unlocked status. You can manage Locks in the Administration portlet. </para> - - </note> - - </section> - - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Content_In_Content_Explorer-Delete_a_web_content"> - <title>Delete a web content</title> + </note> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Content_In_Content_Explorer-Delete_a_web_content"> + <title>Delete a web content</title> + <para> This function is used to remove a web content from the web content folder in a specific site's drive. - </para> + </para> + <para> To delete a web-content, do the following: - </para> + </para> + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Delete_a_web_content-Delete_a_web_content"> <title>Delete a web content</title> - <step> - <para> - Right-click the name of the web content that you want to delete and then select <guilabel>Delete</guilabel> in the drop-down menu: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/selectdelete.png" format="PNG" /> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/selectdelete.png" format="PNG" width="75mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + + <step> + <para> + Right-click the name of the web content that you want to delete and then select <guilabel>Delete</guilabel> in the drop-down menu: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/selectdelete.png" format="PNG" /> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/selectdelete.png" format="PNG" width="75mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> </step> - <step> - <para> - A confirmation message will appear. Click <guilabel>OK</guilabel> to accept the deletion, or <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> to quit without deleting. - </para> + + <step> + <para> + A confirmation message will appear. Click <guilabel>OK</guilabel> to accept the deletion, or <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> to quit without deleting. + </para> </step> - </procedure> - </section> - - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Content_In_Content_Explorer-Publish_a_web_content"> - <title>Publish a web content</title> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Content_In_Content_Explorer-Publish_a_web_content"> + <title>Publish a web content</title> + <para> This function helps you publish a web content that you have added to web content folder in Content Explorer. - </para> + </para> + <para> See <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Contribute_Content-Publication_Process" /> to know how to publish a web content. - </para> + </para> + <para> After the content is published, all users who have the right to access that position can view the published web content as a page on the Navigation bar. - </para> - </section> -</section> \ No newline at end of file + </para> + </section> + </section> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/SitesExplorer/Views.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/SitesExplorer/Views.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/SitesExplorer/Views.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -3,371 +3,308 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "../../../User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<section id="sect-User_Guide-Views"> - <title>Views</title> - <para> - There are many drives in the Content Explorer. Each drive has different views that allow you to look at the data in the drive in a particular way. Each view has various actions available on tabs in the viewing pane. - </para> - <para> - Site Publisher offers four ways to view nodes in a specific folder and show the corresponding actions on the Actions bar. - </para> - <note> - <title>View Types</title> - <para> - The number of View types depends on which drive you are browsing. You can manage the view types in Site Publisher Administration. See <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Content_Presentation_Manager-Manage_Views" /> for details. - </para> - - </note> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Views-Admin_view"> - <title>Admin view</title> - <para> - In this view, each item in the list includes the following information: <systemitem>Name</systemitem>, <systemitem>Date Created</systemitem>, <systemitem>Date Modified</systemitem>, <systemitem>Owner</systemitem> and <systemitem>Versionable and Auditing</systemitem>. This information will help you manage nodes more easily. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/detailsview.png" format="PNG" /> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/detailsview.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - You can sort nodes based on node information by clicking the label of the corresponding column. The <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/descendingarrow.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>ascending arrow</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon indicates that nodes are ordered in ascending order and the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/ascendingarrow.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>descending arrow</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon means nodes are in descending order. - </para> - </section> - - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Views-Icons_View"> - <title>Icons View</title> - <para> - In this view, nodes in a specific folder will be viewed as icons. The name of each node will be shown under its icon. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/iconsview.png" format="PNG" /> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/iconsview.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </section> - - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Views-Thumbnails_View"> - <title>Thumbnails View</title> - <para> - With Thumbnails view, nodes in a specific folder are viewed as icons bounded by frames. Name of each node is shown under its icon. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/thumbnailview.png" format="PNG" /> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/thumbnailview.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - If nodes are image files, their thumbnails will be shown as so: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/thumbnailimages.png" format="PNG" /> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/thumbnailimages.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - Additionally, when in this view, you can <emphasis>overload</emphasis> a thumbnail image for a node. For example, if you want to add a thumbnail image for the <emphasis role="bold">Digital Assets</emphasis> folder, do the following: - </para> - <procedure> - <title></title> - <step> - <para> - Select a folder (on the left or right panel) that you want to add a thumbnail image. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/overloadthumbnail.png" format="PNG" /> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>Overload Thumbnail</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon to open the <guilabel>Add thumbnail image</guilabel> form. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select an image from your machine to use as a display icon for the selected folder. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Complete adding a thumbnail image by clicking <guilabel>Save</guilabel>. This node will be stored in a exo:thumbnails folder. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Back to the parent folder (folder Pictures in this example) that contains the selected folder to see a icon used to display. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> - - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Views-Cover_Flow_View"> - <title>Cover Flow View</title> - <para> - This view is defined as a dynamic view with side-scrolling views of nodes in a folder. In this view, when a node is selected, its name is set with bold effect to set it apart from others. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/imagefolders.png" format="PNG" /> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/imagefolders.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - If nodes are pictures, they appear as: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/coverflow.png" format="PNG" /> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/coverflow.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - If nodes are documents or folders, they are displayed as: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/folderflow.png" format="PNG" /> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/folderflow.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - You can move from one node to another in one of three methods: - </para> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - Use the mouse wheel. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - Hold and move the yellow circle button to the left or the right. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - Click the folder/document name that you want to select. - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - </section> - - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Views-Slide_Show_View"> - <title>Slide Show View</title> - <para> - In this view type, pictures in folders are viewed in a slide show. - </para> - <para> - To view pictures in the slide show, click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/slideshowicon.png" format="PNG" width="7mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>slide show</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/imageslideshow.png" format="PNG" /> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/imageslideshow.png" format="PNG" width="63mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - If nodes are pictures, they are displayed as: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/pictureslideshowscreen.png" format="PNG" /> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/pictureslideshowscreen.png" format="PNG" width="138mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - The Slide Show view automatically show all picture nodes. Users can control this slide show by clicking the below buttons: - </para> - <table> - <title></title> - <tgroup cols="2"> - <thead> - <row> - <entry> - Button - </entry> - <entry> - Function - </entry> - </row> - </thead> - <tbody> - <row> - <entry> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/slideshownavfirst.png" format="PNG" width="7mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </entry> - <entry> - Go to the first picture node. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/slideshownavprev.png" format="PNG" width="7mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </entry> - <entry> - View the previous picture node. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/slideshownavpause.png" format="PNG" width="7mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </entry> - <entry> - Pause the slide show. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/slideshownavnext.png" format="PNG" width="7mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </entry> - <entry> - View the next picture node. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/slideshownavlast.png" format="PNG" width="7mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </entry> - <entry> - View the last picture node. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/slideshownavplay.png" format="PNG" width="7mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </entry> - <entry> - Continue viewing pictures node. - </entry> - </row> - </tbody> - </tgroup> - </table> - </section> - - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Views-Timeline_View"> - <title>Timeline View</title> - <para> - This view enables users to view all nodes created and uploaded by time. To use it, click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/timeline.png" format="PNG" width="5mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>clock</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon. - </para> - <para> - All the nodes that were created and uploaded will be displayed in a timeline: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/timelineview.png" format="PNG" /> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/timelineview.png" format="PNG" width="62mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - You can click directly on the node name to view its content in details. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/timelinedetails.png" format="PNG" /> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/timelinedetails.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - You can also click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/favestar.png" format="PNG" width="6mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>star</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon to mark your item as favorite or the - <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/unfavestar.png" format="PNG" width="8mm" /> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>star</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon of a favorited node again to remove it from favorites. - </para> - </section> -</section> - - + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Views"> + <title>Views</title> + + <para> + There are many drives in the Content Explorer. Each drive has different views that allow you to look at the data in the drive in a particular way. Each view has various actions available on tabs in the viewing pane. + </para> + + <para> + Site Publisher offers four ways to view nodes in a specific folder and show the corresponding actions on the Actions bar. + </para> + + <note> + <title>View Types</title> + + <para> + The number of View types depends on which drive you are browsing. You can manage the view types in Site Publisher Administration. See <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Content_Presentation_Manager-Manage_Views" /> for details. + </para> + </note> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Views-Admin_view"> + <title>Admin view</title> + + <para> + In this view, each item in the list includes the following information: <systemitem>Name</systemitem>, <systemitem>Date Created</systemitem>, <systemitem>Date Modified</systemitem>, <systemitem>Owner</systemitem> and <systemitem>Versionable and Auditing</systemitem>. This information will help you manage nodes more easily. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/detailsview.png" format="PNG" /> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/detailsview.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + You can sort nodes based on node information by clicking the label of the corresponding column. The <guilabel>descending arrow</guilabel> icon means nodes are in descending order. + </para> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Views-Icons_View"> + <title>Icons View</title> + + <para> + In this view, nodes in a specific folder will be viewed as icons. The name of each node will be shown under its icon. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/iconsview.png" format="PNG" /> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/iconsview.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Views-Thumbnails_View"> + <title>Thumbnails View</title> + + <para> + With Thumbnails view, nodes in a specific folder are viewed as icons bounded by frames. Name of each node is shown under its icon. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/thumbnailview.png" format="PNG" /> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/thumbnailview.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + If nodes are image files, their thumbnails will be shown as so: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/thumbnailimages.png" format="PNG" /> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/thumbnailimages.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + Additionally, when in this view, you can <emphasis>overload</emphasis> a thumbnail image for a node. For example, if you want to add a thumbnail image for the <emphasis role="bold">Digital Assets</emphasis> folder, do the following: + </para> + + <procedure> + <title></title> + + <step> + <para> + Select a folder (on the left or right panel) that you want to add a thumbnail image. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Overload Thumbnail</guilabel> icon to open the <guilabel>Add thumbnail image</guilabel> form. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select an image from your machine to use as a display icon for the selected folder. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Complete adding a thumbnail image by clicking <guilabel>Save</guilabel>. This node will be stored in a exo:thumbnails folder. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Back to the parent folder (folder Pictures in this example) that contains the selected folder to see a icon used to display. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Views-Cover_Flow_View"> + <title>Cover Flow View</title> + + <para> + This view is defined as a dynamic view with side-scrolling views of nodes in a folder. In this view, when a node is selected, its name is set with bold effect to set it apart from others. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/imagefolders.png" format="PNG" /> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/imagefolders.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + If nodes are pictures, they appear as: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/coverflow.png" format="PNG" /> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/coverflow.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + If nodes are documents or folders, they are displayed as: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/folderflow.png" format="PNG" /> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/folderflow.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + You can move from one node to another in one of three methods: + </para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + Use the mouse wheel. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + Hold and move the yellow circle button to the left or the right. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + Click the folder/document name that you want to select. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Views-Slide_Show_View"> + <title>Slide Show View</title> + + <para> + In this view type, pictures in folders are viewed in a slide show. + </para> + + <para> + To view pictures in the slide show, click the <guilabel>slide show</guilabel> icon: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/imageslideshow.png" format="PNG" /> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/imageslideshow.png" format="PNG" width="63mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + If nodes are pictures, they are displayed as: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/pictureslideshowscreen.png" format="PNG" /> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/pictureslideshowscreen.png" format="PNG" width="138mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + The Slide Show view automatically show all picture nodes. Users can control this slide show by clicking the below buttons: + </para> + + <table> + <title></title> + + <tgroup cols="2"> + <thead> + <row> + <entry> + Button + </entry> + + <entry> + Function + </entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/slideshownavfirst.png" format="PNG" width="7mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry> + Go to the first picture node. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/slideshownavprev.png" format="PNG" width="7mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry> + View the previous picture node. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/slideshownavpause.png" format="PNG" width="7mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry> + Pause the slide show. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/slideshownavnext.png" format="PNG" width="7mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry> + View the next picture node. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/slideshownavlast.png" format="PNG" width="7mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry> + View the last picture node. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <mediaobject> + <imageobject> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/slideshownavplay.png" format="PNG" width="7mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </entry> + + <entry> + Continue viewing pictures node. + </entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Views-Timeline_View"> + <title>Timeline View</title> + + <para> + This view enables users to view all nodes created and uploaded by time. To use it, click the <guilabel>clock</guilabel> icon. + </para> + + <para> + All the nodes that were created and uploaded will be displayed in a timeline: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/timelineview.png" format="PNG" /> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/timelineview.png" format="PNG" width="62mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + You can click directly on the node name to view its content in details. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/timelinedetails.png" format="PNG" /> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/timelinedetails.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + You can also click the <guilabel>star</guilabel> icon to mark your item as favorite or the <guilabel>star</guilabel> icon of a favorited node again to remove it from favorites. + </para> + </section> + </section> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/SitesExplorer.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/SitesExplorer.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/SitesExplorer.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -3,16 +3,17 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "../../User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<section id="sect-User_Guide-Content_Explorer"> - <title>Content Explorer</title> - <xi:include href="SitesExplorer/Access_Sites_Explorer.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> - <xi:include href="SitesExplorer/Drives.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> - <!-- DOCS NOTE: Views options do not seem to be available in EPP 5.2.0 + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Content_Explorer"> + <title>Content Explorer</title> + + <xi:include href="SitesExplorer/Access_Sites_Explorer.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> + + <xi:include href="SitesExplorer/Drives.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> +<!-- DOCS NOTE: Views options do not seem to be available in EPP 5.2.0 <xi:include href="SitesExplorer/Views.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" />--> - <xi:include href="SitesExplorer/Actions.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> - <xi:include href="SitesExplorer/Manage_Content.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> - <xi:include href="SitesExplorer/Folders_and_Documents.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> - -</section> - - + <xi:include href="SitesExplorer/Actions.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> + + <xi:include href="SitesExplorer/Manage_Content.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> + + <xi:include href="SitesExplorer/Folders_and_Documents.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> + </section> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/View.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/View.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/View.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -3,70 +3,66 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "../../User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<section id="sect-User_Guide-View_a_site"> - <title>View a site</title> - <para> - In Site Publisher, the term <emphasis role="bold">Website</emphasis> is used interchangeably with the term <emphasis role="bold">Portal</emphasis>. So, "<emphasis>Viewing a portal...</emphasis>" means the same as "<emphasis>Viewing a website...</emphasis>". You can select the website that you want to view by selecting its name in the drop-down menu on the administration bar: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/toolbar.png" format="PNG" /> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/toolbar.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> - </imageobject> - - </mediaobject> - <para> - The main screen of the site will appear. The illustration below highlights some important components of the web page: - </para> - <mediaobjectco> - <imageobjectco> - <areaspec> - <area coords="" id="area-User_Guide-View_a_site-admin" /> - <area coords="" id="area-User_Guide-View_a_site-banner" /> - <area coords="" id="area-User_Guide-View_a_site-navigation" /> - <area coords="" id="area-User_Guide-View_a_site-home" /> - <area coords="" id="area-User_Guide-View_a_site-footer" /> - - </areaspec> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/acme.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - <calloutlist> - <callout arearefs="area-User_Guide-View_a_site-admin"> - <para> - The <emphasis role="bold">Administration bar</emphasis> contains administration functions related to portals (websites). - </para> - - </callout> - <callout arearefs="area-User_Guide-View_a_site-banner"> - <para> - The <emphasis role="bold">Banner</emphasis> portlet contains things like the company name and logo used throughout the website. - </para> - - </callout> - <callout arearefs="area-User_Guide-View_a_site-navigation"> - <para> - The <emphasis role="bold">Navigation bar</emphasis> helps users to visualize the structure of the website and provide quick links to different pages. - </para> - - </callout> - <callout arearefs="area-User_Guide-View_a_site-home"> - <para> - The <emphasis role="bold">Home page</emphasis> is the main page of the website. This is the default page that is displayed first when you visit the website. - </para> - - </callout> - <callout arearefs="area-User_Guide-View_a_site-footer"> - <para> - The <emphasis role="bold">Footer</emphasis> is any texts, or image that is displayed at the bottom of the website. It provides information about author/institutional sponsor, revision date, copyright and more. - </para> - - </callout> - - </calloutlist> - </imageobjectco> </mediaobjectco> -</section> - - + <section id="sect-User_Guide-View_a_site"> + <title>View a site</title> + + <para> + In Site Publisher, the term <emphasis role="bold">Website</emphasis> is used interchangeably with the term <emphasis role="bold">Portal</emphasis>. So, "<emphasis>Viewing a portal...</emphasis>" means the same as "<emphasis>Viewing a website...</emphasis>". You can select the website that you want to view by selecting its name in the drop-down menu on the administration bar: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/toolbar.png" format="PNG" /> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/toolbar.png" format="PNG" width="150mm" /> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + The main screen of the site will appear. The illustration below highlights some important components of the web page: + </para> + + <mediaobjectco> + <imageobjectco> + <areaspec> + <area coords="" id="area-User_Guide-View_a_site-admin" /> + + <area coords="" id="area-User_Guide-View_a_site-banner" /> + + <area coords="" id="area-User_Guide-View_a_site-navigation" /> + + <area coords="" id="area-User_Guide-View_a_site-home" /> + + <area coords="" id="area-User_Guide-View_a_site-footer" /> + </areaspec> + <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="images/acme.png" format="PNG" align="center" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + <calloutlist> + <callout arearefs="area-User_Guide-View_a_site-admin"> + <para> + The <emphasis role="bold">Administration bar</emphasis> contains administration functions related to portals (websites). + </para> + </callout> + + <callout arearefs="area-User_Guide-View_a_site-banner"> + <para> + The <emphasis role="bold">Banner</emphasis> portlet contains things like the company name and logo used throughout the website. + </para> + </callout> + + <callout arearefs="area-User_Guide-View_a_site-navigation"> + <para> + The <emphasis role="bold">Navigation bar</emphasis> helps users to visualize the structure of the website and provide quick links to different pages. + </para> + </callout> + + <callout arearefs="area-User_Guide-View_a_site-home"> + <para> + The <emphasis role="bold">Home page</emphasis> is the main page of the website. This is the default page that is displayed first when you visit the website. + </para> + </callout> + + <callout arearefs="area-User_Guide-View_a_site-footer"> + <para> + The <emphasis role="bold">Footer</emphasis> is any texts, or image that is displayed at the bottom of the website. It provides information about author/institutional sponsor, revision date, copyright and more. + </para> + </callout> + </calloutlist> + </imageobjectco> + </mediaobjectco> + </section> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Webdav.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Webdav.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics/Webdav.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -4,417 +4,439 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "../../User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Site_Content_with_WebDAV"> - <title>Manage Content with WebDAV</title> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Site_Content_with_WebDAV-What_is_WebDAV"> - <title>What is WebDAV?</title> - <para> - <emphasis>WebDAV</emphasis> is an abbreviation of <emphasis role="bold">Web</emphasis>-based <emphasis role="bold">D</emphasis>istributed <emphasis role="bold">A</emphasis>uthoring and <emphasis role="bold">V</emphasis>ersioning. It is used to publish and manage files and directories on a remote server. It also enables users to perform these functions on a website. - </para> - <para> - WebDAV provides the following features: - </para> - <variablelist> - <varlistentry> - <term>Locking</term> - <listitem> - <para> - This feature prevents two or more collaborators from overwriting shared files. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>Site Manipulation</term> - <listitem> - <para> - WebDAV supports the <emphasis>copy</emphasis> and <emphasis>move</emphasis> actions and the creation of <emphasis>collections</emphasis> (file system directories). - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>Name space management</term> - <listitem> - <para> - This function enables copying and moving web pages within a server&apos;s namespace. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - </variablelist> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Site_Content_with_WebDAV-Why_use_WebDAV"> - <title>Why use WebDAV?</title> - <para> - With WebDAV, you can manage content efficiently. You can: - </para> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - Copy/paste content on your device and have those changes reflected in a host-based website. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - Easily and quickly manipulate actions on a website without having to access it directly. Files can be accessed from anywhere and are treated as if they were in local directories. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - Easily and quickly upload content to a website simply by copying it into the appropriate directory. - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Site_Content_with_WebDAV-How_to_Use_WebDAV_With_Site_Publisher"> - <title>How to Use WebDAV With Site Publisher</title> - <para>To use WebDAV with - Site Publisher, you first need to have an active network connection. Next, you can follow one of the two following ways:</para> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-How_to_Use_WebDAV_With_Site_Publisher-Method_One"> - <title>Method One: WebDAV server</title> - <para>This procedure uses Windows XP as an example. Please modify the following steps to suit your operating environment:</para> - <step> - <para> - Navigate to <menuchoice><guimenu>My Network Places</guimenu></menuchoice> on your local computer. You will see all shared files and folders: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/mynetworkplaces.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/mynetworkplaces.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the <guilabel>Add a network place</guilabel> link on the left to open the <guilabel>Add Network Place Wizard</guilabel>: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/networkplacewizard.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/networkplacewizard.png" format="PNG" width="149mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Next</guilabel> to choose a network location: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/networkplacelocation.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/networkplacelocation.png" format="PNG" width="144mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select <guilabel>Choose another network location</guilabel> to create a shortcut. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter an address into the <guilabel>Internet or network address</guilabel> field. For example, the address of the demonstration site <emphasis>Acme</emphasis> is <ulink type="http" url="http://localhost:8080/portal/rest/private/jcr/repository/collaboration/sites/content/live/acme"></ulink>. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Next</guilabel>. After a few moments, a folder named <filename>acme on localhost</filename> appears in the <menuchoice><guimenu>My Network Places</guimenu></menuchoice> directory. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newnetworklocation.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newnetworklocation.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - Each site managed by WebDAV appears as a folder in this location. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - You can take actions on the content in this folder to administrate the site content remotely. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-How_to_Use_WebDAV_With_Site_Publisher-Method_Two"> - <title>Method Two: Sites Management</title> - <para>This method can be done using the <emphasis>Sites Management</emphasis> functionality of Site Publisher:</para> - <step> - <para> - Navigate to <ulink url="http://localhost:8080/portal" type="http"/> in your web browser. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Group</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Content Explorer</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice> in the administration bar. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the <guilabel>Drives</guilabel> button then select <guilabel>Sites Management</guilabel>. - </para> - <para> - You will see all sites listed in the left sidebar: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/sitesleftpane.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/sitesleftpane.png" format="PNG" width="64mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Right-click the site you want to view with WebDAV and select the <guilabel>Download and Allow Edition</guilabel> item in the menu. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/alloweditionmenu.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/alloweditionmenu.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - The selected site will be shown in WebDAV: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/webdavsiteview.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/webdavsiteview.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - In this view, you can access documents in the directories that are linked to the web server. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> - - <section id="sect-User_Guide-How_to_Use_WebDAV_With_Site_Publisher-WebDAV_Considerations"> - <title>WebDAV Considerations</title> - <!-- DOCS NOTE: This content is duplicated in the EPP Reference Guide to avoid cross-document linking. + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Site_Content_with_WebDAV"> + <title>Manage Content with WebDAV</title> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Site_Content_with_WebDAV-What_is_WebDAV"> + <title>What is WebDAV?</title> + + <para> + <emphasis>WebDAV</emphasis> is an abbreviation of <emphasis role="bold">Web</emphasis>-based <emphasis role="bold">D</emphasis>istributed <emphasis role="bold">A</emphasis>uthoring and <emphasis role="bold">V</emphasis>ersioning. It is used to publish and manage files and directories on a remote server. It also enables users to perform these functions on a website. + </para> + + <para> + WebDAV provides the following features: + </para> + + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>Locking</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + This feature prevents two or more collaborators from overwriting shared files. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Site Manipulation</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + WebDAV supports the <emphasis>copy</emphasis> and <emphasis>move</emphasis> actions and the creation of <emphasis>collections</emphasis> (file system directories). + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Name space management</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + This function enables copying and moving web pages within a server&apos;s namespace. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Site_Content_with_WebDAV-Why_use_WebDAV"> + <title>Why use WebDAV?</title> + + <para> + With WebDAV, you can manage content efficiently. You can: + </para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + Copy/paste content on your device and have those changes reflected in a host-based website. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + Easily and quickly manipulate actions on a website without having to access it directly. Files can be accessed from anywhere and are treated as if they were in local directories. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + Easily and quickly upload content to a website simply by copying it into the appropriate directory. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Site_Content_with_WebDAV-How_to_Use_WebDAV_With_Site_Publisher"> + <title>How to Use WebDAV With Site Publisher</title> + + <para> + To use WebDAV with Site Publisher, you first need to have an active network connection. Next, you can follow one of the two following ways: + </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-How_to_Use_WebDAV_With_Site_Publisher-Method_One"> + <title>Method One: WebDAV server</title> + + <para> + This procedure uses Windows XP as an example. Please modify the following steps to suit your operating environment: + </para> + + <step> + <para> + Navigate to <menuchoice><guimenu>My Network Places</guimenu></menuchoice> on your local computer. You will see all shared files and folders: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/mynetworkplaces.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/mynetworkplaces.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Add a network place</guilabel> link on the left to open the <guilabel>Add Network Place Wizard</guilabel>: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/networkplacewizard.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/networkplacewizard.png" format="PNG" width="149mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Next</guilabel> to choose a network location: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/networkplacelocation.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/networkplacelocation.png" format="PNG" width="144mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select <guilabel>Choose another network location</guilabel> to create a shortcut. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter an address into the <guilabel>Internet or network address</guilabel> field. For example, the address of the demonstration site <emphasis>Acme</emphasis> is <ulink type="http" url="http://localhost:8080/portal/rest/private/jcr/repository/collaboration/sites/content/live/acme"></ulink>. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Next</guilabel>. After a few moments, a folder named <filename>acme on localhost</filename> appears in the <menuchoice><guimenu>My Network Places</guimenu></menuchoice> directory. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newnetworklocation.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/newnetworklocation.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + Each site managed by WebDAV appears as a folder in this location. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + You can take actions on the content in this folder to administrate the site content remotely. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-How_to_Use_WebDAV_With_Site_Publisher-Method_Two"> + <title>Method Two: Sites Management</title> + + <para> + This method can be done using the <emphasis>Sites Management</emphasis> functionality of Site Publisher: + </para> + + <step> + <para> + Navigate to <ulink url="http://localhost:8080/portal" type="http"/> in your web browser. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <menuchoice> <guimenu>Group</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Content Explorer</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> in the administration bar. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Drives</guilabel> button then select <guilabel>Sites Management</guilabel>. + </para> + + <para> + You will see all sites listed in the left sidebar: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/sitesleftpane.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/sitesleftpane.png" format="PNG" width="64mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Right-click the site you want to view with WebDAV and select the <guilabel>Download and Allow Edition</guilabel> item in the menu. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/alloweditionmenu.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/alloweditionmenu.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + The selected site will be shown in WebDAV: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/webdavsiteview.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/webdavsiteview.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + In this view, you can access documents in the directories that are linked to the web server. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-How_to_Use_WebDAV_With_Site_Publisher-WebDAV_Considerations"> + <title>WebDAV Considerations</title> +<!-- DOCS NOTE: This content is duplicated in the EPP Reference Guide to avoid cross-document linking. Any changes here should also be made there--> <para> There are some restrictions for WebDAV in different operating systems. - </para> + </para> + <formalpara id="form-User_Guide-How_to_Use_WebDAV_With_Site_Publisher-WebDAV_Considerations-Windows_7"> - <title>Windows 7</title> - <para> - When attemping to set up a web folder through <guilabel>Add a Network Location</guilabel> or <guilabel>Map a Network Drive</guilabel> through <guilabel>My Computer</guilabel>, an error message stating <guilabel>The folder you entered does not appear to be valid. Please choose another</guilabel> or <guilabel>Windows cannot access … Check the spelling of the name. Otherwise, there might be …</guilabel> may be encountered. These errors may appear when you are using SSL or non-SSL. + <title>Windows 7</title> <para> + When attemping to set up a web folder through <guilabel>Add a Network Location</guilabel> or <guilabel>Map a Network Drive</guilabel> through <guilabel>My Computer</guilabel>, an error message stating <guilabel>The folder you entered does not appear to be valid. Please choose another</guilabel> or <guilabel>Windows cannot access … Check the spelling of the name. Otherwise, there might be …</guilabel> may be encountered. These errors may appear when you are using SSL or non-SSL. </para> - - </formalpara> + </formalpara> + <para> To fix this, do as follows: - </para> + </para> + <procedure> <step> - <para> - Go to Windows Registry Editor. - </para> - + <para> + Go to Windows Registry Editor. + </para> </step> - <step> - <para> - Find a key: \HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlset\services\WebClient\Parameters\BasicAuthLevel . - </para> - + + <step> + <para> + Find a key: \HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlset\services\WebClient\Parameters\BasicAuthLevel . + </para> </step> - <step> - <para> - Change the value to 2. - </para> - + + <step> + <para> + Change the value to 2. + </para> </step> - - </procedure> + </procedure> + <formalpara id="form-User_Guide-How_to_Use_WebDAV_With_Site_Publisher-WebDAV_Considerations-Microsoft_Office_2010"> - <title>Microsoft Office 2010</title> - <para> - If you have: + <title>Microsoft Office 2010</title> <para> + If you have: </para> - - </formalpara> + </formalpara> + <itemizedlist> <listitem> - <para> - Microsoft Office 2007/2010 applications installed on a client computer AND... - </para> - + <para> + Microsoft Office 2007/2010 applications installed on a client computer AND... + </para> </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - The client computer is connected to a web server configured for Basic authentication VIA... - </para> - + + <listitem> + <para> + The client computer is connected to a web server configured for Basic authentication VIA... + </para> </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - A connection that does not use Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) AND... - </para> - + + <listitem> + <para> + A connection that does not use Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) AND... + </para> </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - You try to access an Office file that is stored on the remote server... - </para> - + + <listitem> + <para> + You try to access an Office file that is stored on the remote server... + </para> </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - You might experience the following symptoms when you try to open or to download the file: - </para> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - The Office file does not open or download. - </para> - - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - You do not receive a Basic authentication password prompt when you try to open or to download the file. - </para> - - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - You do not receive an error message when you try to open the file. The associated Office application starts. However, the selected file does not open. - </para> - - </listitem> - - </itemizedlist> - + + <listitem> + <para> + You might experience the following symptoms when you try to open or to download the file: + </para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + The Office file does not open or download. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + You do not receive a Basic authentication password prompt when you try to open or to download the file. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + You do not receive an error message when you try to open the file. The associated Office application starts. However, the selected file does not open. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> </listitem> - - </itemizedlist> + </itemizedlist> + <para> These outcomes can be circumvented by enabling Basic authentication on the client machine. - </para> + </para> + <para> To enable Basic authentication on the client computer, follow these steps: - </para> + </para> + <procedure> <step> - <para> - Click Start, type <literal>regedit</literal> in the Start Search box, and then press Enter. - </para> - + <para> + Click Start, type <literal>regedit</literal> in the Start Search box, and then press Enter. + </para> </step> - <step> - <para> - Locate and then click the following registry subkey: - </para> - <para> - <envar>HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\Office\14.0\Common\Internet</envar> - </para> - + + <step> + <para> + Locate and then click the following registry subkey: + </para> + + <para> + <envar> + HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\Office\14.0\Common\Internet + </envar> + </para> </step> - <step> - <para> - On the <guilabel>Edit</guilabel> menu, point to <guilabel>New</guilabel>, and then click <guilabel>DWORD Value</guilabel>. - </para> - + + <step> + <para> + On the <guilabel>Edit</guilabel> menu, point to <guilabel>New</guilabel>, and then click <guilabel>DWORD Value</guilabel>. + </para> </step> - <step> - <para> - Type <literal>BasicAuthLevel</literal>, and then press <keycap>Enter</keycap>. - </para> - + + <step> + <para> + Type <literal>BasicAuthLevel</literal>, and then press <keycap>Enter</keycap>. + </para> </step> - <step> - <para> - Right-click <literal>BasicAuthLevel</literal>, and then click <guilabel>Modify</guilabel>. - </para> - + + <step> + <para> + Right-click <literal>BasicAuthLevel</literal>, and then click <guilabel>Modify</guilabel>. + </para> </step> - <step> - <para> - In the Value data box, type <literal>2</literal>, and then click <guilabel>OK</guilabel>. - </para> - + + <step> + <para> + In the Value data box, type <literal>2</literal>, and then click <guilabel>OK</guilabel>. + </para> </step> - - </procedure> - - </section> - - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Site_Content_with_WebDAV-Actions"> - <title>Actions</title> - <para> - You see all the default folders of a site when accessing it via WebDAV. Manipulating their content through WebDAV is the same as working on it in local folders. - </para> - <para> - This allows you to copy or paste files, list folders, rename, and more in system directories. - </para> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Add_new_content_to_a_specific_site"> - <title>Add new content to a specific site</title> - <para> - This function enables you to copy web content (such as <filename>.html</filename> files) from your local computer to a web content folder of a site. - </para> - <procedure> - <step> - <para> - Access a site via WebDAV (refer to <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Site_Content_with_WebDAV-How_to_Use_WebDAV_With_Site_Publisher"/>), then go to a web content folder within the site. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Copy the web content on your local system into this folder. - </para> - <para> - The copied file will be converted to web content that is viewable by WebDAV automatically. The content is converted to a directory containing <emphasis>CSS</emphasis>, <emphasis>documents</emphasis>, <emphasis>js</emphasis> and <emphasis>media</emphasis>. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - <para> - After new content is added, it can be viewed as a folder in WebDAV or as page content using a web browser. - </para> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Delete_a_web_content"> - <title>Delete a web content</title> - <para> - This function enables site administrators to delete web content files separately or in batches. - </para> - <procedure> - <title/> - <step> - <para> - Navigate to the folder that contains the content you want to remove. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Right-click the content files or directories (hold the <keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap></keycombo> key to select multiple files at once) and select <guilabel>Delete</guilabel> from the context menu. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/webdavcontextdelete.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/webdavcontextdelete.png" format="PNG" width="76mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - The selected file(s) will be removed from the site. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> - </section> -</section> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Site_Content_with_WebDAV-Actions"> + <title>Actions</title> + + <para> + You see all the default folders of a site when accessing it via WebDAV. Manipulating their content through WebDAV is the same as working on it in local folders. + </para> + + <para> + This allows you to copy or paste files, list folders, rename, and more in system directories. + </para> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Add_new_content_to_a_specific_site"> + <title>Add new content to a specific site</title> + + <para> + This function enables you to copy web content (such as <filename>.html</filename> files) from your local computer to a web content folder of a site. + </para> + + <procedure> + <step> + <para> + Access a site via WebDAV (refer to <xref linkend="sect-User_Guide-Manage_Site_Content_with_WebDAV-How_to_Use_WebDAV_With_Site_Publisher"/>), then go to a web content folder within the site. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Copy the web content on your local system into this folder. + </para> + + <para> + The copied file will be converted to web content that is viewable by WebDAV automatically. The content is converted to a directory containing <emphasis>CSS</emphasis>, <emphasis>documents</emphasis>, <emphasis>js</emphasis> and <emphasis>media</emphasis>. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <para> + After new content is added, it can be viewed as a folder in WebDAV or as page content using a web browser. + </para> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Actions-Delete_a_web_content"> + <title>Delete a web content</title> + + <para> + This function enables site administrators to delete web content files separately or in batches. + </para> + + <procedure> + <title/> + + <step> + <para> + Navigate to the folder that contains the content you want to remove. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Right-click the content files or directories (hold the + <keycombo> + <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> + </keycombo> + key to select multiple files at once) and select <guilabel>Delete</guilabel> from the context menu. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/webdavcontextdelete.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/webdavcontextdelete.png" format="PNG" width="76mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + The selected file(s) will be removed from the site. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + </section> + </section> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Basics.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -3,27 +3,44 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "../User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<chapter id="chap-User_Guide-Basic_Actions"> - <title>Basic Actions</title> - <para> - These actions are for all registered users after they have logged in the accounts. - </para> - <xi:include href="Basics/View.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> - <xi:include href="Basics/Print.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> - <xi:include href="Basics/Sites.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> - <xi:include href="Basics/Contribute_Content.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> - <xi:include href="Basics/Content_Inside_Categories.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> - <xi:include href="Basics/Dynamic_Navigation.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> - <xi:include href="Basics/SEO_management.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> - <xi:include href="Basics/SitesExplorer.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> - <xi:include href="Basics/Webdav.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> - <xi:include href="Basics/Search.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> - <xi:include href="Basics/Preferences.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> - <xi:include href="Basics/SearchPortlet.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> - <xi:include href="Basics/Newsletters.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> - <xi:include href="Basics/FastContentCreator.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> - <xi:include href="Basics/FormGenerator.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> - <xi:include href="Basics/Categories.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> - <xi:include href="Basics/Content_By_Query.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> -</chapter> - + <chapter id="chap-User_Guide-Basic_Actions"> + <title>Basic Actions</title> + + <para> + These actions are for all registered users after they have logged in the accounts. + </para> + + <xi:include href="Basics/View.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> + + <xi:include href="Basics/Print.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> + + <xi:include href="Basics/Sites.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> + + <xi:include href="Basics/Contribute_Content.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> + + <xi:include href="Basics/Content_Inside_Categories.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> + + <xi:include href="Basics/Dynamic_Navigation.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> + + <xi:include href="Basics/SEO_management.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> + + <xi:include href="Basics/SitesExplorer.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> + + <xi:include href="Basics/Webdav.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> + + <xi:include href="Basics/Search.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> + + <xi:include href="Basics/Preferences.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> + + <xi:include href="Basics/SearchPortlet.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> + + <xi:include href="Basics/Newsletters.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> + + <xi:include href="Basics/FastContentCreator.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> + + <xi:include href="Basics/FormGenerator.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> + + <xi:include href="Basics/Categories.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> + + <xi:include href="Basics/Content_By_Query.xml" xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" /> + </chapter> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Get_Started/Account.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Get_Started/Account.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Get_Started/Account.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -4,34 +4,35 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "../../User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<section id="sect-User_Guide-Account"> - <title>Account</title> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Account-Register_an_account"> - <title>Register an account</title> - <para> - To register a new account on the portal, do as follows: - </para> - <procedure> - <step> - <para> - Go to the portal by entering the URL in the address bar (e.g: <ulink url="http://localhost:8080/portal/public/classic" type="http"/>). - </para> - <para> - The anonymous homepage will appear: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/homepage.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/homepage.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the <guilabel>Register</guilabel> link on the top of the site. The <guilabel>Register</guilabel> form will be displayed. - </para> + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Account"> + <title>Account</title> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Account-Register_an_account"> + <title>Register an account</title> + + <para> + To register a new account on the portal, do as follows: + </para> + + <procedure> + <step> + <para> + Go to the portal by entering the URL in the address bar (e.g: <ulink url="http://localhost:8080/portal/public/classic" type="http"/>). + </para> + + <para> + The anonymous homepage will appear: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/homepage.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/homepage.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Register</guilabel> link on the top of the site. The <guilabel>Register</guilabel> form will be displayed. + </para> <!-- DOCS NOTE: BZ#814395: <mediaobject> <imageobject role="html"> @@ -43,357 +44,444 @@ <caption>An asterix (*) indicates a required field.</caption> </mediaobject> --> - <para> - The <guilabel>Account Setting</guilabel> information includes: - </para> - <table> - <title/> - <tgroup cols="2"> - <thead> - <row> - <entry> Field </entry> - <entry> Information </entry> - </row> - </thead> - <tbody> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>User Name</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> The user name that is used to log into the system. It must be unique. The user name must begin with a character. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Password</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> The security characters are used to login. It must have at least 6 characters. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Confirm Password</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> The re-typed password above. The password in Password field and this field must be the same. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>First Name</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> Your first name </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Last Name</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> Your last name </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> - Display Name - </entry> - <entry> - The name you would like displayed in your interactions on the site. - </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Email Address</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> Your email address. It must have a right format: <replaceable&gt;username(a)abc.com&lt;/replaceable&gt;&lt;/entry&gt; - </row> - </tbody> - </tgroup> - </table> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter the appropriate values for the fields in this form. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/magnifyingglassicon.png" format="PNG" width="7mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>magnifying glass</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon to search and check if the chosen user name is available or not. + <para> + The <guilabel>Account Setting</guilabel> information includes: + </para> + + <table> + <title/> + + <tgroup cols="2"> + <thead> + <row> + <entry> + Field + </entry> + + <entry> + Information + </entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>User Name</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The user name that is used to log into the system. It must be unique. The user name must begin with a character. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Password</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The security characters are used to login. It must have at least 6 characters. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Confirm Password</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + The re-typed password above. The password in Password field and this field must be the same. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>First Name</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + Your first name + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Last Name</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + Your last name + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + Display Name + </entry> + + <entry> + The name you would like displayed in your interactions on the site. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Email Address</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + Your email address. It must have a right format: <replaceable&gt;username(a)abc.com&lt;/replaceable&gt; + </entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter the appropriate values for the fields in this form. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>magnifying glass</guilabel> icon to search and check if the chosen user name is available or not. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter values in the fields of <guilabel>User Profile</guilabel> tab, including: <guilabel>Profile information</guilabel>, <guilabel>Home information</guilabel> and <guilabel>Business information</guilabel>. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/userprofile.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/userprofile.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to register a new account, or <guilabel>Reset</guilabel> to revert all completed fields. + </para> + + <para> + You will see an alert message and be unable to add a new account if any of the following occurs: + </para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + The <guilabel>User name</guilabel> already exists or is invalid. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + The <guilabel>Password</guilabel> has less than six (6) or more than thirty 30 characters. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + The <guilabel>Password</guilabel> and <guilabel>Confirm Password</guilabel> are not the same. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + The <guilabel>Email Address</guilabel> is not in a invalid format. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + Any of the required fields are empty. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </step> + </procedure> + + <para> + After adding a new account, contact the administrator to get a confirmation. </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter values in the fields of <guilabel>User Profile</guilabel> tab, including: <guilabel>Profile information</guilabel>, <guilabel>Home information</guilabel> and <guilabel>Business information</guilabel>. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/userprofile.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/userprofile.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to register a new account, or <guilabel>Reset</guilabel> to revert all completed fields. - </para> - <para> - You will see an alert message and be unable to add a new account if any of the following occurs: - </para> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> + + <note> + <title>Email</title> + <para> - The <guilabel>User name</guilabel> already exists or is invalid. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - The <guilabel>Password</guilabel> has less than six (6) or more than thirty 30 characters. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - The <guilabel>Password</guilabel> and <guilabel>Confirm Password</guilabel> are not the same. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - The <guilabel>Email Address</guilabel> is not in a invalid format. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - Any of the required fields are empty. - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - </step> - </procedure> - <para> - After adding a new account, contact the administrator to get a confirmation. - </para> - <note> - <title>Email</title> - <para> - Ensure you enter your email address correctly at this stage, as it is used in the recovery process if you forget username or password. - </para> - </note> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Account-Sign_In"> - <title>Sign In</title> - <para> - This function logs you into Site Publisher in the private mode. - </para> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Sign_In-Sign_in"> - <title>Sign in</title> - <step> - <para> - Go to the your portal's Home Page by entering the URL in the address bar (e.g: <ulink url="http://localhost:8080/ecmdemo/public/classic" type="http"/>). - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click the <guilabel>Login</guilabel> link at the top of the home page. The <guilabel>Sign in</guilabel> form will appear: - </para> + Ensure you enter your email address correctly at this stage, as it is used in the recovery process if you forget username or password. + </para> + </note> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Account-Sign_In"> + <title>Sign In</title> + + <para> + This function logs you into Site Publisher in the private mode. + </para> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Sign_In-Sign_in"> + <title>Sign in</title> + + <step> + <para> + Go to the your portal's Home Page by entering the URL in the address bar (e.g: <ulink url="http://localhost:8080/ecmdemo/public/classic" type="http"/>). + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click the <guilabel>Login</guilabel> link at the top of the home page. The <guilabel>Sign in</guilabel> form will appear: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/signin.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/signin.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <table id="tabl-User_Guide-Sign_in-Options"> + <title>Options</title> + + <tgroup cols="2"> + <thead> + <row> + <entry> + Option + </entry> + + <entry> + Information + </entry> + </row> + </thead> + + <tbody> + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>User name</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + To input the registered username. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Password</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + To input the password of your username. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Forgot your User Name/Password</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + To retrieve the forgotten user name or password when you forget. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Sign in</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + To sign into the eXo Portal with the inputted user name and password. + </entry> + </row> + + <row> + <entry> + <guilabel>Discard</guilabel> + </entry> + + <entry> + To close the Sign In form without any changes. + </entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </table> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter your registered User name and Password. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Sign in</guilabel> to submit your details or <guilabel>Discard</guilabel> to exit the form. + </para> + + <para> + If the User Name does not exist or the submitted User name/Password set is invalid, an alert message will appear that requires users to re-submit the correct values. The page will be redirected to the private security checking mode. + </para> + + <para> + To login again, enter your <guilabel>User Name</guilabel> and <guilabel>Password</guilabel> again. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <para> + After signing in, you will be presented with the authenticated homepage: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/authhomepage.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/authhomepage.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Account-Sign_Out"> + <title>Sign Out</title> + + <para> + The function ends your authenticated session and redirects you back to the anonymous portal. + </para> + + <para> + To sign out, click the <guilabel>Logout</guilabel> link on the right access banner: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/accessbanner.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/accessbanner.png" format="PNG" width="100mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + Alternatively, members of the <emphasis>/platform/web-contributors</emphasis> role can click <menuchoice> <guimenu>Start Logo</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Sign Out</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> from the toolbar: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/startlogo.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/startlogo.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Account-Retrieve_user_namepassword"> + <title>Retrieve user name/password</title> + + <para> + If you forget your account or password, you can recover them by doing as follows: + </para> + + <procedure> + <title/> + + <step> + <para> + Click the link <guilabel>Forgot your User Name/Password?</guilabel> in the <guilabel>Sign in</guilabel> form. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select one of the two options: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/retrieve.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/retrieve.png" format="PNG" width="147mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <variablelist> + <varlistentry> + <term>Forgot my password:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + If you forgot your password, you need to select this option. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + + <varlistentry> + <term>Forgot my username:</term> + + <listitem> + <para> + If you forgot your username, you need to select this option. + </para> + </listitem> + </varlistentry> + </variablelist> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + If the <guilabel>Forgot my password</guilabel> option is selected the password recovery form appears: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/forgotpassword.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/forgotpassword.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + If the <guilabel>Forgot my username</guilabel> option is selected, the username recovery form appears: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/forgotname.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/forgotname.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter either your username or email address, as appropriate, in the corresponding form. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Send</guilabel> to submit the recovery request. + </para> + + <para> + Once the request has been sent, you will receive an email with the requested information, (either your <systemitem>User name</systemitem> or <systemitem>Password</systemitem> at the email address that you registered. + </para> + + <itemizedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + If you forget you username, an old username is restored and can be reused. A new password will be sent to your email with the old username. + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + If you forget your password: a new, temporary password will be set and sent to you. You will be directed to change the password the next time you sign in. + </para> + </listitem> + </itemizedlist> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> + + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Account-Change_Account_Information"> + <title>Change account information</title> + + <para> + The function enables you change your account information, such as your profile and password. + </para> + + <procedure> + <title/> + + <step> + <para> + To begin, click your username name in the top toolbar. + </para> +<!-- DOCS NOTE: BZ#814395: <mediaobject> <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/signin.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/signin.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <table id="tabl-User_Guide-Sign_in-Options"> - <title>Options</title> - <tgroup cols="2"> - <thead> - <row> - <entry> Option </entry> - <entry> Information </entry> - </row> - </thead> - <tbody> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>User name</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> To input the registered username. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Password</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> To input the password of your username. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Forgot your User Name/Password</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> To retrieve the forgotten user name or password when you forget. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Sign in</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> To sign into the eXo Portal with the inputted user name and password. </entry> - </row> - <row> - <entry> <guilabel>Discard</guilabel> </entry> - <entry> To close the Sign In form without any changes. </entry> - </row> - </tbody> - </tgroup> - </table> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter your registered User name and Password. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Sign in</guilabel> to submit your details or <guilabel>Discard</guilabel> to exit the form. - </para> - <para> - If the User Name does not exist or the submitted User name/Password set is invalid, an alert message will appear that requires users to re-submit the correct values. The page will be redirected to the private security checking mode. - </para> - <para> - To login again, enter your <guilabel>User Name</guilabel> and <guilabel>Password</guilabel> again. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - <para> - After signing in, you will be presented with the authenticated homepage: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/authhomepage.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/authhomepage.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Account-Sign_Out"> - <title>Sign Out</title> - <para> - The function ends your authenticated session and redirects you back to the anonymous portal. - </para> - <para> - To sign out, click the <guilabel>Logout</guilabel> link on the right access banner: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/accessbanner.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/accessbanner.png" format="PNG" width="100mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - Alternatively, members of the <emphasis>/platform/web-contributors</emphasis> role can click <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Start Logo</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Sign Out</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice> from the toolbar: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/startlogo.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/startlogo.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Account-Retrieve_user_namepassword"> - <title>Retrieve user name/password</title> - <para> - If you forget your account or password, you can recover them by doing as follows: - </para> - <procedure> - <title/> - <step> - <para> - Click the link <guilabel>Forgot your User Name/Password?</guilabel> in the <guilabel>Sign in</guilabel> form. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select one of the two options: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/retrieve.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/retrieve.png" format="PNG" width="147mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <variablelist> - <varlistentry> - <term>Forgot my password:</term> - <listitem> - <para> - If you forgot your password, you need to select this option. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - <varlistentry> - <term>Forgot my username:</term> - <listitem> - <para> - If you forgot your username, you need to select this option. - </para> - </listitem> - </varlistentry> - </variablelist> - </step> - <step> - <para> - If the <guilabel>Forgot my password</guilabel> option is selected the password recovery form appears: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/forgotpassword.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/forgotpassword.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - If the <guilabel>Forgot my username</guilabel> option is selected, the username recovery form appears: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/forgotname.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/forgotname.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter either your username or email address, as appropriate, in the corresponding form. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Send</guilabel> to submit the recovery request. - </para> - <para> - Once the request has been sent, you will receive an email with the requested information, (either your <systemitem>User name</systemitem> or <systemitem>Password</systemitem> at the email address that you registered. - </para> - <itemizedlist> - <listitem> - <para> - If you forget you username, an old username is restored and can be reused. A new password will be sent to your email with the old username. - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - If you forget your password: a new, temporary password will be set and sent to you. You will be directed to change the password the next time you sign in. - </para> - </listitem> - </itemizedlist> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <section id="sect-User_Guide-Account-Change_Account_Information"> - <title>Change account information</title> - <para> - The function enables you change your account information, such as your profile and password. - </para> - <procedure> - <title/> - <step> - <para> - To begin, click your username name in the top toolbar. - </para> - <!-- DOCS NOTE: BZ#814395: - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/accountname.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> @@ -401,10 +489,10 @@ </imageobject> </mediaobject> --> - <para> - The <guilabel>Account Profiles</guilabel> form will appear. - </para> - <!-- DOCS NOTE: BZ#814395: + <para> + The <guilabel>Account Profiles</guilabel> form will appear. + </para> +<!-- DOCS NOTE: BZ#814395: <mediaobject> <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/accountprofile.png" format="PNG"/> @@ -413,67 +501,74 @@ <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/accountprofile.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> </mediaobject>--> - </step> - </procedure> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Change_Account_Information-To_Change_Account_Profiles"> - <title>To Change Account Profiles</title> - <step> - <para> - Select the <guilabel>Account Profiles</guilabel> tab. - </para> - <para> - This tab displays your current basic information. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Change your <systemitem>First Name</systemitem>, <systemitem>Last Name</systemitem> or <systemitem>Email</systemitem>. You cannot change your <systemitem>User Name</systemitem>. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to accept changes. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Change_Account_Information-To_change_your_Password"> - <title>To change your Password</title> - <step> - <para> - Select the <guilabel> Change Password</guilabel> tab. - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/changepassword.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/changepassword.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter your current password to identify that you are the owner of this account. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter your new password. The new password must be between six (6) and thirty (30) characters long. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Enter the new password again in the <guilabel>Confirm New Password</guilabel> field. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to submit the changes. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - </section> - <!-- DOCS NOTE: QA review by Monika Gottvaldova on 08/Dec/11 states this section is no longer relevant. + </step> + </procedure> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Change_Account_Information-To_Change_Account_Profiles"> + <title>To Change Account Profiles</title> + + <step> + <para> + Select the <guilabel>Account Profiles</guilabel> tab. + </para> + + <para> + This tab displays your current basic information. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Change your <systemitem>First Name</systemitem>, <systemitem>Last Name</systemitem> or <systemitem>Email</systemitem>. You cannot change your <systemitem>User Name</systemitem>. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to accept changes. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + + <procedure id="proc-User_Guide-Change_Account_Information-To_change_your_Password"> + <title>To change your Password</title> + + <step> + <para> + Select the <guilabel> Change Password</guilabel> tab. + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/changepassword.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/changepassword.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter your current password to identify that you are the owner of this account. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter your new password. The new password must be between six (6) and thirty (30) characters long. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Enter the new password again in the <guilabel>Confirm New Password</guilabel> field. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Save</guilabel> to submit the changes. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> +<!-- DOCS NOTE: QA review by Monika Gottvaldova on 08/Dec/11 states this section is no longer relevant. <section id="sect-User_Guide-Account-Toolbar_Visibility"> <title>Toolbar Visibility</title> <!DASHDASH Source Metadata @@ -615,4 +710,4 @@ Any of the above procedures will grant access to the site's toolbar, which will allow a user to take the actions outlined in the following two sections. </para> </section>--> -</section> \ No newline at end of file + </section> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Get_Started/ChangeLanguage.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Get_Started/ChangeLanguage.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Get_Started/ChangeLanguage.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -4,75 +4,66 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "../../User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<section id="sect-User_Guide-Change_The_Display_Language"> - <title>Change the display language</title> - <para> - The priority order of display language is shown to the following order: - </para> - <orderedlist> - <listitem> + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Change_The_Display_Language"> + <title>Change the display language</title> + <para> - User&apos;s language - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> + The priority order of display language is shown to the following order: + </para> + + <orderedlist> + <listitem> + <para> + User&apos;s language + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + Browser&apos;s language + </para> + </listitem> + + <listitem> + <para> + Portal&apos;s language. + </para> + </listitem> + </orderedlist> + <para> - Browser&apos;s language - </para> - </listitem> - <listitem> - <para> - Portal&apos;s language. - </para> - </listitem> - </orderedlist> - <para> - Therefore, to display your preferred language, you should be attentive to this order to change the language type appropriately. - </para> - <procedure> - <step> - <para> - Move the mouse over <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Start Logo</guimenu> - <guimenuitem>Change Language</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice> on the top left corner of the portal: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/startlogo2.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/startlogo2.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - <para> - The <guilabel>Interface Language Setting</guilabel> form appears: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/languagesetting.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/languagesetting.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select another language from the list. The currently selected language will be marked with the <inlinemediaobject> - <imageobject> - <imagedata fileref="images/tickicon.png" format="PNG" width="4mm"/> - </imageobject> - <textobject> - <phrase>blue tick</phrase> - </textobject> - </inlinemediaobject> icon. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Apply</guilabel> to change the display language temporarily, and wait few seconds to take effect, or click <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> to quit without any changes. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> -</section> \ No newline at end of file + Therefore, to display your preferred language, you should be attentive to this order to change the language type appropriately. + </para> + + <procedure> + <step> + <para> + Move the mouse over <menuchoice> <guimenu>Start Logo</guimenu> <guimenuitem>Change Language</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> on the top left corner of the portal: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/startlogo2.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/startlogo2.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Interface Language Setting</guilabel> form appears: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/languagesetting.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/languagesetting.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select another language from the list. The currently selected language will be marked with the <guilabel>blue tick</guilabel> icon. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Apply</guilabel> to change the display language temporarily, and wait few seconds to take effect, or click <guilabel>Cancel</guilabel> to quit without any changes. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + </section> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Get_Started/ChangeSkin.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Get_Started/ChangeSkin.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Get_Started/ChangeSkin.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -3,52 +3,48 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "../../User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<section id="sect-User_Guide-Change_the_skin_of_the_current_site"> - <title>Change the skin of the current site</title> - <para> - <emphasis>Skins</emphasis> are attractive user interface styles for displaying a portal. Each skin has its own characteristics with different backgrounds, icons and more. Changing the skin of the current site can make use of the portal more easier and more effective. - </para> - <procedure> - <title/> - <step> + <section id="sect-User_Guide-Change_the_skin_of_the_current_site"> + <title>Change the skin of the current site</title> + <para> - Hover the mouse pointer over the <menuchoice> - <guimenu>Start Logo</guimenu></menuchoice> then click on the <menuchoice> - <guimenuitem>Change Skin</guimenuitem> - </menuchoice> item in the drop-down menu: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/startlogo3.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/startlogo3.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> + <emphasis>Skins</emphasis> are attractive user interface styles for displaying a portal. Each skin has its own characteristics with different backgrounds, icons and more. Changing the skin of the current site can make use of the portal more easier and more effective. + </para> + + <procedure> + <title/> + + <step> + <para> + Hover the mouse pointer over the <menuchoice> <guimenu>Start Logo</guimenu></menuchoice> then click on the <menuchoice> <guimenuitem>Change Skin</guimenuitem> </menuchoice> item in the drop-down menu: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/startlogo3.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/startlogo3.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + + <para> + The <guilabel>Skin Setting</guilabel> form appears: + </para> + + <mediaobject> + <imageobject role="html"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/skinsetting.png" format="PNG"/> </imageobject> <imageobject role="fo"> <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/skinsetting.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> </imageobject> + </mediaobject> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Select the skin you want by clicking its name. + </para> + </step> + + <step> + <para> + Click <guilabel>Apply</guilabel> and wait a few seconds to take affect. + </para> + </step> + </procedure> + <para> - The <guilabel>Skin Setting</guilabel> form appears: - </para> - <mediaobject> - <imageobject role="html"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/skinsetting.png" format="PNG"/> - </imageobject> - <imageobject role="fo"> - <imagedata align="center" fileref="images/skinsetting.png" format="PNG" width="150mm"/> - </imageobject> - </mediaobject> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Select the skin you want by clicking its name. - </para> - </step> - <step> - <para> - Click <guilabel>Apply</guilabel> and wait a few seconds to take affect. - </para> - </step> - </procedure> - <para> - This action can be performed by users who have the right to use the administration bar with a personal preferences menu. - </para> -</section> \ No newline at end of file + This action can be performed by users who have the right to use the administration bar with a personal preferences menu. + </para> + </section> Modified: epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Get_Started.xml =================================================================== --- epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Get_Started.xml 2012-10-18 05:27:32 UTC (rev 8912) +++ epp/docs/branches/5.2/Site_Publisher/User_Guide/en-US/modules/Get_Started.xml 2012-10-18 05:48:54 UTC (rev 8913) @@ -4,9 +4,12 @@ <!ENTITY % BOOK_ENTITIES SYSTEM "../User_Guide.ent"> %BOOK_ENTITIES; ]> -<chapter id="chap-User_Guide-Get_Started"> - <title>Get Started</title> - <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="Get_Started/Account.xml"/> - <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="Get_Started/ChangeLanguage.xml"/> - <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="Get_Started/ChangeSkin.xml"/> -</chapter> + <chapter id="chap-User_Guide-Get_Started"> + <title>Get Started</title> + + <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="Get_Started/Account.xml"/> + + <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="Get_Started/ChangeLanguage.xml"/> + + <xi:include xmlns:xi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XInclude" href="Get_Started/ChangeSkin.xml"/> + </chapter>